
Friday, March
31
John McIntyre
of Real Clear Politics recaps the week.
HH: Joining me now at the end of a week of
pretty important political news, John McIntyre of Realclearpolitics.com,
your one-stop shopping center for all the news of politics that
matters, except any mention of my book.
JM: (laughing) Well, you've got to give me
a little warning, Hugh. I mean, I think when I saw you on Hannity
was the first time I saw Painting
the Map Red.
HH: Well, that was 48 hours ago.
JM: Well, we'll see what we can do.
HH: I'm pretty good at shameless self-promotion,
John.
JM: Well, I know. I know.
HH: Do you know what the tomb of Sula the
Dictator has on it?
JM: I would have thought you would have sent
me a copy, an advance copy.
HH: What, do you think I'm giving away things
now?
JM: (laughing)
HH: What am I? A bank making loans? Listen,
McIntyre, you know what's on Sula the Happy's tomb?
JM: No.
HH: You'll want to write this down. Have
you got a pen? You're a Princeton guy. Can someone write this
down for you? On Sula the Happy's tomb, it says no friend has
ever done me a favor, nor enemy an injury that I have not repaid
in full.
JM: Okay.
HH: Think about that. Now anyway, John, immigration.
How badly are the Republicans bleeding here?
JM: Pretty badly.
HH: Yes, it's pretty ugly, isn't it?
JM: Following on the Dubai ports situation,
it hasn't been a good run, recently, I would say. I mean, I
don't know that the Democrats...it's not like the Democrats
are doing anything good. It's just the Republicans are politically
taking the brunt of it.
HH: They are, and I think there's a way out
of this, but I'm going to ask you. If you were just taking a
political look at this, forget the issues, but your objective
was to maintain the President's majorities in Congress so that
he can have two more years of productivity and success in the
war, what would you do?
JM: Well, I mean to be honest, Hugh, I'd
punt on the issue. You either punt, or you have to get a deal
that has some real enforcement on the border, and I don't see
any way really to do that without some kind of wall. I mean,
I heard the President say well, we have 42% more border guards,
or we spent 38% more, just throwing more money at the problem
and hiring another 1,000 border agents isn't going to do anything.
HH: Agreed.
JM: It's not going to change anything.
HH: You know, Israel has a real border problem,
and they did not hire more border agents.
JM: That's right.
HH: They built four hundred miles of fence.
It's not done, yet, but they're building four hundred miles...and
it's not just fence. Sometimes it's triple barriers, sometimes
it's not much...
JM: So I mean, to me, you've got to...and
the only way you're going to get a fence is you're going to
have to compromise, and whether it's the "amnesty"
that people describe the McCain-Kennedy bill, you're going to
have to do something to get a consensus to get that to deal
with the 10 or 11 million illegals that are already here.
HH: You've come exactly where I am. First
you get the fence. You authorize it. All seven hundred miles
of it. Then you do a temporary worker program, the Kyl version,
preferably, but you might have to give them Kennedy-McCain.
JM: That's right.
HH: But the Kennedy-McCain would have to
be compromised back to they've got to leave the country to be
eligible to come back into the country, and they've got to get
in line.
JM: Exactly. You're exactly right. It has
to start with a change...it can't be Reagan '86 all over again.
There has to be a change where it says we are serious about
stopping the problem at the border. Unless the Congress is willing
to do something like that, you've got to punt, because anything
else is just going to create more problems than it solves.
HH: Now let me tell you about the Battleground
poll that the Wall Street Journal has up right now on the Senate.
Right now, they're calling for a two seat pickup for the Democrats.
They think that DeWine and Santorum have lost to Brown and Casey,
Jr., respectively.
JM: Right.
HH: They also think Menendez is in trouble,
but listen to these margins. Republican Jon Kyl leads by 5%,
Talent by less than 3%, Ensign by 8%, Bryant by 7.5% in the
Tennessee open seat. Hutchinson's running away with it in Texas
with 30%, George Allen by 7%. Now the Democrats on the other
hand have margins of 12 points in Florida, 9 points in Maryland,
11 points in Michigan, almost 8 points in Minnesota, 20 points
in New Mexico, more than 20 points in New York, and in Washington
State, 7.5, and in Wisconsin, it's pretty close. It's pretty
close in Wisconsin. So it looks like the Democrats are much
safer than the Republican safe seats, and that the Republicans
are taking on water. Good analysis?
JM: Yeah, I think that's the situation, the
lay of the land right now. I mean quite frankly, I think given
the run the President's had and the Republicans have had recently,
those poll numbers, I don't think, are so bad.
HH: Well, they could turn this around.
JM: That's right.
HH: I mean, they can take out Menendez. They
can take out Stabenow and Cantwell.
JM: And the Minnesota seat is a vulnerable
seat there. If the Republicans can take some initiative here
and can get some things passed, and can demonstrate to the country
that they're actually doing something, and addressing some of
the issues that the public wants addressed, you get some positive
movements, perhaps, in Iraq, get the President's poll numbers
back over 40% on job approval, you're looking at a whole different
political landscape, essentially.
HH: You could actually win four or five pickups.
You konw, Klobuchar has got the worst prosecuting record of
probably any prosecutor in Minnesota. She's terrible. Wait until
they start to bang that drum.
JM: No, that's exactly right, Hugh. Now the
flip side of that is if the type of environment we've seen for
the last two or three months continues, you could get a further
deterioration, and you could...there's a lot of close races
that can go either way, and that's how a lot of these elections
come down to. And a lot of the close Republican seats, whether
it's Talent or DeWine or Burns in Montana, they can go all one
way or the other way. And if the Democrats just get a little
more movement their direction, then they start inching into
where they can pick up four or five seats. I don't think there's
any way they can get six. I don't think Ford can do it in Tennessee.
HH: Well, again, I think you could have a
wave. Now John McIntyre, I sat down with the Congressmen, yesterday,
half dozen Congressmen, and gave them my dire warning, my assessment
that it could be '94 in reverse. And I also pointed to the fact
that they're going to be the fewest days in session since 1948.
They're going to be the do-nothing Congress. Shouldn't they
change that?
JM: Absolutely.
HH: They can change that. They can just work
longer.
JM: That's right. They can demonstrate to
the country that they're serious about doing something with
their majority. I think that's the biggest frustration that
conservatives have, is that they've sort of...Republicans have
a majority. Do something with it.
HH: And you know the easiest way to that
message out, John McIntyre?
JM: Tell me, Hugh.
HH: The easiest way is to go to Realclearpolitics.com,
and then see a full-framed graphic of Painting
the Map Red right there on the front. That's what...I mean,
it's obvious to me. John McIntyre, Realclearpolitics.com.
Welcome to the center for self-promotion, shameless division.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:30PM PST
The polling
is now open.
Thanks to everyone for participating in the
Photoshop contest. As of now, there's well over 200 entries,
and they're still coming in. Here's how we're going to sort
them out. All of us here at Team Hewitt have narrowed down the
finalists to twenty. You can see them at the top of this page.
Vote for as many as you want. The top five vote getters by Monday
at Noon Pacific will qualify for the final poll next week. If
you are one of the top 20, start stuffing the ballot box.
Posted at 3:32PM PST
Return to top
Thursday,
March 30
Dan Alon,
the sole survivor of the Israel Olympic squad from Munich in
1972.
03-30alon.mp3
Mr. Alon is going to appear at Dartmouth's
Rockefeller Center on Friday, March 31st, at 4:30PM EST, sponsored
by Chabad
at Dartmouth.
HH: I'm joined now by a man who on September
5th, 1972, chose the right exit, and as a result, Dan Alon is
alive to tell us about the terror at the Olympics of that year.
He was an Israeli athlete, a fencer when it happened. Yesterday,
on the campus of Yale for the first time ever, he addressed
an American audience about what happened that night. Dan Alon,
welcome to the Hugh Hewitt Show.
DA: Good evening.
HH: Mr. Alon, can you for the benefit of
audience, especially young audience, tell us briefly what happened
in September of 1972?
DA: Well, it's a big story, but on the 5th
of September, in the morning, at half past Four in the morning,
we were all sleeping in our buildings of the Israeli delegation.
And we heard some explosions and gunshots. We didn't know exactly
what really it was. I woke up together with my partner in my
room, another fencer, who was fencing, and we looked at one
another. And he asked me, the guy, what can it be? And I said
I don't know. Maybe some other delegation are celebrating some
medal or something. We went back to sleep. And fifteen minutes
later, we heard, really, machine guns. So we knew exactly that
something was wrong. Two minutes later, from the other room
in my apartment, came two shooters, Israeli shooters in the
Olympics, and they told us look, we've got a problem. There
is terrorists standing outside the door of our entrance, and
they're talking to the German police. That's what's happened.
And what he said that really described everything you want to
know, that he said we are a group of September, Black September.
We attacked the Israeli delegation buildings. We killed two
Israelis in the attack, and we have at our place, holding nine
others. Please, he told them, please contact the German authorities,
and tell them to demand from Israel to release 200 Palestinian
prisoners from the prisons. If not, we're going to kill all
the Israelis until 12:00 Noon. And that was really the story,
but how I escaped and everything, it's a long story. But in
the end, what happened was a big negotiation between the terrorists
and the Germans and the Israelis, and they came to some decision
that they will go out of the village, and will fly with three
helicopters to a airport field not far from Munich. They will
go in a civilian aircraft, and fly to Libya. And the Germans
did it because they tried to make some attack during the time
they were landing with the helicopters. And they did something,
but they failed to release the Israelis. They killed five terrorists,
they kept three terrorists, but the three terrorists panicked,
and they decided to kill all the Israelis when they were sitting
in the helicopter. So they killed all the nine, and they blew
up the helicopter. That was the real story.
HH: Your coach was killed, Mr. Alon? Your
fencing coach was killed, a very close friend of yours, correct?
DA: Yes, Andre Spitzer. He was not only a
coach of mine, he was my best friend, because we were the same
age, 27 at that time.
HH: Now Mr. Alon, today is a day when Jill
Carroll, an American journalist, is, thank God, released from
the hands of terrorists. And you escaped terrorists, but you
also had friends killed by terrorists, and you've lived in Israel
for 33 years, where many people have not escaped it. And this
is also the year of Munich, a film by Steven Spielberg, which
purports to, in some way, chronicle the events of September,
1972, and their aftermath. What did you make of the movie?
DA: What did I think about the movie?
HH: Yes.
DA: Well, I think that Steven Spielberg did
a beautiful job. Really. I saw the movie in Israel two months
ago. The movie is divided in two parts. One part is, he shows
the, really the attack, what really happened in the village,
the Olympic village, and the attack on the Israeli delegation.
The second part is what they did after Munich, the revenge of
the Israeli government by the Mossad. The first part, I can
tell you, it's done very good. Steven Spielberg did a very beautiful
job, and I really felt like a deja vu when I saw the movie.
And it was very touching. The second part, about the Mossad,
I can't tell you, because I don't have any details, and I wasn't
involved in this. But the movie itself is beautiful, and I think
the end of the movie, the last scene when you see on the screen
the New York City with the Twin Towers, the scene is following
until the end of the movie, that you can see the message, I
think so, that Steven Spielberg gave. It's bloodshed brings
more bloodshed, and we have to prevent it. And I think that's
a very good message, that it's...we have to stop this.
HH: How do you react to yesterday's elections
in Israel?
DA: I was not in Israel. I'm here in the
States, so I couldn't vote. And I'm not so involved in the politics,
really. Believe me.
HH: Okay. Well, I'm wondering if you think
the terrorism problem, which shattered your life at 27, has
gotten...spread beyond the Palestinians who were Black September,
obviously to the terrorists who attack Israel on a daily basis.
But do you think it's the same enemy that now took down the
Towers, and blows up innocents in Iraq?
DA: Yeah. I think it's all the same. It didn't
change, unfortunately.
HH: How do you beat it?
DA: How you beat it?
HH: Yeah.
DA: Well, well, well. I'm against, really,
I'm against bloodshed, really.
HH: Well, so am I, but how do you deter it?
DA: Well, you have to ask some professional
people who deal with it. I am really not a politician, and I'm
not really a specialist in those kind of things. But I think
they have to find some solution like economics, boycotts, or
something like this to stop those people, not by killing them,
maybe.
HH: When I read the Yale Daily News account
of your first-ever in the United States talk, I asked myself
why now? Why did you come and give this speech now, after having
not done so ever in the United States, and only twice ever in
Israel?
DA: Well, I didn't talk about it for 33 years,
because...two reasons. First of all, I was really emotionally
very upset, and touched about what happened, and I was fencing...two
months later after Munich, I quit fencing. But the second reason
that...naturally, the media, after Munich until now, they were
concentrated in what's happened to the athletes, and what's
happened to the families, and what's happened to the terrorists,
and what's really happened. But they didn't ask about us, about
the survivors, what we feel, what we felt. Nothing, really.
We were completely ignored, and I couldn't go out in the street
and shout look, I'm a survivor. Please ask me questions, you
know? And now, two months ago, when the movie appeared all over
the world, suddenly people started to ask me questions. And
the first telephone I got from Chabad from Oxford, at Oxford
in England, and he suddenly called me and told me look, Danni.
Please, if you can come and talk about it to our students, and
tell them. I was really hesitant, and I didn't want to do it
in the beginning, but he convinced me, and I came there, and
I, really, the first time in public, stood there and I gave
the story. And emotionally, I'm telling you, it was really hard
for me. I had to stop a few times in my speech. But now, when
I came to the States after this, and I was talking now twice,
I feel much better, more relaxed, and I can talk about it better
now.
HH: Danni Alon, survivor of Munich, 1972,
how often do you think, is it every day, of the events of September,
1972?
DA: It's very often. Very often. You know,
wherever I go, people say oh, you were in Munich. So please...and
they remind me all the time, you know? You can't forget things
like this.
HH: And so, will Jill Carroll, even though
she survived as you did, be spending the rest of her life sort
of stuck on the last few months of her captivity?
DA: Yeah, I think so. She will have some
problems, I'm sure. You will never forget it so easily.
HH: Well, Danni Alon, welcome to the United
States. Thank you for sharing your story at Yale, and spending
some time with us tonight. I think it's wonderful that you're
doing it.
DA: Thank you. Thank you for you, and I appreciate
you Americans, what you're doing all over the world to stop
the terror. And please continue doing it.
HH: I'm sure...well, this administration
is committed to that, Mr. Alon. Thank you.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:45PM PST
James Lileks
sitting in a chair and saying, "Moo."
HH: Joined now by James Lileks of Lileks.com,
Star Tribune columnist, that's the Minneapolis Star Tribune,
also Newhouse columnist, also Newhouse columist, also proprietor
of Lileks.com.
James, you are a veteran of book tours.
JL: Yes, sir.
HH: How much do you love them?
JL: I hate them. Absolutely. When you have
to go places to do things, you're just a piece of dead meat
propped up in a chair and asked to say, "Moo."
HH: (laughing)
JL: And if it's one of those things where
you're staring into the blank eye of a camera in some little,
small satellite studio, you don't really get the eye contact
and the give and take that you like. So if they sent me on a
40 city tour, I'd jump on it in a second. But the idea of doing
it from my kitchen in my shorts is perfectly fine, because if
the interview's going poorly, and you've got 40 minutes left
to go with somebody who's doing a duck hunting show, who for
some reason has signed your book, like happened to me the last
time, you can just pretend that the phone goes dead.
HH: You did a duck hunting show?
JL: Yeah, it had been a duck hunting show,
I think, the week before. Then they changed formats to duck
hunting and novel and writers, and they shoved me on. Couldn't
have been more disinterested, that guy.
HH: Well, he might not really care to talk
about anything except ducks, but that's a...
JL: I know, well, some consultant came through
and said duck hunting is great, but we really need more books
about how to raise children according to 40's instructional
manuals. I did get your book today, though. Your crack production/promotion
team sent it to me, and I was alarmed to see on the cover, for
those who haven't seen it, it's a wonderful picture of the United
States, with an elephant bestriding the Plains, and he's got
a paint roller clutched in his trunk.
HH: I love the cover.
JL: It's a great cover, but his left foot
is crushing South Minnesota.
HH: Oh, it does?
JL: And this is the part of the state that's
purple. It could actually swing the state.
HH: I thought it was DFL land.
JL: Well, not necessarily. So if the state
doesn't swing red, that's why. Your elephant killed them all.
They're just jam on the foot of that guy now.
HH: Now let's get to the serious stuff. I
did Laura Ingraham's show this morning, and I did Chris Matthews'
show tonight. Both of them could talk of nothing except immigration.
Now I have a chapter on immigration policy in Painting
the Map Red, and it anticipated this.
JL: Right.
HH: It warned of the civil war that loomed
out there. But Laura was not for calm conversation about how
a fence needed to be first, although she agrees with that. And
Chris Matthews wanted to paint all Republicans as bigots.
JL: Yes.
HH: Not a surprise there.
JL: No.
HH: What do you make of this?
JL: It's a little bigger in Washington and
talk radio than it is out here, I think. And what people do
generally in this situation, and immigration may be the worst
of all, they tend to project to their own feelings on the subject
for the rest of the country at large, i.e. everybody is completely
upset about illegal immigration. And you know, not necessarily
so. When you live up here, and it doesn't have the impact that
it does in the Southwest, it's not that high on your radar.
I think you could get national consensus on a fence first, with
security, and then some sort of whatever, some sort of greasy,
mealie whatever, as long as we don't call it amnesty, later.
But it is not, I don't think, as big an issue as it is for some
people, for the people for whom it really counts. And I understand
exactly why it counts so much to people, and I'm in agreement
with a majority of their sentiments. But at the same token,
if you read The
Corner earlier in the week, Jonah Goldberg, and a writer
that I greatly admire and like, was confessing that he simply
could not muster the ire for the issue that a lot of people
on his side had. And I sort of feel the same thing. It's just
not at the top of my list, so I'm not going to project what
I feel about it onto the rest of the country. Consequently,
take it for what you're worth, I don't think it is necessarily
the doom issue that some people do. What I find tiresome is
what you went through with Matthews, of course, is that your
objection to this is simply people who had a duskier he than
you, and I...
HH: That...I don't know if you saw that segment.
It was really quite odd. He has a vision of California being
nativist, and upset that the California of 1940 has been destroyed.
Well, the California of 1940 was still having people picking
the crops in the Central Valley.
JL: That's right.
HH: And when I point out to him that Santa
Ana may be the most Mexican place, in fact, it is the most Mexican
place outside of Mexico, but that I live five miles from it
doesn't bother me in the least, he just doesn't want to buy
that. I do think there are two issues here. One is fear of a
dirty nuke, fear of the border. And the other is fear of crime,
and that is a manageable fear, if it's articulated.
JL: Right. And for me, because while I of
course fear the dirty nuke, don't have the crime problem here
that other places do. And interestingly enough, some smaller
cities in Minnesota do, because they do have higher proportions
of immigrant labor. For me, it's more of an issue of American
culture. And I think one of the things that was a fatal mistake
for the pro-immigration people the last week was to waive the
Mexican flags, was to put it above the American flag, and turn
the American flag upside down, because what that does to people
who are casually observing this, they shrug their shoulders
and really begin to feel a sort of calloused indifference to
the whole subject, and to what happens to the people who get
caught in the middle. That was the stupidest thing I can possibly
imagine for them to do, but it's extemely telling of how the
debate really isn't just about immigration and jobs and economy.
It is about cultural identity, and that is an issue that goes
beyond immigration.
HH: But you know why they did that? They
were waiving a red flag in front of the Republicans. That's
all it was. It was designed to bring the Minutemen out of their
closet with their guns going, proverbially, they don't have
guns. It was designed to send Laura and other talk show hosts
into orbit, and it did. It was designed to get exactly this
sort of meltdown, but I'll tell you, I think the meltdown, in
the final analysis, because it focuses on security, is going
to help Republicans again.
JL: I think so, too, because what that does
is the people in the middle see this, and it doesn't just waive
a red flag to Republicans. It waives a red flag to the people
in the middle who don't necessarily have party affiliation,
who just don't like that. Just do not like seeing that stuff.
HH: Okay. My summary, and I want to...
JL: ...because the sense of ingratitude that
you get is...we demand that we be able to come here, speak the
language, use all of your facilities, pay no taxes, and also,
we want the country back. After that, we can talk.
HH: Democrats see illegals, and they see
votes.
JL: Yeah.
HH: Some Republicans see illegals, and they
see labor. A lot of Americans, left, right and center, see illegals,
and they see security threat.
JL: Yup.
HH: So how does this debate play out, Lileks?
JL: (laughing) With the usual, messy, inconclusive
result. I mean, at the end of this, do I think we're going to
have a big wall? Do I think we're going to have increased security
that makes everybody happy? Do I think we're going to have a
path to legitimacy that takes tens of millions of illegal immigrants,
and has them queue up to get their cards? No, I don't.
HH: All right. Now James, let me ask you.
Did you listen to the Ware
interview?
JL: I did. It was fascinating.
HH: What did you think?
JL: Well, the part that was godsmacking was
the bit that he couldn't really tell you whether or not things
under Krushchev were better than things under Stalin, because
that really is the heart of it here, isn't it?
HH: Yup.
JL: I mean, it's messy now, it's going to
be messy for a while. But the point is, there are degrees of
awfulness here. And if you're not concentrating on the degree
of awfulness that Saddam's regime represented, and would have
represented in the future if it had remained in power, then
you don't have the...you're not presenting the context in which
these things are happening, and the context of what success
means. I found that...and again, the brave man, and I can get
away from the whole chicken hawk thing, but you know, here I
am, chicken journalist. I'm not over there doing what he's doing,
but that bothered me. That inability to say what exactly needs
to be done, I found a bit distressing.
HH: Always a pleasure, Lileks. www.lileks.com,
America.
End of interview.
Posted at 10:30PM PST
Return to top
Wednesday,
March 29
Mark Steyn,
a legal immigrant, on the issue of illegal immigration.
03-29steyn.mp3
HH: And joining us on Wednesday as opposed
to his normal date on Thursday because of my travel schedule,
columnist to the world, Mark
Steyn. Mark, welcome to the Hugh Hewitt Show.
MS: Good to be with you, Hugh.
HH: Mark, let's start with the issue that
is raging in Washington, D.C., the McCain-Kennedy bill, the
immigration issue, and the meltdown among Republican over it.
What's your assessment of what's going on there?
MS: Well, you know, I think there is a big
problem with immigration. I'm personally always reluctant to
speak about it, because I belong to that very, very tiny, tiny,
tiny demographic of documented immigrants. And judging from
that parade in Los Angeles the other day, there's far fewer
of us than there are of the other kind.
HH: Yes, that's true.
MS: And if you talk to legal immigrants,
they're the ones who are the most resentful of this whole illegal
business, because we're the ones, we pay the huge fees to immigration
lawyers, we filled in all the paperwork. I've stood in line
at these dreary government offices to get these stupid cards
and these stupid government numbers, to go through the whole
process officially. And everyone whose done that is resentful
to the idea that somehow if you just make it across the border,
and you get here, you can stay here, and half the state governments
in this country will do what they can to make your situation
as painless as possible, and the public schools...I'll give
you a small example of schools. If you're a legal immigrant,
and you enroll your children in a local grade school, they want
to know whether they've had all the shots, you know, for this
and that.
HH: Sure. Vaccinations.
MS: If you're a legal immigrant, you have
to then, you're faced with then getting the documentation out
of whatever country you happen to have come from. And sometimes,
that can be difficult, because they give them different things
at different times, and the school nurse will give you a lot
of harrassment. If you actually just say okay, scrub that, they're
not legal immigrants, I want them redesignated as illegal immigrants,
then you won't be asked for any paperwork. It's a lot easier.
The problem at the moment is that it's a rational decision,
coming into this country, to be an illegal immigrant. And that
is the problem.
HH: Mark Steyn, I don't know what year you
emigrated, but you ought to go back and get a refund if this
thing passes, that's for sure. My question is, though, we've
got 11 to 15 million illegals. It's a complicated problem. We're
not going to throw them out of the country. But given that,
is the first thing we should do secure the border? Or is the
first thing we should do legalize or regularize, or use any
euphemismize that you want, the 11 to 15 million?
MS: Well, no. I think if you're going...as
you say, there is a problem. You've got a population that is
basically four times the size of the average European Union
nation...
HH: Right.
MS: ...living in the United States illegally.
Four times the size of the population of Ireland, say. Two or
three times the size of the population of Denmark or Norway.
So I think the first thing you have to do is say well, that
is a problem, but before we deal with that, before we come up
with some way of finessing that, we will secure our borders.
I mean, I do think this is a national security issue, because
when I hear this sort of pseudo-isolationist talk that comes
out from many people on the right particularly, I say well look.
You've got a country here that can't even secure its borders
against two relatively benign states, yet now you're saying
you'll be able to tell the whole world to go to hell, and that
Iran and Iraq and Afghanistan doesn't matter, and the whole
place can go to hell. You can't even enforce your border against
some sleepy Mexicans and wily Canadians. And America has to
be able to demonstrate...sovereignty begins at the border. You
don't have a nation if the nation doesn't have borders.
HH: Now Mark Steyn, I understand why Ted
Kennedy and liberal Democrats want to naturalize and legalize,
and then get voting, the 11 to 15 million whom they perceive
as their voters. I understand that. They might be as wrong as
Gladstone was about the enfranchisement of the late 1870's,
but I do not understand why John McCain, Lindsey Graham, Arlen
Specter, and Mike DeWine want to go out of order, leaving the
border unsecure, but getting to naturalization or amnesty first.
How do you explain McCain?
MS: Well, I think a lot of Republicans on
this issue have, are operating between what they see as two
pincers. One is that if you come out strongly against immigration,
illegal immigration, you're seen as somehow being quasi-racist
by the media. So you lose a lot of your good...if you're an
anti-immigration Republican, you lose a lot of whatever good
press you won. And we've seen, particularly in the case of Lindsey
Graham, that that's very important to him. And at the same time,
there is no doubt that there is a constituency in the Republican
Party that thinks that somehow the economy is dependent on this
huge flow of illegal immigrants. Again, that's something that
is, i think, repugnant to legal immigrants, because if it's
an economic issue, then certainly this country should be capable
of devising swift, efficient, safe, secure legal immigration
to get them in here. But the idea that somehow letting people
annex different industries, stage by stage, in order to artificially
depress the cost of operating those industries as a conservative
position, I think is ludicrous.
HH: But I go back to McCain, Mark Steyn,
because first, there was McCain-Feingold, then there was the
Gang of 14, and now we have McCain-Kennedy. And it seems he
will never not subjugate the interest of his party to his own
perception of political self-interest. Is that fair? Or do you
think he's just trying to do the best he can?
MS: No, I don't think that. I mean, my observation
of John McCain, and I understand he's very popular with a lot
of people in the United States. My observation of him during
the 2000 campaign, the 2000 New Hampshire primary season, is
that he is one of the most incredible narcissists on the political
scene. And that basically, John McCain is very good at talking
himself into believing that whatever position he adopts is,
by virtue of the fact that he's adopted it, the sensible, sane
position. That's certainly true of McCain-Feingold, and I think
he'll do a similar job talking himself into it with this view
of him on immigration.
HH: Narcissism is a word that came up much
in my e-mail overnight in connection with a lengthy interview
I did yesterday with Michael Ware, Time Magazine Baghdad bureau
chief. Did you have a chance to see that, Mark?
MS: Yes, I did, and I thought it was an incredible
interview. And in a way, incredible because I would imagine
that nobody, no foreign correspondent for a major Western news
organization would regard it as unusual. And that's what's so
depressing. The bit where he was talking about yes, he's got
contacts in Zarqawi's organization, and he's been taken on these
privileged little trips to meet with them and all the rest of
it, that's the complete opposite of...I don't know how you feel,
Hugh. You probably feel the same way. But I felt gradually exhausted
since September 11th, 2001, that it's very dispiriting trying
to keep going in this phase of what is a very long conflict.
And the reason I do it is because I want us to win. I don't
particularly like journalism. I don't particularly like writing
newspaper columns. I'm sick of having to make what I think should
be an obvious case again and again and again. And I'd much rather
pack it in and sit on my porch in New Hampshire and enjoy the
view of the mountains. But I do it because I want us to win.
And the idea that he has, this diseased sense that somehow just
the story, the story is somehow how you demonstrate your journalistic
integrity and purity, and might get you nominated for some prize
that nobody cares about somewhere down the line, that's not
what it's about. I mean, why does he want to be a journalist,
if it's not to be on the right side of history. This is ridiculous.
HH: That's...there was a moral vacuum there,
and the left is mocking the interview, suggesing that I was
arguing that we are front line troops in the information war.
I wasn't. I was suggesting that every civilian is invested in
this, because of a hole in the ground three miles from here.
MS: Exactly, and that's where your left-wing
detractors are missing the point, is that we're all, in a sense,
we're all conscripted in this war. Those 3,000 people who died
on September 11th, they weren't serving forces, they were just
fellows who got up in the morning and went to work, or went
to Logan Airport and got on a plane. And that's the thing. We're
all conscripted in this war, whether we know it or not.
HH: I think you would rather be writing things
like obituaries. I have to get to this obituary of this Telegraph
columnist about whom I had never heard, but I read laughing
out loud on the airplane East this week. It's in the Atlantic
Monthly. People should run out and get it. Tell people about
this guy. What an idiosyncratic writer.
MS: Well, Michael Wharton, who was a colleague
of mine at the Telegraph in London, and he died in his 90's
a few weeks ago, and he basically wrote this satirical column
for fifty years in the Telegraph, in which gradually all the
things that he satirized about eventually came true. You know,
a lot of things we take for granted now, like bishops who believe,
trendy bishops who believe in nothing, insane environmentalists,
social workers who say we're all guilty. In a sense, he developed
a lot of these features in the modern world as sort of satirical
things in the early 60's, and then had the horror, as great
satirists often do, of finding that they all came true.
HH: Yeah, he thought be was a humorist, but
he turned out to be a prophet. It's a wonderful tribute to your
colleague. I hope people pick up the Atlantic Monthly. Mark
Steyn, columnist to the world, always a pleasure. www.steynonline.com.
End of interview.
Posted at 3:34PM PST
Senator Jon
Kyl on the immigration debate.
HH: Joined now by Arizona Senator Jon Kyl,
who is on the Judiciary Committee. I think he voted against
the bill that passed out of Judiciary earlier this week. Senator
Kyl, welcome to the Hugh Hewitt Show.
JK: Thank you, Hugh. Great to be with you
and your great listeners.
HH: Am I correct about your vote this week?
JK: Absolutely. There were six Republicans
that voted against the bill, ten Republicans and all of the
Democrats who voted for it.
HH: Now tell me a little bit about your thought
process.
JK: Excuse me. Four Republicans and the Democrats
who voted for it. I'm sorry.
HH: Did Sam Brownback vote for it, Senator
Kyl?
JK: Yes, he did.
HH: Okay. Did Senator DeWine?
JK: Yes.
HH: Okay. I'm just so troubled by this, but
tell me...
JK: Lindsey Graham and Arlen Specter were
the other two.
HH: What was your thinking? Why could you
not support McCain-Kennedy?
JK: First, the enforcement provisions were
largely lifted from our bill. So they were fine. What was not
fine were parts of the temporary worker program, and the way
to deal with the illegal immigrants, both of which, instead
of dealing in a temporary way, treated these folks as permanent
legal residents, and put them on a path to citizenship. That's
both unnecessary, and unwise in my view. And that's why I voted
against it.
HH: All right. Now what do you think about
fencing, Senator Kyl?
JK: Fencing works. It has certainly worked
in California in the San Diego. It works in the urban areas,
and one of the amendments that I got adopted was in the State
of Arizona, to increase the amount of fencing that we have,
primarily in the urban areas. There are three primary urban
areas, and then to replace some of the existing fences...the
fencing that exists, and to put in vehicle bollards in areas
out in the middle of the desert where it's flat, and they run
a lot of cars across there, so they can't get across with cars.
Even though you wouldn't put a fence out there necessarily,
but you sure want to keep vehicles from coming across.
HH: Now in that amendment, was that an amendment
to McCain-Kennedy itself? Or is that an amendment that's been
offered today?
JK: No, the underlying bill was a Specter
bill. We did a lot of amending of that, primarily dealing with
enforcement. This amendment that I just talked to you about
was my amendment that was adopted onto that bill. Eventually,
we came to the temporary worker sections, and how to deal with
illegal immigrants already here. Those were dealt with by a
substitution of the...or an addition of the Kennedy-McCain bill,
which was adopted by the Committee, and then became the temporary
worker and illegal immigrant sections of the bill. The part
that dealt with enforcement remained intact.
HH: Now Senator Kyl, do you expect enforcement
then to be a part of anything that gets through the Senate?
JK: Yes, I do. But we're only talking about
one half of the enforcement. We're talking about enforcing the
border. And I think those provisions will be pretty good. The
part that...we don't have yet is the part that deals with interior
enforcement, at the workplace, primarily. Those provisions have
been written, but they are not inserted in the bill yet, because
they were written by a different committee. I think they're
going to be okay, but they're still a bit of a work in progress,
and they are every bit as important as the enforcement at the
border, because once you get sixty miles north of the border,
you are home free. There were only three cases brought last
year against employers who allegedly hired illegal immigrants.
So you've got to have, for any system to work, regardless of
what kind of temporary worker program you have, if you don't
have good employer verification of eligibility for employees,
you don't have anything.
HH: Now Senator Kyl, some people say the
bill on the floor, which I'm calling McCain-Kennedy for want
of a better term...
JK: It's McCain-Kennedy with stronger enforcement.
HH: Okay, well that's better.
JK: At the border, yeah.
HH: That's a step in the right direction.
JK: Yeah, at the border.
HH: Is it an amnesty bill?
JK: You know, I made a little speech today
to our Republican colleagues. I said look, all of us are using
rhetoric, and what we need to do is have a calm debate that
doesn't characterize things, but describes them. I said you
know, some things are bad enough if you just describe them.
And so I'm not going to characterize. Others can draw their
conclusions. I will say that I don't think it is fair for American
workers to create a situation in which instead of bringing people
here temporarily when you need them, and then not giving out
temporary visas when the jobs aren't here, that that's not fair.
It's not fair to immigrants like my grandparents, who waited
a long time to come here, when they're waiting patiently in
line, and in their case, it was Holland, but let's say Mexico
or France or China or wherever it might be, for illegal immigrants
to be able to get legal permanent residence, and be put on a
path to citizenship. They do not go to the back of the line,
contrary to what some folks said. The line is in Mexico, or
El Salvador, or Holland, or wherever it might be. The line is
not in the United States. So they're not going to the back of
the line, they're staying right here in the United States. I
don't think that's fair. And I don't think it's necessary, at
least not for all of the people, because most of the people
who came here didn't come here to be citizens. They came here
to work. And I say as long as we have a job for them, that's
fine. But make it a temporary work program, not a permanent
legal residence.
HH: How long is that line in Mexico, Senator
Kyl?
JK: It's about, and it varies with different
countries as you know, it's about a five year wait right now.
But another feature of McCain-Kennedy is to add dramatically
to the quota of green cards, so that that backlog would disappear
pretty quickly, or you'd use it up with illegal immigrants who
are here already.
HH: Now one of the things I don't understand,
just as a common sense approach to this, if you allow people
to legalize in place, you'll never get them to leave even temporarily
to register the correct way. But if you did, say, okay, if you're
back in Mexico, and you apply within six months, we will pretty
much guarantee you'll get a green card within two years, they
would leave, wouldn't they, Senator?
JK: I think so. Again, I don't think that
everybody who came here, came here to be here permanently. The
Mexican government will tell you that they favor circularity,
where people can come here, work for a while, and then return
home. And a lot of the illegal immigrants surveyed, tell you
that's exactly what they intend. So it's a mistake to assume
that everybody that came to this country needs to become a citizen.
Many do not, and they didn't come here for that reason, and
they would be happy with a temporary work permit. Why not provide
that for them?
HH: Now I've also received the objection
that any fine that will be leveled will simply be paid by, or
lent to the illegal by their employer, in order to keep them
in place. In other words, that there will be no penalty for
breaking the law.
JK: I think it is likely that in most cases,
the penalty will be paid by the employer who needs the employee
here. And it's no penalty to keep working. I mean, they say
and the individual will have to continue to work for five years.
Well, why did they come here in the first place, but to work.
So it's not really a penalty. All it does is allow them to be
in the United States while they're waiting the five years, rather
than waiting for it in their home country. But again, that's
on the assumption the individual wants to become a legal permanent
resident. And I really think that a temporary work permit would
be better, because it can fluctuate depending upon the economic
circumstances here. If there are no jobs for people, then you
don't want to issue more permits. If there are, maybe you want
to issue more.
HH: Senator Kyl, we've got less than a minute.
This seems to me to be like taking the helm of the Titanic and
aiming for the iceberg, politically. I can't understand Senator
DeWine. I'm hoping he gets re-elected in Ohio. I'm working for
it. But I think they're really hurting the party. Is that awareness
dawning?
JK: Everybody has to look at it through their
own lens. The majority of Americans do not want to grant citizenship
to people who came here illegally. They would prefer that these
people return home, but they're willing to have a temporary
worker program. And I think we can accommodate that with our
bill. I think we do it the wrong way with the bill that passed
out of the Committee.
HH: Senator Jon Kyl of Arizona, good luck
in your efforts to rally the majority of the Senate, and to
get a bill passed. We need it, and yours makes sense.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:45PM PST
Return to top
Tuesday,
March 28
Time Magazine's
Michael Ware from Baghdad.
03-28ware.mp3
HH: Joining me now live from Baghdad is Michael
Ware, bureau chief for Time Magazine. Michael, welcome to the
Hugh Hewitt Show.
MW: Thanks, Hugh.
HH: Michael, we met each other courtesy of
CNN on a couple of editions of Anderson Cooper's program last
week. And I was intrigued as I read up on you, our acquaintance,
Tim Blair, a mutual acquaintance, speaks very, very highly of
you. Of course, that stands you in great regard in the American
blogosphere, as Blair is much loved there. Can you give us a
little bit of...
MW: Yeah, well Tim's a great guy. He's a
good journalist.
HH: Yes, he is. Can you give us a little
bit of your background, how you ended up in Baghdad, so people
can get you focused on where you're from? Because you're Australian,
and that obviously comes through in your voice. But let's get
you to Time Magazine. Where were you before then?
MW: I'm actually a lawyer or an attorney
by training. But after graduating law school, I only stayed
in practice for one year after working in our court of appeal,
then fell into journalism, working for Rupert Murdoch's News
Corporation newspapers in Australia, where I eventually covered
the conflict in East Timor. After that, I took a job with Time
Magazine in Australia, and then after September 11, I was sent
to Afghanistan, where I stayed for over a year. And then as
the war in Iraq approached, I entered Iraq through Iran, into
the Kurdish North, where I hooked up with U.S. Special Forces,
and the Peshmerga militia, and covered the Northern front line.
Ever since then, I have essentially been living in Baghdad.
HH: So you are a long traveled war correspondent,
having covered Afghanistan, Iraq, before that East Timor. And
I think you were at the encirclement of Osama bin Laden, were
you not? I think I read some of your dispatches from that as
well.
MW: Well, I was in the Battle of Shah-i-Kot,
the Operation Anaconda, which was fought in March, 2002. So
I was in many of the engagements involving al Qaeda forces in
Afghanistan. And in some of them later in Iraq.
HH: So Michael Ware, what do you think...and
you've spent time with insurgents, too. That's very controversial
reporting that I've read. Explain to the audience how you connected
up with them, and how much time you spent with them in Iraq.
MW: Well, in the course of the past three
years, I've had ongoing contact with different elements of the
insurgency. It all began immediately after the fall of Saddam's
regime in the early months of the occupation. I was doing a
story which was looking at the invasion. I was trying to find
out from the Iraqi commanders themselves what had happened on
their side, what was the chaos like, what was it like as a dictatorship
deteriorated, and dissolved before their eyes in the midst of
this American attack. Now at that time, I met these men. They
were Republican Guard commanders, members of the secret police,
the intelligence service, the secret service, all manner of
agencies, asking them what had happened to them during the war.
Then as time went by, these men started to feel more and more
disenchanted, more and more dishonored. And one by one, they
started picking up arms, and in a very ad hoc fashion, started
attacking passing American vehicles and so on. Then over time,
they started to evolve. And I got to watch that with my own
eyes, as they did take shape as the insurgency we've ultimately
come to see today.
HH: Does that insurgency, in your opinion,
have a command and control structure, a heirarchy that actually
operates to give signals to attack? Or is it simply a series
of guerillas that pulse attacks whenever possible?
MW: Well, it's very complicated in the sense
that nothing is concrete. However, there are very clear command
structures. The one thing to be said though is there's no one
overreaching command, or supreme command. This is a very fractured
insurgency. There's many different organizations fighting in
many different ways, for many different reasons, from the Islamic
Jihadis of al Qaeda, and the Islamic militants. So you see Iraq
is but one theater in a global holy war. All the way down to
former Iraqi army officers, you know, Baghdad's version of West
Pointers, who are fighting what they see as a war of liberation
against a foreign occupier, be he benign, or be he malevolent.
Then you also have a mix in between, guys who fight today, but
don't tomorrow. Some who fight for money, some who fight because
their brother's just been killed, or their cousin has just been
arrested. It's a very mixed bag, but yes, there's coordination.
And even between these groups, even when there's rivalry, they
still work together. And at the very least, they deconflict
their operations, so as much as possible, they try to avoid
overlap. That's the level of organization.
HH: Have you spent time with the jihadis?
MW: I have. I have. It's certainly not something
that's simple to do at any time, particularly now. However,
in the past, though, I have actually been with Zarqawi's organization
on different occasions. I once was taken to a Zarqawi training
camp, although I was not told that that's where I was going,
or for quite a while, that that's where I was. I've been to
some of their safe houses. I've received some of their propaganda
materials. By the same token, trying to film them secretly in
Baghdad, I was kidnapped by them, dragged out of my car, and
a group of Syrian fighters for Zarqawi were preparing to execute
me on the street here in Baghdad. So I've been with Zarqawi's
people in a number of different forms.
HH: What happened with the Syrians who were
preparing to execute you? Did they get a Federal Express package
from Zarqawi saying don't shoot the Aussie?
MW: No, I think if it was coming from Zarqawi,
it would be very different. I mean, he's...or his official spokesman
has threatened me on one occasion directly, and on another occasion,
indirectly, publicly, as a result of things I've written. So
if it was coming from Zarqawi, I don't think I'd be talking
to you now. What eventually saved me was some Baathist fighters
in the area, these former military officers. They see themselves
as nationalists fighting this great war of liberation. Now they
might work with these Islamic militants of al Qaeda, but they
don't share the same goals, and they don't like to fight in
the same way. It came down to a turf war, and I was very fortunate
to fall between the cracks of these two organizations, where
one group was saying if you want to kill this guy, you kill
this guy. But understand, that starts a fight with us. And eventually,
the al Qaeda Syrians decided it wasn't worth it, and through
very gritted teeth, after having said a Westerner comes in here
and you expect us to let him leave alive, they finally relented
and set me free. It was not a pleasant experience.
HH: Michael, can you quantify for my audience
the amount of time you've spent with the jihadis, and the amount
of time you've spent with the insurgents? And then I want to
ask you some questions about both of them. And the reason I'm
asking for the amount of time is to give some sense of depth
of experience with those two very distinct groups.
MW: Yeah, they are markedly different, and
I guess principally, the bulk of any time I've spent dealing
in any way with the insurgency, the vast majority of it has
been with the Baathists, the former military officers, these
men who identify as nationalists, or as Iraqi Islamists, dealing
with the Islamists of al Qaeda. That's much, much more difficult,
and it's only been a fraction of my time.
HH: Has it been a couple of days? A week
with the Islamists? Or a few months with the insurgents? Again...
MW: I mean, I don't know how I'd add it up.
I mean, it's a meeting here, it's a meeting there. It's a morning
spent with him here, it's an afternoon spent with them there.
It's...I'm told to meet on the street corner, taken to a restaurant
for what looked like dinner, and then whisked out to go and
see something for a few hours. And it's always very confusing.
You're often blindfolded. You're often shoved down in the back
of a car. You're often driven around for what seems like hours
just to confuse you. You're shifted from place to place. You're
constantly kept disorientated and confused, and you're constantly
being challenged and tested. I mean, on three occasions, I was
present when a discussion took place about whether I should
be killed or sold, or goodness knows what else, and my fate
has rested in their hands while they talk about this around
me in a language I don't understand. So it's very hard to quantify
the exact amount of time one has spent in these kind of circumstances.
HH: Okay, indulge me, a lawyer, and you're
a lawyer, so you know. I'm just trying to get a sense of it.
Has it been five different times out with the jihadists and
20 different times with the insurgents? I'm not looking for
minute counts here, but I am trying to get a sense of how often
you'll cross over to the other side and spend time with them.
MW: Well, I suppose it's a matter of how
you look at crossing over, too. But I mean, I guess I've dealt
with jihadis in one form or another perhaps a dozen, couple
of dozen times, and the Baathists, many, many times. I mean,
to constantly reassess where these guys are, I mean, as military
intelligence does, trying to take their pulse of how sophisticated
they are, how under pressure they are, how well financed they
are or aren't, how organized they are, what morale is like.
You constantly have to keep dipping into the well to see where
they are. So with the Baathists, with the military types, it's
many, many, many times.
HH: Okay, let me put a floor on it then.
At least 18 times with teh jihadists, and 30 or 40 times with
the insurgents.
MW: Yeah, you could easily say that.
HH: That's a lot of time.
MW: Yeah.
HH: All right. So we've got a good grounding
here. Now this brings me to the interesting issue that we talked
about on CNN, and that is the morality of doing that. Why do
you do that?
MW: Well, there's a number of reasons. I
mean, you can look at it very, very cynically. One is know thy
enemy. Now I cannot begin to tell you how much the American
people, not to mention the Brits and the Aussies back home,
have been significantly misled about the nature of the enemy.
I mean, I've been at press conferences under the CPA. I've been
at press conferences under the interim Iraqi government. I've
been to press conferences under the current regime. I've listened
to all manifestation of U.S. military spokesmen, of diplomats,
of ambassadors, discuss and describe the enemy. And so often,
it has been wrong. And it's either because these people don't
understand what they're up against, or more likely, it's that
these people are not telling the public the truth about them,
about the fact that they're not just one homogenous group, that
there are many different motivations. And that was a very, very
valuable thing to come to understand, because it's led to the
point now, that we see, where we have this Bush administration
opening dialogue and negotiations with the more nationalist,
or Baathist elements of the insurgency. So learning that this
was not one homogenous, scary boogeyman was vital to not just
my and the public's understanding, but also to military intelligence
and this administration's. Look what it's led to.
HH: Do you think it's true that everyone
has understood from the beginning that there were Iraqis who
were nationalists, and that there were jihadists who were Islamists,
who just simply want to kill? I think that distinction has been
there, my gosh, going back to the first blows of the insurgency
against the coalition forces.
MW: Well, that's not entirely correct. Remember
these famous glib, sad excuses for expressions like the dead-enders
who are out there fighting us. Well, these dead-enders are still
putting 15-20,000 men in the field on any given day. You know
what? Today the current average for attacks on coalition forces
is about 74 attacks a day. Now only about one in four of those
attacks is what anyone would consider effective. But nonetheless,
there's 74 odd attacks, any given day, right now. You know how
many there were a year ago? Pretty much the same. And the year
before that? Not that much different. So this enemy that is
out there, these dead-enders of 2003, are still putting something
close to a division in the field, and maintaining their tempo
of attacks.
HH: But I go back to the distinction...
MW: So I mean, we've been misled many, many
times. And for the public to understand this, I think, is important.
HH: Now see, I don't want to...I'm actually
interviewing not to quarrel with you, but just to get it understood.
MW: Yeah, I know.
HH: But I do think that that distinction
between Islamists and insurgents has been well understood, and
for a very long time. And I'd look for you to tell me when were
you misled about that. But more importantly, going to the Islamists,
about whom...you'll agree with me, they're evil. Won't you,
Michael?
MW: Well, I certainly...I mean, one has to
be careful that as the Islamic army of Iraq reminded just last
week on Al Jazeera, the insurgent groups study very closely
everything that we hear, say and write. And given that we're
within their grasp, one always must be diplomatic. Suffice to
say, it's very hard to relate to the goals or tactics that the
hard-line Islamists employ.
HH: Now that's very interesting, because
that would indicate that...and I understand it, but that fear
is affecting your reporting, or your candor level.
MW: Well, it certainly affects the way you
couch things. It doesn't stop you saying things. I mean, like
I said for example, I came across a tape once of Zarqawi himself,
on an audio cassette, instructing or giving a seminar to some
of his recruits and fighters, somewhere outside of Baghdad.
Now this was a tape that was meant purely for internal consumption,
for ideological or for training purposes. Now by one means or
another, that fell into my hands, and I published it. I published
its contents. Now within that discussion, Zarqawi himself showed
that there was great division between his organization and one
of the leading Iraqi Sunni organizations, and you're hearing
him criticizing this very important Iraqi leader. Now by me
publishing that, that aired their dirty laundry. As a result
of that, he threatened, or his organization threatened to kill
me. I mean, one has to be careful about how you couch things,
but it doesn't stop you reporting the facts.
HH: No, but it does, however, get to the
question of whether or not media from the West should be...what's
the right word, Michael Ware? It's not assisting, but providing
information flow to the jihadis about whom I'm quite comfortable,
and I think most Westerners are quite comfortable, just declaring
to be evil, because they kill innocents, and that killing of
innocents is evil, is it not, Michael?
MW: Well, absolutely. And I think you'll
find that that's the source of one of the greatest divisions
amongst all the insurgents here.
HH: And so, is it easy for you to do good
journalism with the threat of reprisal hanging over your head,
perhaps even greater, because you've been given access over
and over again to the bad guys?
MW: Well, yeah, it's still more than able
to be done. Nothing is easy in this country. But it's just like
how when you're writing about, let's say, an American unit that
you're embedded with. You get into some very heavy, some very
nasty combat. And I've done that so many times, I can't even
begin to count. And something happens, something that may not
exactly play well back home. And yet, it's something that you
know, well, people outside of this experience would never understand
that. I mean, how do you relay that without betraying the trust
and the confidence of the troops? And for some journalists,
they have to bear in mind well, if I write a negative story
about the military on this embed, will they give me another
embed? So there's always these pressures from all the players.
For example, I wrote a story last year that reflected very,
very badly on the Iraqi government, or very significant parts
of the Iraqi government. And I was discussing and exposing through
documents smuggled out of Iran, their links to the regime in
Tehran. Now that resulted in elements of the government showing
up at my house, demanding the production of these documents,
which clearly we refused to do. So you're always at risk from
everyone, either directly or indirectly, through self-censorship
or through direct intervention.
HH: Michael Ware, what is the difference
between what you've been doing, especially with the jihadists,
though to a certain extent with the insurgents as well, and
say a World War II-era reporter making numerous trips to the
German side to talk with the Nazis, and then coming back and
being ambivalent about reporting on the Nazis, or being candid
about the Nazis.
MW: Well, I mean, I think we're talking about
very markedly different experiences. I mean, for example, during
World War II, there was very clearly delineated front lines
that simply were not crossed in a fashion like that. It wasn't
a guerilla war. It wasn't an insurgency that's fought amongst
the mix of a civilian population. So that simply wasn't able
to be done. Plus, there was also a very great understanding
about the nature of German expansionism, and German nationalism.
Hitler had very much outlined his intentions for a decade before
the war. So I don't think there was any great mystery there.
There was no great unknown to the extent that there is here,
that people just don't know what this war is really about. And
getting to the bottom of that is extremely difficult, and requires
you sifting through any number of filters that all of these
players want to throw at you.
HH: But as you said at the beginning, the
jihadis consider this to be one battlefield of a vast war. And
the jihadis...
MW: Yeah, as does the West. Exactly.
HH: And the jihadis are very prolific in
their statements from Osama through Zawahiri down to Zarqawi.
So we really know what they're about. Given that you're arguing
geography is the reason you do this, I want to go back to the
nature of actually doing it, and whether or not if, in fact,
in World War II, someone had been offered in Portugal an assistance
from the Abwehr to go back and forth to Germany to visit various
Nazi encampments or policies, would that have been acceptable
in World War II, Michael Ware?
MW: Well, I think the values would be different
back then. But let's think about it. What would be the value
of doing that? I mean, imagine, okay, we know what we know about
the German regime, or the Nazi party. We are inundated with
their propaganda. We're listening to their chatter. We're getting
their side of the story. Could you imagine having an objective
view, go in and come out, and say this is what is really looks
like? this is what it really feels like? This is what people
in their quiet moments behind closed doors will actually tell
you. Now imagine the value of that.
HH: So you would have encouraged such reporting,
had it been possible in World War II?
MW: Well, I don't know. I wasn't around in
World War II, so I'm not sure I'm really in a position to determine.
All I can talk to about are the circumstances that have presented
themselves to me, and the wars I've found myself in.
HH: I'm really fascinated by the question
of whether or not it's ever good journalism to consort with
the enemy in search of interesting stories. And there's not
denying, Michael, where you get scoops. It's fascinating to
read. You've got a great deal of courage, of physical courage,
in doing this. So no one's denying that. I'm just wondering
whether or not there's a line that you have in your mind reconciled
yourself to crossing not once, but scores and scores of times,
to report on the enemy, and whether or not that's a good thing.
And you think it is, I think I hear you saying, because the
public will not otherwise know what it is that you're reporting.
Is that a fair summary?
MW: That is fairly accurate, and let's look
at it this way. I mean, you're sitting back in a comfortable
radio studio, far from the realities of this war.
HH: Actually, Michael, let me interrupt you.
MW: If anyone has a right...
HH: Michael, one second.
MW: If anyone has a right to complain, that's
what...
HH: I'm sitting in the Empire State Building.
Michael, I'm sitting in the Empire State Building, which has
been in the past, and could be again, a target. Because in downtown
Manhattan, it's not comfortable, although it's a lot safer than
where you are, people always are three miles away from where
the jihadis last spoke in America. So that's...civilians have
a stake in this. Although you are on the front line, this was
the front line four and a half years ago.
MW: Absolutely, and I think that's really
the reason that a lot of us are doing what we're doing. I mean,
it's because of that horror that so much has ensued. It is because
of this fight that these people came and picked, that so much
has happened. But I mean, what I'm saying to you is that if
you think anyone would have the right to complain or to take
umbrage at what I do, it would be the troops here on the ground.
It would be U.S. military intelligence. It would be the U.S.
military. You'd think that they wouldn't give me embeds, wouldn't
you? You'd think that they wouldn't grant me backgrounders,
or wouldn't take me out on special events. You'd think that
they wouldn't give me access to the generals, or to military
intelligence. You know, in this war alone, I've been in combat
with virtually every kind of U.S. fighting force there is, from
the SEAL's, to the Green Berets, to Delta, to Infantry, Airborne,
Armored, Mechanized. I mean, I've been there, done that in combat.
I've been in every major battle of this war, except from Najaf
and the first battle of Fallujah. That includes the battle of
Tal-Afar, the Battle of Samara, and the Battle of Fallujah,
with front line units. I witnessed an event that the Pentagon
subsequently asked me to write about as a witness, which is
now a matter for the Congressional Medal of Honor nomination.
And I am mentioned in that citation. So if anyone would have
a problem with what I do in exploring the issues of this war,
you'd think it'd be the military. Yet strangely, they don't.
HH: Michael Yon, as you recall on CNN, paid
you great compliment for the way you've covered the war, in
a way that he is frankly admiring of, as I am. But I would prefer
that you not report on the insurgents, and I'm troubled by your
insistance on many occasions that the coalition forces, the
military, are lying to people. I'd like you to expand on that.
MW: Well, as I said, I've sat in briefings
where...and I will describe for example, events that...this
is the thing. What's the title of Phillip Knightley's book,
that great time of journalism, the first casualty...and how
the first casualty of war is always truth. I mean, for a start,
even with the best of intentions, not everything on a battlefield
is clear. A lot of things are very fuzzy, particularly at the
end of it. Don't forget also that this is an information war.
This is a propaganda war. This war, as, you know, insurgents
said way back in 2003, isn't going to be won on the battlefield.
It's going to be won on the air waves. It turns out it's going
to be won or lost on the internet. So these things become critically
important.
HH: Michael Ware, I'm interested in your...and
stepping back for a second, because I'm fascinated by this.
You've been there for five years. Did you think it was wise
to invade Afghanistan? And did you think it was wise to invade
Iraq, knowing everything that you know now?
MW: Okay, I don't think there was any choice
whatsoever about Afghanistan. It simply had to be done. You
could not allow an organization that had reached out and attacked
Western interests like that to sit in its safe haven. Even if
it could not be destroyed, and let's face it. Al Qaeda has not
been destroyed, and some could argue it's morphed and evolved
and changed, and in some ways, is stronger, and in some ways,
is weaker. It could not continue to have that sanctuary. It
had to be ousted. It had to have pressure put on it. And that's
been done. But let's look at Iraq. Iraq is an entirely different
kettle of fish. From the reasons publicly stated and privately
expressed for the removal of this regime, to the manor of the
planning, and then that execution itself. All of them, I believe,
went awry, or were poorly done, the consequences of which we
are now living with, three years down the track into this war,
with more than 2,300 American men and women who have been killed
here in uniform, with what? $250 billion dollars. At the end
of the day, what do we have? We have the shakiest of governments
here, which is more aligned to our stated enemy of the United
States, a member of the axis of evil, than it is with the American
forces who liberated them. So Iran has actually become stronger
as a result of this invastion. Who else has become stronger?
Well, al Qaeda. It's got a whole new branch here in Iraq it
never had, hundreds if not thousands of new members it never
had, and Zarqawi, who was a nobody in Afghanistan, is now the
superstar of international jihad, and that's been acknowledged
by the administration when they put a $25 million dollar price
tage on his head, the same as Osama. The Iraq war stands markedly
different to Afghanistan.
HH: Christopher Hitchens rejects in every
particular the argument you just made about Iran being stronger
now, and Zarqawi having been a nobody. But rahter than get bogged
down, I just wanted to make you aware that people dispute you
on that. I want to ask you...
MW: That's fine.
HH: Because we talked about this on CNN.
Do you think Iraq is better off today, just...than it was under
Saddam? Do you think that...
MW: Well, I was never here under Saddam.
My period during Saddam's regime was in the Kurdish North, where
with U.S. air cover, they've forged their own autonomous sanctuaries.
So I never lived under Saddam, and I can only imagine what the
horrors were like, and what the restrictions were like. All
I can tell you that life here right now is extraordinarily difficult,
and there's a lot of killing going on, and there's a lot of
deprivation going on, and to be able to compare that to something
I never saw is a bit difficult for me.
HH: Well, do you think the Russian people
were better under Krushchev than they were under Stalin? Neither
of us saw Kruschev or Stalin, but both of us...
MW: Yeah, I wouldn't have a clue, you know?
HH: You wouldn't have a clue? Really?
MW: No, not really. I mean, Stalin was the
beast of all beasts, but you know, I'm not a student of Russian
modern history, nor of the Cold War, on where the broad brush
strokes...and I certainly don't hold myself out as expert enough
to be able to comment on something like that. All I can tell
you about is what I see, and what I experience. And what I know
is the reality on the grounds here. Now was a vicious dictatorship
removed? Absolutely. On a human rights basis, it has to have
been a good thing. However, as the result of which, we've let
a horrific genie out of the bottle, where 50 or 60 people are
showing up dead every morning from an undeclared civil war that
even the American ambassador now acknowledges is killing more
people than the insurgency. Now that's something that was not
here before, yet is here now. So I mean, it's an entirely different
problem set that I really don't think can be competently compared
like that. It's not that simple.
HH: Now this raises a question of whether
or not American journalists generally, and perhaps you specifically,
Michael, have an investment in describing this as a genie out
of the bottle, have an investment in ignorning, say, the benefits
the Marsh Arabs have achieved, the benefits the stability, relative
stability in Mosul...they just had an attack in Mosul, so it's
relative stability, not great stability. What is it? 13 out
of the provinces are generally sedate. It is Baghdad, Anbar,
the Syrian desert there, that are the terrible places of great
conflict. And while 50 to 60 bodies a day is a horrible toll,
Mark Steyn argues that on a net, there are 100,000 Iraqis more
alive every year that Saddam is gone, than every year this insurgency
goes on. Does that not make a difference in your understanding
of the conflict?
MW: Well, I mean, like I said, it's very
hard to compare. If 100,000 more people are alive, then clearly,
that's a blessing. How we come to those numbers I wouldn't have
a clue. But I mean, what I can say is that I, for one, certainly
have no investment in beating one administration, or favoring
one party over the other. I'm an Australian who reports for
an American magazine. I have no stake in your political process
whatsoever. I just call it as I see it. I mean, there's nothing
to be gained for someone like me. And look, there's enough people
here that I've certainly come across in the three years, and
who have been writing or publishing or broadcasting, that would
be more than happy to tout the successes. Yet those people either
can no longer be here because of the security, or I found that
a lot of them like some of the soldiers I know, are just being
warn down by the horror and drudgery of this place, to the point
where that perhaps their views have changed. So I mean, I can't
speak for every journalist. All I can say is that I don't personally
have a liberal, anti-administration bias. And I can't say that
I say that many of my colleagues do.
HH: I want to let you go, because you've
stayed up late. I've just got three quick more questions. CNN's
Eason Jordan wrote a piece after the war began, apologizing
for the conduct of CNN under Saddam, not reporting on his horrors,
having been afraid of getting people killed, having been in
essence, a hostage to Saddam's regime. Some of the stuff we
discussed earlier in this has a hint of you're being a hostage
of the insurgents at this point, because they're watching you
very clearly. Under those circumstances, Michael Ware, shouldn't
you come home?
MS: Well, I don't know. Have you been listening
to what I said? I mean, I said to you that regardless of any
of these difficulties, I've still reported in such a way that
Zarqawi's given me treatment that he's given no other journalist.
And I don't know how many other journalists he's directly threatened.
So I don't know that I'm exactly that hostage to him or his
agenda.
HH: Well, CNN was also given access, and
it was also threatened, and it was also affected, but it was
only revealed by Jordan after Saddam was toppled, the extent
to which CNN had been impaired in its journalistic integrity.
So you're telling me we don't have to worry about you pulling
an Eason Jordan on us, and telling us down the road you couldn't
quite cover what the insurgents were doing, because they were...not
just for you, but for your staff. That's what Eason Jordan said.
It was his Iraqi stringers that would have been executed. There's
no issue like that with you?
MW: Well, actually, in the course of this
war, we've had a translator assassinated four blocks from our
house. Our house has been hit by, or subject to car bombs twice.
I've had two of my stringers who deal with the insurgency kidnapped,
one of whom was rescued by the Marines when they overran Fallujah
in November, 2004. The other one was tortured for five days
as al Qaeda tried to get information on me before he was finally
released, when they became convinced that he was innocent of
any kind of crime. I had another translator of mine, who when
al Qaeda targeted him to get information on me and our operation
and he refused, they blew up his car. We had to fly him to Jordan,
get last ditch surgery to save his arm, and he's now been granted
refugee status in Australia. My staff have been in firefights.
Their lives have been threatened. I'm not sure that that's been
an easy ride.
HH: I'm not saying it is. I'm saying that
it might weigh very heavily, and in fact, so heavily upon you,
even as did similar circumstances upon Eason Jordan, that it
might impair your ability to report. And you're telling me it
doesn't?
MW: Well, it hasn't so far, and after all
that we've been through, we're still out there revealing things
about the insurgency that no one else has been able to reveal,
and that is still being recognized by the U.S. military. So
despite it all, we're still in there punching.
HH: My last question. Zarqawi.
MW: Yeah.
HH: He was there before the war began. He
had come back and forth to Afghanistan. In your dealings with
the insurgents, had they dealt with him prior to the war?
MW: No. I did uncover some documents, however,
that referred to his presence, here in some form. Now it seemed
to be covert and unofficial, and one can only guess. However,
I did receive a document written by one of his right hand men,
a man who was killed in 2004 by a U.S. JDAM in his vehicle,
who wrote an after action report of the first battle of Fallujah,
in the course of which he said well, you know, Abu bil-Bloggs
(phonetic spelling) was killed at this point. You know Abu bil-Bloggs.
He was the one who saw Zarqawi in Baghdad before the war.
HH: Did you publish that?
MW: Yeah.
HH: In Time Magazine.
MW: Yeah.
HH: Oh, that's interesting. I missed that
one. I have to go back and find that. That's a very significant
find. What about the weapons of mass destruction...I lied. I
got one more. The weapons of mass destruction, Michael Ware.
What do the insurgents tell you about what happened to them,
or what the story is there?
MW: Well, I did a weapons of mass destruction
story back in 2003, and back then, most of the people I was
dealing with were not insurgents. I believe some of them probably
went on to become insurgents. But back then, they were former
Republican Guard, officers, former scientists, former secret
police of intelligence officers, whose job was to monitor the
U.N., or monitor the scientists. Basically, what all of them
tell me was that all the stuff had been destroyed in the early
90's, just as Saddam had told the U.N., and the CIA subsequently
found to be true, that whatever wasn't destroyed was so rotten
it was unusable, that if we'd had it, by goodness we would have
used it. The other thing was that the whole weapons industry,
including the WMD industry that Saddam had mothballed, was riddled
with corruption. So a lot of these guys were saying, you know,
some of these big characters in the regime, were selling Saddam
on the idea of this wonder-weapon, that actually never really
existed. They fired once, it didn't really work. They dodgy
up the report. He throws $10 million at them, which they all
pocket. So that was what I learned from regime figures about
WMD.
HH: Michael Ware, I've kept you up late,
and now I want to let you go. But I hope we can get a return
conversation. It's been fascinating. I appreciate your candor,
and wish you God speed, and safe travels around Baghdad.
MW: Thank you very much. It's been a great
pleasure. Take care, Hugh.
HH: Thank you, Michael.
End of interview.
Posted at 6:05PM PST
Senator John
Cornyn on the immigration bill, and his concerns over the Taliban
Yalie.
HH: I'm now joined by Senator John Cornyn
of the great state of Texas. Senator, great to have you back,
and congratulations on calling Yale on the Yale Taliban.
JC: Well, thanks, Hugh. Good to be with you.
It's pretty unbelievable to me. I guess I'm still waiting on
a written response from Secretary Chertoff, and I'm going to
be briefed by the FBI soon on this. And hopefully, we'll be
able to find out exactly what happened.
HH: It does underscore the laxity of our
immigration laws, when the former deputy foreign minister of
the Taliban can wander in on scholarship to Yale.
JC: Well, that's exactly right, and it would
appear to be in violation of at least two laws that Congress
recently passed, the so-called Real I.D. Act, and also other
provisions of the intelligence reform laws that we passed just
last year.
HH: Well, I'm glad you're doing it. Please
keep us posted, and if the Secretary is wise, we'll get some
quick answers on that. Now Senator Cornyn, you're on the Judiciary
Committee. You are recognized as one of the experts on this
immigration issue. I think that the McCain-Kennedy bill is like
the Titanic aiming at the iceberg when it comes to the Republican
Party. What do you think of it?
JC: Well of course, I voted against the McCain-Kennedy
bill that was adopted in the Judiciary Committee yesterday,
and I'm committed on the floor of the Senate, when we start
the debate as early as tomorrow, to seek amendments that will
strike some of the most egregious provisions, particularly the
one that would essentially let people who have come to the United
States in violation of our immigration law, breaking line ahead
of those who have patiently waited and complied with the laws,
and tried to immigrate legally. The so-called guest worker program,
which is really just an alternative path to legal permanent
residency and citizenship, I think, is flawed. It should be
replaced by a temporary worker program, once we're able to determine
we've secured our borders, and we've got worksite verification.
But unfortunately, the bill that passed the Judiciary Committee
just provides an alternative path to citizenship.
HH: Senator John Cornyn of Texas is my guest.
Senator, it seems to me perplexing when 70 members of the House
have sent a letter to their colleagues in the Senate, when the
American people are overwhelmingly for not a border-length fence.
We know we don't need that. But the House passed 700 miles of
fencing, and Senator McCain says oh, we don't need that, virtual
security is fine. When people want to protect their home, or
Israel wants to protect their country against terrorists, they
don't build virtual fences. They build real fences.
JC: Well, I know that the House has taken
a tough stand when it comes to border security, and I think
the principle is one that is absolutely important. And we are,
I would say if there is some bright light in the bill that passed
the Judiciary Committee yesterday, it is that it was built on
the foundation of legislation that Senator Jon Kyl of Arizona
and I introduced, that provides 10,000 more boots on the ground,
doubles the size of the border patrol, and uses modern technology
that the Department of Defense is using along the Syrian and
Iraq border to detect intrusions, and unmanned aerial vehicles
that will give us some eyes and ears a long way out, and help
border patrol control the border. But there's a lot that needs
to happen to improve the bill before, certainly before I can
vote for it, and I'm sure that unless it's vastly improved,
that it will be dead on arrival when it hits the House.
HH: Now Senator Cornyn, tell us a little
bit about this process, and how long it's going to take. How
long is the immigration bill debate going to actually take on
the floor of the Senate, moving towards a conclusive vote on
what to send to the House?
JC: Well, the Majority Leader, Bill Frist,
controls the floor schedule, and he's given us the best part
of two weeks for this debate and this process. And you know,
what I would encourage your listeners to do, and your readers,
is to contact their Senator and let them know how they feel,
because I have the very distinct sense that what we're hearing
in Washington is not what people across the country are saying,
and what they really feel about this issue. And I think it's
very important. But to answer your question, two weeks on the
floor of the Senate, then we'll go, assuming a bill is passed,
which it may or may not be, then it would go to a Conference
Committee with the House of Representatives. That could be scheduled
in a matter of weeks. It could take a matter of months. There's
no time limit on it, but it would have to be done before the
end of the year, or else they'd have to start all over again.
HH: Now help us understand some of the politics
of this, Senator Cornyn, because I'm from Ohio. I really like
Mike DeWine. I want him to win re-election. I write about it
in the new book, Painting the Map Red, how important that seat
is to us. But then he goes and votes for this bill, and it just
cuts the heart out of the base. It is almost indifferent to
what people in Ohio, and I broadcast in Ohio, I'm from Ohio.
They don't like this bill. What is the political calculus for
Senators DeWine and Graham and Specter, and of course, John
McCain on this?
JC: Hugh, Mike DeWine, you're right. He's
a prince. We need to get him back in the Senate for another
term. And I guess I'd feel more comfortable having you ask him
directly. I hope he'll listen to you, and his other constituents
in Ohio, about how strongly they feel about this. But this is
a strange issue, the whole immigration issue, because it cuts
across so many different other segments of society. For example,
I visited with the Archbishop of Houston on Saturday, who asked
me quite directly, if I would support McCain-Kennedy bill. And
I said respectfully, I can't do that, because I believe it repeats
a mistake that occurred in 1986, when there was an amnesty declared.
So there are a lot of different people, employers, the Chamber
of Commerce wants McCain-Kennedy, because they believe that
it provides them a source of labor that they need in order to
keep doors open. So it really is a very unusual combination
of factors.
HH: Thirty seconds, Senator Cornyn. Do you
foresee the political pratfall that I am if we get this wrong?
JC: Absolutely. This is a test for the Republican
Party, and in a larger sense, it's a test for the country.
HH: John Cornyn of Texas, thank you, Senator.
We hope to check back with you repeatedly as the next two weeks
brings this most important debate front and center in the United
States Senate.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:45PM PST
Senator John
Thune on the immigration bill and his recent trip to Iraq.
HH: Joining me now to discuss, well, the
devastating blow to the Republican Party underway on the Hill,
and the war, Senator John Thune of the great state of South
Dakota, no stranger to upset wins and hard politicking, and
also no stranger to Iraq. John Thune, welcome back to the Hugh
Hewitt Show.
JT: Good to be on, Hugh.
HH: Senator, you were in Baghdad last week.
Can you tell us about the circumstances of your trip, and what
you saw there?
JT: We were actually in Baghdad, Fallujah,
and down in Babel province in Hilla. And I was there a year
ago, and so it was interesting to get an assessment of where
things are. One of the reasons of being there was to press the
case with the Iraqi officials to get this national unity government
formed, but secondly, to take the measure of how much progress
they've made on getting the Iraqi security forces in a position
to defend the Iraqi people. And that was the most noticeable
change from my last visit there. They have come a long way.
About 75% of the operations now, they are conducted independently
by the Iraqis, or with them in the lead, and the U.S. troops
supporting them. So they're making good headway on that front,
and that, as you know, is one of the key conditions that needs
to be met before we can beging to ease up on our presence there.
HH: Senator Thune, next hour I'm talking
with Michael Ware, Baghdad bureau chief of Time Magazine, for
almost the entire hour. He's something of an alarmist about
conditions in Iraq, and the violence escalating, and fifty bodies
a night, and the prospects for peace dimming. Do you share that
pessimism?
JT: I think that it shifted somewhat after
the Samara bombings, because now you've got this sectarian violence,
where Sunnis are attacking Shiites, Shiites are attacking Sunnis.
But frankly, Hugh, I think that the conditions are there for...everybody
talks about civil war. That's clearly not the case today. The
key is going to be forming a national unity government, and
we made it clear to the Iraqi officials on no uncertain terms,
that that absolutely has to happen, and it has to happen in
a timely way. And they're very confident. They're very optimistic
that they will see that government come together, and that when
it does, a lot of the sectarianism, and some of the sectarian
violence will come to an end. I don't expect that that's going
to happen entirely, but I think it will go a long ways toward
tamping down a lot of the violence that we're seeing there today.
HH: What's the morale of the troops, Senator
Thune?
JT: Yeah, I've got to tell you, I couldn't
be prouder of our troops, and people in this country, irrespective
of whether they support the war there or not, need to support
these men and women. They are incredibly accomplished at what
they do, they're very dedicated, and they just make America
proud. And I'll tell you, they're very upbeat. You talk to troops
over there, I had a chance to visit with South Dakota troops.
Of course we visited with the Marines at Fallujah. They believe
they're making a difference, they believe that they're going
to complete the mission there, and they need to have support
from people in this country.
HH: John Thune, in Fallujah, of course, the
site of a the fierce battle of November, 2004, which we often
reference here, because the family of J.P. Blecksmith is a friend
of mine, and I've had his sisters at the law school at which
I teach, and I had a chance to meet his father. Is Fallujah
being rebuilt? Is Fallujah a deserted city? What's Fallujah
like now?
JT: Well, it's bereft of all the terrorists
that created that web that we had to go in and root out. And
it's, I think, remarkably improved. The Marines are now more
concerned about Ramadi, where the terrorist organizations like
Zarqaw are trying to set up an operation, and they're consistently
having to go in there and lead operations. Many, I should say,
the operations are now being led by Iraqi security forces. But
they feel very good about the progress that's being made. You
get into that Anbar Province, they've got two full divisions,
they've got Iraqi police forces that are constantly taking over
more and more battle space, and that part of Iraq, remarkably,
Hugh, is dramatically improved from where it's been in the past.
HH: That's a real testament to the people
who have sacrificed so much for Fallujah. Senator Thune, let's
turn to the circumstances that confront the Republican Party.
I'm out on a book tour preaching dire warnings because of a
variety of circumstances, primarily simple indifference to the
math, and a lack of energy on the Republican side. But now,
Senator McCain teaming with Senator Kennedy and others to bring
forward this bill, I think it puts the majority in peril. Your
take?
JT: Well, I think that clearly, we have some
challenges ahead of us. I think there's a lot of fatigue, Hugh,
among Republicans, too, over the war, because of the constant
bombardment, day to day, from the media, and the bad news that's
coming out of Iraq. But you're right. On the issues like fiscal
responsibility, immigration, we really need to provide strong
leadership, and I think people need to know when it comes to
border security, that we're serious about it. We have to enforce
our borders, we have to as a matter of national security, let
the people in this country know that we are serious about cracking
down on what has become a rampant problem at the borders, and
that's illegal immigration. So the bill that we'll have on the
floor will have that component. We will deal with the border
security, but there are a whole other range of amendments that
will be offered, dealing with the status of people who are already
here, and I can't predict today how that debate's going to come
out. But I think you're right. We have a lot riding on it.
HH: Now one of the debates, and the one I
focus on before everything else, is the issue of the fence,
in its both practical and symbolic. Others say oh, we need a
virtual fence, and I point out, no one ever puts a virtual fence
around anything that matters to them. They don't have virtual
fences around prisons, and they don't have virtual fences in
Israel to prevent Hamas terrorists from entering. Fences are
fences, and they can be patrolled. Is the Senate not going to
endorse the House version of a fence, John Thune?
JT: I don't know if the Senate, if there
are the votes in the Senate to...we won't start with the House
bill. There is a lot of support for a fence, and in some cases,
for a physical fence. But there are different, I guess what
I would say opinions as to whether that needs to be completely
a physical fence, or whether that is partly physical fence,
partly a so-called virtual fence, or technological fence, however
you want to refer to it. But I think that will be a point of
debate in the Senate, and I suspect it'll continue to be a point
of debate getting into conference with the House, because the
House has that provision in there.
HH: It has 700 miles.
JT: It's a mixed bag in the Senate.
HH: Now what is the sense of your majority,
John Thune? Some judges are still stuck, Terry Boyle, Brett
Kavanaugh. They're languishing there despite the Gang of 14's
deal. There's no permanent tax relief. Is anything happening
there?
JT: Well, we've got to get movement on permanent
tax relief. We're going to have votes on estate tax coming up.
We're going to have votes on some health care reforms that have
been languishing for a long time. We have, as you know last
year, moved some judges, but we need to move more judges. I
think that in years divisible by two, people begin to quit paying
attention to sometimes the work ahead of us and the agenda,
and start focusing on the elections. But I see the two as connected.
If we don't have an agenda that's forward looking, and addresses
the issues that people in this country, and particularly Republican
voters in this country care about, we're not going to keep the
majority. So we just flat out have to get some things done in
the next few months to demonstrate to the people of this country
that we deserve to govern.
HH: John Thune, two questions. One, how much
are you hearing on immigration? And two, are your Republican
colleagues up for election, or trying to take a Democratic seat,
using you, or finding you available to help them in their campaigns?
JT: I have done some things for some of my
colleagues around the country, particularly helping them raise
money. I hope to be active as the year wears on in being out
there. And so I will be...what was your first question again?
HH: The intensity of the public response
to the immigration debate.
JT: Well, I think it really, in my state,
the people care about it. We've got both sides of that deate
engaged in South Dakota. But I do believe it is a white hot
political issue that it's to our peril if we don't address it.
HH: John Thune, always a pleasure to talk
to you, Senator. Thank you so much, and we'll talk to you soon.
End of interview.
Posted at 10:30PM PST
Wall Street
Journal's John Fund with an update on the Taliban Yalie, and
comments on the immigration debate.
Once again, Jed Babbin guest hosting for
Hugh.
03-27fund-1.mp3
JB: Right now, at the risk of being serious,
let's get back to today's news, the whole thing of, the whole
wonders of the schoolyard. The wonders of the schoolyard up
at Yale University. Joining me right now, from Opinionjournal.com,
the indispensible John Fund. John, how are you? And what's the
latest on the Yale Taliban?
JF: Well, it's fascinating, because Yale
is starting to buckle. What's happened is the president of Yale,
Richard Levin, has decided that he's going to yank the decision
as to whether or not Rahmatullah Hashemi, the former Taliban
ambassador at large, and bon vivant, and apologist for that
murderous regime, is going to be a sophomore member of the Yale
class, taking it out of the Admissions Department, and put it
right into his office, where he's going to make the final decision.
JB: Really? So maybe the general public ought
to make its opinion known to Dr. Levin, whose...I just happen
to have his e-mail address, ladies and gentlemen. If you want
to express to Dr. Richard Levin your opinion on them having
a former Taliban minister at Yale, maybe you want to write to
richard.levin@yale.edu.
John, what's going on with this, though? I mean, they've got
this guy here. You've got the most famous woman in Afghanistan
coming to the campus to protest this?
JF: Well, she was scheduled to give a speech
on Afghanistan in general, but of course, this controversy erupted
just before her arrival last Thursday. Her name is Malalai Joya,
and she is a 27 year old women's rights activist, and member
of the Afghan Parliament. She's the same age as Rahmatullah
Hashemi, the Taliban activist, and she was not happy. I have
to tell you, I have never seen such a searing condemnation of
someone from a podium in years. She got up and she said, "It
is disgusting, and an insult that he should grace the halls
of Yale University." She said, "It is an insult to
every Afghani. It is an insult to every American's sense of
idealism and human rights." And she said, "He is a
germ who should be removed from the campus."
JB: Now she's got some standing to say this,
right? I mean, what's her background? She's a member of the
Loya Jirga, as you said, the Afghan Parliament. But she ran
some sort of an underground railroad for women during the Taliban
years?
JF: She went back to Afghanistan during the
Taliban, and she ran an underground school for women, because
education was forbidden for women after the age of 10. And she
braved her life to try to fight for her people. At the same
time, Rahmatullah Hashemi was apologizing for a regime...well,
step back. Jed, I have to tell you. There was a film shown before
her talk, one of the most haunting films I've ever seen. It
went to the area where they had those giant Buddhist statues
that the Taliban blew up five years ago, just before 9/11?
JB: Yes, right.
JF: And they had a woman there who said they
came by and they tried to exterminate my entire tribe. "From
hundreds of women here, not one has a husband. From a hundred
children, just one still has two parents. They bulldozed houses
with women and children inside. They cut off women's breasts."
And this is the same group that's now fighting guerilla war
in Afghanistan, killing American soldiers. One of the people
at this speech last week was Natalie Healy, who lost her Navy
SEAL son to the Taliban last year. She was there to protest,
and say how dare Yale dishonor American service men and women
by having the minister of a regime which is still fighting them.
JB: Now John, has Yale's president, Richard
Levin, condescended to meet with this brave SEAL's mom?
JF: Yes. She was driving down from her home
in New Hampshire to Yale. She called and asked for a meeting.
He had his office call back and say he would be willing to meet
with her, but she had to get there by 1:30, so she sped up.
She was tied up in traffic. She got there about fifteen minutes
late, and he'd already left the office for the day.
JB: Wow. So...
JF: But a public affairs officer did meet
with her and hear her complaint.
JB: Well, whoop-de-do. Is she going to take
another crack at this? Is he actually going to come down and
meet with her?
JF: Well, you can call Natalie Healy up in
Exeter, New Hampshire, and ask her. I simply don't know.
JB: I think we should.
---
03-27fund-2.mp3
JB: John, recap that for us. Dr. Levin himself
is going to decide whether Hashemi is going to be part of the
Yale student body next year?
JF: Hashemi is applying for sophomore status,
Class of 2009. He's also going to be applying for financial
aid, because apparently his backers from the foundation that
was supporting him have pulled out. So Mr. Levin, President
Levin, has taken the decision away from the Admissions office,
put it into his office. In the next few weeks, he will be deciding
whether Taliban Minister Hashemi stays at Yale, and all of those
other people who were worthy, and Afghan women who were applying,
I wrote about them today at Opinionjournal.com...
JB: Yes.
JF: ...whether they'll keep being frozen
out.
JB: Wow. Well, I think we all ought to just
pick up our phones and call Dr. Levin and let him know our opinion.
(203) 432-2550, or you can e-mail him. richard.levin@yale.edu.
All right, enough said about that. John, talk to me about what's
going on in Congress on this illegal immigration bill. We have
the House taking some very strong action, apparently creating
a new crime for being an illegal immigrant here in the United
States...
JF: Well, making it a felony rather than
a misdemeanor.
JB: Right. Making it a felony. And we have
the Senate doing something today. I don't think anybody really
knows entirely what the heck they did, least of all them. But
now something's going to go to the floor of the Senate. What
do you think is going to come out of this mess?
JF: Well, the House has an enforcement only
bill. The Senate has a bill that combines some enforcement with
the beginnings of a guest worker program, and waters down a
lot of the House provisions. But the real action wasn't in Congress,
Jed. It was in Los Angeles and other cities, where hundreds
of thousands of illegal immigrants, and legal immigrants, turned
out to protest any Congressional action on immigration. And
I have to tell you, I think this was a watershed. I am someone
who is not for a dramatic crackdown on immigration. I'm not
a Tom Tancredo type. Tancredo calls immigrants the scourge facing
America. He wants to dramatically restrict legal immigration,
when actually, there are a lot of high tech and other jobs where
we need people legally to immigrate to this country.
JB: Heck yes.
JF: But that rally was just amazing. I mean,
I saw a similar one in 1994, when Prop. 187 was being proposed.
This is not good, because the rally featured hundreds and hundreds
of Mexican flags, Guatamalan flags, El Salvadoran flags. And
it was not like a St. Patrick's Day rally. This was a demonstration
of solidarity with another country, another way of life. And
regardless of what the people who were carrying the flags were
thinking, the message they were conveying is these are people
who have a different perspective on what it is to be an American,
and what it is to remain in America.
JB: Well, it's more than that, John. Isn't
it worse than that? I mean, what they're basically saying, they're
planting the Mexican flag on our soil. They're saying hey, we
own this. This is part of Mexico now. Deal with it, and too
bad.
JF: Not all of them are saying that, but
I'm telling you this. They certainly are allowing people to
come to that conclusion. Now here's the problem. I personally
believe that while people who come here to earn a living, pay
their taxes, and many, many people do, put down roots, I think
they contribute to our society. But anytime you have hundreds
of thousands of people, illegal immigrants coming here, and
you have the Mayor of Los Angeles, Antonio Villaraigosa, saying
this bill is criminal, in other words, the bill that simply
restates the fact that people shouldn't come here illegally,
because they're cutting in line in front of all the people who
are waiting patiently to get in legally...
JB: Sure.
JF: ...to himself say this bill is a crime,
I mean, this is an abrogation of his oath of office as an elected
official.
JB: Well, and that's absolutely true. But
he will pay no penalty for that, John. We're talking about a
situation here where Congress and not only this President, but
the several before him, have not dealt seriously with this problem.
what are we going to do? What kind of confidence can we have
that even now, they're going to do anything seriously? I mean,
talking about making this into a felony is nonsense. You've
got 90,000 cases go through the federal courts every year. It's
going to take a hundred years to put these people through the
courts.
JF: Jed, I think there are two things that
need to be done, and I'm going to disappoint some of your listeners
here. I think one of the most important things we need to do
is recognize that 30% of the people in federal prisons are non-citizens.
Most of them are illegal aliens. We've got to find a way to
send them back to Mexico. We also have to make sure that anyone
who commits a crime, however small, here in this country, that's
an automatic ticket for deportation. But as for all the millions
of other people here, we have to have a comprehensive approach.
It cannot just be enforcement only, and I'll give you an example,
because a comprehensive approach that included guest workers
did once work. Do you remember the Bracero Program?
JB: Yes.
JF: That Eisenhower put in?
JB: Absolutely.
JF: This is a program that took the number
of arrests of illegal aliens on the border from 885,000, 885,000
in 1953, to 45,000 in 1959. And when Lyndon Johnson got rid
of it because the unions pressure him to do so, we went from
87,000 illegal aliens arrested in '64, to 876,000 in 1976. The
Bracero program, which brought in agriculture and other guest
workers, and if people complied long enough and stayed long
enough, they might be able to stay longer, that program worked.
We can make it work again, because we now have much better technology,
and much better border control implementation procedures.
JB: Well, John, I agree with you substantially.
But I think that we've got to start first with controlling the
borders. I don't believe we have much control on our borders,
and if you look at what just broke...
JF: Well, Jed, the problem is, you cannot
get...you know, Congress is the art of the compromise. You cannot
get through Congress a bill that is guest workers and no enforcement,
or just enforcement and no guest workers. It's not going to
happen.
JB: Well, and maybe we need to do both. And
I don't disagree with you, John. I think we need to have a guest
worker program, and we need to have a means of deporting people
forthwith who commit crimes here. But I think the basic bottom
line is until we get control of security at the border, no matter
what kind of guest worker program we have, nothing's going to
work. It's not going to have any meaning.
JF: I agree.
JB: Well, I thought you'd come around. No,
we are really in violent agreement as usual. John, thanks very
much for joining us. Read him on Opinionjournal.com.
End of interview.
Posted at 9:00AM PST
Return to top
Monday, March
27
Michael Barone
on the great immigration debate.
Sitting in for Hugh Hewitt today while
he is on his book tour for Painting
the Map Red, available at all fine booksellers and online
at Amazon.com, former Deputy Secretary of Defense, Jed Babbin.
JB: Illegal immigration is the subject of
the week, and joining me to talk about that, and a lot of other
things right now, Michael Barone of U.S. News and World Report.
Read his blog at USnews.com.
And if you don't own a copy of the Almanac
of American Politics, you just don't have the single most
indispensible reference tool that will help you figure out what
the heck is going on in Congress. Michael, thanks for joining
us.
MB: Nice to be with you, Jed.
JB: Let's talk about this illegal immigration
issue. We've got four or five, or half a dozen different bills
being bandied about the Senate. It seems that they range from
guest worker programs to amnesty, to declaring the illegal immigrants
illegal and making it a felony. I mean, how is this going to
play out? Are the Democrats going to win? Are the Republicans
going to duck and hide?
MB: Well, I don't think it's purely a partisan
issue. I think this is an issue that cuts across party lines
to some extent, and that apparently was the case with the Senate
Judiciary vote, which I gather was within the last hour. On
it, you had four of the ten Republicans supporting some of the
measures...of the legalization measures in the McCain-Kennedy
bill. And evidently, some guest worker things. I'm not fully
up to speed on this yet, as well as all eight, or just about
all eight of the Democrats, and so you had six Republicans against.
The posture of this thing now is it's going to the floor of
the Senate tomorrow. Senate Majority Leader Bill Frist has said
last week that he would not bring to the floor a Judiciary Committee
bill unless it was supported by a majority of the Judiciary
Committee Republicans. And in this case, is wasn't by just a
narrow margin of 4-6. If one vote had switched, that would have
been...met Frist's condition. So we'll go forward with the Frist
bill, which is strictly a border security bill, similar to,
but not identical with the one that the House passed in December.
But given the margin, the apparent margin of the Senate Judiciary
Committee, I think it's quite possible that some of these other
provisions will be added by the majority voting in the course
of the Senate debate.
JB: Now is that going to bring about some
sort of filibuster? Our friend, Harry Reid, the leader of the
Democrats, said that if there was something in the nature of
the criminalization provision, he was going to mount a filibuster
against it.
MB: Now I'm not clear if the Senate Judiciary
Committee has the same kind of felony classification for people
who've come across the border, or whether Senator Cornyn said
that he...one of the more conservative Republicans on the Committee,
that he favored a misdemeanor rather than a felony thing. So
I'm not clear whether Senator Reid's characterization for the
reasons that he would filibuster have been invoked by this bill.
But I think to some extent, that is a little bit beside the
point, because Reid's filibuster...you've got some Democrats
there, including Edward Kennedy, whom I remember seeing sitting
in the gallery of the Senate, watching him manage an immigration
bill forty years ago...
JB: Wow.
MB: He was a little slimmer then.
JB: (laughing) Weren't we all, Michael.
MB: And not as gray, but...and he was doing
a good job of it. Senator Kennedy, I think, wants a bill, and
he may think that he has the votes on some of these provisions,
and will want to bring it forward, and he's probably going to
tell his Senate minority leader don't filibuster this thing.
We've got the votes. And under Senate rules, typically, it's
hard to prevent a Senator that's got considerable support from
bringing forward an amendment that he wants to bring forward.
You can do that in the House with the Rules Committee. You can't
really do it in the Senate.
JB: Well, play it out for me, Michael. You're
really more expert on this than pretty much anybody I have ever
heard of, far less know. What is going to be in a bill which
would benefit the Republicans this Fall, versus a bill that
would benefit the Democrats this Fall?
MB: Well, I think that the border security
measures are measure that will certainly benefit Republicans,
and I think have some possibility to benefit Democrats. I mean,
the fact is that there's a widespread perception that our border
is too porous, and that we haven't fully utilized the, I would
say, the private sector in order to do this. You know, the fact
is that we could do a better job, and that government is a clumsy
instrument, and the U.S.C.I.S., the former Immigration and Naturalization
Service, has long been known as one of the government's least
competent bureaucracies. So it's a benefit for the Republicans
there, but I think also for the Democrats. 36 Democrats voted
for that House bill with those tough provisions in it, tougher
than, I think, are going to come out of any Senate bill. So
obviously, Nancy Pelosi, the minority leader in the House, said
basically, it was okay for Democrats to vote. It wasn't a party
line issue as far as she was concerned. On the question of legalization
and guest workers, I think there's some in the Republican Party
and the Republican base that are not going to like those measures.
President Bush has called for something along those lines. You
know, you've got very noisy Congressmen like Tom Tancredo of
Colorado, who's very strongly against it. The House leadership
did not bring forward such a measure. I think Democrats will
go to Latino voters and say hey, we got this for you. But the
fact is there is also Republican support for that, and there's
a danger for Republicans that if they're seen to take an issue...if
they're seen to be contemptuous of the hard-working immigrants
that we have, you pay a political price for that. That happened
in California in 1994, Proposition 187. That was really only
about denying benefits of government service to illegal immigrants,
though it also included their children. That was...35% of Latinos
in California voted for it in that election, among the voters.
But the ads that were run that suggested that Hispanics are
only coming across the border because they want welfare, that
really stuck in the craw of a lot of people, including many
conservatively-inclined Hispanics. I mean, they said look, Hispanic
males have the highest workforce participation of any demographic
group in this economy. And if you're saying...whatever else
we may be, we work hard.
HH: Michael Barone, USNews.com, read his
blog, and read his book, The Almanac of American Politics.
End of interview.
Posted at 10:13PM PST
Who's reading
Painting the Map Red?
If you're a longtime reader of this blog,
you'll remember when Hugh wrote Blog, his last book, the Photoshop
contest followed soon after, and the results were hillarious.
To view the old gallery, click here.
Well, Hugh's new book is now officially out,
and available for your viewing pleasure at all major bookstores,
and online at Amazon.com.
Here's the assignment. Who are where would you find Paint the
Map Red that you wouldn't normally expect? Here's the cover
art.

To get you going, here's a couple
of starters from our good friend, Joshua
Sharf:


Now for the prize part of the
contest. We're going to put up a poll of the top 10 entries,
and the top three are going to win the coveted Crosley Solo
radio, worth $130 bucks. And, if that wasn't enought, the first
place winner is going to get not one, not two, but an entire
case of Hugh's new book, Painting
the Map Red.
Here's what you have to do.
First off, be creative. Be funny. Think outside the box. Do
not be pornographic or offensive, or it'll never have a chance.
When you've created your masterpiece, or masterpieces, as some
of you get on a roll, send the picture in .jpg or .gif format
only, please, and reduce it to about the size above, and send
it to generalissimo@hughhewitt.com.
Make sure you include your name,
address and contact phone number in your e-mail, and if you
have a blog to flog, include the url as well, and I'll link
back to you in the gallery. Once again, lay off the video games
for a few days and stretch those artistic muscles. Then send
your entry to generalissimo@hughhewitt.com.
To see the gallery as it grows,
click here.
Good luck, and check back as
the entries come in.
Posted at
2:30PM PST
Return to top
Sunday, March
26
The Fox News-Halliburton
connection.
The Associated Press today incredibly printed
an anonymous story, reporting a find on the website, The Smoking
Gun, in which the Vice President's hotel requirements were leaked.
Amazingly, the AP found this to be news.
Nowhere have you seen what the hotel requirements
are for any previous executive branch leaders, especially while
they were in office, and wouldn't you have loved to see what
Bill Clinton's requirements were?
Here's the link to the AP
story, and what they actually have to say:
It doesn't take much to make Dick Cheney
at home on the road: Diet Sprite, a pot of coffee - both sans
caffeine - and a TV tuned to Fox News Channel.
No matter how controversial his
policies or how great his political power, the vice president
has kept any excitement in his personal life and habits under
deep cover (except for that one hunting trip).
So perhaps it isn't surprising that the
newly unearthed memo Cheney's office sends to hotels, outlining
his "downtime requirements," contains no shockers
or even rock star-like indulgences. The memo, obtained by the
Web site The Smoking Gun, makes such modest requests as:
_A suite with a king- or queen-size bed
and a connecting parlor.
_Four to six bottles of bottled water
(specifically the name brands Calistoga or Perrier, if Mrs.
Cheney is traveling with the vice president).
_Diet Caffeine Free Sprite, 4 cans.
Also, the hotel staff is advised, when
the veep arrives all lights should be turned on, a freshly brewed
pot of decaf should be waiting, and the room should be 68 degrees,
with "all televisions tuned to FOX News."
I'm stunned after reading this. I might have
to go lie down for a while. Diet Caffeine Free Sprite and decaf
coffee? The nerve of a man who has had cardiac issues to actually
follow his doctor's advice and cut out caffeine.
Forget the opportunity to throw in a cheap
shot by reminding people about the hunting accident, which has
nothing at all to do with the "story." There's only
three possible reasons why this is "news," according
to the AP.
1. The room must be 68 degrees - To the phantom
AP writer, in an era with oil prices going through the roof,
energy costs rising, and global warming about to cause the distinction
of all known life on the planet, the Vice President, by not
keeping his thermostat at the recommended 78 degrees to conserve
energy, clearly is out of step with the rest of the country
trying to come to grips with the energy crisis we're in.
2. Calistoga or Perrier bottled water - Again,
if you are a lefty hack AP writer, Dick Cheney is just another
conservative that doesn't really care about clean air and clean
water. The fact that he requests bottled water shows that he
doesn't care about all the impoverished people out there who
can't afford to buy bottled water, and are polluting themselves
by drinking plain old tap water, the stuff that Republicans
won't spend government money on because they gave it all away
in tax cuts to the rich.
3. FOX News - This is the big one. The other
two would be interesting if it was a slow news day, but the
Vice President actually requesting Fox News? Well now, the right-wing
cabal is exposed once again, isn't it? Whenever Cheney is on
the road, Karl Rove has to stay with the President, or else
there's nobody running the country, right AP? So Fox News on
the road makes perfect sense. It's like a direct pipeline back
into the White House, actually, since Karl Rove secretly programs
that network. It saves time and trouble of having to sit through
conference calls, when the Vice President can get briefed by
Karl through Fox like the rest of us.
Now for the fun part, if you are a left-wing
fever swamper.
Dick Cheney ran Halliburton, right? That's
one leg of the triangle.
Now we see that Cheney goes out of his way
to support Fox News whenever he's on the road. He also appeared
exclusively with Brit Hume after the hunting accident. No coincidence.
You now have another leg of the triangle.
According to Halliburtonwatch.org,
and yes, there is such a thing, Fox News has done puff pieces
on Halliburton and their subsidiary companies, including this
one from last year where KBR, a Halliburton food company
that feeds the troops. So Fox News covers for Halliburton, which
everyone knows is crooked. The final leg of the triangle.
Why again was the Cheney hotel requirement
story news to the AP? It just reinforced to the MoveOn.org readership
out there that there really is an axis of evil, and it ain't
Iran, Iraq and North Korea. To the fever swamp, the axis of
evil is the Bush Administration (Bush, Cheney, Rove), Fox News,
and Halliburton.
In all seriousness, what you might see out
of a piece like this is an attempt by MSM to go after Fox News
and try to discredit them. The MSM is supposed to be the 4th
estate, a check on the other three branches of government. For
Cheney to request Fox by name, they might say, shows that Fox
can't be trusted in reporting on the executive branch because
they're too close. Nonsense.
The mere reason why the Vice President would
request Fox is because unlike the other television news channels,
he actually wants to know what's going on in the world without
the spin. Seriously, do you think Cheney can learn anything
constructive from the likes of Jack Cafferty, Paul Begala, James
Carville, or Bill Schneider on CNN?
Do you think such stunning political analysts
like Ron Reagan, Chris Matthews, Dana Milbank, or Keith Olbermann
can add anything that Cheney hasn't figured out already?
If he's got a choice, and being the Vice
President, he does, it's no surprise that he picks Fox. He doesn't
strike me as a man who suffers fools, which, with some exceptions,
is largely what's on display on the other two cable news channels.
Posted at 11:35PM PST
Return to top
Saturday,
March 25
The Beltway
Boys
HH: Fred
Barnes, Morton
Kondracke are with me. Together they're the Fox
News Channel Beltway Boys. You can watch them tomorrow night,
6PM in the East, 3PM in the West. It repeats later in the evening,
and it's been quite a tumultuous week. And so I'll start with
you, Fred Barnes. The media expected to roast George Bush this
week. Instead, I think they got roasted. What was your assessment?
FB: Well, they did. At the press conference
that the President held on Tuesday, he was triumphant. It was
one of the best I've seen. He was animated. He was strong. He
was more persuasive in defending the war in Iraq, and the aftermath
of the war in Iraq than he was in his set speeches. It was really
remarkable. And then there was this encounter with Helen Thomas,
who just rather than ask a question, just leveled accusations
at him about Iraq. You know, all the reason you cited were false,
and so what's the real reason you went into Iraq, and so on.
Things like that. And importantly, it touched off a national
debate on whether the media is accurately covering what's been
going on in Iraq, whether it's been too negative. And I don't
think this debate's going to end soon.
HH: I carried it on the last two nights on
CNN with Anderson Cooper and Time Magazine's Michael Ware and
Nic Robertson from CNN, Morton Kondracke. Laura Ingraham took
it to David Gregory on the Today Show. A number of places, the
MSM have found themselves under withering counter-assault, and
you know, the troops are being heard from as well. Bloggers
blogging from Iraq, they're angry at the mainstream media, and
they're saying the mainstream media's hurting the war effort.
Your take on it?
MK: Look, I think that the mainstream media
does emphasize the negative, that they've, right from the beginning,
they've been expecting that this was going to be Vietnam, and
they've been following that story pretty steadily, and they
ignore good stuff. They're fixated on the bad, and I do think
that the President has the right idea that the enemy knows how
to play this, that they create enough violence, and they create
a firestorm of public opinion back in this country. On the other
hand, I think that there are real problem in Iraq, and this
whole story about the possibility of civil war was not a media
creation. I mean, the Samara bombing really did take place,
and there really are militias going into neighborhoods and killing
people on the basis of what sect they belong to. So it's a double
story. And even if the media were reporting about all the good
reconstruction projects and all, the heroism of American soldiers,
which they should do, I think still people would be largely
negative on the war.
HH: Now Fred Barnes, the civil war meme,
Ralph Peters filed a column from Baghdad saying Dude, who took
my civil war? And others have pointed out Karbala march from
Baghdad, tens of thousands of Shiia pilgrims unattacked this
week. Is that the overplayed hand? Is that the straw that broke
the public's back when it comes to media credibility in Iraq?
FB: Well, I think it's certainly one of the
things, and I certainly admire Mort's standing up for America
and for President Bush and the soldiers in supporting the war
in Iraq. He and I agree totally. But I do disagree on this thing
about a civil war. I think it's a media creation. I mean, Iraq
is nowhere near a situation of civil war, and yet it's repeated
over and over and over again, that it makes it sound like a
small amount of partisan strife, and a few killings, have put
the Iraqis right on the edge of a full-scale civil war, that
in fact, nobody wants, not the Kurds, not the Shiites, and not
the Sunnis. So I hold the media responsible for that, too.
HH: Morton Kondracke, go ahead.
MK: No, listen. Look, look, look. Zalme Khalilzad
has talked about the danger of a civil war. Former Prime Minister
Alawi admittedly for political reasons, has said that there's
a low grade civil war going on. Don Rumsfeld has said if the
civil war breaks out, that we would largely leave it to the
Iraqis. I mean, these people are not saying there's no danger
of civil war. I mean, it's clear that Zarqawi or whoever blew
up that...
FB: No, no. That's not what the media's saying.
What the media said is that Iraq was on the brink of a civil
war.
MK: Huh?
FB: What the media said is that Iraq is on
the brink of a civil war. That is simply not true.
MK: I think Zalme Khalilzad has said they're
on the brink of a civil war.
FB: No, no.
MK: I think I'm going to pull back. I think
they have not...look, I agree with you that they have not plunged
into civil war. What is happening, though, is not good, and
you've got militias going after one another, and it's got to
stop, and it's got to stop as you yourself say, Fred, with the
formation of a government that can govern.
FB: Absolutely.
HH: Let me see what else has to stop, though.
At ABC, Drudge got ahold of, and put out on Thursday, the Bush
makes me sick e-mail from a senior ABC producer. John Green
said he wanted to puke when the President talks about mixed
messages. How prevalent is that attitude, Fred Barnes, in mainstream
media?
FB: Well, I think there are two attitudes
in the mainstream media. One is the pure we hate Bush and we
hate this war. And I think that's probably the prevalent one.
On the other hand, there's also the we can't win attitude. Mort
referred to this earlier. It's the reporters and pundits and
so on who think it's another Vietnam. And while they're not
necessarily against it, they're just weary and thinks it's just
unwinnable. You see this from, particularly in the writings
of John Burns of the New York Times, a great reporter, but he's
been consistently pessimistic about Iraq and the ability of
the U.S. to prevail.
HH: And Morton Kondracke, I get so many e-mails
saying where are the Ernie Pyle's. I don't think they're there.
MK: You know, I've seen some reporting from
Knight-Ridder, for example, which does tend to be negative,
but the correspondent there whose name I forget, has actually
been around in a lot of nasty places, Tal Afar, and Fallujah,
and Ramadi, and places like that, along with the troops.
HH: Don't get me wrong. They go to nasty
places, like Time Magazine's Michael Ware. But when they get
there, they're not there to encourage the public about the progress
or the bravery of the troops. They're reporting almost with
moral equivalence on the insurgents sometimes, Fred Barnes.
And I think that's what exposes a nerve.
FB: Well, it does, and on the other hand,
I would say that Ernie Pyle was writing about a different war,
where you could stay with a group of men over a long period
of time, and report on them, the grunts. And this is a different
kind of war. But on the other hand, the other reporters don't
seem inclined to write about any courage or heroism, either.
HH: Thank you very much, Beltway Boys. Fred
Barnes, Morton Kondracke, tomorrow night at 6PM in the East,
3PM in the West. It repeats again, and after a week that was
like this week, you do not want to miss the Fox News Channel
Beltway Boys. At least I don't want to miss them.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:00PM PST
Return to top
Friday, March
24
Frank Gaffney
the film critic?
HH: Frank Gaffney joins me now, Center For
Security Policy, www.centerforsecuritypolicy.org,
blogs at Warfooting.com,
and has gone film critic on us. Frank Gaffney, welcome to the
program.
FG: My pleasure to be with you in all of
my capacities.
HH: On Tuesday, What
We Fight For, your column in the Washington Times, talks
about a new film, Obsession:
Radical Islam's War Against the West. Run through who made
this, and why it's important.
FG: Well, to be honest with you, I can't
remember the names of the guys who made it, but they're small,
independent film makers. They've put together an extraordinary
array of experts, some in the West who are not Muslim, a number
who are. But most powerfully, perhaps, they've used extensive
footage from television stations and networks in the Middle
East and the Arab world, that are promoting the kind of Islamo-facism
that the film addresses as the immediate threat we face, and
a very dangerous one indeed.
HH: Now you mention in your column, Sir Martin
Gilbert, Alan Dershowitz, Daniel Pipes, Carolyn Glick, Steve
Emerson, Itamar Marcus. These are very different people. I mean,
this is not any particular group of one ideological center or
another.
FG: Well, I think that there's a community
of people of which they're representative, who are very thoughtful,
very knowledgeable about different aspects of history, of the
faith, the Islamic faith, of the strategic character of the
enemy, of a totalitarian political mold we face today. And interestingly
enough, Hugh, that is so similar, in important respects, even
down to now the stiff-arm salute and the goose-stepping, familiar
from Hitlerian days, they're bringing to bear a wealth of expertise
that I think is tremendously informative about this enemy. And
most especially needed at this moment, when we hear people in,
particularly in Washington, consumed with paroxysms of doubt
about the future of the war in Iraq, when in fact as we've talked
about so many times. And this film makes very clear the war
in Iraq is but one front in a larger, truly global war we are
now facing. I would call it the war for the free world.
HH: On Monday, Frank Gaffney, the Christian
Science Monitor, a usually very respectable newspaper that is
careful in how it approaches issues, had a story by Ileen Prusher
out of Jerusalem, the headline of which "Key Hamas Cabinet
Posts Go To Hard-liners." Moderate politicians refused
to join the organization's new government on Sunday. Frank,
isn't it sort of a crippling inability to see if they call anyone
at Hamas other than a hard-liner?
FG: Well, I'm not sure whether they were
indulging in the fanciful notion that there are so-called doves
or moderate in the Hamas ranks. My guess is what they were referring
to were the moderates, so-called, of Fatah, Yassir Arafat's
party. Even by relative terms, the terrorists who followed the
secular, relatively secular banner of Fatah were no moderates,
and certainly not people that I think Israel, or for that matter,
the United States could repose any more confidence in that these
thugs following the banner of Hamas.
HH: Well actually, I think they're just talking
internal Hamas. It begins, "The crucial diplomatic position
of foreign minister, for example, went to Mahmoud Zahar, who's
adamantly opposed to any softening of Hamas' position that Israel
should be destroyed. Zahar is known for his fiery rhetoric and
vocal support for the organization's use of suicide bombing."
I mean, I don't think there are any moderates inside of Hamas,
and I think that a lot of the West believes it is reformable.
Do you?
FG: I certainly don't. I haven't seen the
article, in fairness, Hugh,
HH: All right.
FG: So you may be right that they're seeing
something that I don't see, and I don't think bears up under
close scrutiny. But the point is that I've not seen anybody
in Hamas come forward and say you know, we really are ready
to live side by side peaceably with Israel. We really are ready
to not only renounce, but condemn this practice of sending our
children in to blow up innocent people. To the contrary, I think
everybody continues very much to toe that line, for the simple
reason that they believe it. And this is one of...again, the
points of Obsession is this ideology, which is so redolent of
Hitler and the Bolsheviks, that this brutally repressive, totalitarian
political ideology, is alive and well. In fact, growing in places
like the Palestinian community, where people are being indoctrinated
and brought up, generation upon generation to believe in a culture
of death, that is a threat not just to Israel, but to freedom
loving people everywhere, including here.
HH: I want to go back to one of the experts
you quote in your column, Matthias Kuntzel, who's a professor
at the University of Hamberg, and an expert both on Islamo-facism
and Nazism. He does not claim that the former sprang from the
latter, but he does point out that while Islamism is an independent
anti-Semitic, anti-modern mass movement, it's main early promotors,
the Muslim Brotherhood in Egypt, the Mufti, and the Qassamites
in Palestine, were supported financially and ideologically by
agencies of the German National Socialist Government. About
the Mufti, I was aware. But the other connections I was not.
FG: Yeah. Well, he's made a quite intensive
study of this, something that I think perhaps springing from
his own familiarity with the German history, has made easier
than perhaps for the rest of us. But he's documented an association
that at certainly the ideological level, and it would appear
at the financial and operational level between the early Islamo-facists,
and the national socialists, also known as Nazis.
HH: Frank, as we're running low on time here,
when does Obsession get to the public? Where will it be able
to seen? And do you expect an attempt to blockade the movie
by sympathizers of Islamists?
FG: Well, it's a good question, Hugh. We're
hoping to make it available to the public. I don't know that
it has any distribution arrangements at all right now. I'm just
trying to help, having only seen it myself for the first time
last night, get the word around that it's a very important film,
it is one that we are going to, I think, hear more about in
the future. It did win, by the way, the best feature film at
the Liberty Film Festival, so it's beginning to get a bit of
buzz, but we can use all the help we can get getting the word
around.
HH: The movie is Obsession:
Radical Islam's War Against The West. The critic, our friend,
Frank Gaffney, Centerforsecuritypolicy.org.
End of interview.
Posted at 5:44PM PST
Return to top
Thursday,
March 23
Mark Steyn
on the herd mentality of the media coverage: Ignore the media,
and find out for yourself.
03-23steyn.mp3
HH: For two night this week on CNN, I've
been told by Michael Ware, Time Magazine Baghdad correspondent,
and others, that only the people with boots on the ground in
Baghdad, those brave journalists know what's going on. Well
now, Mark
Steyn, columnist to the world, has in fact been in Iraq,
dined on chicken in Fallujah, as I recall. And Mark Steyn, is
the media anti-war?
MS: Well, I think the media has a herd mentality,
as Christopher Hitchens was talking about in his marvelous interview
with you just the other day. And I think that is the problem,
that anyone who's been with large groups of journalists, whether
you're at a political convention in Philadelphia, or whether
you're with the foreign correspondent crowd in Kabul, knows
that they all sit together in the same bar, and they reinforce
the herd think. And I think the most interesting stories to
come out of Iraq have been the ones from independent bloggers,
sometimes with the American military, and sometimes Iraqi bloggers,
or sometimes just from some fellow who happens to be in Kurdistan,
and notices the big tourist boom that's going on there. They're
all stories that are different stories. You know, the State
Department, a lady at the State Department asked me if I wanted
to go to Iraq the other day, and I politely said well, you know,
I'm not thinking about it at the moment. And the reason I said
that was because I think there's a difference when you go as
part of a media assignment. When I was just driving around the
Sunni Triangle, I was doing it pretty much as a tourist, and
I think you see a different way that way. The media sitting
in the same hotel bar in Baghdad, and then watching, filming
the burning Nissan of the morning so it can be on the Today
Show, is not the whole story about what's going on in Iraq in
any means.
HH: Mark Steyn, a mil-blogger in Iraq, in
Mosul, actually, named Buck
Sargeant, sent me an e-amil today, which includes in part,
some slams at Michael Ware and other journalists, and he says
soldiers really do know what's going on, and he concludes by
saying the media wants us to lose, and they're doing their damnedest
to see it happen. But I have faith in the American people that
they're too smart to fall for that trick twice. Do you think
that attitude, whether or not justified, is pervasive in the
American military?
MS: Yes, I think so. I think that is one
of the big stories here, that in fact, the military, whether
or not Iraq is like Vietnam, I don't think it is. That's rubbish.
But clearly, the military this time around is not like Vietnam.
That's the big difference. Anyone who gets e-mail from the troops
knows that they're full of pride in what they're doing, and
they think it's doing very well. And the way...I think the way
to test this is just to try and be reasonably objective about
it. When people use terms like insurgency and civil war and
all this, think about the meaning of those terms. We've seen
what civil war is within recent memory, in Rwanda and Bosnia
and Ivory Coast, just to pick three examples. That's where the
country gets split from top to toe between different ethnic
groups, and they all start killing each other, and rival governments
spring up, and there's massive population displacements. None
of that is going on in Iraq, and it's absolute...you know, Tim
Russert said today, he defended NBC, the media's Iraq coverage,
by saying we capture reality. Yeah, they capture reality in
the same sense that those insurgent guys capture people. They
saw it's head off and shout Allah Akhbar at reality. That's
what they're doing when they capture reality. The reality of
what's happening in Iraq is very different from what Tim Russert
thinks it is.
HH: You wrote a column
up at today's Jerusalem Post. I want to quote a paragraph.
"Despite the Mosque bombings," you wrote, "There's
a net gain of more than 100,000 civilians alive today who would
have been shoveled into unmarked graves had Baathist rule continued.
Meanwhile, the dictator would have continued gaming the international
system through the Oil For Food program, subverting Jordan,
and supporting terrorism as far afield as the Philippines."
That's the math, I say, Mark Steyn, but most of MSM will not
even begin to try and do the sums.
MS: Well, in fairness to them, that's not
just them. But the idea that they're...my column today was to
reject the idea that there is such a thing as stability. There's
no stability on the international scene. It's like a frozen
lake in New Hampshire in March. Underneath, the water is on
the move in that frozen river. And if it's not going in your
direction, it's generally going in the other guy's, and that's
basically what was happening during the twelve years under which
American was containing Saddam. When George Bush I declined
to finish the job, Saddam understood very well what was going
wrong, that when you go to a lot of time and trouble and expense
to set up, effectively, a big dictatorial management program,
which is what the U.N. and America and Britain did, Saddam understood
that was an act of weakness. So to think that you could have
held him in that position indefinitely is ludicrous.
HH: Now Drudge has obtained from inside ABC
e-mails, a particularly provocative source on the web today.
One of them, from a senior producer for one of the weekend shows
reads, are you watching this? Bush makes me sick. If he uses
the mixed messages line one more time, I'm going to puke. He's
now had a friend go out and say he feels very, very bad about
this, he's a straight shooter, a great producer, he's always
fair. What does the John
Green e-mail tell us, Mark Steyn?
MS: Well, I think the fact of the matter
is, I wouldn't put Bush makes me...you know, a lot of people
make me nauseous, but I wouldn't put it on an e-mail, because
I wouldn't assume that everyone who saw that e-mail agreed with
me. What is reveals is that what the media think of as their
impartiality is in fact rather a bland assumption that they
all think the same way. And that's what's revealing about this,
that he knew he could send that e-mail to all his chums at ABC,
and that they would all agree that Bush makes them puke. And
the difference is, you know what I think, and I know what you
think. And why doesn't...I'm happy that this has come clean,
that Bush makes him puke.
HH: Yup.
MS: That's great. Now if he can only say
where ABC, where the network thinks Bush makes us puke, that
would be one step to a kind of greater honestly and straightforwardness
in dealing with the public.
HH: And I think that is the bottom line,
that the appearance, or the assertion of objectivity...and I
just ran into it so often with Michael Ware over the last two
days. And he's an Aussie, and he has the old standard we understand
better than Americans do, because it's not our fight, blah,
blah, blah. It's just maddening to Americans when they can smell
the anti-Bush aroma in the room. Mark Steyn, let's talk a little
bit about the documents that are coming out. You referenced
one of those with Saddam's connection to Philippines terror.
Another one revealed that he was holding onto hundreds of Kuwaiti
hostages ten years after the war. What's the effect of these
documents on the left's sort of acquittal of Saddam campaign?
MS: Well, the left's argument has always
been that Saddam was a secular dictator, and therefore he would
have nothing to do with a bunch of theocrats like Osama bin
Laden and al Qaeda. Well, you know, the left themselves refute
that argument, because they're essentially secular leftists,
and they are happy to make alliances of convenience with the
Islamists who hate gays, and hate women, and all the rest of
it, if it means...because they both happen to be anti-American.
So I think they left themselves as self-refuting on that argument.
But there's no doubt that when you look at these documents,
that there are all kinds of small links that emerge between,
explicitly between Iraq and their contacts with al Qaeda going
way back into the early 90's. And there are also links with
all kinds of other terrorist groups across the planet. And this
is why I think it's so absurd to pretend to use that as an argument
for not getting rid of Saddam. The point of the matter is that
Saddam was someone who had been allowed to mock American victory
in the 1991 Gulf War, and been allowed to mock it for 12 years.
And so he was part of the September the 10th world, and needed
to be removed on those grounds alone.
HH: Mark Steyn, you and close behind you,
Christopher Hitchens, are the two people I think have been thinking
clearly and, a long record of thinking clearly about the war.
You referenced the interview I did with Hitchens two days ago.
There's a note of pessimism in his voice about the ability to
rally the West to this long war. Do you share that pessimism?
MS: Well, I think what Christopher Hitchens
said, he used an expression which I think is correct, this passivity
that you know, essentially the left's arguments, the non-deranged,
America-hating left. Put them aside, the America-haters, for
a bit. And the argument of a lot of the mainstream of the Democratic
Party is this passivity. Oh, we can't do this, and we can't
do that, because something may go wrong, and it may not be easy,
and this will happen, and that will happen. And we don't understand
any of these strange, wacky foreign places anyway. That passivity
will end freedom in the world. It won't end freedom in the world
in America, it won't end it in Iowa and in Massachusetts tomorrow.
But it will end it in a lot of the borderline jurisdictions
around the world very quickly. You cannot be that feeble in
the face of an existential threat. Christopher Hitchens understands
that. I don't agree with him when he starts talking about Mother
Teresa and the Royal Family and all his other bug bears, but
I respect him because on this issue, he shows a clarity that
should be obvious to everybody of left or right.
HH: I think you're right about that. Robert
Kaplan has written extensively. The American military gets it
at the lowest level, Mark Steyn. It's just a question of whether
or not the media will ever catch it from them.
MS: Well, I think you should ignore the media,
and find out for yourself. You know, Glenn
Reynolds has a marvelous new book out called An
Army of Davids. And he promotes this idea he's had on his
website,
a pack, not a herd. The media are the herd. And the way to beat
the herd is with a fast-thinking pack that draws in all kinds
of resources, and uses them to the full.
HH: Mark Steyn, well put. Always a pleasure.
Steynonline,
America.
End of interview.
Posted at 4:00PM PST
Victor Davis
Hanson on the tripartite nexus of Congressional leadership,
media elite, and the celebrity fringe criticizing the war effort.
Read or listen to it all, but make
sure you get to the last part, where Hugh plays back the Michael
Ware/Hugh Hewitt interchange from CNN a couple of nights ago,
and Professor Hanson just schools him.
03-23hanson-1.mp3
HH: Joined now by eminent military historian
and classicist, Victor
Davis Hanson. Professor Hanson, I got up pretty early this
morning, had a 7:00AM meeting. But before I did, I read your
Jewish World Week Daily column
on your house, and it was melancholy. And I said that's
not very VDH. Explain to people your reflection on your six
generations of Hansons and your farmhouse, and let's take it
after there.
VDH: Well, I live in a house that was built
in 1870, and so I have an alternate version of U.S. history,
because I grew up with stories from my parents, about my grandparents,
about my great-grandparents, about my great-great-grandparents.
And it was always the take on the U.S. from this particular
house, whether it was the Great Depression or World War I, or
the Spanish-American War. And I was just saying that if I could
synthesize that take on the world of people who lived in this
house, it looks just about the same as it did when it was built,
was a tragic view that they accepted that Americans did not
have to be perfect to still be good, that when you went to war,
you had a bad choice and a worse choice. But we, the generation,
and I said the people that live in this house live in a very
different therapeutic world. Even though the house looks the
same, I think that our ancestors would look, if the house could
talk, would say what's wrong with you people? Do you think that
you have a birthright to have perfection? Don't you understand
that we almost died? We starved to death, we had Typhoid, people
got Polio in this house? We were lucky to eat? We built this
farm out of nothing, and now you have six hundred channels,
and you're less happy than we were. And I think I was trying
to use this as a metaphor to a way a lot of Americans look at
Iraq, for example.
HH: That's where I was going. Does that crisis
of the spirit that you're describing for the next generation,
the generation after you and that one, condemn us to defeat?
VDH: I don't know if it condemns us to defeat,
but at some point, either somebody who's in the administration,
a spokesman's got to say now just wait a minute. We went 7,000
miles over to the ancient caliphate, and right in the heart
of the autocratic Middle East. We're trying to make a democracy.
We've lost 2,300 people, but that's about two weeks in Okinawa,
and this country's been through a lot worse at Shiloh and Antietam,
Belleau Wood, Iwo Jima, the Yalu River, and we can win this,
and we're not getting any oil, the price skyrocketed. We have
the biggest, magnanimous foreign aid plant since the Marshall
Plan, $87 billion dollars. We don't have anything to apologize
for, and we're almost there. We've had three successful elections.
We've dismantled a lot of al Qaeda. We have millions of people
in Iraq who've pledged their lives to see this democracy work,
and we're not going to stumble before the finish line. So stop
it, and just get a grip on yourself. But we need to hear that.
HH: Now this is going to be a little esoteric,
but it's prompted by the fact that you are, along with David
Horowitz, and the Center For the Study of Popular Culture, going
off to Rome, May 21st through 29th. And you, Victor Davis Hanson,
are going to give four lectures to the group that's traveling.
There's a link if people want to go to your home
page on this trip. And as you go off to Rome, I wonder if
you're not considering sort of the collapse of the late Roman
Republic, when Sulla marches on Rome, and Marius comes into
Rome, and the games that were always not indulged in, because
it was the Republic that was at issue, all of a sudden did become
indulged in. And then of course, you had the second triumvirate
and all...it just sort of gradually became so deeply partisan
that it ended in disaster for the Roman Republic. Are you going
to be lecturing on that, Professor?
VDH: I am, and I was reminded of that when
all of a sudden this week, I kept hearing this strange refrain,
whether it was Ted Kennedy or Harry Reid, that the President
was dangerously incompetent. And I didn't realize that almost
everybody was saying that. But it was just a patent refrain.
I want to know what was dangerously incompetent. We haven't
had another 9/11, we freed 50 million people, we've set up democracies
in the most unlikely places following the Taliban and Saddam
Hussein, and I don't see anything incompetent about that. And
to use the words dangerously incompetent, and then to have the
exact same words mimicked, it's almost as if we've got some
kind of group speak going on. And it doesn't match reality.
HH: And to refer to the action of the NSA
to conduct surveillance of al Qaeda contacting their agents
in the United States as criminal behavior, it's reckless political
behavior. It's over the edge political behavior.
VDH: It is.
HH: The sort that marked the end of the Roman
Republic. Now I'm not...
VDH: It is, and it's ahistorical, Hugh, because...not
just the Roman Republic, but this is a country where Abraham
Lincoln suspended habeus corpus. Andrew Johnson did it in the
entire state of Tennessee. We intured people in World War I
and World War II. Roosevelt, Truman, Kennedy used things, all
things that we regretted later, and we haven't even approached
that, even though in this particular war, unlike those in the
past, we've lost 20 acres in downtown Manhattan from stealthy
attacks, which are more likely to be the exact things we have
to watch for, than a conventional, transparent enemy. And we
haven't done any of that, and yet this country has almost become
unhinged in a way that our ancestors, getting back to this house,
were not unhinged about.
HH: Now when you say unhinged, are you speaking
of the elite media? Or are you speaking of the hard left, or
both, or something broader?
VDH: I think I'm talking about a tripartite
nexus of the people in the Senate like Harry Reid, Nancy Pelosi,
Ted Kennedy, the rhetoric they use, and talking about people
in the elite media, and I'm talking about the fringe, the Michael
Moore, Cindy Sheehan left that uses language like Bush is the
greatest terrorist. The Harry Belafonte people that have no
constituency, but they seem to have the ear of the media, and
their views resonate, and we hear about them, even though they're
unhinged. They're not credible or serious thinkers at all.
HH: Have we seen this...you're a military
historian. In other campaigns, and other drawn-out wars, have
we seen the American left ally with elite media to wage war
on the war?
VDH: Well, we saw it in Vietnam, and a good
example was when Walter Cronkite came back and said the war
was lost after Tet, even though in just one of the most heroic
chapters in the history of the U.S. Marine Corps, in Hue, and
then the U.S. Air force at Que Son, the U.S. Army in Saigon
itself, we killed over 50,000 Vietnamese, North Vietnamese Communists,
and lost 1,500, and really destroyed the Viet Cong in the South
for over a year, and we were told that was a grievous defeat,
because the media covered it in such a way it suggested that
terrorists were on the Embassy grounds. And we've seen something
like this in the past. If you go back and look at the Summer
of 1864, when people were calling for Lincoln's impeachment,
the Copperhead movement...and this is what we have, is a Copperhead
movement. That's a term used for people who wanted to bisect
the United States, and have a confederacy and a union, and go
back to the status before the Civil War under George McClennan
and Horace Greeley. So we have that kind of extremism, but what
we don't realize is we all canonized Lincoln, but Lincoln was
hated more than Bush ever was. So what seems conventional wisdom
today, if President Bush can stick it out, and we're already
seeing changes in Iraq the last three weeks. The Iraqis are
taking more and more of the responsibility. American casualties
are going down the last four weeks. If we can pull this off
in five years, Bush will be considered a great President. But
I'm just worried that even his base is starting to be affected
by this hysteria.
---
03-23hanson-2.mp3
HH: Professor Hanson, I'd like to play for
you a little bit of Michael Ware, Baghdad bureau chief for Time
Magazine. Two nights ago on CNN, I was debating him. I'd like
to get your reaction to what this says about our culture.
HH: Compared to what, Mr. Ware? Compared
to Baghdad under Saddam? Are you arguing that Iraqis are worse
off today than they were four years ago?
Anderson Cooper: Michael Ware, do you
want to respond?
Michael Ware: Yeah, well I think if you
ask a lot of Iraqis, I think you'll be surprised by what the
answer is. A lot of them say what? This is democracy? The joke
is you call this liberation. And okay, let's look at the context
as you suggest. Let's look at the even bigger picture. What
is the bigger picture? Who's winning from this war? Who is benefitting
right now? Well, the main winners so far are al Qaeda, which
is stronger than it was before the invasion. Abu Musab al Zarqawi
was a nobody. Now he's the superstar of international jihad.
And Iran...Iran essentially has a proxy government in place,
a very, very friendly government. Its sphere of influence has
expanded, and any U.S. diplomat or senior military intelligence
commander here will tell you that. So that's the big picture.
Where's that being reported?
HH: Now Victor Davis Hanson, how do you respond
to that?
VDH: Is that man a journalist?
HH: Well, he's the Time Magazine Baghdad
bureau chief.
VDH: That's just a mockery of what we would
call sober and judicious reporting. And everything he said was
factually incorrect. We dismantled two thirds of the al Qaeda
heirarchy, and Mr. Zarqawi was well enough to get an invitation
to come before we went into Iraq to seek medical care under
Saddam. Everything he said was untrue, and when we went into
Iraq, nobody knew much about the Iranian nuclear program. The
entire world is galvanizing against it now. The Iranians are
petrified that this democratic experiment will work right on
their border, and one of the most subversive things they can
imagine right next to them. And the United States knows so much
more about the danger of Iran than it did two years ago. The
world was asleep to their nuclear antics. And 67% of the people
have confidence in Iraq, according to the polls, that things
are getting better. And it shows two things. One is that this
idea of stability is always better than the chaos that comes
with freedom. It's like saying that Hitler or Stalin...1936
Germany was much, much better than anything you can imagine
in the 20's, when you had inflation. Or Stalin's...after the
purges, there was a sense of order in Russia. All of that's
true, as long as you accept that Saddam was killing 40-50,000
people a year. And the second is this utopianism that all wars
are a choice between something's perfect, and something that
is bad. When we went to war after 9/11, and we had one war with
Saddam in '91, a second war with 12 years of no-fly zones, then
we had...there were no good choices. There was a bad choice
and a worse choice.
HH: So with this in mind...again, I stress
he's the Baghdad bureau chief of Time Magazine, at one time
the most influential magazine in the West, I believe. What is
the disease in the media? Where did it come from?
VDH: I think it came to be frank between
the journalism schools, the academic training of a lot of the
people, and this affluent, elite culture, to be frank, that
comes out of the unversities on the left and right coasts, that's
divorced from the tragic view, because these people are not...they
don't open hardware stores. They don't service cars. They've
never worked physically with their hands. They have an idea
in this international culture of the West that somehow, all
of their affluence, all of their travel, all of their freedom
came out of a head of Zeus, and it's not dependent on the U.S.
military, the United States role in the world. They have no
appreciation for the very system that birthed and maintained
them. And they've had this sort of sick cynicism, nihilism,
skepticism, and the height of their affluence and leisure, that
they don't have any gratitude at all, which is really one of
the most important human attributes. Humility to say you know,
I'm very lucky to be a Westerner, and have certain freedoms.
And that's why he cannot appreciate what we're trying to do
in Iraq, because he has no appreciation of the very idea that
he can jet out of Baghdad anytime he wants on a Western jet
that's going to get him safely to a Western country, where he's
going to be protected, that the people in Iraq want that same
thing that he doesn't seem to appreciate. And that's...I know
I'm sounding a little emotional, but that's been one of the
most depressing aspects of this entire media...you did a great
service to the country, Hugh, by having him on your show, and
having him admit to something that we all suspect. But that
hysteria and that anger and that predjudice was very valuable
for people to see.
HH: Well, we hope to continue to do it. Victor
Davis Hanson, thank you for spending time with us this afternoon.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:30PM PST
Glenn Reynolds
and Mickey Kaus weigh in on the ABC Bush makes me puke memo.
03-23reynolds-kaus.mp3
HH: As we continue on with the coverage of
a media meltdown and a backlash against anti-war reporting bias
in the media, attacks on the President, set-ups of the Secretary
of Defense, I'm joined by two of the new media titans, and I
use that word advisedly. Mickey Kaus, one of the original bloggers,
he blogs at Slate.com
under Kausfiles.com.
And of course, the Instapundit,
Glenn Reynolds, professor of law at the University of Tennessee,
and author of An
Army of Davids. And I think that's what's going on this
week, Glenn Reynolds. Many of that Army of Davids just got fed
up with mainstream media coverage of the war. Agree or disagree?
GR: Oh, I think that's absolutely right.
I think we've got a swarm starting up again.
HH: A swarm about what?
GR: Well, about a whole variety of mis-coverage,
and under-coverage, and distorted coverage, and people remembering
that it's not the first time. And I think sometimes, you get
kind of tired, because it seems like you just have to keep pointing
this out over and over again. I know that's how I kind of feel.
It's like oh, God, here we go again.
HH: But it doesn't stop. Mickey Kaus, is
this an accurate assessment of what's happening?
MK: I think so. I'm not sure...is it going
to rise to Eason Jordan heights? Is this guy going to have to
quit? Is there going to be a relentless attack? He's sort of
just said what everybody knew all along, and I thought Roger
Simon's take was quite accurate, which is now we know. So
congratulations. Thanks. There's nothing to be...he needn't
apologize for it. It's what he thinks.
HH: Yeah, but you're talking about...I agree
with you, by the way. The honesty expressed by the ABC senior
producer. But I'm thinking more of, it began with Helen Thomas
this week. It spiraled with David Gregory and James Carville
ganging up on Laura Ingraham. Michael Ware and I got into it
on CNN a couple of times this week, and then you had Jaime McIntyre
going after Rumsfeld with a Maureen Dowd column, Mickey. I think...and
then Jack Cafferty flips out today. I think people are sick
of these people.
MK: Well, I thought Laura Ingraham held her
own, actually.
HH: Yes, she did.
GR: Always outnumbered, but never outgunned.
MK: But it depends on what happens in Iraq.
I mean, I was down on the war when I turned to Iraq
the Model, who was a pretty pro-war blogger from Baghdad,
and his home was getting mortared, okay? And he was depressed.
And he talked to his father, and his father thought the war
was lost. And so, when that happens, it's hard to blame media
bias.
HH: No, but I think actually you can, if
that is the only story they're running with, and they're not,
for example, covering what's going on in Kurdistan, the Marsh
Arabs, the relative security around Basra, or in fact, those
homes that were mortared once, and then not mortared today.
It's not really about reporting good news, it's making sure
that it's balanced. Glenn Reynolds, your reaction?
GR: I'll tell you the example. The press
knows how to be exquisitely sensitive about sending the wrong
message when they care. For example, with regard to race. If
they reported only crimes where black criminals were involved,
and they always mentioned the race of the perpetrator, and they
never point anything else positive about black people, which
is in fact how they used to do it fifty years ago, we would
say that was bias, one-sided, and that they were responsible
for the change in social climate that that one-sided reporting
produced. In fact, we did say that, and they tried to change
their ways. And if you want to contrast saying Bush makes you
want to puke may hurt somebody's career, maybe not, one racially
charged remark which was I think just a slip of the tongue about
Condi Rice, and a deejay's out of a job. So when they care about
the message, when they care about what's going on, they know
how to control themselves.
HH: Mickey Kaus, your reaction?
MK: Well, I think that's right. A couple
of points. First, then they're very careful about who they hire.
And if you hire somebody who Bush makes puke, or whatever he
wrote in that memo, he's not going to change his spots just
because he's ordered to be sensitive. So these people are all
over the media, they have tenure, they're not going away. And
you can't just overnight, suddenly...they're not going to change.
HH: Mickey, what percentage, if we define
the elite media as the big newspapers, and we know the five
or six of them there are, the big networks, Time, Newsweek,
and we talk about their senior leadership, meaning the top one
hundred people in the organization, so we're talking roughly
the thousand people who make the news right now...
MK: Right.
HH: What percentage of them are anti-Bush?
MK: Anti-Bush?
HH: Anti-Bush.
MK: I would say 80.
HH: Instapundit, what do you think?
GR: 90.
HH: I think it's 90, maybe 95. Now of those
one thousand people again, Mickey Kaus, what percentage of them
are anti-war?
MK: I would say 70, 65.
HH: Glenn?
GR: About 85.
HH: I'm still up at around 90, and I go to
what Christopher Hitchens said on this program on Wednesday,
that a senior network executive admitted to him that in fact,
they are beginning to cause the insurgents to believe they can
win this war. I'll go back and get the exact quote here. Is
that happening? Is the media helping, Mickey Kaus, the bad guys?
MK: Well, it's certainly a small world. That's
all part of what Instapundit says is happening, and sure, the
people in Iraq watch the American media often more closely than
Americans do.
GR: It's an information war. Terrorism is
an information war disguised as a military conflict.
HH: I think you're absolutely right. So what
does the Army of Davids do, because honestly, I've been doing
this for six years, and I've been in media for fifteen years,
and I went to Columbia Journalism School and did an article.
The intake valve is still open on the left and closed on the
right. It's not going to change. Mickey Kaus is right, it's
self-perpetuating elites who hire themselves, who bring those
same opinions. So what happens, Glenn Reynolds? What's your
Army of Davids do except grind their teeth?
GR: You marginalize them by giving people
alternatives. You point out, and I actually pointed this out
on Reliable
Sources on CNN a couple of weeks ago, the best single piece
of reporting I've seen from Iraq was Michael
Totten, who's a blogger, who's paid by his readers to go
report. And he does a great job.
HH: Yeah, and he just left Kurdistan, is
on his way home. I also put Michael
Yon in that category.
GR: Yes.
HH: But it doesn't seem to, Mickey Kaus,
change GE's assessment of how NBC is being run.
MK: Well, you know what? NBC is not doing
very well lately, I was told. I just found out last night. So
at some point, they will start to lose money. There are mainstream
reporters that do a good job. I think John Burns does a very
good job. His reporting today of the election was certainly
inspiring, and he seems to have his heart in the right place.
HH: Let me read this to you from Hitchens.
He's saying about a well-known network senior executive. He
called me the other day. This is not a guy who's in any way
a conservative, and he said you know, we've known each other
for a bit. He said you know, I'm beginning to think you must
be right, because it really worries me what we're doing, when
we are giving the other side the impression that all they need
to do is hang on until the end of this administration. Do people
know what they're doing when they're doing this? One doesn't
have to make any allegation of disloyalty, but just if it worries
him, as it really does, I think it should worry other people,
too, and it certainly worries me. Is Christopher Hitchens right,
Mickey Kaus?
MK: Well, you know, there is an argument
on the left, which I think some of them at least make sincerely,
which is that our presence there is doing more harm than good.
And I don't think...but you know, there is also this inevitable
effect, which is it emboldens the terrorists, sure.
HH: And today, Glenn Reynolds, I want to
ask you both about this. New documents indicating contacts between
al Qaeda, and specifically Osama bin Laden, and Saddam's people
came to light, a '95 document, 2001 document. Kevin Drum at
Washington Monthly writes, so what? I mean, that's his quote.
So what? What do you do to that, Instapundit?
GR: You laugh at it. I mean, you just have
to note that people are out of touch with reality. One thing
I've noticed about the press, by the way, the defensiveness
I've seen in the last week or two illustrates a couple of things.
I think first it shows that even they realize that they've gone
too far and overplayed their hand, and it's likely to come back
to bite them. The other thing I think they've figured out is
imagine that in fact, what they're doing succeeds, that we do
lose the war, that it is seen as another Vietnam. A substantial
portion of the American public, 30, 40%, at least, is going
to blame them and hold a grudge that will last decades. Now
is that a position they want to be in? Because that's what's
going to happen, and they will have earned it.
HH: Mickey Kaus, I want to quote Kevin specifically.
Who cares? This document apparently dates from 1997, it doesn't
tell us anything new, we've known for years that Saddam and
Osama had few contacts during the 90's, the last of which was
in '98-'99, when Osama's relationship with the Taliban was undergoing
some strain, and Saddam had just been bombed by U.S.-British
forces. The contact was brief, and nothing came of it. No one
ever suggested Saddam had no contact at all with al Qaeda. He
did. But it never amounted to anything, and the credible evidence
indicates there hasn't been any other than casual contact between
Saddam and al Qaeda for over four years. Does this just strike
you as oddly disinterested in fact?
MK: Kevin's a pretty reliable guy. So he's
not one of the...
HH: Oh, he's not a screamer. I agree.
MK: He's not one of the left-wing crazies.
My impression is that are people running around saying that
there absolutely no connection, and that there was more than
a casual connection. They sort of reached some sort of semi-entente.
And I sort of see it like Bill Clinton and Patricia Duff Medavoy.
You know, maybe they didn't meet and get it on, but it was sort
of inevitable, given events that some point in the future, that
might well happen. If you were paranoid about it, you would
worry about it.
GR: Now remember, Richard Clarke was worrying
in 2001 that Osama was going to boogie to Baghdad when we invaded
Afghanistan.
HH: Absolutely. And we're just learning about
the Philippines connection. It just seems to me that the blinkard
left and the anti-Bush media are combining to deny important
facts. An
Army of Davids, how's the book doing, Glenn?
GR: Book's doing great. Had a great review
in the Wall Street Journal today, and was on NPR, and got a
bunch of other stuff coming out, and it seems to be selling
pretty well. So I'm pretty happy.
HH: Mickey, when's your coming out?
MK: I shot my wad back in '92.
HH: Well, there's got to be another book
in there somewhere. Mickey
Kaus, Glenn
Reynolds, two great new media titans. Thank you both.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:00PM PST
Powerline's
John Hinderaker on the AP's collapse in Project Harmony analysis.
HH: As I wind down a day devoted to this
disease that has the mainstream media in its grip, I did not
want to ignore the fact it's not just the Baghdad bureau chiefs.
It's not just the ABC producers who say Bush makes them puke.
It's not just the talking heads. It's not just David Gregory.
It's not just Helen Thomas. It's at every level, including the
level of AP reporters. One guy who's been covering that aspect
of the collapse of mainstream media character is John Hinderaker
of Powerline.
Hello, John. Welcome to the program.
JH: Hi, Hugh. Thanks.
HH: John, you caught this story. I didn't.
I want you to explain to people what AP did this week, and put
it in the context of how AP is operating.
JH: Well, it has to do with the release of
documents and audio tapes from Iraq and Afghanistan, that generally
goes under the name of Project Harmony. And these are the thousands
of boxes of documents that Stephen Hayes was instrumental in
getting released. And the government is now putting these out
on the internet so that people can look at them, read them,
translate them, and so forth. And maybe 10% or less of all of
the audio tapes that were made in Saddam Hussein's office have
now been released. Saddam was like President Nixon in that he
had a tape recorder running in his office. And the night before
last, the Associated Press came out with a story that claimed
that these audio tapes proved that Iraq did not have WMD's.
And it actually portrays Saddam and his henchmen almost like
the heroes of this story, and quotes a couple of sentences pulled
out from these audio tapes, and talks about how they were frustrated,
and how could they get the U.N. to understand that they weren't
trying to cheat. And at one point, the article says the documents
make clear that Saddam's regime had given up banned weapons.
Well, I thought this was just nuts for several reasons. Number
one, fewer than 10% of these audio tapes are out. So to start
drawing conclusions as to what they prove or don't prove is,
I think, premature to say the least. Number two, none of the
audio tapes that have been released so far date from after 1996
or 1997. So even if it were true that they showed that there
were no WMD's as of 1996, say, that doesn't mean that there
were none in 2002 and 2003. If there were audio tapes that late,
they have not been released.
HH: Now you also point out that there is
a nine minute gap on one of these tapes.
JH: Well, but the other thing is that I don't
know how they...if they missed this one audio tape, or decided
to ignore it, or what, but I quoted on Powerline, at considerable
length, an exchange on one of these transcripts between Saddam
and one of his henchmen. And this guy talks about their efforts
to fool the United Nations, and he talks about the WMD programs
that Iraq had going on. He says the U.N. was concentrating its
efforts on the biological issue. And it's a small program compared
to the chemical, missile and nuclear programs. Okay? This is
Saddam's...one of the top guys in his regime talking. And then
he goes on to talk about the fact that the U.N. has kind of
got the goods on them with respect to biological weapons, and
I'm just going to read a quote here. He says, "Sir, this
is a meeting of the highest leadership in our country. We did
actually produce biological weapons." Okay?
HH: Yeah.
JH: And then he goes on to the conclusion
that the special committee, that's of the U.N., came to is correct.
It's not a lie. And then he goes on, and it's actually kind
of funny, because he talks about the fact that there was some
substance, some material, he doesn't specify what it was, that
they ordered from Western countries, and they tried to tell
the United Nations that is was for medical purposes. And I'll
just read you another quote. He says, "You said it's for
medical purposes. Using it for medical purposes only requires
kilograms, not tons, meaning that the ministry of health can
use 200 kilograms the entire year for examinations, but it doesn't
use 37 tons." Okay? So this is how they got caught. And
then the conversation goes on, and the last words that are on
the transcript are this guy in the regime says, "So the
biological issue," and then it ends, and it says the next
nine minutes of the tape are blank. So you know, for the Associated
Press to say that these audio tapes prove that Iraq had given
up on WMD's, and they were just frustrated because the U.N.
was irrationally convinced that they were trying to cheat and
so on, is just nuts. And in this one audio tape, there's an
explicit admission that we did actually produce biological weapons,
along with the admission that the biological weapons program
is, "a small program, compared to the chemical, missile
and nuclear programs."
HH: Isn't that amazing? And of course, the
AP is so invested in a narrative about Bush. It's so liberal,
it's so left-wing...
JH: It's unbelievable, and you know, the
guy that wrote this...and you read it, and it's very hard to
tell...I think what he's trying to say is that Saddam never
had WMD's after 1991. Remember the first Gulf War ended, and
that he was supposed to destroy them all?
HH: Yup.
JH: And what I think you're supposed to take
away from this article is that he did, and after that, he was
completely innocent. Well, you know, that's ridiculous. In 1996,
his son-in-law, I believe it was, defected. Remember that?
HH: Yeah, to Jordan.
JH: Yeah, to Jordan, and told all about these
stockpiles of WMD's. And then his son, Uday, kind of panicked,
and he led people to various locations where they had hidden
WMD's. So I don't know if this reporter is ignorant of that
history or what.
HH: Oh, he is. Obviously, or duplicitous.
One or the other, because it's just not correct. John, I want
to thank you for short notice to fill in that gap. AP in the
tank along with everyone else, high and low, and I just wanted
to make sure we got the complete picture of that. Thank you,
John.
JH: Okay. Thank you, Hugh.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:55PM PST
The good,
the bad, and the odd with Lileks.
HH: That music means Lileks is here, as in
James Lileks, columnist for the Minneapolis Star Tribune, proprietor
of Lileks.com,
author, humorist, and general good guy around the radio. James,
you've heard this media debate all week.
JL: Yes, and I've enjoyed every minute of
it.
HH: I'll bet...after a while, I'm sick of
it. But I do think it's...
JL: You know, sick of it...It's been going
on since the start of the Afghan invasion. Every since the dreaded
Afghan Winter, which was supposedly going to leave our troops
as soldier-cicles in the high mountains, we've been hearing
nothing but the same old miserableism, but go on.
HH: So when does it end? Or will it not end,
if we want to win the war?
JL: It ends when a Democrat takes the White
House, perhaps. Because at that point, there's a fighting chance,
maybe, that large swaths of the media will begin to consider
this theirs. Up to now, it hasn't been their fight. If there
had been some Democrat in the office in 2002, 2003, who gave
them that old JFK 'bear any burden', Berlin airlift vibe, they
might have gotten manned up sufficiently to realize that this
is actually everybody's war. But until that point, no. They're
going to see it through a very narrow prism, and that's going
to be exactly what they've been showing us. On the front page
of my own paper, which I love dearly, the third anniversary
of the war was heralded by what? Do you think it was...and I'm
not expecting a cake. I'm not expecting some ginned up photo
where the little kids from the neighborhood bring a big cake
to the soldiers every day. But was it a hospital? Was it a school?
Was it a smiling thumbs up or a purple finger? No. The third
anniversary was presented through the bombed-out window of a
car. That was the image of three years of accomplishment right
there.
HH: Did they cover the French riots? I'm
just curious, because cars got really badly used in those riots.
JL: (laughing) Well, you know, it's hard
sometimes. I mean, there's the sort of instinctual pro-French,
they're Europeans, so they've got something going. But on the
other hand, burning cars is good, because cars are bad. But
on the other hand, burning cars creates toxic fumes, so that's
bad. But on the other hand...I mean, yes, you can just tie yourself...
HH: But isn't this going to...I think it's
been palpable. When the standing ovation in West Virginia hit,
when that woman said you know, they're not telling us the truth,
and the reaction I've gotten to the CNN appearances, and Laura
Ingraham got to her attempted mauling by Gregory and Carville,
I think there's a real backlash, although I don't know that
the bottom can fall much more out of the media than it already
has.
JL: No, I don't think so. It's so stark,
that at the top of the hour news, Harris Faulkner on the Fox...we
have the Fox News feed here on this
particular station, and she referred to the allied troops,
coalition troops, as our troops. And that actually sort of jarred
me, because you don't hear that very often.
HH: No, you don't.
JL: And it's one of the reasons that people
detest Fox News in the first place, is that they have the unmitigated
jingo gaul to use terms like the first person plural when referring
to American troops. I mean, I have a whole selection, I should
just pass these along to you, of World War II-era news reporting.
And what's remarkable about it is not only the depth and the
detail, but the calmness of the voice, and just the absolute
recitation of the fact without attempting to punch everything
up with undue emotion. And it's that need to make a 15 second,
30 second newscast sparkling, and peppered with emotion, that
sometimes drives them to do things like this, because you can't
really get people excited, and turned to the radio, if you're
talking about the fact that the electricity in Baghdad is not
on 17% more than it was last week.
HH: Did you hear the conversation with Michael
Ware, the Aussie who runs Time's Baghdad bureau?
JL: Yes, yes I did.
HH: What do you make of him?
JL: He's full of gusto, isn't he?
HH: Yes, he is.
JL: I defer to the gentleman who called,
I believe the soldier who called and said he detected a bit
of the adrenaline junkie in the man's voice, and a bit of self-aggrandizement.
However, he's there, I'm not. And I also have to go, like you,
with Tim
Blair's assessment of the man.
HH: Yeah, that's what's so funny. My guess
is he's a pugnacious brawler who really believes this stuff,
that they're in a better position than the American military
to know what's going on. That's what I love.
JL: Well, I don't believe, necessarily, that
the even-handed approach is what's required here. It's good
when you're covering a school board meeting. It's fine when
you're covering a fire, and it's necessary to look at things
from combustion's point of view as well. But in this case, we...actually,
there is an us. There is, at the end of the day, an us, which
is a civilization, which I think...well, again, it comes back
to what you've pointed out, what Hitchens has pointed out, what
Steyn's pointed out, and that is that this is essentially an
existential matter. And that feeling, I don't believe, is shared.
I'm not even exactly sure that the other side knows what the
word means, necessarily.
HH: No, they don't. Now I've got to move
to important stuff. The number of avalanche deaths in this country
has risen dramatically to thirty a year, and 90% of them are
men. And the Men's Health writer who wrote about this couldn't
figure out why that is. I wonder why do you think that nine
out of ten avalanche victims are men?
JL: (laughing) Because women are smart enough
not to go climbing the stupid things. I'm waiting for the rash
of avalanches that kill sharks, because that will combine all
these things together. You know, the shark attacks on the rise,
avalanches are on the rise. If we can get the avalanches to
kill the sharks, I think we'll be fine.
HH: That would be good. Now Matt Sutter couldn't
get tornado out of his head or ears, because he, on March 12th,
went for a ride in a tornado. "It's a pretty awkward record
to have," he said about the longest known ride in a torado
on record. Interesting?
JL: (laughing) I wasn't sure that they were
actually keeping records of the number of people who have survived
being picked up. If I saw a tornado deposit somebody in my front
yard, I would just have all of my friends get down on their
knees and speak in little, tiny, high voices, to make the guy
think he'd landed in Munchkinland or something.
HH: (laughing) Okay, from the AP in Bonita
Springs, Florida. Someone knocking at her door in a gated community
earlier this week, she looked out to see an unwelcome visitor
on her front stoop, an 8 foot alligator. The bull gator had
wandered up from the pond behind the house, and had a bloody
lip from banging its head against the door. What do you do,
James Lileks?
JL: Well, instantly, you call your husband
and the appearance of a man will trigger an avalanche, apparently,
and the avalanche will kill the alligator.
HH: That's it. You're right.
HH: Do I know my ecosystems? Or do I know
my ecosystems?
HH: You've got this down. Now James, you
worked in a bar for a while, didn't you?
JL: Seven years.
HH: Seven years in a bar. Texas has begun
sending undercover agents into bars to arrest drinkers for being
drunk. What do you think about that?
JL: I don't like that at all.
HH: (laughing)
JL: I don't like that. I mean, I understand,
and I have a problem with them catching people as they stagger
outside, not when they go to their cars, no. Perhaps when they
go to their horses, or walk or bike or whatever. But the idea
that people inside of a bar should be worried as to whether
or not somebody is monitoring their intake seems rather un-Texan,
shall we...un-Texican.
HH: It does. I think that's what's so amazing
about this story, is that no one would ever have expected Texas
to break down on drunks in bars.
JL: In Vermont, yes. But if a man cannot
get drunk at a honky tonk in Texas, then America is truly a
different country.
HH: That's the media's fault, I think. Finally,
Face Book,
that online meeting place for undergrads, has gone from 2.2
million visitors a day, to 10.5 million visitors a day. What
does this tell you, James Lileks?
JL: That there are a lot of people with internet
access at work.
HH: But these are college kids. They don't
work.
JL: I know. Fine. Well, then there are a
lot of people who go to Kinko's
and hang out. Look, the amount of time that I spend on the web
on absolutely stupid debates in small little corners of blogs,
it surprises me not that a page like that should get as much
attention as it does.
HH: How many columns do you write a week?
JL: Five for the website, six for the newspaper,
one for Newhouse, one a month for American
Enterprise Institute, and then the 30 minute podcast, and
the other stuff.
HH: So it's about 13 a week it will average
out.
JL: 13, 14 pieces a week, yeah.
HH: And do you consider yourself hard-pressed?
JL: I consider myself lazy.
HH: All right. That's what I wanted to know.
Lileks, always a pleasure. Lileks.com.
End of interview.
Posted at 10:44PM PST
RNC Chairman
Ken Mehlman.
HH: Joined now by the Chairman of the Republican
Party, Ken Mehlman. Chairman Mehlman, welcome back to the Hugh
Hewitt Show.
KM: Thank you. I've been all over Wisconsin
today.
HH: What's going on in Wisconsin? We've got
a Senate race up there?
KM: Well, we've got a very competitive governor's
race up there. We're going to have a potentially competitive
House race, and we have a great state party up here, a lot of
energy, a lot of grass roots, and spent the day traveling the
state. One of the other things we talked about in this state
was what I saw, was the misguided effort by Senator Feingold
to censure the President. I think that we ought to be appreciating
the President for trying to stop foreign terrorists before they
hit us, not punishing him for it.
HH: Now Ken Mehlman, the subject this week,
every day on this show, and many other places. I've done CNN
two nights in a row on this, is the media's coverage of the
war. I think Americans are fed up with, at least a majority
of Americans are. Do you sense that out on your travels?
KM: I do. I hear people talking about it
all the time, and you know, one of the interesting things that
happens, and you noted in your excellent books, is that people
can vote with their feet today. In the old days, when there
was a liberal mainstream media monopoly, there was nothing you
could do about it, except for to hope that they improve. Today,
you can change, and we've seen so many examples of that, and
there's no question it's a problem, and I think that the mainstream
media ought to think about what it's doing, because every day
they do what they do, is they lose more customers.
HH: Now Ken Mehlman, a lot of people are
happy that the President gave the press conference and two stem-winders
this week. Do you think he needs to keep that up, because this
is a long war?
KM: I think he does, and I think he will.
I think we need to remind people what the stakes are, remind
people of the 9/11 attacks, remind people that what we're doing
is dealing with the threat over there, so that we're safer over
here. And I think all the time we can do to remind people of
those things are critically important. You know, it's interesting,
when America faces a new war, the old way you thought about
war, the metrics you used to judge success and failure, aren't
as relevant anymore, and that's one of the challenges we face,
just as during Korea, when people had been used to the World
War II model, they were anxious. We have the same challenge
today, I think.
---
HH: Ken, what's the money situation as we
look at seven months away from the mid-terms, party to party?
KM: Well, our numbers look pretty good. I
think the latest numbers we have was about $40 million dollars
cash on hand. I think the Democrats had about $8 million dollars
cash on hand. So we have a big advantage, party to party. But
as you know, Democrats have certain advantages. One is the power
of trial lawyers and labor unions, which have historically overwhelmingly
backed them. And the second is a point you mentioned, which
is the power of the mainstream media. And so I think that we
need to have more resources. In 2004, we were outspent by $120
million dollars, and we've got to be ready for that potentially
to happen again. We've also got to recognize that ultimately,
we need a strong grass roots. We need a lot of people listening
to shows like this, participating in the blogs. All these are
part of what we need to have, which is an alternative network
to get the word out.
HH: Now Ken Mehlman, are you worried, because
I am. I think it's break the glass and sound the alarm time,
that complacency among Republicans threatens the majorities
they hold in Congress.
KM: I am. I worry not just about complacency.
I worry about something I call learned helplessness sometimes.
I think people either think they really can't do anything to
make a difference, because they feel very safe. Or they think
things are bad, they throw their hands up. That's not the right
answer. John Boehner is a fantastic new leader in the House,
and will do a great job as the majority leader, continuing the
tradition of a great majority leader. We've got great leaders
in the Senate, we've got the President. The stakes are enormous.
We've got to remind people our nation is now at war. This isn't
like even back before, when we had the Cold War, we had an established
pattern of dealing with that challenge. We're now at the same
moment we were in 1946, when the Iron Curtain came down. And
the policies that were established then for a generation decided
how Americans would deal with the threat of international Communism.
The policies that are made right now, the results of the elections
right now, will decide for a generation whether we take the
battle to the enemy, whether we use every tool at our disposal
to defeat the enemy, whether we make sure that things like Patriot
Act and the surveillance of foreign terrorists continue, or
whether those things stop, and we go back to a pre-9/11 mindset
that says we can win this thing somehow with just law enforcement,
and responding after the fact. So all of these issues are on
the table now, and it is critically important that every one
of your listeners be involved in these campaigns.
HH: Ken Mehlman, always great to talk to
you. We will check in often as we approach election day. Of
course, we always invite Howard Dean, and he never accepts.
Howard, if you're listening, you're welcome to come on early
and often.
End of interview.
Posted at 6:00PM PST
Return to top
Wednesday,
March 22
A reasonable
look at the media coverage of Iraq on CNN's Anderson Cooper
tonight.
On the panel was Michael
Yon, Michael Ware, Nic Robertson, and Hugh Hewitt.
The transcript is here,
or will be shortly.
The audio is here.
03-22hugh-cooper-ware.mp3
The video? Expose
The Left's got it.
Posted at 11:00PM PST
Christopher
Hitchens on the media coverage of Iraq, and whether some on
the other side are recognizing what they've wrought.
03-22hitchens.mp3
HH: Happy to have back to begin today's show
Christopher Hitchens, Vanity
Fair columnist, author of many books, including a recent
bio of Thomas
Jefferson. And a great time to talk to you, Christopher
Hitchens, as this is the third anniversary of the invasion of
Iraq. There have been a lot of lookbacks, including a couple
of which I participated that have focused on the media's role
in reporting from Iraq. I'm wondering, generally, do you think
the media is doing a good job in conveying both the stakes and
the situation on the ground in Iraq?
CH: Not really, I don't. I mean, I can think
of some outstanding reporters who've done their very best to
cover it. Michael Gordon's new book, for example, I think is
very good. And John Burns from the New York Times is outstanding,
much better than his newspaper, when he writes there, that's
to say. It's just that I've been doing this business for a long
time. I've been a journalist for most of my life, and it must
be nearly 40 years now, and I know a press herd mentality when
I see one. I really do. And sometimes, I approve. I mean, I
remember when I was in Bosnia, all of the press was hostile
to Milosevic in one way or another, and as it happened, I thought
that was the right bias to have. But I did realize it was a
bias. And when I've been in the company of people covering Iraq,
I notice this...another herd mentality, and it's been there
since before the war, and it's placed a bet on quagmire at best.
HH: Yeah, I tried to make an argument last
night...
CH: And defeat at worst. And in some ways,
it doesn't want its prediction to be falsified. I won't say
any more than that. It's not a conspiracy, but it's definitely
a mindset.
HH: That's my point. Last night on CNN, I
was debating this with Michael Ware from Time Magazine. Do you
know him, Christopher Hitchens?
CH: I don't, but I was on CNN with Michael
Weiskopf of Time Magazine a few nights ago, who said that the
only person capable of unifying Iraq was Saddam Hussein, and
I thought good grief. We've come this far to hear that?
HH: That's...this is exactly...I want to
play you a little bit. Michael Ware's a very respected war correspondent.
He's covered Timor, he's covered all sorts of civil wars. He's
an Australian, he's a rugby player. He's tough as nails. But
here's an exchange last night I'd like your take on. I'm asking
him a question.
HH: Compared to what, Mr. Ware? Compared
to Baghdad under Saddam? Are you arguing that Iraqis are worse
off today than they were four years ago?
Anderson Cooper: Michael Ware, do you
want to respond?
MW: Yeah, well I think if you ask a lot
of Iraqis, I think you'll be surprised by what the answer is.
A whole lot of them say what? This is democracy? The joke is
you call this liberation. And okay, let's look at the context,
as you suggest. Let's look at the even bigger picture. What
is the bigger picture? Who's winning from this war? Who is benefitting
right now? Well, the main winners so far are al Qaeda, which
is stronger than it was before the invasion. Abu Musab al Zarqawi
was a nobody. Now he's the superstar of international jihad.
And Iran...Iran essentially has a proxy government in place,
a very, very friendly government. Its sphere of influence has
expanded, and any U.S. diplomat or senior military intelligence
commander here will tell you that. So that's the big picture.
Where is that being reported?
HH: Christopher Hitchens, does that reflect
the mindset that you're talking about?
CH: In part it does, because it's very passive.
In other words, you read all the time, people say, you could
look at any of your today's newspapers and notice it, and say
well, there's a civil war atmosphere, as if that was a criticism
of the Bush administration, instead of the people like Zarqawi,
who have been announcing for two years now that it's their plan
to create a sectarian civil war by destroying the other side's
Mosques in an unbelievable piece of facistic blasphemy. People
look at you when they read about atrocities is if it's your
fault for wanting to get rid of Saddam Hussein. This is simply
illogical. It's a non sequitur. And you'll note the slight tone
of hysteria and the nervousness, I think, in the over-assertive
way that your man was just talking now.
HH: Yes, I did notice that.
CH: By the way, since he mentions Mr. Zarqawi,
about whom I know a lot, Mr. Zarqawi was a very senior member
of the bin Laden family. He probably had, and in my opinion,
probably always did have the ambition to outdo Mr. bin Laden,
and to become himself the great sheikh and a great leader. But
he was a very important member of that gang in Afghanistan already,
long before. And of course, if we hadn't gone to Afghanistan,
if we'd left it in the hands of the Taliban and al Qaeda, he'd
still be there. He wouldn't be in Iraq, so of course your man
is correct again in saying we've made him worse. But what...has
he thought of the logic of what he's saying? Of course Zarqawi
would still be in Afghanistan if we left him alone.
HH: The logic of...
CH: I mean the whole thing is based on this
unbelievably masochistic passivity, and which leads to people
making elementary logical mistakes they wouldn't otherwise make,
because they wouldn't otherwise be blinded by their predjudice.
HH: Last week, when we talked about Yugoslavia
and the descent into genocide that Milosevic led, it was because
Yugoslavia descended into civil war, and the slaughter became
too high, that we had to go in. In Rwanda, the great shame is
that in that civil war, the West did not intervene. Now it strikes
me as exceedingly odd that on the left, there are voices who
wish us to withdraw from Iraq because of the threat of civil
war. Does that add up?
CH: Of course, if we had gone into Rwanda
when we could have done, when we were warned, and when the United
Nations commanders there were begging just for a slight increase
in force that would have held off, or at least blunted the original
genocidal attack, of course there would have had to be a moment
where American soldiers fired on the people trying to commit
genocide. It would have happened, and we would have been accused
of starting a civil war in Rwanda if that had happened. And
you know by who, as well.
HH: Right.
CH: Or we're just really glad...or even though
we keep complaining and say oh, we're so sorry we did nothing,
secretly we're relieved we didn't ever have to expose ourselves
to the messy responsibility. By the way, there's a question
from your last...I'm sorry, Michael Ware was it?
HH: Yes.
CH: ...that I didn't answer. I didn't want
anyone to think I was ducking it. On the question of Iran's
influence in Iraq?
HH: Yes.
CH: There's no doubt about it. I mean, we've
known for some time. It was a risk we ran from the beginning,
that anything you do to reduce the power of any Iraqi government...this
is the reason why we tried to split the difference during the
Gulf War between Iran and Iraq. And by the way, the other way
around, as when Carter encouraged Saddam to attack Iran, risks
the possibility of enhancing the other side. That's almost zero
sum, but as against that, which is a serious problem, has taken
a very nasty form in Iraq. We can also say that among Iranians,
millions of Iranians, there's a great deal of pro-American influence
that has been spread, and I don't know a single Iranian who
isn't glad that Saddam Hussein was removed, and doesn't think
that in the longer run, this movement that's been unleashed
in the region will be at the expense of the mullahs, in spite
of any short-term gains. I can't promise that that's true, but
I can promise that it's a real possibility.
HH: Christopher Hitchens, just objectively
stepping back, is Iraq better off today than it was four years
ago, given the documents we are now seeing, given what Robert
Kaplan called the unbelievably Stalinist nature of Hussein's
regime, and the mad as hatter sons who were in line and would
never have given it up.
CH: Yes.
HH: What do you think?
CH: Oh, on that decision, there's only one
way to argue it. It's not only a great deal better off than
it was four years ago, but it's enormously better off than it
would have been if it had been left to rot and crash under this
mad despotism, which bear in mind, stayed in power by using
the tactics of divided rule, and importing jihadists like Zarqawi,
and the Fedayeen Saddam, who were going to be the suppressor
regime. I mean, if you think it's bad now, just try and imagine
what it would have been like if it had been left alone. And
on that, I don't think there's any disput at all. And by the
way, I've made this point in countless arguments with so-called
anti-war people, many of whom are actually pro-war, but on the
other side, in public and in print and on television and on
radio and in universities. I've never had any of them reply
to my point there.
HH: When you say pro-war but on the other
side, what do you mean, Christopher Hitchens?
CH: Well, I object to people like Michael
Moore for example, or Ramsey Clark being referred to as...in
the New York Times as anti-war activists, or anti-war campaigners.
They're not anti-war at all. For one thing, they're not pacifists,
particularly not Ramsey Clark. For another, they've declared
that they believe the beheaders and jihadists and the blowers
up of Mosques and mutilators of women and so forth are a liberation
force or an insurgency. Michael Moore even said they were the
modern equivalent to the American founding fathers. So in that
case, fine. George Galloway's the same. Many of them are. They're
not really against the war. They're not anti-war, but on the
other side in the war for civilization, and they should be called
out on it and given their right name.
HH: Do you believe that there are leaders
in the Democratic Party in Congress who also belong to that
caucus?
CH: No, I can't say that I do think that.
I mean, maybe Cynthia McKinney, who is not exactly a leader.
She seems sometimes to talk in a sort of MoveOn.org manner,
but no, I think that we're far from that in this case. I think
what you have there is again, a sort of fatalism, the feeling
that if you can say a war is unwinnable, you've also said it's
wrong. In other words, that you would desert the side you were
on if you thought things were going badly. That's a moral degeneracy
of a different kind.
HH: And is that so pervasive as to be irreversible,
as we've got about 45 seconds left, in the Democratic Party?
CH: Yes, I believe so. I don't need 45 seconds
to say that.
HH: Well then, in 30 seconds, if the Democratic
Party returns to power in this country, you get thirty seconds
now, what happens?
CH: I'll just tell you something a very senior
person at a well-known network. I know this sounds a bit odd,
but I just can't tell you who he is or which network. I don't
have the right to do it. But you'll have to believe me, okay?
HH: Okay.
CH: He called me the other day. This is not
a guy who's in any way a conservative, and said you know, we've
known each other for a bit. He said you know, I'm beginning
to think you must be right, because it really worries me what
we're doing, when we are giving the other side the impression
that all they need to do is hang on until the end of this administration.
Do people know what they're doing when they're doing this? One
doesn't have to make any allegation of disloyalty, but just...if
it worries him, as it really does, I think it should worry other
people, too, and it certainly worries me.
HH: It certainly should. Christopher Hitchens,
as always, a pleasure.
End of interview.
Posted at 4:00PM PST
The Smart
Guys on the keep your hands off my Church case, or Kelo, Part
2.
HH: Now John Eastman, last week we touched
on your Long Beach case. I want to take a couple more minutes
and lay it out and get Erwin's reaction to it.
JE: Sure. I actually have two Long Beach
cases that we're in the middle of. The first was a campaign
finance case, and we got a temporary restraining order against
an illegal campaign finance ordinace just last week.
HH: Oh, congratulations.
JE: Thanks. The second involves, and it's
not in litigation, yet. We're waiting to see whether the city's
going to follow up with condemnation that they're now authorized
to do. They're condemning a Church because it's in the redevelopment
zone, and of course, half of the city is in the redevelopment
zone. And it's not that they need the Church land to create
an assemblage of a parcel for a big Home Depot, or anything
like that. They just want to extend the housing development
a couple more units, to take out this Church property. The Church
is not blighted, and there's been no demonstration that taking
the Church out and bulldozing it down is necessary to fulfill
the elimination of blight purposes in the rest of the area that
is the ground for bringing the condemnation in the first place.
I think it presents a very important challenge to Kelo. When
you're dealing with a non-profit organization such as a Church,
what does Kelo mean when it said it's permissable to take private
property for economic development, when you're dealing with
private property that by definition doesn't contribute economically
to the base of the city, but has a different kind of contribution.
HH: Erwin, what do you think about this?
EC: Well, I think it's complicated, because
when you're dealing with a Church property, then all of a sudden,
the Religious Land Use and Institutionalized Persons Act comes
in, that says if the government significantly burdens religion
with regard to land use decisions, the government has to show
a compelling interest. And so I would start with that aspect
of it before even getting to the takings clause aspect of it.
HH: John Eastman, are you pleading that?
JE: Well, you know, we certainly will, and
I think Erwin's absolutely right. RELUIPA says they've got to
show a compelling interest, which is even a higher standard
than the taking. The taking says they had to have a finding
of necessity, and the RELUIPA standard is they have to have
a compelling interest. And I'm just not sure getting a couple
of extra lots is compelling.
HH: Erwin, what would your advice be to the
City of Long Beach?
EC: Well, I don't know enough facts, but
based on what John has said, my advice would be to settle the
case.
HH: Yeah, I think they are out of their minds.
John Eastman, where can people learn more about this atrocity?
JE: Well, we've got a wonderful web URL we've
set up, called Handsoffourchurch.com,
and people can go to that, and it transfers you to the internal
Claremont
Institute webpage with all the details on the case.
HH: And Erwin, have you been to the NCAA's
yet?
EC: No, though I'm sure following closely
what's going to happen tomorrow and this weekend.
HH: If you're at Duke, I assume you have
to, or they'll run you out of town. Erwin Chemerinsky from Duke
University Law School, John Eastman from Chapman University
Law School, thank you both.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:59PM PST
The Smart
Guys deconstruct the 5-3 Court decision today.
HH: That music means the Smart Guys are with
us. From Duke University Law School, Erwin Chemerinsky. From
Chapman University Law School, John Eastman. Professors both,
John from the right, Erwin from the left. And today marks the
handing down of the first John Roberts dissent. The Chief Justice
dissents. John Eastman, you want to give a quick summary of
why?
JE: Well, the case involves 4th Amendment
law. The police have long have the ability to conduct a warrantless
search if the occupant of the property gave consent. And an
earlier case by the Supreme Court had held that that was true,
even if the person was only a co-tenant, and the other tenant
may not have given consent. But if they were absent, the co-tenant's
permission is sufficient. Here you had the wife giving consent,
and the husband explicitly not giving consent, and the Court
ruled 5-3 that the non-consenting co-tenant can prevail, and
the police can't search the house based merely on the consent
of the other party. Now Chief Justice Roberts' dissent raises
some important question and concerns about the ability of police
to conduct searches and intervene in domestic violence matters
as a result of this ruling.
HH: And it also, according to Justice Roberts,
Chief Justice Roberts, says the end result is a complete lack
of practical guidance for police in the field, let alone for
the lower courts. Erwin Chemerinsky, your reaction to today's
decision?
EC: Well, I think it's a very narrow decision.
Justice Souter's majority opinion is clear that he's dealing
just with the situation where the objecting person is at the
door and says to the police, you're looking for evidence about
me, you don't have my permission to come in. Justice Souter
says I'm not dealing with the situation where the person's in
the house but not at the door, not dealing with the situation
where the person is away from the house. And so I think the
problem with it is it's too narrow, because it's just focusing
on a very unique situation. The police come to the house, two
spouses come to the door, one says yes, the other says no. The
one in whom the evidence is sought against says no. The Court
says you can't go in on those circumstances.
HH: So if the wife has called, and then the
husband who's abusing her knocks her out, she's out of luck?
EC: Well, that's not what the Court says.
I mean, obviously, if the police come to the door and the wife
says my husband just beat me up and the police hear her testimony,
the police can arrest him on the basis of that. But what they're
saying is here, which had nothing to do with domestic violence,
when the police are trying to come to somebody's house to get
evidence on that person, that person at the door saying no should
prevent there being consent. If the police come to my house
and I'm the only one who answers the door, and they say do we
have consent to come in, I think all three of us agree I have
the ability to say no.
HH: Correct.
EC: Well, the fact that my wife is at the
door saying yes, but they're not looking for evidence against
her, and they're looking for evidence against me and I say no,
that's the no that should count.
HH: John Eastman, the Court is fractured
here. Not only did Justice Souter write, but so did John Paul
Stevens and Stephen Breyer, Justice Kennedy siding with them.
And we had three dissents as well. What happened to the fabled
unanimity under Chief Justice Roberts?
JE: Well, you know, I've been tickled by
the pundits talking about how there's a new era, and everything's
going to be unanimous all the way to June. These are the early
cases coming out that were unanimous. Some of them could have
provoked controversy, but they wrote them narrowly enough so
they didn't. There's a big dynamic going on at the Court, but
I don't think unanimity from this group of justices is going
to be the measure. Let me go to what I think it means in practice.
It means a second question from police at the door. You've got
the husband saying no, you've got the wife saying yes. The police
will then say to the wife, is there anything in there that would
give us probable cause to search? She'll say yeah, he's got
his cocaine pipe on the desk there. Bing. Now all of a sudden,
they've got exigent circumstances that gives them probable cause
to go in, and the ability to destroy evidence. That means they
don't have to stop and go get a warrant from a magistrate and
then come back. And so they'll just ask a second question. So
at the end of the day, I think we may get where we need to,
but it's...well, we'll see. I've got to parse all the opinions
to see all the implications.
HH: And Erwin, before I go back and talk
to John about his Long Beach case, I just wanted to sound you
out on a case I brought up last week, Vermont's campaign finance
reform. The three dissenters from the most recent application
of Buckley are still there. Two of the majority upholding campaign
spending contribution limits are gone from the Court. Do you
think there's the potential here to overturn Buckley V. Vallejo?
EC: I think there's a real potential, but
probably not this year, in this case. There's no doubt that
Scalia, Kennedy and Thomas believe that any restriction on contributions
is unconstitutional. We don't know if Roberts and Alito will
be with them. We can surmise they might be. If so, that will
be five votes that any limit on campaign contributions is unconstitutional.
My guess, though, is in the Vermont case, they're going to decide
much more narrowly, just saying the Vermont law's unconstitutional
under Buckley V. Vallejo, and leave for a future year the dramatic
change in American election law that would come from overruling
Buckley.
HH: I certainly hope your wrong.
End of transcript. More from them in a bit.
Posted at 11:45PM PST
John Mark
Reynolds on how to really get your kid prepped for college.
HH: This is a special segment I told you
about. Professor John Mark Reynolds is my friend. He's a tremendous
blogger, he's a professor of philosophy at Biola
University, where he leads a program for elite students.
And I found out a couple of weeks ago that he also spends his
Summer, along with some of his colleagues from Biola, running
the Wheatstone Institute, and I wanted Americans to hear about
this. John Mark, good to have you, pal.
JMR: Yeah, it's always good to be here.
HH: Tell people what the Wheatstone
Institute is.
JMR: Well, if you are worried about the fact
that students who go to college, head off to college are going
to get indoctrinated with views that are not open-minded, that
don't teach them to think for themselves, that instead propagandize
them in a worldview that you might not like, then Wheatstone
is a great place. It doesn't teach students answers so much
as how to think critically, how to think outside the box, and
understand, well, bull when they hear it. So Christians should
be able to think better than anyone else. And so since we know
the truth, we don't have anything to fear from teaching critical
thinking, and so it's an exciting time to teach students how
to handle the propagandistic college environment that in a couple
of years, juniors and seniors in high school are heading off
for.
HH: So now you run three of these a Summer?
JMR: They're running five this Summer.
HH: Wow. And how many students in each one
of them?
JMR: They try to hold it down to thirty.
It's an absolutely amazing student-teacher ratio. You'll find
a mentor who's, generally speaking, an honor student from Biola
University, or from the Torrey
Honors Institute, though there's no connection between Wheatstone
and Biola, I should add, who will model good behavior for your
student, but also model good intellectual behavior. It's not
just about learning to be good. It's learning to think really
critically, and be at the cutting edge of technology in other
areas while learning to be a good Christian person.
HH: It sounds like boot camp for kids going
to secular university.
JMR: I'll tell you, that's exactly what it
is. No one should come to Wheatstone if they think fun is hanging
out at the mall and saying whatever. This is a place for students
who are serious about changing the world.
HH: And now, what do you do?
JMR: Well, that's a good question. We begin
by helping people to think about the status of Christianity
in the world. You know, Hugh, we're in a war of ideas against
a radical Islamic ideology that's essentially facist in nature,
against secularists who can't fight anything or even reproduce
themselves, they're so narcissistic and have so embraced a culture
of self-indulgence. They have no staying power. And against
that, I'm afraid Christians veer between being reactionary,
not traditional Christians, just reacting to whatever the culture's
giving them and hiding. Or they just give up and become wimpy.
My former denomination did that, and has drifted off into absolute
irrelevance. And so the goal will first, to paint a vision for
students. Then the second thing they do is, we put them into
discussion groups, reading some of the hardest and most important
books ever written, not all of them by Christians, like Plato's
Republic. And then after they're done with that, we wrestle
with what the Bible would have to say about that, and look at
contemporary film, talk about blogging, talk about things that
are going on in the culture in the light of these big ideas
we've been looking at.
HH: What's the web address for the Wheatstone
Institute, John?
JMR: What's really great is that people can
just type in Wheatstone, that's wheat as in the thing you put
in bread, and stone, academy. It's dot org. Wheatstoneacademy.org,
and that will take them right to the site.
HH: Okay, I want to make sure I say that
again. Wheatstoneacademy.org.
Where are the five sites this Summer?
JMR: They are all over Southern California.
So if you take a look at the site and you live anywhere close
to Southern California, we'll also have students fly in from
all over the country. Another thing we'll challenge students
with are ropes courses and other things to bring together the
physical with the mental.
HH: Do they have to be really smart?
JMR: They don't. No one starts off really
smart. All of us are created in the image of God, and we can
all learn to think, and we can all learn to be culture changers.
HH: Do the kids who go enjoy it? Or is it
like prison?
JMR: No, that's a good question. I can imagine
students saying you're sending me where to do what?
HH: Yes.
JMR: 99% of the students who've ever participated,
and this is the 6th year of the program, have reported an outstanding
time. Many of them come back again and again to experience the
program, and a lot of them end up at Biola, because they've
become addicted to doing what you do every day on the radio,
which is taking no prisoners for good ideas.
HH: John Mark Reynolds, what's it cost? Because
people will want to know that.
JMR: It's just under a thousand dollars for
a week, and that's all inclusive, but there are scholarships
available for people that need them.
HH: All right. And so, walk us through the
first day, because again, it's always tough to sell a high school
kid. I'm sure these moms and dads that are intrigued by this
are hearing this, and their kids are rolling their eyes saying
a week of my last Summer before college, and you want me to
go do Plato with John Mark Reynolds?
JMR: That's right. Well, we'll start off
trying to explain why that's important to them, but then we'll
take them to an art museum like the Getty, and show them what
the culture has turned into. They'll also, on those first couple
of days, experience working on a ropes course, and thinking
about fear and the edge of a challenge, and how that integrates
with what we're reading. They'll also meet other really bright
students who are going through the same struggle, and they'll
sit in groups of three or four people, and get down to brass
tacks. It's the sort of thing that can change your life, Hugh.
HH: Is it co-ed?
JMR: It is.
HH: And does...tell me the ideal student
for this, John Mark Reynolds, because a lot of parents probably
driving around thinking about this right now, and they're intriguted
by the Wheatstone Academy. But who is it for?
JMR: The ideal student isn't just a good
student. They're somebody who's a leader. They're somebody who
wants to think outside the box. They might do theater, they
might be involved in a sport, and they also make pretty decent
grades. They want to do the right thing, but they're sick of
easy answers. They want to be challenged, and think outside
the box.
HH: John Mark Reynolds, it sounds a little
bit like the Summer session at the U.S. Naval Academy.
JMR: Well, that's the goal. Really, when
we invented this, we said is there a way to strip out all the
bull, bluntly, all the touchy-feely stuff, let's try to entertain
you, and while having a good time, having fun, get real, get
serious, realize we're at war in several different ways, culturally,
and prepare shock troops for victory.
HH: Wheatstoneacademy.org.
Is that correct?
JMR: That's correct.
HH: John Mark Reynolds, always a pleasure.
I think I'm going to replay this on Friday in a different hour,
so other people get to hear that. Professor John Mark Reynolds
of Biola University, one of the founders and leaders of Wheatstoneacademy.org.
I saw this brochure. I thought I'd tell America about it. That's
why I love having a radio show.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:30PM PST
Weekly Standard's
Stephen Hayes on what the Saddam docs should be telling us.
HH: Joined now by the Weekly Standard's Stephen
Hayes, who absolutely owns the story about connections between
al Qaeda and Saddam. And in the new Weekly Standard issue, has
an article on the Philippines
connection. It's a cover
story, actually. It's now available online. Stephen Hayes,
welcome back to the Hugh Hewitt Show.
SH: Hugh, good to be with you.
HH: Last night, as I was in the green room
waiting for CNN to go on opposite Michael Ware, I read through
this three or four times. I finally got it, but it's a complicated
story, Stephen Hayes. I'd like you to take your time and set
it up for people to understand, who have not read your article.
SH: It is a complicated story. I did my best
to simplify it. I don't always succeed at tough things. The
story was derived from three translations of sets of documents
that I was given by a U.S. government official. One set of documents
deals with the operations of Iraqi intelligence, and the Iraqi
diplomatic corps in the Philippines, primarily in 2001. The
second set of documents deals with the Iraqi intelligence service's
outreach to Saudi opposition groups, including bin Laden. And
the third document was, a single document, was a second or third-hand
report from an Iraqi intelligence source in Afghanistan, regarding
the various connections between Iraq and al Qaeda, or the allegations
of a connection between Iraq and al Qaeda.
HH: Now I think what's important also is
to describe the Philippine/al Qaeda branch, and its connection
to Osama at the beginning of the money transfer.
SH: Yeah, Abu Sayyaf has what I think most
people would regard as very strong links to al Qaeda. It was
funded by Osama bin Laden's brother-in-law in the mid to late
1990's. There are, I think, credible reports that members of
the Abu Sayyaf received training both in the Philippines and
back in Afghanistan in al Qaeda-sponsored camps. So the ties
between Abu Sayyaf and al Qaeda are of something I don't think
anybody would dispute.
HH: Right. And so, pick up the story then.
SH: Well, the Philippine documents are interesting.
Basically, what it is, is it's a series of correspondence between
the Iraqi Embassy in Manila, including the members of the intelligence
corps there, and the Iraqi intelligence headquarters back in
Baghdad, and the Iraqi Ministry of Foreign Affairs back in Baghdad.
And what you have, essentially, is letters back and forth that
form the core of a debate. And the debate is taking place from
March, 2001, through June, 2001. And the debate, essentially,
is this. Should the Iraqi intelligence service use a charity
that is sponsored by Mohamar Qaddafi, the Libyan leader, in
order to reinforce its connections or support of Abu Sayyaf.
And the argument there would be by using this third party, essentially
a cut-out, the Iraqis could then further distance themselves
from this terrorist group, but at the same time, support it.
And there was a robust debate back and forth. There was one
document that I saw where somebody makes an argument for doing
this, says that there would be intelligence value in doing this.
There are apparently documents going back the other way, saying
well, this isn't such a good idea. Unfortunately, we don't have
full translations of those documents, just summaries. But anyway,
the debate goes back and forth. Should we do this? Shouldn't
we do this? And ultimately, the Iraqis apparently decide that
they're not going to further engage themselves in funding and
supporting Abu Sayyaf. But what I think was very interesting,
in a June 6th, 2001, letter from the Iraqi ambassador in Manila,
back to Baghdad, he describes the scene after one of Abu Sayyaf's
kidnappings...your listeners may remember some Americans were
kidnapped along with 17 other civilians from a resort in the
Philippines.
HH: The husband and wife missionaries, the
Burnham's, yeah.
SH: Exactly. And this was essentially the
report from the Iraqi ambassador in Manila, back to Baghdad
on the status of the kidnappings, what's going on in the Philippines
with respect to the kidnappings. And he goes through and gives
sort of just a cursory review, I've met with these people, this
is what's in the newspapers, this is what the Philippine government
is saying. And in the course of doing that, he says, sort of
mysteriously, we have been supporting, essentially...I'm paraphrasing
here...we have been supporting the kidnappers until now, and
we no longer have any contact with them, which just struck me
as a very interesting revelation sort of buried in this mountain
of correspondence.
HH: Yes, it is. Stephen Hayes, with two minutes
left, I want to jump to a piece that you quote at the end. The
Foreign Affairs piece that gives us a glimpse inside the Fedayeen
Saddam, which Christopher Hitchens just pointed out, was being
set up to take an evil, despotic regime even deeper into the
abyss.
SH: Yeah, it's really an interesting passage.
There's, I think, a brilliant Foreign Affairs piece that walks
through sort of what Saddam was thinking and doing in the years
before the U.S. invasion, March, 2003. Most of the report deals
with Saddam and weapons of mass destruction, what his scientists
were telling him, what he thought, etc. But there's an interesting
paragraph in the middle of the piece that talks about Saddam
Fedayeen taking part in the regime's domestic terrorism operations,
and planning for attacks througout Europe and the Middle East.
They cite one document in May of 1999, where Uday Hussein ordered
preperations for "special operations, assassinations, and
bombings," for the centers and trader symbols in London,
Iran, and the self-ruled areas, where they mean Kurdistan. But
the most interesting sentence in the entire piece, I think,
and it's a lengthy piece, is the next sentence. Preperations
for "blessed July," a regime-directed wave of martyrdom
operations against targets in the West, were well under way
at the time of the coalition invasion. That is pregnant with
lots of interesting questions...
HH: Yeah.
SH: And certainly, we need to know more about
what "blessed July," was, and just how far along those
operations were, and what the targets in the West were.
HH: And how it was going to be operational.
We've got about a minute, Stephen Hayes. What's coming out from
the document trove next?
SH: Well, there's a document that I highlighted
in the middle of this piece that you referred to, that is an
internal Iraqi intelligence memo, which describes outreach from
the Iraqi intelligence service to four Saudi opposition groups.
One of those groups, the Iraqis refer to as the reform and advice
committee, and it's headed by Osama bin Laden. And essentially,
in a nutshell, Saddam Hussein agrees to a request from bin Laden
to rebroadcast anti-Saudi regime propaganda videos. And they
sort of defer a request from bin Laden to make the relationship
operational.
HH: We're going to need a new updated edition
of The
Connection, Stephen Hayes. You've got too much new stuff.
It's got to go into the book. Thank you much. We'll check back,
Stephen Hayes.
End of interview.
Posted at 8:11PM PST
Return to top
Tuesday,
March 21
More revelations
from the Saddam documents.
HH: Dan Darling is a counter-terrorism consultant
for the Manhattan
Institute's Center For Policing Terrorism. He is also a
contributor to Weeklystandard.com,
and today at the Weekly Standard, he has an article, Republic
of Fear, focusing on some of the newly released documents
from Saddam's regime. Dan Darling, welcome to the Hugh Hewitt
Show.
DD: Thank you for having me.
HH: Let's start, Dan, with the documents
that discussed the captured Kuwaitis, because to me, this is
a hugely significant find, and your article's very important.
Explain what these released documents tell us about the Kuwaitis.
DD: Well, during the Iraqi conquest of Kuwait
back during the first Gulf War, a number of Kuwaiti prisoners
were taken back to Iraq. Iraq admitted in 1996 that they had
taken 126 prisoners, but they said that those were no longer
in Iraqi custody. Now the reason these documents are significant,
is this shows that in 2003, before the war, Iraq was still holding
448 Kuwaiti prisoners, and apparently had arranged for them
to be placed as sort of human shields around sensitive targets,
so that when the U.S. bombed those locations, it would create
the greater impression of civilian casualties.
HH: That's my first question, because as
I read through the Republic of Fear today, I couldn't quite
get a date on the document from Qusay Hussein that directed
that the 448 Kuwaitis be used as human shields. Was that document
actually dated?
DD: I believe it was, at least from 2003.
It goes back into the Iraqi war planning stages.
HH: Okay.
DD: So we can reasonably place it just from
the internal evidence at being around late 2002, early 2003
HH: Now the significance of this is obviously
that the Iraqis were lying through their teeth concerning one
issue. So that just beyond a reasonable doubt, they had Kuwaitis,
they had proffered many times there were no Kuwaitis, and they
had Kuwaitis, and they were going to use them inhumanely as
human shields, correct?
DD: Yes, and this is after giving numerous
international assurances that no such Kuwaitis were being held.
HH: Now Dan Darling, why didn't the United
States government put out this document, for example, in the
last three years?
DD: Well, there've been hints that this existed,
generally from private people. I found one story in the Christian
Science Monitor, indicated that perhaps the Kuwaitis were alive
as of the early 2000's, and still in Iraqi custody. I would
say probably because they may not have even known this document
existed. We know that many of these documents were not seriously
went over by the U.S. government, some of this for lack of resources.
And that's one of the reasons why the Pentagon is releasing
them now.
HH: And how did this one come to your attention,
Dan Darling?
DD: Well, this particular document was posted
on the website of the foreign military studies section up at
Fort Leavenworth, which is where I'm from. And as soon as it
was posted up there, I checked it regularly, and I saw it, and
I recognized the significance of the document, and so, the story
kind of wrote itself from that point.
HH: I'm curious. Has the Kuwaiti media picked
this up yet?
DD: I honestly have been very busy today,
so I haven't been able to see the Kuwaiti reaction. I would
imagine that especially the families of the individuals who
were claimed to have been imprisoned by Iraq would be very interested
in knowing who was being held, were they killed during the war,
are they still alive?
HH: Wow. That is huge. Second, we go to the
area of chemical weapons. You have a document, linked again
at Weeklystandard.com, Dan Darling is my guest from the Manhattan
Institute, counter-terrorism consultant for the Center For Policing
Terrorism, and it discusses in details, plans made up to draw,
to attack the Kurdish bases, Kurdish guerilla bases. Were those
the Ansar al-Assam bases? Or were they the good Kurds, the Kurds
that were our allies?
DD: Peshmerga?
HH: Yeah.
DD: Well, this document itself occurs back
in 1987, I believe, back during the conduct of the Iraq-Iran
War. And basically, what happened is these would not be Ansar
al-Islam. Ansar al-Islam wasn't even around back then. It was
the two major Kurdish factions, the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan,
and the Kurdistan Democratic Party, which today are staunch
allies of the United States.
HH: So in 1987, we see the planning to deploy
special equipment, that is obviously a term for chemical weapons,
Dan Darling?
DD: Yes, it's actually clarified that they're
referring to serin mustard gas, and several other nasty toxins.
HH: Yeah, and ricin.
DD: That's right.
HH: And so the question is, does this have
any bearing on the post-Iraq war, Gulf War, disarmament? Can
we draw anything other from the fact that it confirms that we
knew he was an evil, chemical weapons using tyrant in the 80's?
DD: Well, this in and of itself confirms
first of all, that anybody who had any serious denial the Iraqi
regime was gassing Kurds in the 1980's, really doesn't have
much of a leg to stand on anymore. As far as the broader issue
of WMD's, there's a lot of contradictory evidence floating around
in that regard. I mean, NBC News broke just the other day that
Naji Sabri had claimed that there were no nuclear or biological
weapons, but there were large stockpiles of chemical weapons.
There have been various Saddam tapes...but on the other hand,
Charles Duelfer in the Iraq Survey Group looked all around the
country and...very seriously looking for WMD's after the war,
and they couldn't locate them.
HH: Now Dan Darling, though, these documents
that are pouring out, that the Iraq Survey Group looked at,
they never touched these documents. What's this do to the credibility
of the Duelfer report, and the work of the Iraq Survey Group?
DD: Well, obviously that depends...this is
one of the issues with the documents, is that many of these
have not been yet authenticated. In the case of these documents,
it's pretty clear that they're genuine. But if you found something,
say, dating from the early 2000's, you know, regarding chemical
weapons, you would need to get that authenticated, and that
could very easily alter the whole public perception there.
HH: But I'm thinking that given that the
Iraq Survey Group did not bother to translate these documents...I
mean, any police investigation that left aside 48,000 boxes
of evidence because it was inconvenient would simply not be
persuasive, would it?
DD: At the very least, it would be called
into serious question. And then further investigation would
be required before you reach a conclusion.
HH: How long it this process going to go
on, Dan Darling? How much time are you devoting to the release
of new documents as they come forward?
DD: Oh, God. There's been...I believe there's
about 2 million documents, and so even assuming we're going
at a rate of, say, 15 or 25 a day, it still takes an astronomical
amount of time, especially with the limited resources that we
ourselves have at this stage in order to get some kind of a
thorough picture of what's going on. And once we have the documents
translated, the issue is authenticating them. It's particularly
the ones that contain some of the more explosive information.
HH: Dan Darling, keep digging, keep translating,
keep authenticating. It's important stuff. I appreciate your
spending time with us. The article's Republic
of Fear. It's at Weeklystandard.com.
I'm certain it's making a splash in the Kuwaiti media. It should
be making a splash in ours.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:43PM PST
Marc Holtzman,
another very viable candidate to be the next Governor of Colorado.
HH: You may recall a few weeks back I was
in Colorado, Colorado Springs, in fact, talking to a lot of
that red state's political elite about the move by deep pocketed
blue Democrats to try and take that state into the blue column.
One that I missed and wanted to catch up with is Marc Holtzman.
Marc was in Davos at that time. Marc Holtzman's a candidate
for Governor in Colorado, and I'm pleased to welcome him to
the Hugh Hewitt Show. Marc, welcome. Good to have you here.
MH: Hugh, I'm a huge fan of yours, and it's
wonderful to be on your show this evening. Thank you.
HH: I was just reading your bio, I've known
about your work at the University of Denver as a venture capitalist,
but I didn't realized you're a Pennsylvanian.
MH: Yes, I grew up in the coal country near
Wilksbury, Pennsylvania.
HH: And now, that doesn't make you a Steelers
fan, does it?
MH: Well, not over the Broncos.
HH: Okay, good. Just checking, because then
we'd have to end the interview right now. The Broncos are bad
enough. I have too many Bronco friends, but that's okay. Marc,
tell people about your career in venture capitalism, so when
we move to talk about some reconstruction issues in Iraq, people
understand you know what you're talking about when it comes
to business.
MH: Sure. Well, after working for Ronald
Reagan as a young man, I went over to Eastern Europe and Russia
in 1989, as an entrepreneur. You know, they have a saying over
there, Hugh, that in the valley of the blind, the one-eyed man
is king. And that's how I kind of felt when I got started over
there. But I worked hard, I persuaded my best friend to leave
Solomon Brothers at the time, and over a number of years, we
built the premiere boutique investment banking firm in Warsaw,
Budapest, Prague, and Moscow, even in Al Mati, Kazakhstan. And
we intermediated over a billion and a half dollars of capital
markets transactions. We took public the first private company
from all of Eastern Europe since the Second World War to go
to the international equity market. And it was a very satisfying
and rewarding experience to be able to do financial transactions
that in some cases, had we not done, they wouldn't have happened.
HH: Now I want to use that experience in
the post-Soviet Eastern Europe bloc countries, and Russia itself,
and ask you to take a look at what's going on around the world
right now, particularly in Iraq. And do you see a future for
capitalism in places that have been so badly destroyed by Stalinist
and neo-Stalinist governments?
MH: Well, I do, but I also believe strongly
that in most cases, political reform precedes economic reform.
And I think that's a huge difference. When you look at the countries
of Central and Eastern Europe, especially the Central European
countries like Poland, Hungary and the Czech Republic, those
are countries that were dominated by Communism for a generation,
for forty years. And there were still people around when we
started our business that remembered what it used to be like.
And culture does matter. And even in Russia, where over 75 years...the
culture of a country had been decapitated, there were still
people that knew and appreciated the capitalist system, the
free market model. My concern is that while it will certainly
work in the Middle East, that it is very important that first,
the political reforms precede the economic market reforms.
HH: Now when you set up the stock exchange
in Warsaw, for example, you helped establish the Warsaw stock
exchange. Had the Communists given up? Had they thrown in the
towel? Or were they still actively trying to interfere with
the growth of capitalism?
MH: Oh, there's no question that in those
early years, there were people in the bureaucracy in Hungary
and Poland that were definitely obstructionists, that were not
happy about things. We used to say that there kind of a whole
class of technicrat that kept the bust of Lenin in their secret
closet at night, and did the dance. I mean, there's no question.
But those people were pretty much weeded out by the mid-1990's.
And unfortunately, Russia's a different matter. Russia was often
perceived by people as a less-developed country. I used to say
that that was wrong, that it was a mis-developed country, though
they had a very high literacy rate, math scores even surpassed
those in the United States. So I felt that by the most part,
by the late 90's, there had been pretty much a house cleaning.
HH: All right. I'm talking with Marc Holtzman,
running for Governor in the state of Colorado. His website,
by the way, www.marc2006.com,
and that's spelled Marc2006.com. Let's switch over to some Rocky
Mountain politics for a second, Marc Holtzman. You've got some
deep pocketed blue, blue activists in your state, and they are
spending like drunken sailors. How does anyone win against that
kind of tidal wave of money, when you don't have contribution
limits?
MH: Well, I believe that you work very hard
to articulate a positive message. I have three things that I'm
talking about. I'm talking about how horrified I am by the in-flow
of illegal immigration into Colorado, the fact that with 400,000
people living illegally in a state of just a little more than
4 million people, it's a tremendous economic burden on our working
families. And as Governor, I have a plan to address it, to deal
with it, to end benefits beyond what are federally mandated,
and to get tough on making sure that employers know and understand
their responsibilities and obligations under the law. I'm talking
about how I'm going to erect safeguards to protect eminent domain
from not being used ever in a private purpose. And I'm talking
about how I'm going to try to roll back the effects of this
$4 billion dollar tax increase, Referendum C, that was on the
ballot last year, how bad it is for working families, how misrepresented
the case for the tax was, and how as Governor, I'm going to
do everything in my power to make sure that we get as much of
that money back to working families as we can.
HH: Now let's go back to illegal immigration.
Fred Barnes, a frequent guest on the program, Marc Holtzman,
as you've obviously heard if you've been listening for a few
years, and Fred last week went on a mini-rant about the Republican
nativist element who are going to drive Latinos from our party's
ranks forever by their inappropriate emphasis on this issue.
How do you respond to Fred?
MH: You see, I love Fred. Fred's been a friend
of mine for a long time, but I think he's dead wrong on this
issue, Hugh. In fact, I will tell you that my strongest support
on this issue is coming from Latino-Americans that resent the
fact that people are trying to get ahead of them in the line,
that they don't want to go through the same process that many
of these people went through to legally and properly become
American citizens. And for that reason, I'm opposed to amnesty.
And I will tell you, this issue is being framed simply by me
on what is fair and what is right and not right. We are a nation
of laws, not a government of people. And no one among us has
the right to selectively decide which of those laws we're going
to enforce on any particular day.
HH: Now would you be opposed to the mixture
of increased border security and some kind of guest worker program
that seems to be what the Senate is looking at?
MH: We definitely need to improve border
security. As far as a guest worker program, I would consider
such a program, but I believe that for someone to qualify, they
should first have to go back to their country of citizenship,
and legally and properly apply to come here, because anything
short of that is just another way of saying that we're granting
amnesty. And every time, Hugh, that we've done this in the past,
we've just resulted in a bigger problem.
HH: Now you've also obviously seen the stories
about deep splits in the Republican Party, especially state
and local leaders fleeing from George W. Bush. What's your attitude
about the President?
MH: Well, I love the President, and I support
him on so many issues. I wish the President would do more to
enforce the existing laws of our land, and to protect our borders.
And again, I believe that this administration is selectively
deciding which of our border and immigration laws on any one
day they're going to decide to enforce. We know that after 9/11,
2001, those borders of this country, North and South, were shut
and sealed tight. No one dared cross. We have the capability
through science to know the difference of the heartbeat of a
human being and an animal within ten miles. We only lack the
political will, and I want to see this President show that kind
of strength.
---
HH: Marc Holtzman, I mentioned earlier the
money advantage Democrats have in the Colorado elections coming
up, and they just wiped out Republicans in 2004. Pete Coors
lost to Ken Salazar. Boy, do we regret that. What's the ground
game look like in Colorado right now? Is there any way to get
the energy back?
MH: Well, Hugh, first of all, we are so looking
forward to your upcoming visit at the Arapahoe County Lincoln
Day dinner in Colorado.
HH: I am, too. I'm looking forward to that,
too.
MH: Yeah, let me suggest something else.
I believe that in 2004, that Republicans lost not so much because
the Democrats beat us on the front that you described, but I
believe that the leadership of our party in Colorado became
detached from the core soul and Reagan roots of our party. We
became so obsessed with holding onto power and winning elections,
that we lost sight of what we stood for. We did a terrible job
at articulating a positive and optimistic and conservative vision
for Colorado. And the result was that in a year when President
Bush won by 7 percentage points in Colorado in '04, we lost
the Senate race, we lost the state Congressional seat in Western
Colorado. And we lost the House and the Senate, first time both
chambers combined in 42 years. One of the reasons I'm running
is because I want to return our party to its core values and
basic principles. And I'm articulating just such a message,
and I am the anti-establishment candidate in this race. but
we've got a lot of support that we're building among the grass
roots of our party. And I am convinced that my message is not
only a winning message for my campaign, but it's going to bring
in a Republican House and Senate, and a sweep across the entire
team. And we're not going to stop at anything less than total
victory.
HH: Now obviously, Republicans have been
running Colorado for a long time. And they've had Wayne Allard
in the Senate for a long time. Until Salazar came along, they
had both seats. They've had Governor Bill Owens in the state
house for almost eight years now. Does a party run through a
cycle where it just runs out of gas?
MH: No, I don't believe so, but in the case
of our party, some of the leaders of our party lost their way.
Governor Bill Owens, for whom I have respect and admiration,
I served in his cabinet, the Governor last year sided with the
Democratic majorites in the House and Senate to promote the
largest tax increase, a referendum, in Colorado history, a $4
billion dollar tax increase. When that happens, it sends confusing
messages to the electorate, to our base, and to others. I believe
that the way we win elections is to stay true to the core values
of who we are and what we stand for.
HH: Now obviously, Colorado's had two major
education stories. We've only got a couple of minutes, but I've
got to talk about Jay Bennish and Ward Churchill.
MH: Yes.
HH: You were the president of a university,
and you know what it's like to get rid of a tenured person.
It's impossible. But what is it that went wrong in those two
instances?
MH: Well first of all, I reformed tenure
at the University of Denver. If you are a recipient of one of
the chairs at our school of law today, you have to voluntarily
relinquish tenure before you can accept the benefit of that
chair. Ward Churchill would have never happened at my university,
because we simply wouldn't have allowed it, we wouldn't have
permitted it. That man should have been fired and dismissed,
because he plagiarized, because he misrepresented his credentials.
It had nothing to do with academic freedom. That was a thin
veil behind which he tried to hide. Jay Bennish, absolutely
disgraceful what he did, and that's all too typical. And that's
why I support vouchers, I support school choice, and Hugh, I
am behind an amendment which is going to be on the Colorado
ballot this year, which if passed, will require that at least
$.65 cents out of every education dollar, as opposed to 57%
today in Colorado, go into the classroom. but I support school
choice for home schooling, for use at Parochial and religiously
affiliated institutions, and through competition, we have to
shake up the system, and that's what I want to do as Governor.
HH: Marriage is on the ballot, is it not,
Marc Holtzman?
MH: Yes, it is, and I'm proud to say that
I'm a strong supporter of the institution of marriage, and that
fact that marriage is defined as an institution between a man
and a woman.
HH: And so when does that come before the
voters of Colorado? June?
MH: It'll be on the ballot this November.
HH: November. So it's going to be the same
time as the general election?
MH: Yes.
HH: And that's going to be a brass-knuckled
fight, right?
MH: I think it's going to be a hard fight.
The left is mobilizing, the kind of secular anti-God establishment
is certainly digging its heels in. But we're going to beat them
on this, because they are wrong and the majority of Coloradans
agree with me.
HH: Quick question. What's it cost to run
for Governor in Colorado, both primary and general?
MH: Probably going to cost about three to
four million dollars in a primary, and at least that again in
the general election.
HH: Well, people can go and read more at
Marc2006.com.
Marc Holtzman, great to talk to you, make your acquaintance.
Look forward to seeing you at the Arapahoe County Republican
dinner when I'm in town in April.
End of interview.
Posted at 10:00PM PST
Michael Yon
on how the mainstream media covers Iraq.
HH: As I told you at the beginning of the
hour, I am on CNN tonight, Anderson Cooper, opposite Michael
Ware in Baghdad, and another CNN correspondent also based in
Baghdad, whose name is Nic Robertson, arguing whether or not
the coverage of the war in Iraq has been useful. And I had already
in my talking points rehearsed, because they asked me, who does
a good job? And I've got six names, and at the top of that list
is my guest, Michael Yon. In the States right now, but going
back soon. Michael, welcome back to the Hugh Hewitt Show.
MY: Thank you, Hugh, and thank you for that
compliment.
HH: Well, I'll be mentioning your name on
CNN tonight. They really ought to have you on CNN, not me, but
I want to make sure people know where to read your stuff. Michaelyon.blogspot.com.
Michael, what do you think of the American mainstream media's
coverage of the Iraq war?
MY: For the most part, it's doing an incredibly
poor job. I see some exceptions, Tony Castaneda at the AP does
a good job. But for the most part, they do...Rich Opal (?),
New York Times, does a good job. But for the most part, they
just focus on...I mean, the mainstream media just focuses on
the flames and the bullets. They focus on the terrorism. They
don't tell us that the Kurdish areas are a complete success.
They're becoming economically viable, they're making a lot of
progress, they're sending their children, including their girls,
to school. They love us there in the Kurdish areas, and they
don't tell us that Mosul is a success now. I mean, Mosul was
the only thing on the news last year when I was there. I'm sure
you remember that.
HH: Yup.
MY: But that battle has been won by the Iraqis
and the American forces, and you don't see it in the news anymore.
Very rarely, anyway.
HH: What about in the Southern part? Basra
and other areas around the waterway. What's your impression
down there, Michael Yon?
MY: It's not as good as the Kurdish areas.
That's a certainty, and it's restive. But it's not certainly...you
don't see it as much on the news as you see the flames up in
Baghdad. And Baghdad's easy to cover. It's a big city, about
6 million people. You know, the Green Zone is there, so when
there's a car bomb, it's easy to roll out and your stringers
can get the footage, and you can immediately get it up. It's
cheap, it's flames, and it sells.
HH: Now what about, for example, Jack Kelly
was just on, himself retired Marine, Special Forces, background
very much like yours, commenting that the dog that doesn't bite
never gets covered. For example, the march to Karbala today,
huge, tens of thousands, hundreds of thousands of Shiia, no
attack. And he notes that will not make the news tonight.
MY: That's well said, the dog that doesn't
bit doesn't get covered. You know, I didn't actually know about
that march today, either. And clearly, because it's not been
covered, because I watch the news coming from Iraq with great
interest.
HH: Do you think that the country is on the
brink of civil war?
MY: Well, I've been saying all 2005 that
it really is in civil war already. It's just not boiling. It's
simmering. But you know, it's been in civil war for decades.
Saddam Hussein killed untold thousands of his people. They're
out there in mass graves. I would venture to guess, I do not
know this, but I would venture to guess that it was worse back
then than it is now. He gassed his own people, he went to war
with Iran, he went to war with Kuwait, and destroyed Kuwait,
destroyed the oil fields. Certainly, there's a lot of violence
going on there now, and it might be getting worse, but it's
been at civil war for decades.
HH: And what doesn't get covered? What do
you say about the war that you really wish mainstream media
would pay attention to?
MY: I interviewed a captain yesterday that
I knew in Mosul. He was badly injured in a car bomb. He's fine
now, he's back on duty. And he told me about an Iraqi man, an
older man, he said he was very clean and stood well, and his
English was very good, and he said please don't go. You're doing
a good job. Please don't go. And this was back when Mosul was
full-on combat. A car bomb went off about a block away, right
then, and this soldier, Captain Shaw is his name, a great soldier,
hit the ground, and the two soldiers with him hit the ground,
and the Iraqi man did not hit the ground, and he actually helped
Captain Shaw get back up. The Iraqi man just stood there, and
he said you'll be fine, you'll be fine. Please don't leave.
HH: Now Michael Yon, when are you going back?
MY: Well, I almost went back this week. It
could be as soon as next week, but I'm ready, my combat gear
is right in front of me, actually.
HH: Have you raised enough funds?
MY: Yes, I have.
HH: You can always use a little bit more,
can't you?
MY: I can, and thank you, by the way. Your
listeners bought me night-vision gear.
HH: Michael, we've got to get you back over
there. You and Roggio...and I admire the work of Ricks and a
few other people that go out with the troops, but I don't think
we're getting the story from people like Michael Ware. Do you
know Michael Ware?
MY: I talk with him on the phone occasionally.
I haven't spoken with him in a while.
HH: Good reporter? Biased reporter? Ideological?
I just don't know his work, other than what I read, and it drips
with acid.
MY: Well, he gets out there. He definitely
gets out there with the troops. I mean, he spent a lot of time
in combat.
HH: Yeah, he was in Afghanistan as well,
covered a lot of the early Afghan war as well. But do you sense
there as with some of the Vietnam correspondents of long ago,
a desire for defeat?
MY: Well, I sense that with some of the reporters,
definitely. I mean, I'm not going to name any names...
HH: All right.
MY: One from CNN, in particular, when I speak
with this individual, and this individual's not on the camera,
the words coming from this individual do drip with acid, as
you say.
HH: You know, that's what I think is going
on here pretty much, is an ideological tinge to a lot of this
war reporting. Michael Yon, when you do go back, which part
of the country are you headed to? Are you going to embed with
another unit like the Infantry division you were with a year
ago?
MY: Well, I've already contacted Sergeant
Major Mellinger, who's the top enlisted man in the theater,
meaning he is the top enlisted man in Iraq. And he goes everywhere.
I've been out with him twice before, and I call him the University
of Iraq, because he seems to know everything that's going on.
So I'd like to spend a couple of weeks with him, getting in-briefed
again about the new state of the country, because he speaks
very bluntly. And then after that, I'll go to probably where
the action is. I tend to go to where our troops are seeing the
most combat, but then I pop out sometimes, and go to the peaceful
areas. But I want to know how our troops are doing.
HH: I hope you will pick up a phone, and
in fact, I hope you have Command Sergeant Mellinger give me
a call. I'd love to brief him on the air.
MY: I'll tell you, the guy's the University
of Iraq. If you can get him on the phone, he would be a great
interview.
HH: Michael Yon, God speed. I'm going to
send people to Michaelyon.blogspot.com. Is the tip jar still
there?
MY: It sure is.
HH: Well, I think people should go and throw
in $10, $20, $50, whatever. It's important to get the good news
that we need from Iraq, and to keep you there. So God speed.
We'll talk to you on the other side when you get over there,
Michael.
MY: Thank you, Hugh.
End of interview.
Posted at 6:14PM PST
Pittsburgh
Post-Gazette's Jack Kelly on the media coverage of Iraq.
HH: I'm joined now by Jack Kelly. He is a
columnist for the Pittsburgh Post-Gazette, also in the Toledo
Blade, and he blogs at Irishpennants.com.
Jack, good to have you back on.
JK: It's great to be on with you, Hugh.
HH: Now Jack, this is a coincidence, and
obviously a little meme is working through the media. Tonight,
I'm on CNN opposite Michael Ware from Baghdad, another CNN correspondent
from Baghdad, and Anderson Cooper to talk about mainstream media's
reporting from Iraq, what is good about it, what is bad about
it. What's your take on it, Jack? You wrote about this in a
column that's at Real
Clear Politics this very day.
JK: Well, the column was about my friend,
Bill Roggio's, appearance on a CNN show on Saturday. And he
gave the media a D-plus, and I think he was generous.
HH: And why is that?
JK: Well, the reporting shows first a monumental
ignorance of military affairs. As Bill pointed out, there's
commentary larded in with the reporting, events are looked at
in isolation, you don't get reporting of events in context.
To give you an illustration, there were two news stories day
that made news. One was this terrorist attack on a prison, an
Iraqi prison in Muqdadiyah.
HH: Yup.
JK: It got a lot of attention.
HH: Yup.
JK: The more significant thing was the dog
that didn't bark, that the Shiia pilgrimage into Karbala, on
this Shiia holiday, passed peacefully, that there were no terrorist
assault, there was no sign of civil war. That got very little
attention.
HH: That's a annual and very massive march,
is it not?
JK: It is indeed. There are hundreds of thousands
of people that participate. And they walk hundreds of miles
in many instances. The Northeast portion of Sadr City largely
empties out to march down to Karbala, which is about 80 miles
away.
HH: Whoa. That's a big walk.
JK: It is indeed.
HH: Okay. You're right, though. It's also
a huge target.
JK: It is a huge target, and there was a
lot of security for it, and there was one incident yesterday
where several pilgrims were shot by drive-by shooting, like
a gangland shooting in L.A. But as far as I know, that was it.
HH: Now Jack Kelly, how do you respond? Michael
Ware will be opposite me, and he has sort of got a patent on
the 'unless you live here, you can't accuse us of bad reporting.'
JK: Well, you can rely on those who actually
go out and do something. Michael Ware probably rarely leaves
his hotel, because most journalists, understandably, because
if you wander around by yourself, there's a white, American-ish
looking person, bad things can happen to you. But because...apparently
because they're afraid of ideological taint, they won't embed
with U.S. forces, which has its dangers, but is relatively safe.
HH: Is that in fact going on? Do you think
MSM is shunning embeds because they don't want the ideological
taint of having traveled with the American military?
JK: I suspect that...I mean, it is true that
they are shunning embeds. There are very, very few embeds, a
couple of dozen, I think, at the current time, which is really
an abomination, when you consider what's going on. Why, I suppose,
depends on the individual person in the news organization. But
the only good reason I can come up with is they fear the taint.
For instance, when Bill was on the CNN show, On The Line, Saturday
night, it was implied by a CNN correspondent that he was biased
because he was a former soldier. Now consider the breathtaking
implications of that.
HH: Yup.
JK: We don't consider a doctor who was a
laywer, like Fox News' Megyn Kendall, to be biased simply...in
covering the courts, simply because she knows something about
the subject she's covering.
HH: Right.
JK: We don't consider someone like Sanjay
Gupta, who's a medical doctor who works for CNN to be biased
in reporting on medicine because he knows something about the
subject. But most news organizations are quite comfortable...not
only comfortable, insistent upon having our wars covered by
people who aren't clear on from which end of the rifle the round
comes.
HH: (laughing) Jack Kelly, you're yourself
a veteran. Marine Corps, right?
JK: Marine Corps and Army Special Forces.
HH: Oh, I'd forgotten the Army Special Forces
stuff. And so, of the journalists who you've watched who are
mainstream, whose work do you admire?
JK: Actually, not very many. There's a reporter
for the Washington Post, Tom Ricks.
HH: Tom Ricks, yeah. He's very good.
JK: ...who is usually very good and on top
of his game, has been to Iraq a few times, and who's quite accurate.
There aren't very many others. There are two reporters for the
New York Times, Dexter Philkins and John Burns. John Burns is
a hero. He was in Iraq before the invasion, long-time correspondent
with background there. And in fact, CNN people ratted him out,
because he was getting news outside of the established Saddamite
sources.
HH: I'm talking, by the way, with Jack Kelly
of Irish Pennants. He's a columnist for the Pittsburgh Post
Gazette. You can read all of his stuff at Irishpennants.com.
His column today that we're discussing at Realclearpolitics.com.
Jack Kelly, do you see any hope for mainstream media in covering
this war? Or do they want a replay of Vietnam? Is that what's
going on here?
JK: Well, for many, I think that's true.
But a large portion of this is merely incompetence. It can be
attributed to it. It isn't all bias. A lot of it is just utter
incompetence.
HH: And so, if you had to quantify that which
is bias and that which is incompetence, what numbers do you
put on it?
JK: I would put about 40-40 with a 20% overlap.
HH: Okay. Now the fact of the matter is,
will be know when peace has broken out in Iraq.
JK: Not directly, but there actually are
some hints, and one of them is now all this talk about civil
war, because even the densest of journalists in Baghdad understand
that the insurgents can't win now. You know, last year, the
meme was the insurgents are winning. They're ahead, they're
going to triumph. Now, with Sunni tribesmen hunting down al
Qaeda wherever they can find them, no person with an IQ above
a carrot can make that claim. So now the meme is we're in a
civil war, or on the verge of a civil war, and all of this is
going to be hopeless for a different reason. But it's not the
reason that the insurgents are winning. No one can say that
anymore.
HH: Jack Kelly, as always, wonderfully illuminating
and right spot on. Irishpennants.com for all of Jack Kelly's
work. His column today, Ignorance pervasive In Reporting from
Iraq, available at Realclearpolitics.com.
End of interview.
Posted at 5:08PM PST
Bill Clinton
to the NFL?
Could we be so lucky as to have Bill Clinton
take over the National Football League after Paul Tagliabue
retires as commissioner? Apparently, there are media reports
that the former disgraced President has been mentioned repeatedly
to fill the shoes of Tagliabue.
Anyone that knows me realizes that I'm no
fan of either of the Clintons. In fact, Inauguration Day, 2001
was one of the happiest days of my life. But I'd actually campaign
for Clinton to get this job, if possible. The material that
would present itself would be too rich to pass up. Consider
the possibilities, if you will.
Just this past season, several members of
the Minnesota Vikings were caught up in a sex/orgy scandal aboard
a boat on Lake Minnetonka. Could you imagine a Commissioner
Clinton being faced with discharging...oops, bad word...dispensing
appropriate punishment with a straight face? It's not entirely
clear what went on during the three-hour pleasure cruise this
last year, but I'd bet a cigar wasn't used inappropriately.
The league is full of players who are addicted
to excess, so why not have a commissioner who himself is addicted
to excess? When attending games around the league, will Mr.
Clinton be more focused on the players or the cheerleaders?
One thing about a Commissioner Clinton would
be certain. Unlike Tagliabue, who maintained just enough of
a public face as necessary to do his job, Clinton's mug will
be front and center during his potential tenure. In fact, the
entire league might be renamed the CNFL, because of his fondness
for the spotlight.
Now if only we can get Hillary to let him...
Posted at 11:00AM PST
Return to top
Monday, March
20
Must-die
TV Reporter.
Far be it for a humble blogger to suggest
to the creative team how to do what they do, because '24' is
simply the best show on television, and they clearly do not
need my help. But if I may be indulged, might I suggest that
for my own personal satisfaction, there be a character brought
in that would remind viewers of a television columnist for the
New York Times, someone a lot like Kate Aurthur. And then may
her character be submitted to torture that would make Saddam
Hussein shudder.
Let's go back to Sunday, shall we? The day
started pleasant enough. A little sleep-in time, a little breakfast,
checking in with Sundial.com to monitor Hugh's progress in the
Los Angeles Marathon, and going to Church. Not a bad sermon,
I might add. Upon my return home, I picked up the Sunday Orange
County Register. Living in Southern California, where the weather
is perfect most of the time, the one price we apparently have
to pay is finding alternatives to the Los Angeles Times. The
Register isn't a particularly good paper, but it usually does
the job, and has a decent crossword.
I leafed through the paper, and got to the
Arts and Entertainment section. Five pages in, and I cannot
explain the shock, disappointment, and outrage that began to
take over.
For years, Monday nights had been reserved
as either softball night, or some other project that usually
spilled over from the weekend. I hadn't caught the '24' bug
yet, because the opportunity to catch it live wasn't really
possible in my schedule. Once TiVo and the first four seasons
appeared on DVD, however, I had no excuse anymore, and so the
catch-up process began earlier this year. I started watching
Season 1, and got hooked by about the second hour. Season 2
and 3 soon followed, and Season 4 is now rotating its way through
the DVD player. Up to now, I've been able to dodge any mention
of what happens during Season 5, the current season, because
everyone that talks about it, whether it's Rush, Hugh, or any
interview I've seen or heard, there's always a warning if there's
going to be any plot disclosure. I realize it's silly, but I
was truly enjoying the ride, not knowing what was coming next,
episode by episode, just letting the show play out.
Now back to Black Sunday, the day that Kate
Aurthur became the new bane of my existence. Don't worry, people.
I'm not going to stoop to her level. I'm not going to reveal
anything about the show, or the fate of its characters. That
would be wrong. Wouldn't be prudent. Not going to do it.
Page five in the Sunday Register starts with
three large photos, taking up half the page, with two of them
revealing what just happened on 24 within the last few weeks.
No warning, no consideration for the millions of people that
may or may not have seen it live when it happened. Then the
story below by Ms. Aurthur, reprinted from the New York Times,
not only divulges without any warning whatsoever the fate of
'24' characters, but much of the plot twists of several other
popular dramas, in a piece entitled, Must-Die TV.
I realize I should have turned away. I shouldn't
have read the piece. But once you saw the picture, the genie
was out of the bottle. There was no going home again. Innocence
was lost, and so I read the story, feeling rather violated once
I finished.
I have been stewing over this for a day and
a half, wondering what in the world this demented woman was
thinking when she wrote this. The point of her story was to
show that TV dramas are getting increasingly competitive by
killing off some of their main characters. That's fine, if you
do the story in generalities. But there is a line there, and
she crossed it.
If there is a movie out there that you might
want to see, you don't want some movie critic giving away the
ending. Almost all the time, that unwritten rule is adhered
to, even by critics that don't like the film. There are exceptions,
of course, with Clint Eastwood's Million Dollar Baby being the
movie in recent memory where the plot line was disclosed, because
some critics decided the movie trailers were misleading the
public into thinking it was a boxing movie, when the movie clearly
had a different agenda. See, Kate? I didn't spoil the ending.
There was easily a way for Ms. Aurthur to
write her story, and even talk to some of the writers and producers
of the different series she mentions in her piece, without going
down the road of names and modes of death. That was just plain
mean. For someone that is supposedly plugged into the TV scene
more than the average person, she ought to have realized the
cult following some of these shows have, and taken a real hard
look before deciding to ruin the surprise factor for millions
of people who actually have a life and can't spend all of their
waking hours in front of the television.
There is a reason why VCR's gave way to
TiVo, and DVD's have exploded in sales over the last few years.
Technology is starting to catch up with the average American
consumer that is working, along with most every other capable
American, if you look at recent unemployment statistics, at
a pace that is keeping the economy booming along. And it allows
for busy people to capture what they want to watch, and gives
them the opportunity to watch it at their convenience.
In the days before the VCR, when you either
caught the show when it happened or you missed out until reruns,
Ms. Aurthur could have gotten away with this stunt. Not now.
There is simply too many alternative ways for people today to
have a chance to see the show for the first time, and not have
the New York Times' TV town crier spoil everything.
Imagine, if you will, the children's magazine,
Highlights.
You know which magazine I'm talking about...the one that you
always see in the dentist's office waiting room. Imagine your
child flipping through the magazine, and then all of a sudden
asking you why Santa Claus looks like somebody's daddy in that
picture? (By the way, if you are under the age of 7 and are
reading this blog, don't worry, wee one. I wasn't really serious
about Santa. I was just making an example and showing what a
bad, bad thing that mean lady from the Times did.)
Kate Aurthur should issue an apology for
being completely insensitive to '24' fans, and tone-deaf to
what the repercussions of revealing plot twists, even ones that
have already aired, could do to otherwise sane and rational
people. She should also be censured by the United States Senate,
since she has released more damaging information, and caused
more harm than the President has with the NSA wiretapping program.
I also want to point the finger of blame
to the editors of the Orange County Register for reprinting
the piece, although that's like scolding a small child for coloring
outside the lines. Some things like common sense elude them.
Posted
at 11:55PM PST
John Fund
with the latest on the Taliban Yale.
03-20fund.mp3
HH: With John Fund of the Wall Street Journal's
Opinionjournal.com.
John, another update on the Yale Taliban, former deputy foreign
minister of the Taliban there at Yale on scholarship. But let's
begin with the assumption that some people don't know anything
about this. Set up the story please.
JF: Sayed Rahmatullah Hashemi was the chief
propagandist and spokesman for the Taliban, which was the murderous
regime that harbored the terrorists that attacked us at 9/11,
harbored Osama bin Laden. We destroyed their government after
9/11, but they retreated into the hills where they're still
killing American soldiers. They killed four of them just last
week. And Yale, for some reason, even though we'll still fighting
them, has decided to let a largely unrepentant senior official
of the Taliban in as a student, and he's attending classes today
at Yale.
HH: Now John Fund, in today's
piece, you wrote that you had a memorable 90 minute meeting
with this man in the Spring of 2001, months before the attack
on the World Trade Center, which if the Taliban did not know
about it, they certainly allowed to happen by virtue of the
comfort they extended to the enemy, al Qaeda, and which in most
instances, people believe they did know was coming. Tell me
about that 90 minutes with this man.
JF: Well, actually, al Qaeda and the Taliban
were one and the same thing. I just spoke with the AP bureau
chief in Pakistan yesterday, and she said the Taliban Defense
Ministry was controlled completely by Osama bin Laden. The meeting
with the ambassador Hashemi was bizarre. I mean, he was defending
the destruction of these 1,500 year old archaeological treasures,
the Buddhist statutes, he was defending the whipping of women.
It was astonishing. And of course, he did it in a very cultured
and a very sophisticated way. And I have to tell you, at the
end of the 90 minute meeting, Hugh, I felt as if I was looking
into, directly looking into the face of evil.
HH: And this is what the background...a very
fine piece today on the commonalties between totalitarian liars,
and the non-excuse that Yale can have for embedding them. But
there is some Yale history here. Explain Yale's attitude towards
past facists.
JF: Well, in the 1970's, it was discovered
that the senior lecturer in the Russian Language department
had been a Nazi propagandist at a low level during World War
II.
HH: They pursued him.
JF: His name was Vladimir Sokolov. He was
pilloried.
HH: Yup.
JF: There were demonstrations. There were
outcries. People threatened to resign from the faculty if he
didn't go. He was finally bullied into resigning, he was later
deported. Well, that was then. Flash forward thirty years, 2006,
the Taliban is the functional equivalent of the Nazis in our
era. These were people...Do you know, Sebastian Junger, the
author of The
Perfect Storm?
HH: Yup.
JF: He has a piece in this month's Vanity
Fair, in which he talks about current Taliban atrocities. They
skin people alive and leave them out in the sun to die.
HH: And this is...again, the Yalie that we're
talking about, their former deputy foreign minister. Now John
Fund, you wrote today that nearly a dozen former and current
officials have contacted you privately about they're concerns.
By this, do you mean former senior officials at Yale?
JF: Officials, faculty members, also separately,
some people at the State Department who are upset that for some
reason, the State Department let this guy in. Look, this fellow
is not currently allied with any terrorists. He hasn't been
with the Taliban for five years. I'm not saying that he is now.
But he is unrepentant, he does not really believe that they
did anything that wrong. In fact, just the other day, he referred
to Israel as America's al Qaeda, aimed as a dagger at the Arab
world. This is clearly someone of unreconstructed views, and
someone...look, I think Yale should just quietly decide that
next year, he should, shall we say, study abroad.
HH: But in fact, John, the Taliban in their
midst has occasioned just a good stonewall from Yale, one of
the more effectively executed stonewalls that I've seen in many
recent years. Talk about the non-response of Yale University.
JF: Well, you know, Yale is famous because
just last week, it lost, unanimously, a Supreme Court case in
which is was trying to bar military recruiters from full access
to its law school. And the irony of keeping out ROTC, keeping
out military recruiters while letting in the Taliban has not
been lost on some people. But Yale has responded to this with
a public relations strategy that I call their version of don't
ask, don't tell. They refuse to answer questions, they refuse
to comment, they refuse to defend themselves. They issued a
144 word statement, which is a masterpiece of gobbledygook.
HH: Also, the pseudo-liberal New Haven Advocate,
which I assume is an alternative weekly along the lines of most
weeklies?
JF: Like the L.A. Weekly, right.
HH: Right. And so, typically you would expect
them to be on the side of the people who are distressed here,
the victims of the Taliban, the women who...
JF: The homosexuals, the gays...
HH: Yeah.
JF: I mean, the women.
HH: But here they are, standing with the
Taliban.
JF: It's astonishing. What you have here
is people automatically assuming that something is on a right-left
continuum, that because I happen to be a conservative and I'm
outraged about this, because I met this fellow, that somehow
this is a right wing issue, and therefore it's illegitimate.
Hugh, there are some issues that aren't right or left. Some
issues are just up or down, as Ronald Reagan said.
HH: Yeah, human rights are typically in that
category. Now Amy Aaland...
JF: I was a member of Amnesty International.
It's a great group.
HH: Exactly. I mean, human rights...well,
they do some stupid things occasionally, but generally speaking,
the campaigns for the people in prison around the world are
good campaigns. Amy Aaland is the executive director of Slifka
Center for Jewish Life at Yale, where Mr. Rahmatullah takes
his meals?
JF: Well, Islamic dietary constraints are
very similar to those of orthodox Jews, so therefore, he gets
the best food that is traditional for him there.
HH: Well, I understand why it's great to
have ongoing Israeli-Arab relations, and ongoing Jewish-Muslim
dialogue. But the Taliban was among the fiercest of the Islamists,
were they not?
JF: They were so brutal, and so vicious,
they would literally yank the fingernails out of women who were
wearing nail polish. And that's why a bunch of Yale alumns have
started a campaign to mail in red press-on fingernails to Yale
as a protest for having let this guy in. And what is the response
of Yale? One of their officials in the law school sent an anonymous
e-mail accusing them of being "retarded."
HH: We talked about that last week in the
update.
JF: And he was suspended.
HH: Mr. Rahmatullah recently called Israel
an American al Qaeda. In what circumstance did he do that, John
Fund?
JF: An essay last year which was posted on
the foundation that is subsidizing him, the International Education
Foundation. Mysterious things have happened since this story
has created controversy, Hugh. Not only has that essay been
wiped off the website, although I kept a copy of it, but today,
the Yale Daily News reported that the three members of that
foundation, who were subsidizing Rahmatullah Hashemi's education,
have yanked their funding from him. One of them told someone
well, "We didn't know everything about him." So if
he's approved for next Fall at Yale, the only way he can stay
is if Yale gives him financial aid.
HH: The relatives of U.S. soldiers...I'm
quoting from your piece
today, killed in action in Afghanistan are appalled. "It's
not like the Taliban ever signed a peace treaty," Natalie
Healey, the mother of a Navy SEAL killed by a Taliban rocket
last year told me. "They're still killing Americans."
John Fund, what's the end game here? Are you going to continue
to cover this story?
JF: Absolutely, and in fact, this Thursday,
by happenstance, the 27 year old woman who is a member of the
Afghan Parliament, is going to be speaking at Yale. It looks
as if she is going to repeat the comments that she made to me
in my article today at Opinionjournal.com,
in which she said Mr. Rahmatullah Hashemi knew about the crimes
of the Taliban. He was not too young, and he should be held
responsible. And better that he would be in front of a court
of law than being a student at Yale.
HH: You know, John Fund, after the Demjanjuk
decades...we were chasing John Demjanjuk when I was in the Department
of Justice. Recently, he just finally...did he die? Or did he
finally get deported...something like that. 25 years, we never
let them go. We never gave up on the Nazis, and here we are
asking a Taliban to matriculate at Yale. I'm astonished.
JF: Well, I think the pressure has gotten
to Yale. I think they are going to have to respond eventually.
And look, I don't wish ill for this fellow, other than the fact
that I think he should study somewhere else.
HH: I actually think he ought to be obliged
to answer some questions if he's going to be in the United States,
about where his loyalties lie, and what he thinks about the
regime which he formally represented with such enthusiasm. John
Fund, always a pleasure. Opinionjournal.com
for the latest on Sayed
and de Man at Yale.
End of interview.
Posted at 6:27PM PST
Return to top
Sunday, March
19
Josh McDowell
on how to respond to the DaVinci Code.
HH: I'm joined now by perhaps one of the
most easily recognized names in all of Christian evangelical
circles, Josh McDowell has been doing what he's been doing for
more than thirty years, he's authored more than 77 books. He
is an itinerant, and an always-influential speaker on behalf
of the Gospel. But now, he's taken on the DaVinci challenge,
and talking about the DaVinci Code. Josh McDowell, welcome.
It's good to talk to you.
JM: Hey, it's good to finally be with you.
HH: Yeah, you and I have never met, though
we've probably crossed paths a hundred times within one day
of each other.
JM: I can tell stories about you, your listeners
would believe.
HH: Then, that's...best me move on quickly,
though. But Josh, I just learned today looking over your bio
at Josh.org,
you have the unfortunate distinction of having been born in
Michigan.
JM: You know, I wanted to be close to my
mother, so that's where I was born.
HH: But I'm a Buckeye, and so you've grown
up with the tradition of losing football, and I hope you've
overcome that. Now you're down in Texas, so you might...
JM: Well you know, our quarterback got his
varsity letter, and he couldn't read it.
HH: That's exactly what I was referring to.
Now Josh, why a book about the DaVinci Code?
JM: Well, for this reason. The DaVinci Code
is fiction. Maybe 4%, maximum 4% truth. Like he says, Professor
Langdon went to Paris. Well, it's true that Paris exists. But
it's done in a marvelous way, and I commend Dan Brown. Every
novelist would love to take a little tiny bit of truth and spin
it into imagination, where people cannot tell where the truth
leaves off and imagination begins. Well, what has happened is
people...I mean, this is unbelievable...have taken it as truth.
I've had twelve students in universities say they were assigned
to read the book to see how corrupt Christianity was for a religion.
In Phoenix, in one of the big high schools, the English department
assigned it to read, to see how religion lies. And it's fiction.
HH: These universities in which this book
is being assigned as some kind of guide to faith, how in the
world do they defend that choice? Because it's just a novel.
JM: That's right. I have no idea. It's like
back when the...remember the movie "The Hawaiians?"
HH: No.
JM: It was the story about how horrible Protestant
missionaries treated the natives?
HH: Okay, sure. Okay.
JM: Well, it was all just fiction. It was
just a story. It had nothing to do with reality. So I'm lecturing
at Memphis State University, in three history classes. And it
was two sessions right in a row. In the first session, I pointed
out the movie was out then, and how it was fiction, but people
quoted it and everything. In the second session, the chairman
of the History department walked in, knew I was a Christian,
and he interrupts me and says, well, have you seen the Hawaiian
movie? Well, you see, just because you have a PhD or in a university,
doesn't mean you're any smarter or more rational or objective,
than the people that mow my lawn.
HH: So now Josh McDowell, the movie is coming
out on May 19th. You've written a new book entitled...what's
the actual title of it?
JM: The
DaVinci Code: A Quest For Answers.
HH: That's it. The
DaVinci Code: A Quest For Answers. It's available at Josh.org.
Now do you encourage people to see the movie?
JM: No, not at all. I don't even encourage
them to read the book. Now I think the movie's probably going
to be the biggest blockbuster of the Summer by far, but no,
I don't encourage people to go. But I definitely encourage people
to be aware of the issues, because everyone's going to be talking
about it. Issues like...yesterday, a woman said to me, did you
know that Jesus was married? I said no, because he wasn't. And
I try to tell people that you know, you should be ready to answer
issues that come up in life, and these are some of the issues
that are going to come up, and that's why I did the book.
HH: All right. Now in your book, what's the
first question that you pose an answer for people?
JM: I don't really pose and answer a question.
I did the book in dialogue between two university students,
a graduate student, and a professor who had just walked out
of the movie.
HH: Okay.
JM: And they bring up the 8-10 different
issues throughout the whole dialogue, the drama. But probably
one of the biggest issues, the first thing that jumps out, it
says that all the events, the artwork, the secret societies
and all, are all historical and accurate. And the first thing
they say is well, in the Louvre, that pyramid right outside
the Louvre Museum in Paris, where a lot of the drama takes place,
that there's 666 panes of glass. And in the DaVinci Code book,
it says and this represents Satan, you know, and all. Well,
there's 673 panes of glass in the pyramid. It says the Madonna
on the Rocks painting is five foot tall on canvas. It's six
and a half feet tall and wood. But those are just little things.
But like the Mona Lisa, people...they travel all over to see
the Mona Lisa, to see secret things that he painted into it,
using the name and all. And here's the issue. Leonardo never,
ever, ever, ever, ever referred to the painting as Mona Lisa.
It wasn't even known as that name, anything. He always referred
to it as the woman in the painting. And then his biographer,
Vasari, in 1550, wrote in his biography of Leonardo, referred
to the woman as Lisa, the wife of Francesco del Giocondo, and
often referred to the painting as La Gioconda, which it is now
in France and in Italy. And then in the 1900's, it was named
Mona Lisa. And they're saying that he was passing on this secret
in the name that Mona means the god Amman, and Lisa means the
god Isis, and it was diguised as a secret to pass on that there's
not only a god, there's a goddess, etc.
HH: You know, I was...
JM: It wasn't even until the 1900's, and
Mona simply means madam, and Lisa's the name of the model that
posed for the picture.
HH: Right. I was over at the DaVincichallege.com
today, where you've contributed and I have contributed. And
there is an Art History professor by the name of Lisa DeBoer
from Westmont College, a wonderful school up in Santa Barbara,
California, and she was writing about the Last Supper, and how
in his etchings, Leonardo DaVinci made sure that everyone knew
who was what in the painting, and he made sure that John was
marked as John.
JM: Right.
HH: I didn't know that until today. It's
kind of dispositive of the whole book's idiocy.
JM: Yeah.
HH: But I guess my question, which I want
to...we'll expand on it after the break...
JM: Yeah, because I have all those, the etchings
that he did before, when he placed them in the Supper, he named
them all. And you can take...you get one of the oldest prints,
and you put a mirror to it, and the names'll be backwards above
the heads. He did that a lot.
HH: And so, when we come back, I want to
ask you what the most important couple of factoids are for anyone
who wants to puncture the idea of historicity. I think that's
the most important thing someone does, and then how to use the
opportunity that's presented by that.
---
HH: Josh McDowell, okay. Someone comes up
to you and says it's not fiction. Dan Brown refuses to call
it fiction. You've got to have the killer ap right out of the
box. What do you bring back?
JM: Well, what you bring back is, since I'm
a Christian, I always rejoice in the truth. If anyone ever shows
what I am teaching is wrong, I'm the first one to rejoice in
it, because as a Christian, I'm supposed to rejoice in truth.
So when it comes to the DaVinci Code, I don't attack the book
or Dan Brown. All I do is point out in the conspiracy, the historical
fallacies, and incorrect...and inaccuracies and all. And when
you do that, I believe ultimately, the truth will win out.
HH: All right.
JM: For example, it says that Constantine
coalated the Bible, that until Constantine put the bible together,
whether the Old Testament, the New Testament, there was no definitive
version whatsoever, and that they voted on it at the Council
of Nicaea, of what books to include in the Bible, in 325AD.
Well, first of all, that is crazy. Historically, anyone would
know that. Diocletian, the previous emperor, gave his famous
edict that every Bible...now listen, definitive Bible in the
empire should be destoyed. And they went from house to house
and everything, Churches destroying Bibles. Well, how do you
come just a few years later with Constantine, and say well,
there's never been a definitive Bible?
HH: Right. Well put.
JM: And Diocletian did. But here's the other
issue. With the Old Testament, you have about 200, 185-200BC,
you have the Septuagint, which is the Greek title given to the
Greek translation of the Hebrew Old Testament. And that became
the definitive Bible what? 1,700 years before Leonardo, 3, 4,
500 years before Constantine. And you had the definitive Bible.
But here's what's interesting. In researching out the Council
of Nicaea in 325, they did 20 verdicts, where they voted on
things, whatever. And not one of them had anything to do with
the Bible, what should be in the Bible, or anything. So that's
just pure fabrication.
HH: Now Dan Brown...today, the Wall Street
Journal, page W-4, has a lengthy story on DaVinci damage control.
This is today's paper, How Sony Hopes To Deflect Book's Religious
Critics, Calling In The Scholars. And it details how you and
I and a number of people have participated in these two Sony
websites, the DaVincichallenge.com,
and the DaVincidialogue.com. But it also says the makers of
the film don't really want anyone to think of it as other than
a story. It's just a novel, and just a story, and they make
stuff up. But Dan Brown really doesn't have that attitude, does
he, Josh McDowell?
JM: No. With Matt Lauer, Matt asked him,
and I got all the transcripts of it, everything, said how much
of the story and the details and the claims in there are true?
And literally, he said absolutely all of it is accurate and
historical.
HH: You see, that's what's so astonishing.
JM: And then with Gibson, which is what?
ABC?
HH: It's ABC. You're right, Josh.
JM: ABC, asking if you had this book as fictional.
If you had to write it over as a non-fiction book, what would
you change? And I've got the transcript, and Dan Brown said
none of it.
HH: Okay. You see, that's where the challenge
comes.
JM: So...but you know, here again, he doesn't
really believe that. He's selling books.
HH: Let's take a quick call before the break.
Kevin in Atlanta, you're on with Josh McDowell. Go ahead, Kevin.
Be quick, please.
Kevin: Josh, I guess I'm just surprised that...how
much energy is wasted debunking the work of fiction. I know
you've talked about this before, but it's a work of fiction.
And I just...to waste 128 pages...we don't go and put 128 pages
on the work of Star Wars, and the inaccuracies of that. So I'm
just baffled why people of faith find this, a work of fiction,
so offensive?
HH: Josh, you've got about thirty seconds
to the break.
JM: We don't find it offensive. I'm amazed
you don't see the point, because...like one woman came to me,
said my son, 17 years old, has been brought up in Christian
schools his whole life, a good Church, everything. He read the
book, has totally walked away from his faith, and saying nothing
in Christianity is true.
HH: You see, yeah, that's the challenge.
JM: Well, see, when you have fiction that
can cause that, you address the issue.
---
HH: Josh McDowell, is this selling well?
Are people taking this? Do they see the challenge out there?
JM: Yes, they are. And the reason is, so
many people are asking questions, like this caller who called
in, said why all the to-do with this? Well, very simple. People
are asking questions, and as Christians, we're supposed to be
ready to answer the question, not ignore them, whatever. And
when you say to a person reading the book, well don't you see
it's just fiction, all that says to that person is I'm dumb
or stupid, because they don't see it that way. And this is why
I wrote this book in the easy reading style, and documented
to help believers, when they're asked questions, to intelligently
share the answers that will affect the other person's life.
We owe that to people to do it.
HH: All right. Let's go to the phones. Elena,
San Diego. Hi, Elena, you're on with Josh McDowell.
Elena: Hi, Hugh. Hi, Josh.
JM: Hi, Elena.
Elena: I'm calling because I can relate to
that mother whose son walked away from the faith after reading
the book. And first, let me preface that by saying that I read
the DaVinci Code, and I thought it was one of the worse-written
books I've ever read. I thought it was terrible as a novel.
But I was...I came back to the Catholic Church after many, many
years of being away, and I was in that Church for oh, about
five years, when I was in a bookstore, and I came across Holy
Blood, Holy Grail. And I read it. I was captivated. I couldn't...could
this be true? It was so convincing.
JM: Yup.
Elena: And I lost my faith, and I haven't
gotten it back. I think I need your book.
HH: That's interesting. All right, Elena.
That's...well, Josh, there's your market.
JM: That's the same story that I'm hearing
on the DaVinci Code.
HH: And Elena...
JM: If that lady could give you her address,
I'd love to send her a couple of books as a gift.
HH: All right, Elena. Stay on hold, and we'll
get that from you and we'll do that. Let's go to Minneapolis,
talk with Janet. Hello, Janet. You're on with Josh McDowell
and me, Hugh Hewitt.
Janet: Hi, Hugh and Josh. Boy, I'm starting
to change my mind here as I hear these callers, but I was going
to challenge you as a Christian, shouldn't I see the movie so
that I have credibility when I'm discussing it with somebody
who's actually believing, thinking that it's true?
JM: That is your decision.
Janet: Okay.
JM: And it might be a right decision. But
publicly, I just can't go public and just say to people, well,
just go see the movie.
Janet: Right, right.
HH: I can. I believe...
JM: You sound like a very intelligent person...
Janet: Thank you.
JM: ...who really seeks the truth. And so
you know, that's your decision.
Janet: Okay.
JM: But if my wife and I were there, we'd
probably buy you popcorn.
HH: Yeah, my theory is I can't talk about
on the air, I won't be able to persuade anyone. I read the book,
I thought it was amusing. I didn't think it was a bad thriller.
It wasn't very good. It wasn't anything like a LaCarre novel
of the old days, but I am very disturbed that Dan Brown is trying
to con people into thinking it's the real deal. Janet, thank
you. Tommy, Houston, you're on with Josh McDowell. Go ahead,
Tommy.
Tommy: Hugh, Josh, thanks a lot for what
you do. Your relentless pursuit of the truth is just something
that lifts a lot of us up out here.
JM: Well, thank you.
Tommy: What Dan Brown has done is really
cowardly, because it's a big lie. And what I've seen over the
years, most big lies have a whole lot of truth, and they're
infected with just enough of a lie to make them very dangerous,
and very believable by people who are not grounded in what they
believe about the most important aspects of our life.
JM: You know, I like what you just said,
because for me, this is a beautiful, wonderful opportunity to
be positive, winsome, and wholesome, and to be able to share
my faith and share the truth with those who I believe have truly
inquiring minds, and can meet their needs.
HH: All right. Thank you much, Tommy. Let's
go to David in Glendale, California. Go ahead, David. You're
on with Josh McDowell and me, Hugh Hewitt.
David: Yeah, two things. First, the 150 year
traffic jam. That's a long time on the road. He implies that
the Knights Templar, who were driven out of France, went up
to Rosslyn Castle, or went up to Scotland and built Rosslyn
Castle. Okay, the persecution of Philip the Fair happened on
Friday, October 13, 1307. They broke ground for Rosslyn Castle
in 1462. That's a long time on the road. Second, Holy Blood,
Holy Grail, the main author of the book that was the source
for that, a French author, he wrote a subsequent book debunking
what he said, because the guy who did it, his two friends, wanted
to make it a bit of theater by making him the heir of King Dabobert.
But when they started the heir of Jesus and everything, they
got scared. He wrote another book debunking it, and Baigent,
Leigh and Lincoln better shut. You know, they're suing Dan Brown.
Well...
HH: All right, David. What do you think of
that, Josh. More stuff, Josh McDowell, that just plays into
your premise that this is an easily exposed fraud.
JM: It is. But the key is this. The people
that are reading it and coming out with questions, I believe
for the most part, they're sincere. And what the book does,
it reinforces your skepticism. What I am committed to is reinforcing
your beliefs,...
HH: Well put.
JM: ...and taking them to proper beliefs.
HH: One more call from Richard in Seattle.
Richard, you're on with Josh McDowell.
Richard: Yeah, Hugh and Josh. Just read this
morning, Blythe Brown is apparently the one that did all the
research on this...
JM: The wife did.
Richard: And she's his wife, about 15 years
his senior, according to the article, and very much into feminist
religious...I can't remember the name of it, Gaia, goddess worship,
or something like that. A very interesting kind of commentary.
HH: Let me focus that in a question with
30 seconds left, Josh McDowell. Do you think there's anti-Christian
hostility in the book?
JM: I think maybe. Now I'm speaking blindly
here, that maybe he's had a real bitter experience with the
Catholic Church, and it's now coming out in his writings. But
I'm not speaking authoritatively on that. But he's trying to
sell books, and he's really selling books.
HH: 40 million. And The DaVinci Code: A Quest
For Answers is Josh McDowell's book. You can order it from Josh,
www.josh.org,
or www.josh.davinciquest.org.
Josh McDowell, a pleasure talking with you, friend.
End of interview.
Posted at 9:50PM PST
Return to top
Saturday,
March 18
The Beltway
Boys
HH: Joined now by the Fox News Channel Beltway
Boys, Fred Barnes of the Weekly
Standard, Morton Kondracke of Roll
Call. Together, they are the Fox News Channel Beltway
Boys. You can watch them tomorrow night at 6PM, 3PM in the
West, and again, it repeats later in the evening and on Sunday.
Gentlemen, let's start with the most important news this week,
the NCAA Tournament. I want to get your pick to go all the way,
Fred Barnes.
FB: Well, once I saw that UCONN was becoming
a prohibitive favorite, I went with Duke.
HH: Very good, and Morton, with you?
MK: Duke. Duke.
HH: No, you're both wrong. It's Ohio State,
and they triumphed easily in the first round today, and will...
MK: Yeah, right.
HH: Ohio State all the way. Let's start,
gentlemen, I was on Neil Cavuto's, your colleague at Fox, show
earlier today to do the obligatory "No, Bush isn't dead,
the presidency isn't over." I think this story is out of
control, writing the President's obituary at this time, Fred
Barnes. You know the President better than most. You wrote the
book, Rebel
In Chief. What's your assessment of the state of his political
troubles?
FB: Well, he's got some now. When his polls
get down in the 30's, Republicans start to attack him. You know,
he had Norm Coleman of Minnesota talking as if he knew everything
that was going on in the White House's staff, and there needed
to be a shakeup, and they had a tin ear at the White House,
and all that stuff. But to some extent, actually, to the greatest
extent, this is just the second term doldrums. And I certainly
believe that when a few things stop happening, like hurricanes,
the President...and he's made some mistakes as well. Obviously,
Harriet Miers was one. But I think with this new series of speeches
on Iraq...Iraq is a problem, because all people see is explosions,
and they don't see the fact that a new government may be formed
soon, and the Iraqi army is really building into a battle-ready
and sizeable force. So I think the President is going to have
a recovery, beginning right about now.
HH: Morton Kondracke, I made the point this
is a semi-annual story, and has been since 2001, as the President
plays politics like he does cards. You don't have to win every
pot, you've just got to win the game. What's your assessment?
MK: Yeah, I agree with that. I don't think
it's over yet. I mean, presidents do become lame ducks often,
and he is clearly in trouble. You know, his polls, they bounced
up to the lofty figure of 43% approval at one point, and now
they've descended again. So he's got to turn this thing around,
and I think talk doesn't do it anymore, frankly. I mean, I don't
think speeches, I don't think people are listening to him. I
think it's events that are going to have to do it, and if the
events don't happen, then he's going to keep descending.
HH: But if in fact there is a new government
in Iraq, and it does become a government of all parties, that's
the real deal.
MK: Absolutely. If that happens, and if the
Iraqi security forces go into battle and actually fight somebody,
which they don't seem to have done this week. You know, this
offensive seems to be like a practice exercise. But you know,
they start winning battles, and they start governing their country,
and they control their militias and all that, if, if, if, if,
then he's good. He's good. He's bet his presidency on the outcome
in Iraq. If the outcome in Iraq is good, he's golden.
HH: Fred Barnes, there is one cliff that
we're getting awfully close to. It's immigration reform. Ted
Kennedy appears to have the momentum in the Judiciary Committee,
Bill Frist trying to block it. What's the President's role in
this? And how much danger does the Republican Party have with
this issue?
FB: They have a lot of danger, but it doesn't
come from President Bush or Teddy Kennedy or John McCain. It
comes from Republicans that will so overdo border security as
to make Hispanic-Americans feel unwelcome in the United States.
I mean, you start building a 2,000 mile wall, or even a 700
mile wall there, you're telling Hispanics in America who have
increasingly become Republican voters that we don't want any
more of your people here. You know, we're not welcoming them
anymore, and I think that's a mistake. We do need more border
enforcement, but we also need to find a way for immigrants to
come into this country legally, and become American citizens.
And we have to do something about those that are already here.
HH: Morton Kondracke?
MK: Look, I don't think that Frist actually
opposes what McCain and Kennedy are doing.
FB: No, not at all.
MK: I think...I mean, he clearly wants to
have the reputation of being a border security guy, but on the
other hand, what he did this week in saying that he was going
to produce this bill, is to get the Senate Judiciary Committee
off the dime. They were...Specter seemed to be slow-walking
the thing, and the minute that Frist said look, something's
going to be on the floor the week after next, that got Specter
going, and they're going to produce a bill that's a comprehensive
bill.
HH: Gentlemen, last night, I was at a fundraiser
for Bill Morrow, who is seeking one of 18 Republicans, he's
a state senator seeking the seat vacated by Duke Cunningham.
Much of the conversation about illegal immigration, and I've
got to say, both of you guys sound like beltway guys, when out
here in the land of the borders, there is no other issue besides
border security. It's not nativist, it's just an impossible
security problem, Fred Barnes.
FB: It is a security problem, but look. Think
about it politically, and that's one of the ways I think about
it, although I think we are a country that has always welcomed
immigrants, the Statue of Liberty symbolizes that. But think
of it this way. Books were written about the emerging Democratic
majority. And they were based on a high percentage of Hispanic
voters being Democrats, because it's the biggest growing, fastest
growing voting bloc in America. Bush has changed that. Now they've
turned and become Republicans. He got 45% of the vote. If Republicans
blow that, if it dips back to 20 or 15% of Hispanics voting
for Republicans, Republicans will no longer be the majority
party in America. I'm for border enforcement, but I think you
have to really be careful about you rhetoric, and what you do.
Hispanics are for border enforcement, but a lot of the language
that's used, and some of the things that are proposed, just
make them feel unwelcome, and they won't be Republicans.
HH: All right. Let's turn to the Russ Feingold
fiasco, the Feingold folly, Morton Kondracke. Never has a gift
been more widely welcomed as Russ Feingold's gift to the Republicans.
Bill Frist said on this show two days ago, he guarantees it
will come to the floor, and there will be a vote and a debate
on it. Good thing for Republicans?
MK: Yes, I think so. I mean, this is the
Democrats contriving to help the Republicans whenever they get
themselves into trouble. And it was Jack Murtha, is was Nancy
Pelosi, and then it was Harry Reid accusing his colleagues of
being corrupt and having to apologize for it. You know, it's
one thing after another. And I think the more the Republicans
warn their base that you stay away from the polls, and you let
the Democrats take control of the House of Representatives,
and you're going to have an impeached president. Do you want
that?
HH: And Fred Barnes, do you agree with that
analysis?
FB: I do agree. If the Democrats...I mean,
you know who's behind all this? You know who makes Harry Reid
say those things, and Russ Feingold, and all of them? It's Karl
Rove.
HH: (laughing)
MK: (laughing)
HH: You know, MoveOn.org has generated 200,000
signatures this week in favor of Feingold. I compared them to
the old Soviet commissars who threatened to shoot anyone who
retreated before the Germans, because they won't let the Democrats
do anything except go over the cliff, Fred Barnes. Will they
let up? Will they let them do anything remotely acceptable to
the middle of America?
FB: Of course not. They're killing the Democratic
Party. You see all...Nina Easton of the Boston Globe wrote a
great story about how all these bloggers and everything are
being hired by Democratic presidential candidates, all of whom,
Mark Warner, Evan Bayh, even the centrist ones are all moving
to the left, and the lefty ones like John Edwards and John Kerry
and so on, they're moving further to the left.
HH: It is really remarkable.
FB: They're getting into territory where
a Democrat cannot possibly win.
HH: Coming up after this segment, gentlemen,
I'm interviewing Lt. Gov. Michael Steele, the subject, sort
of, Morton Kondracke, of a story this week, because a Chuck
Schumer staffer is going to go...the feds are going to go get
her for breaking into this credit records. Does he have a chance,
in your estimate, in Maryland?
MK: Yeah, he does. He definitely does. You
know, it's a hard road. It's a very Democratic state. I think
Steele said something really stupid when he compared stem cell
research to murder, or something like that. I mean, that's just
off the charts. But I think he's got a prayer. I wouldn't say
much more than that.
HH: Now Fred Barnes, we've got Lynn Swann,
Ken Blackwell, Michael Steele, three high-profile African-Americans,
who are likely to be their nominees, and all three, two governors
and one Senate race, what's that say about the future of the
Republican Party, and the African-American vote?
FB: Well, it says that blacks are much more
included than ever before. You know, it used to be, Hugh, as
you know, that blacks could get a nomination for an unwinnable
seat.
HH: Right.
FB: But now, all those are winnable seats.
Blackwell could be elected governor of Ohio, though it will
be tough. Swann is matching Rendell in Pennsylvania in the polls,
and I agree with Mort. It'll be tough for Steele, but he's a
smart, tough candidate, and could win in Maryland.
HH: Last question for both of you. Have either
of you been subpoenaed by Scooter Libby? Fred Barnes?
FB: No, but I hope he gets off.
HH: Morton Kondracke?
MK: Not yet.
HH: All right. Just be careful who you talk
to when you get off the airplane, Morton. It could be a process
server. Fred Barnes, Morton Kondracke, the Fox News Channel
Beltway Boys. They're on tomorrow night at 6PM on the East,
3PM in the West.
End of interview.
Posted at 2:30PM PST
Return to top
Friday, March
17
So, Congressman
John Campbell, why are all of you spending money like drunken
sailors?
Remember it is St. Patrick's Day, so
there was an Irish bumper playing, and these two know each other
pretty well - RB
03-17campbell-1.mp3
HH: I'm a real Irishman, but I'm here with
one of my English forebears, oppressors, Congressman John Campbell.
JC: English? Campbell, Campbell.
HH: Well, Scots English. You were oppressors.
JC: Scots English?
HH: And you were one of the black Campbells.
JC: Have you ever said that in Scotland?
HH: No, I wouldn't dare say that...
JC: Oh, they'd kill you.
HH: Yeah, but you were with the crown against
Charlie.
JC: That's true. That's true. We were.
HH: You were a black Campbell. I know all
about you. You're Royalists.
JC: We were.
HH: Down to the sole of your toes.
JC: And we did bad things to McDonalds in
their sleep, too. Yeah.
HH: Welcome back. John Campbell's back from
D.C., our freshman Congressman extraordinaire. I almost cancelled
this segment because he's wearing a USC sweatshirt. How is USC
doing in the NCAA Tournament? Oh, that's right. They're not
in.
JC: I so expected this.
HH: Ohio State won today.
JC: You know, I am not a fair weather fan,
but Georgetown will beat Ohio State what is it? Tomorrow? Next
day?
HH: Well, two days.
JC: Two days.
HH: We'll see about that.
JC: Georgetown will beat them.
HH: Is USC doing well in the NIT?
JC: Uh...
HH: Oh, they're not even in the NIT.
JC: (sigh)
HH: I don't know any team in America that
isn't in either the NCAA or the NIT, except USC, and they signed...all
of their professionals are going professional. They're in bad
shape. Hey listen...
JC: It's so unfortunate that you...
HH: I appreciate your flying back from D.C.
to do this show, because now finally...I can talk with Dreier
about the rules, but you're on Financial Services, you're on
Veterans Affairs, and you're on the floor voting on these things,
not yet in the leadership. And so, I am confounded, befuddled,
by what happened this week on the spending stuff, and I want
you to walk our people through. What is going...why are you
people spending money like drunken sailors?
JC: I think it's actually just...I'm going
to give you the conclusion before we get to it. We need a spending
limit, and we need a line item veto. And I'm not sure that anything
else is going to stop it, just because of the way that Congress
works with individual...with so many members and so many interest
groups. Let me just give you a few examples. I've been in Congress
now just over 90 days. Not a long time, right?
HH: Right.
JC: Brand new guy. Just came in. Had 63 requests
for earmarks.
HH: No.
JC: 63 requests. And they only had 60 days
to get to me.
HH: Where do they come from?
JC: Everything from a number of private contractors
looking for defense money. You know, we have this thing and
it's really good, and it'd be great for the national defense.
The Department of Defense unfortunately doesn't recognize that.
So if you can get us $3 million or $4 million dollars, we can
create this thing.
HH: Explain to people what an earmark is.
I always make that mistake.
JC: Sorry. Okay, I've assumed that the listeners
of the Hugh Hewitt show have been educated by you, but I guess
not.
HH: I try, I try.
JC: All right. Okay.
HH: There are Pittsburgh Steeler fans listening.
JC: What an earmark is, is members of Congress
and the U.S. Senate have the opportunity to direct specific
money to something in their district. So rather than its...let's
say you have a transportation bill, and it's got however many
billion dollars in it, and it gets sent to the states to spend
on transportation things. But let's say you want to do a particular
transportation project in your district. You can earmark and
say I want this $4 million dollars to go specifically to the
interchange of the 5 and the 22 freeway. You know, whatever
it may be. Something like that. So that's what earmarks are.
Most of the earmarks requests I got were from public agencies.
But I mean, you get things like that. The point is, is that
the easiest way as a member of Congress to make friends is to
spend money on people. And there's lots of opportunities to
do that. I would say 80% of the meetings I've had in my office
thus far have been people asking for money. Either earmarks
or simply in the budget, make sure we increase this. Or in the
budget, we need to put money for this. Or in the budget, we
need to increase the money for this. And one of the things I've
asked every single person that's come in thus far, is I've said
you know, we have a budget issue. We have deficits. There's...money
isn't endless, even for $2.7 trillion dollars, which is the
federal budget amount, even...is a finite number. You want us
to spend $10 million on this. Could you bring me a suggestion
of something we can spend $10 million less on, so that then,
we can spend $10 million on the thing you want. And people kind
of don't want to come in with that. But something I've been
asking. But because of this whole...I mean, the number of people,
constituents, non-constituents, whatever, that come and ask
you for money is amazing. And it's frankly, it's hard to say
no to everybody, to 80% of the people who come to see you. It's
easy to say yes, and so that whole impetus creates...and that
impetus times 535 people, members of the House of Representatives
and the U.S. Senate, creates a whole wave of wanting to spend
more money on things. So that's basically, I think, what's making
it happen, plus the reality of votes. You know, well, gee, I
won't vote for the budget unless we increase this by $100 million,
or that by $50 million, or that by $150...and you see that dynamic
going on as well.
HH: I'm going to quote you, and Radioblogger's
going to put up with interview. I've been in Congress a little
more than 90 days, and I have received 63 requests for earmarks,
is that correct?
JC: That is correct.
HH: What did they total? Are you keeping
a running total?
JC: Actually, I didn't add up the numbers.
It'd be in the hundreds of millions.
HH: That is just incredible.
---
03-17campbell-2.mp3
HH: John Campbell has been a frequent visitor
before he was an Assemblyman, then when he was an Assemblyman,
then when he was a State Senator. Now he's the least senior
member of Congress, though that's going to change pretty radically
in a year, because there are a lot of retirements, including
Martin Sabo today from Minnesota.
JC: Another one.
HH: Another one, and more upcoming.
JC: We're now up in the high 20's, and so
the Class of 2006 in the House is going to be 30 plus members,
depending on how many incumbents lose.
HH: And so one of my themes is going to be,
over the years that this show, if we're blessed and continue
on, is that you're going to listen to how John Campbell becomes
an inside the beltway creature...hopefully not.
JC: (laughing) Oh, yeah. I hope. No! How
about a no on that?
HH: We're giving him...we're taping him at
the beginning, that he's down on...
JC: Hugh Hewitt listeners, that's part of
your job. Kick me if it sounds like I ever am becoming that.
HH: But at the very beginning of your career,
you're 90 days into this thing. You've already had 63 earmark
requests, but you also got your committee assignments.
JC: I did.
HH: Tell people how that happened, what your
on, and what you're supposed to do.
JC: I'm on three committees. I'm on Financial
Services Committee, the Budget Committee, and Veterans Affairs.
Financial Services, I mean, everyone has a pretty good idea
what a Budget Committe does, and what Veterans Affairs does.
Financial Services handles all matters related to finance, banking,
securities markets, and insurance. And housing, actually, as
well.
HH: Encrypted data now, right? I mean, you're
going to be into all sorts of strange stuff.
JC: Yeah, there's all kinds of things, like
we had a bill we passed out of the committee just two days ago,
having to do with data security breaches. All this talk about
if a company, a bank or somebody that has...well, let's see.
Choicepoint, I think, wasn't it that had a...
HH: Yeah.
JC: They believed that someone might have
entered their computer and released some data. So what's been
happening is every state has been passing all kinds of laws,
so we now have this patchwork of 50 state laws. Well, these
sorts of things are inherently interstate commerce, because
you're talking about large companies, large data that's spread
across computers all over the country. So what we're trying
to do is establish a national standard of what companies need
to do when there are these data security breaches, when they
need to notify consumers, and what they need to do to respond.
So I mean, that's just an example of what we did on Wednesday,
in addition to flood insurance, which was an insurance thing,
which obviously, the flood insurance...
HH: It's a really bad idea, flood insurance.
JC: National Flood Insurance Bank, okay?
But it's bankrupt now, or not bankrupt, but it's in trouble.
So we had to do...and move some things around. But when you
look at it, gosh, it's got a lot of...we subsidize every house
in America that was built...
HH: In a coastal zone.
JC: No, built before 1974. Why?
HH: I'm not for that.
JC: And second homes.
HH: I'm not for that.
JC: Why?
HH: Well, change it.
JC: So...
HH: We do it because there are a lot of people
living in those homes.
JC: We tried, but couldn't get quite enough
votes to change that part of it.
HH: But Financial Services is not one of
the big three. The big three are Rules, Ways and Means, and
Approps. But it is...it may become an exclusive...
JC: Actually, Energy and Commerce.
HH: Energy and Commerce. Are there four?
JC: Well, the exclusive committees, which
where you can only be on that committee, and you can't be on
there as a freshman...and by the way, they're determined by
party. For example, Financial Services is an exclusive committee
if you're a Democrat.
HH: Oh.
JC: But not if you're a Republican. So on...it's
basically Appropriations, Rules, Ways and Means, and Energy
And Commerce.
HH: Energy and Commerce. But Financial Services
may become one, because of the amount...
JC: On the Republican side, it may become
one next year, yes.
HH: And you're on two subcommittees?
JC: I'm on two subcommittees.
HH: And so, give the people...forget the
specifics. How much time are you spending in committee?
JC: You can spend almost all of Tuesday,
Wednesday and Thursday in committee if you want to, because
the committees are going on. But they are hearings, where you
don't vote. That's the things you see on TV, where somebody
sits at a table, and they get asked questions back and forth.
And those are hearings where you're collecting information,
but you don't vote. An awful lot of members don't actually attend
those. They watch on their TV, their staff watches on the TV,
they go somewhere else. They generally show up if they want
to ask a question, and then they go back, whatever. And then
there's things called mark-ups. And a mark-up is when you're
actually voting. A bill is there, people offer amendments, changes
to it, and you vote on the bill, or you don't. So you could
be there all day Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday. But if all
you wanted to do was show up when you're going to ask a question
and when you're going to vote, then it can be only a matter
of a few hours a week.
HH: Again, last night, you were at the National
Republican Congressional Campaign Committee dinner, right?
JC: I was...with the President.
HH: And how much did that raise?
JC: I think they said $9 million dollars.
HH: Nice...good night. Good gain.
JC: It was a very nice night. It was at the
Washington Hilton, and there were I think 2,500 people there.
HH: And so, between mark-ups and committees,
and meeting the 63 requests and moving to D.C., are you exhausted?
JC: Yeah, I don't have a lot of...there's
not a lot of free time.
HH: And you're running for re-election.
JC: Yes.
HH: You campaign in June. There's a Democrat,
and there's a Libertarian. But you drew no primary opponent?
JC: No primary opponent. That's right.
HH: And so, you're in like Flynn as the Republican
nominee?
JC: For the primary. That's correct.
HH: Then you're going to have to work hard
on this. So that's a good week. Now back to the budget, because
we've got two minutes now, and two minutes after the break.
JC: Okay.
HH: Republicans split over the budget this
week. A bunch of...maybe 30...
JC: No, it wasn't as many as that. There
were...you're talking about these supplemental...
HH: For Katrina and the war.
JC: And the war. And also a thing called
LIHEAP, which I'll explain in a minute, which is just a ridiculous
expenditure of money, in my view. But actually, only 19 Republicans
voted no on this. There were about 54 Democrats who voted no.
It was an interesting group of noes. There were 70-something
no votes total on this bill, and the anti-war Democrats voted
no, and the strong fiscal conservative Republicans voted no.
HH: And there were only 19 strong fiscal
conservative Republicans?
JC: Well, I would like to think there are
more, but there were not more than 19 that were willing to make
this vote, which some could perceive, some were worried could
be perceived as voting against the war in Iraq. That's obviously
why the Democrats voted against it. But that's not why I voted
against it.
HH: But you're prepared to answer people
who say you're against the war?
JC: And that's not why any of the other 19
did. Because...yeah, I am, because I...clearly, every other
vote I've made, every public statement, everything I've ever
done shows that that's not the case, but...and this is what
happens in a lot of these bills. Bill in Congress are huge.
They have lots of things in them. And in the end, if the majority
of things you agree with, you vote for it. If the majority of
things you don't, you vote against it. I did not agree with
the majority of things in this bill, so I voted against it.
---
03-17campbell-3.mp3
HH: He voted against Katrina relief this
week, and I want people to know why.
JC: I voted against Katrina relief...I voted
against this bill for a number of reasons. Part of it has $19
billion dollars more for Katrina relief. We've already sent
them $60 billion dollars, and we haven't spent that particularly
well. Many of you heard about the homes in Hope, Arkansas, and
the fraud that's gone on, and the $20 billion that hasn't been
spent, because people haven't claimed it, and we're giving people
up to $150,000 dollars per house for houses that they've left.
I don't know whether you know that or not.
HH: What?
JC: Yeah. Everybody that lost a house can
get up to $150,000 dollars just cash out of the pot that's gone
before. It's just...
HH: Wait a minute. No, we're not.
JC: Yes, we are.
HH: I have not seen that anywhere. We're
giving everyone who lost their house $150K?
JC: Up to. It depends on...
HH: You get the value of your house up to
$150K?
JC: Uh, I'm not even sure it's conditioned
by the value of the house. But it depends on various different
circumstances. It starts at like $50,000, and goes to $150,000,
based on certain types of things.
HH: Do they have to give the government the
deed?
JC: I'm not 100% sure how the whole system
works. But the point is, it's...
HH: Out of control.
JC: It's out of control. And there's all
kinds of money, and there's all kinds of this. It hasn't been
spent well. Why do we...to me, it was good money after bad.
Why do we want another $19 billion dollars? In addition in this
bill, was a thing, an acronym called LIHEAP, which stands for
low income heat energy assistance...
HH: Heating oil subsidy.
JC: Energy assistance program, right. Okay.
What's the date today? It's March 17th.
HH: Right.
JC: We passed this today...yesterday. It
will need to go to the Senate, be passed, and signed by the
President. The people couldn't get the money before probably
the end of March, to the beginning of April at the earliest
for heat assistance, okay? $750 million dollars. And what was
this year?
HH: The warmest record on...
JC: The warmest year in the history of, like,
since they've been keeping this stuff. And we're going to send
$750 million dollars in low income heating assistance, starting
with April. I just don't...I can't get this. Plus, in the Defense...let
me just finish. Just to show you there's a bunch of stuff...in
the Defense bill, there's a plane and an engine for jets that
the Defense Department said we don't want this. We don't do
this anymore, this is not what we need for the war effort. But
they're in there. And why are they in there?
HH: Well, Duane would like you to earmark
a house for him. He says he had a home in New Orleans, and he's
lost it.
JC: Ah. I see. Well, he...
HH: Where does he sign up for his $50K?
JC: Get in line.
Emmett of the Unblinking Eye: In fact, nobody
can find it.
HH: No one can find it.
JC: Yeah, get in line.
HH: I may have lost a couple.
JC: Yeah, I know.
HH: Can I earmark a couple...would you take
my earmark back there and get me a couple of New Orleans houses
that I don't have to have in order to get my $300K?
JC: You might as well just...
HH: Congressman John Campbell, how long are
you on recess for? A week?
JC: Wait. It's not recess, now. It's a district
work period. That's what we call them now.
HH: Yeah.
EOTUE: It's like a teacher conference week.
HH: It's a teacher conference day.
JC: I am in my district for a week, yeah.
HH: For a week. Well, we'll talk to you from
D.C. in a couple of weeks. John Campbell, great to have you
back, USC sweater and all.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:59PM PST
Lt. Gov.
Michael Steele, the next Senator from Maryland.
03-17steele.mp3
HH: I'm joined now by Michael Steele. He's
the Lieutenant Governor of Maryland, and he is also a candidate
for the United States Senate. Just today on Neil Cavuto's show,
I was touting the Maryland Senate seat as one of the possible
pickups for the Republican Party. Lt. Gov. Steele, great to
have you on the Hugh Hewitt Show.
MS: It's great to be with you. How's it going?
HH: Good, good, good. Now this is the first
time we've chatted, and I really must confess. Though I'm a
political junkee, when I lived back there, I was a Virginian.
And I really don't know your state, and I didn't think Republicans
were allowed to live there.
MS: Generally, they're not.
HH: Okay. (laughing)
MS: But I managed to sneak in, in the dead
of night, and place camp, and I've been going ever since. And
now, we're up to about 30 or 40 of us, and we're making a lot
of noise.
HH: Michael Steele, tell people about this
race, your likely opponent, and how Maryland came to be in play,
previously a dark blue state, but a lot of people are looking
at that and saying Michael Steele's the guy to make it slightly
red.
MS: Well, you know, we're working for the
color purple here. And that's the goal.
HH: That's very good.
MS: And Maryland is really much a state in
transition. I've been Lieutenant Governor for about three years
now, and we were elected, Governor Ehrlich and I were elected
in 2002, first Republican ticket to be elected in 40 years.
And I currently serve as the first African-American elected
statewide in Maryland. And so, that dynamic, with that election,
really began to change the ground a little bit. So Sarbanes
retires, announces his retirement a year ago, and immediately,
the speculation was well, who are the Republicans going to run?
And a lot of my friends in Washington, and in the state, started
talking to me about the potential of this race. And I'm a political
junkee like you, so I know the numbers, I know the realities.
And I evaluated it, and what I saw was something in the people
that said they were ready for something a little different.
They're ready for a change. And I think I represent that change,
and I think that's why the Democrats have been so afraid of
my getting into this race, and have been relentless in their
pursuit of me. About eight months before I even announced that
I was going to run, they were already at their typical usual
tactics.
HH: In fact, yesterday, federal prosecutors
announced that they would proceed against a Chuck Schumer staffer...
MS: Yeah.
HH: ...working at the Democratic Senatorial
Campaign Committee, who rifled your personal files, broke into
your credit records. I hope she does some time. I hope they
don't give her a slap on the wrist.
MS: Well, you know, they're...I doubt it
at the end of the day. She'll do about 150 hours of community
service, and then they'll look to expunge her record at the
end of that, as long as she doesn't do anything else. But the
question for me is what signal are you trying to send? In an
age when everyone is clamoring at the President about wiretappings,
and privacy, and protection thereof, here we have the Democratic
Senatorial Committee, under the leadership of Chuck Schumer,
stealing my credit report.
HH: Yup.
MS: And what's even worse...I mean, at least
the government, the President's talking about wiretapping those
who want to kill us. I mean, these guys are stealing my credit
report for purely political gain.
HH: Right. Michael Steele, they don't try
to slime people they're not worried about, so you must have
the profile and the achievement behind you that makes them sweat
at night. Have you got a likely opponent yet? Do you know who
the Democrat's going to be?
MS: Ben Cardin, Congressman Cardin, is the
number one choice. He is the darling of the leadership of the
Democratic Party here in the state and nationally. The problem
they have is a gentleman by the name of Kweisi Infume, who is
African-American, former head of the NAACP, and former Congressman
himself. And they've all but kicked him to the curb, so it's
created an interesting tension within their base, in how they
treat their only, and first and only African-American to run
statewide here in Maryland against how the Republicans have
responded to my candidacy. It's like night and day.
HH: I've interviewed Mr. Infume a number
of times back in my television days with PBS. He's a tremendous
orator, very charismatic. I doubt he'll go quietly into the
night.
MS: He will not go quietly into that good
night, trust me. And he plans to stay in this race right through
the end. And so, they've got an interesting little pickle to
work through. And my attitude's very simply this. I will be
ready for whoever shows up the day after the primary.
HH: Now when you were Governor Ehrlich's
running mate, how did you two do? Did you win by 500 votes,
5,000, 50,000? What was the race?
MS: We won by 66,000 votes.
HH: Okay, that's a good margin in Maryland.
MS: And it was...again, it was a shocker
for folks, and we had about 9% of the African-American vote
in our election, 2002. Right now in this race for the United
States Senate, and this is what got the Democrats so worried,
I'm carrying 31% of the black vote.
HH: Well, of course you would be. I mean,
you've been out there talking about opportunity and achievement.
MS: Yup.
HH: And doing so without condescension, or
without the tired old rhetoric of those people who've been around
leading the civil rights movement for 40 years. Instead, you're
out there actually talking opportunity. Michael Steele, how
much do you have to raise to win this race?
MS: I've got to raise somewhere between eleven
and fifteen million dollars.
HH: Man, that's a lot of dough.
MS: It's a lot of change, and we're working
hard to do it. This is a national race, Hugh. You're going to
be talking about this race, you're going to be following this
race. Right now, it's the number 6 race in the country, and
it's one of the best, as you noted on Neil Cavuto's show, one
of the best opportunities for a pickup that Republicans have
in this cycle. It's a dynamic race. We're going to make it a
lot of fun, but we're all over the country, we're here at home
working hard to raise the dollars that we're going to need.
And a lot of people are responding. I've been very pleased with
that. And we've picked up in the last...probably since last
October when I officially announced, some 4,500 new donors to
our campaign.
HH: Wow. How many of those are using the
website, Steeleformaryland.com?
Are they all...
MS: We're beginning to see that, and one
of the things I'm looking for are opportunities where I can
promote, let people know we're here, because a lot of people
are calling my state offices saying hey, I hear he's running.
How do I find out? So the website is www.steeleformaryland.com.
HH: And it's steel-e for Maryland. Yeah.
Steele with an e for Maryland.
MS: Right. Steele with an e for Maryland.com.
You go there, you can log on, you can follow what the latest
is on what's happening in the race. You can donate, you can
volunteer. I had a gentleman call, send an e-mail to the office,
to tell me that he just contacted his buddy who lives in Bethesda
here in Maryland, and he said he told his friend for the months
of September, October and November, I'm planning to come and
stay with you, because I want to work on the Steele campaign.
He's from Wisconsin.
HH: You know, I hope everyone in that city
as well, all those young Republican staffers, and all those
young independent people down there, and government workers
know they've just got to break with Maryland's past. I mean,
it's really tough there. It's been such a culture of corruption
in Maryland for so long, that you and the Governor are breaking
rocks. But they're not going easily, are they?
MS: They're not going easily, and as they're
putting up a fight, they're fighting us at the legislative level
here in the state capitol. Certainly, they've put a big target
on my back. I mean, I've already had a Democrat member of our
Congressional delegation tell me that after the primary, in
this general election, they will have every national Democrat
in the country coming in here to take me on.
HH: When is their primary?
MS: September 12th.
HH: So they have a late primary, though,
so they're going to be slugging it out right...
MS: Yup. Exactly.
HH: And they can't really come in against
Infume until after that, can they?
MS: Right. It's all...and it's an interesting
dynamic, because if Infume somehow wins this nomination, the
politics in the state kind of shift, because he is very liberal,
he is very left, and very extreme. And so, the moderate conservative,
the Reagan Democrats in the state, of which we have quite a
few, and the independents who tend to lean Democrat, aren't
necessarily going to warm up to that, and I'll be there waiting.
HH: And you know, we'll be there covering
it. Michael Steele, Lieutenant Governor of Maryland, a great
pleasure to have you on. We'll be back in touch repeatedly between
now and November, as we look for the Turps to go red like their
school colors in November.
End of interview.
Posted at 3:56PM PST
Return to top
Thursday,
March 16
Mark Steyn's
position on commissions.
03-16steyn.mp3
HH: I begin this Thursday as I do most with
Mark Steyn,
columnist to the world. Mr. Steyn, we begin a story that centers
on you. What has happened to the Sunday Telegraph and the Spectator?
The Hugh Hewitt listeners want to know where the Mark Steyn
material is.
MS: My relationship with the Telegraph group,
which the Spectator also belongs to, deteriorated over the last
year, and became adversarial, which I don't think is particularly
healthy. And I don't mind...I've been the token conservative
on liberal newspapers. I don't mind an adversarial relationship
in terms of your position on the Gulf War, or Afghanistan, or
the European Union or whatever. I don't mind having differences
with editors and so forth on that. But when it gets into, when
the whole relationship just becomes generally toxic, then I
think it's best to hang out your shingle somewhere else, which
I will do in the United Kingdom at some point.
HH: That's the important part. You will be
back writing in the UK. Any time frame set for that, Mark Steyn?
MS: Well, I would hope sooner rather than
later. One of the things, if you're a controversial writer,
when I parted company with the National Post up in Canada, I
thought well, every newspaper's going to start calling me, because
I was the hottest columnist there, according to some of their
reader surveys and things. And of course, instead, these editors
think oh, well, good riddance to that right-wing wacko. We don't
need a crazy guy like him. And after a couple of years of the
phone not ringing, they all came kind of slinking back and made
me derisory offers of one kind or another. And I would bet on
the same thing happening over in London.
HH: Now isn't this sort of suicidal behavior
on the part of newspapers, Mark Steyn? And we'll take you out
of it. But we just had a Pew report showing they're in terrible
condition. Nobody cares about their in-house tubas that go on,
boom, boom, boom on the old, same notes. They're killing themselves
if they deny their readers what their readers want.
MS: Well you know, one of the things I find,
and I'm sure you do, too, you travel a lot around the country.
And the thing about American newspapers in particular, but it's
also true of Canada and certain others, is that if you get off
the plane at almost any airport on the continent, and you'll
pick up the local paper which will be a monopoly daily, published
by Gannett or some other similar company, and it will just have
like the world's dullest comment page, the world's dullest op-ed
page. This is a great riveting time of war, and say what you
like about crazy folks on left or right, but there's a lot to
say about it. And in fact, the newspapers, and their monopolies,
have made them dull, and that's the danger, I think, in much
of the United States, that you want someone, whether you agree
with him or not, that you want something that will be riveting
and thought-provoking. And some of these guys have been just
holding down prime op-ed real estate for decades. It's amazing
to me.
HH: Mark Steyn, last question on this. One
of the Telegraph suits sent out an e-mail to someone questioning,
saying we hope to have Mark Steyn back within the Telegraph
family soon. Is that just shining on their distraught readers?
MS: Yeah, I don't quite know why they're
saying that, because (laughing)
HH: You're not coming back soon. All right.
MS: I'm not...that's certainly something
that...there's no reason for them to be sending that out to
readers.
HH: Oh, except to get the readers to go away
for a while. Let's turn to international affairs, but beginning
in the domestic side. Yesterday, there came word, Mark Steyn,
that the Iraq Study Group had been formed. Now I cannot find
the statute that authorized this, and I suspect it's a John
Warner/Frank Wolfe gambit. But it's got James Baker and Lee
Hamilton, and a bunch of the usual suspects to study the war.
I can't believe we're going to do the 9/11 Commission again.
What's your reaction to the formation of this group?
MS: Well, the 9/11 Commission is the...I
mean, you know me. I'm a foreigner, but I'm pro-American. And
yet I must say, the 9/11 Commission is everything I loathe about
the United States, in that its legalistic, retrospective, showboating
blowhards, pompous people going on TV round the clock. And in
effect, it becomes something in and of itself. It's not just
commenting on something like a play by play guy is, but it actually
changes the course of the something its commenting on. And that's
what's bad about this. You know, Iraq isn't a Broadway play
in previews. The show has opened, and it's on now. So it's too
late to have arguments about this little weak spot in the first
act, and we should get it re-written. The show has opened, and
the responsibility of these people involved in this, James Baker,
Lee Hamilton, Rudy Giuliani, all these people, is that they
should now be saying let's win it, and then have the arguments.
HH: But do you suspect the White House attempted
to stop this? Or are they at this point reeling on so many fronts,
they didn't think they had the ability to say no?
MS: Well, I think there is a danger in the
last couple of weeks that they have lost control of they...not
what's going on in Iraq, but in a sense, the rationale behind
it. Now I would imagine that James Baker, who's very close to
the Bush family, I can't imagine him taking this, if he didn't
at least have a tacit approval from the Bush family. But at
the same time, I think this is an example of just what we don't
need with Iraq. We do need a refreshing renewal of war rhetoric,
but we don't need to argue, you know, have a big commission
on where the WMD are and all the rest of it, and all that hooey.
HH: Now speaking about the renewal of war
rhetoric, yesterday, General John Abizaid, commander of United
States Central Command, testified before the Senate Armed Services
Committee. It's available on the web. It is hard-hitting. It
is actually fierce, and quite unsparing in the protrait that
he paints of al Qaeda, and what they will do. And then today,
the National Security strategy comes out, which is equally unsparing
about Iran and the necessity of defensive action against them,
if they refuse to abandon this. Is this what you're talking
about, Mark Steyn? Getting back to basics on the stakes?
MS: Absolutely. I think we have to take these
guys at their word. You know, the fact of the matter is that
Saddam behaved as if he had weapons of mass destruction. And
the basis of American policy in this world should be that if
you go around claiming to have weapons of mass destruction,
and threatening to use them as the Iranians are currently doing,
then it shouldn't be a matter whether you're just bluffing or
not. We have a responsibility to take you at your word and do
something about it. And that's really the issue in Iran. Iran,
actually, does generally walk the walk as well as talk the talk.
They are people who have blown up Jewish community centers in
Buenos Aires. And it's hard to, even by the biggest stretch,
it's hard to say that's a legitimate grievance because of Israeli
occupation of Palestine. I mean, they are people with a long
reach, and a 25 year history of extra-territoriality. Why would
they have nuclear weapons if they didn't, at the very minimum,
intend them for serious nuclear blackmail?
HH: Let's turn to the domestic side of the
attack on national security. Russ Feingold wants to censure
the President. How should the GOP in the Senate respond, Mark
Steyn?
MS: Well, I would very much hope that the
only reason he's doing this is because Karl Rove has opened
up a big bank account in the Cayman Islands for him, because
it's hard to see how this can be of any advantage to the Democrats.
It's amazing to me. Just as they've found this sort of rather
shrill opportunist bit of good news for them on the Dubai ports
deal, where they found a national security angle that somehow
in crude political terms worked for them, then they go and blow
it all back to...Russ Feingold, basically demanding that we
censure the President for eavesdropping on al Qaeda phone calls.
There is no good that can come for the Democratic Party out
of that, and if Russ Feingold wants to pursue it, to shore himself
up with the party base, good luck to him, because it's only
going to make things worse for Hillary Clinton. Hillary will
have to run to the left to avoid him peeling off significant
support for her.
HH: But do you think Bill Frist will be successful
in pushing this through the Judiciary Committee, onto the floor
for a debate, and should he?
MS: Yes, I think he should, because I think
every time the Democrats come up with this joke...these joke
talking points, censure, impeachment, withdrawal from Iraq,
timetable for withdrawal now, we need to set a timetable for
withdrawal on April 17th, I think you should call them on it,
and say fine, let's get it to a vote, and let's see how many
of you, how many of you trinners and weather vane politicians,
the John Kerry's and all the rest of them, how many of you are
actually prepared to put your vote where your party's big mouths
are.
HH: Well put. Now I want to close with a
cultural question. The Rock And Roll Hall of Fame had its induction
this week. James Lileks has been on this program defending,
and will be later again, Black Sabbath and Sex Pistols, as pretty
much the summit of American culture. Your reaction to the Rock
and Roll Hall of Fame as a general proposition, Mark Steyn,
and if you have any thoughts on this year's inductees?
MS: One of the most disgusting examples of
the bloated federal budget is that federal money goes to the
Rock and Roll Hall of Fame.
HH: Oh, I didn't know that.
MS: And if rock and roll is not even self-supporting,
nothing in America is.
HH: Mark Steyn, always a pleasure. I will
put my note to the Sunday Telegraph's editor, and call him a
man of not great precision or truth when he's communicating
with his e-mailers. Talk to you again next week, Mark
Steyn.
End of interview.
Posted at 4:09PM PST
Lileks: No
blue ribbons, lots of Scott Tissue, and how Peshawar, Pakistan
did nothing musically for America's Dan Peek.
HH: Vile slander issued from my mouth an
hour ago at this very time, a horrific sliming of James
Lileks for being late and out of touch, when in fact, only
three days earlier, he had told Producer Duane he would be here
at this hour (sigh - RB). Oh, James, I am sorry.
JL: You know, it's unusual, because now my
daughter thinks it's completely normal to turn on the radio
and have the man in the radio say I suppose Lileks is just coming
back from Chuck E. Cheeses.
HH: (laughing)
JL: Which is precisely what we were doing.
She thinks now that the radio somehow narrates her entire life,
and she's going to be so disappointed when she...
HH: Well, of course it does. Now James, you
must tell me a little bit about the snow conditions there. We
were worried about the garage door. Have there been any accidents?
JL: (laughing) No, as a matter of fact.
HH: All right.
JL: I no longer need worry about that, because
I've installed one of those devices that emits a loud shriek
if you back into the door. I have a camera that tells me what's
behind me, and I also removed the door.
HH: All right. Very good.
JL: No problems.
HH: Now I would like to discuss both matters
cultural and political with you. I want to begin with the Iraq
Study Group.
JL: Yes.
HH: I asked Mr. Steyn about this earlier.
He agreed with me that this is a damnable bad idea. What say
you, James Lileks?
JL: I think it's a tremendous idea, Hugh.
I think this is the commission that's finally going to win the
war.
HH: (laughing)
JL: You know, we've all been waiting for
them to step up to the plate and I think what really worried
me at first was whether or not it was a blue ribbon commission.
I didn't hear anybody mention the color of the...
HH: There were no blue ribbons.
JL: I didn't hear any mention of the color
of the ribbon. You know, it could be one of those chartreuse
ribbon commissions, which just doesn't dig deep enough. But
I think this is going to be the one. I think if we take this
commission, and we strap them all with about 50 pounds of Semtex
and drop them in Tehran, there's a good shot they're going to
have an effect.
HH: All right. Number 2. Today, it's announced
that Ted Kennedy has successfully pursuaded Republicans on the
Judiciary Committee to sign on to the McCain-Kennedy immigration
bill. I know you're not really a big anti-illegal immigration
fellow. You just leave that one alone. But politically speaking,
would this be the stupidest move of the past four years? Or
merely one of many bad moves by the Republicans?
JL: Merely one of many. There are just so
many. This is one of those arguments that is infuriating, because
when you start to talk about illegal immigration, immediately,
everybody then assumes that you're talking about immigration
period. And then you spend all of your time talking with your
leftist friends about how the fact that you don't really mind
if smart and capable people come into the country. It is an
argument that's just going to generate more heat, and the Republicans
will never really look good on this, because to the other side,
they're just racists anyway, who will want them to pick their
oranges and grapes, as we're told.
HH: Thank you. Now, Number 3. Laura Lee Donoho
is a very fine blogger at the Wide
Awake Cafe. But you have scared her.
JL: How so?
HH: Because you wrote about Alfred Hitchcock's
The Birds in the context of the Avian Flu, and that creeped
her out. And frankly, it creeps me out, too.
JL: (laughing) I did no such thing. When
did I do that?
HH: She said...
JL: When you write 14 columns a week, you
sort of forget what you've said.
HH: Well, something about Bay tuna.
JL: About what?
HH: Bay tuna and the Bird Flu.
JL: Good Lord, this...Oh! No, no, no. This
goes back to the remarks that were made by a government official
a couple of days ago, saying that when you go to the grocery
store, and you buy three cans of tuna, you might want to buy
a fourth one and tuck it under the bed. That was the column
that I wrote for Newhouse, also in the Screedblog,
about whether or not you can depend on the government to help
you, should the Bird Flu strike. It was a sort of semi-annual
Bird Flu column, and I'd like to keep it at the semi-annual
phase, which is...
HH: But you know it's coming.
JL: Yes, I do. But I don't know whether or
not it's going to mutate. I mean, they always say that if the
Bird Flu mutates into something that could affect humans, the
effects would be catastrophic. That's true. And if the human
body mutated so that oxygen was suddenly toxic, that would be
very bad as well.
HH: But people...
JL: We'll cough up that quart of phlegm when
we get to it.
HH: But you remember pig flu, or whatever
they called that flu...
JL: Swine Flu.
HH: Swine Flu.
JL: Right.
HH: And you remember Y2K.
JL: Yes, I do.
HH: The panic people can't always be wrong.
(laughing)
JL: (laughing) No, of course they can't.
Listen, I'm the stockpiling kind of guy. I have enough...
HH: You've got a tunnel in your house, for
goodness sakes.
JL: I've got a bunker under there. I have
enough Scott
Tissue that if we should not only be quarantined for six
months, we're fine if we have dysentery. So I'm not worried
about that. I tend to err on the side of stockpiling and being
very careful about this. But I'm not going to freak out until
people all over the world start to get it. And at that point,
you know, kid's coming out of school, we're wearing face masks
around the house, and all the chickens get slaughtered.
HH: All right. Now I have a business question.
The Fetching Mrs. Hewitt, while I was off in Colorado in the
middle of my vacation, took in a performance by David
Barry.
JL: Yes.
HH: He did two hours of stand-up.
JL: Yes.
HH: Have you ever done anything like that?
JL: Oh, no. No, I haven't. No, I just confine
myself to babbling on the radio, when I had my own show, and
doing the Podcast. But Dave's very good at that. Dave is an
absolute natural. He's...
HH: But I think you could do that.
JL: Well, you know, put me on...I would like
to join his band, but of course, he has a band that always seems
to be out of town when I...
HH: But humorists who are funny are actually
quite rare. I mean, Garrison Keillor gets paid to do that, and
he's not funny.
JL: That's right. He writes a newspaper column,
incidentally. And I think when people signed up to get the column,
they were hoping for some of that Keilloresque, small-town whimsy?
HH: Yeah.
JL: And they're getting columns about why
it's necessary to impeach Bush, which I don't really think is
what they bargained for.
HH: It's not what they wanted, no. They wanted
Erma Bombeck with a Mid-Western drawl.
JL: Well, most humorists in person are just
sort of dour, miserable creatures.
HH: Okay, last subject, I hesitate to return
to it, Rock and Roll Hall of Fame.
JL: Yeah, and you told Mark Steyn that I
believed that the Sex Pistols and Black Sabbath were the apogee
of American culture. Thanks, Hugh.
HH: That's how I understood your remarks
from Tuesday.
JL: Yeah, thanks, Hugh.
HH: Now you do support the induction of the
Sex Pistols, right?
JL: I absolutely do. Horrible band, couldn't
play their instruments, crucial to what punk rock became in
'76-'77.
HH: Well then, if you want them in the Hall
of Fame, then you think they're at the summit.
JL: I don't want anybody in the Hall of Fame.
I think a V For Vendetta movie should be made, in which the
entire thing is dynamited on general principle.
HH: Are the Carpenters in the Hall of Fame?
JL: If they are, then they're right next
to the Herb Alpert...
HH: Well, Herb Alpert got in because he was
impresario music.
JL: Everybody's going to be in it at some
point. Barry Manilow's going to be in it.
HH: Well, of course.
JL: Some little kid with a Casio keyboard
who put out one little cassette tape in 1984 is going to be
in it.
HH: Have you been there?
JL: No, I've not. I've not been to...
HH: Have you any interest at all?
JL: None. None whatsoever.
HH: All right. Now the question I asked on
Monday is, if any Rock and Roller were to write their memoir,
which one would you read.
JL: That's a fascinating question, he says,
stalling. I don't know. I'd like to read Elvis Costello's, because
he's a very smart man when it comes to music, and he's also
a bit of a wanker when it comes to a man. So I'd like to know
how he reconciled the two. Usually, they have no problem. He's
sort of the Woody Allen of the punk rock scene.
HH: I'm reading Dan Peek of America's memoir.
JL: Of America?
HH: Yeah.
JL: Good Lord. If it's anything like the
music, it's just one vowel that goes on for 14 pages.
HH: But know this. At the age of 14, he was
taking 12 hour truck rides from Peshawar, to the remote areas
of Pakistan, to play gigs with his brother and a couple of G.I.'s.
JL: Remarkable how that informed his music,
didn't it?
HH: (laughing)
JL: To the tune of zero.
HH: (laughing) Lileks, thank you. www.lileks.com.
It's true. This guy, before...you should just read...it's wild.
He's driving around, all over the places that no American would
be caught in, in a thousand years now, in the first chapter.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:58PM PST
Orange! Grape!
Orange! Grape! Orange! Grape!
03-16orange-grape.mp3
HH: Earlier today, if you're just tuning
in, I told you about a story
in the Rocky Mountain news. Representative Tom Tancredo
and Luis Gutierrez engaged in a nasy exchange after a CNBC show
yesterday, and the report says Gutierrez, who was visibly upset,
began to scream at Tancredo, "Have you ever eaten an orange?
A Grape," an apparent reference to illegal farm workers.
He then repeated the same phrase several times as Tancredo tried
to answer, "An Orange, a grape, an orange, a grape, an
orange, a grape." Joining us now to add more light on this
orange grape controversy is Will Adams, press secretary to Tom
Tancredo. Hi, Will. How are you?
WA: (laughing) I'm doing well, Hugh. How
are you doing?
HH: Do you have this on video?
WA: Oh, gosh, I really wish I did. (laughing)
I really wish I did, because the story, even though it's accurate
in the Rocky, doesn't quite do it justice. You should have been
there to see both the physical signals that Gutierrez gave off,
and the inflection. I don't know if I will do it justice, either.
HH: Was his voice high-pitched at this point?
WA: Oh, my gosh. Well, let me walk you through
it very briefly.
HH: Okay.
WA: They were on CNBC's
Power Lunch, and as often happens, you know, it get a little
bit heated. But my experience is in the past, you know, two
members get heated, there's a bit of theatricality to it when
you're on TV, and then afterwards, they kind of slap each other
on the back and say hey, colleague, let's go do lunch, or something
like that.
HH: Yup.
WA: Well, this time was an exception to that.
We showed up about 30 seconds late. Gutierrez gets on there,
does his spiel, Tancredo does his spiel, back and forth. We
end it, and Gutierrez makes what I thought was a friendly and
pretty funny joke, saying, "Hey, look. The immigrant shows
up on time, the gringo shows up late, and you wonder why we
get the jobs." So I kind of laughed, and Congressman Tancredo
laughed a little bit. Tancredo asked him, "So are you an
immigrant?" And he goes, "Yes, yes. My family immigrated
here from Mexico, etc." By the way, as an aside, he actually
was born in Chicago in the 1950's, so he himself is not an immigrant.
But that's neither here nor there.
HH: Okay.
WA: So anyway, we're walking pretty slowly.
Gutierrez has some sort of cast on his leg, and we're going
around this rotunda. Mind you, we are in the House office building
where most of the visitors come to visit. So you've got Mom
and Pop, and kids on vacation taking pictures and so on, and
hearing all of this. So Gutierrez starts walking away, he goes,
"Tancredo, have you ever been to a restaurant?" And
Tom goes, "Huh? Excuse me?"...kind of perplexed.
HH: (laughing)
WA: Gutierrez then, and this is where I can't
do justice, and I don't think radio can. He kind of squints
his eyes, and takes his shoulders up a little bit, and goes,
"You mean with those illegal aliens who are wiping your
dishes? How can you eat from those plates?" Tom goes, "Well,
hold on for a second." And just as he was saying that,
Gutierrez says, "Have you ever had an orange? Or a grape?"
HH: (laughing)
WA: Congressman Tancredo, again perplexed,
looks at him and goes, "Uh, what do you mean?" (Gutierrez),
"An orange? A grape? An orange? A grape? An orange? A grape?
An orange? A grape?"
HH: (laughing)
WA: And so on and so forth. I swear I haven't
seen that since I was in 3rd grade on a lunch break or what
have you. So at this point, it escalates a little bit, and Gutierrez
calls him a racist and a bigot, and starts to walk away. And
of course, Tom, not one to take a punch sitting, walks after
him and says, "Hold on for a second," and taps him
on the shoulder as he's walking away. Gutierrez says, "Get
your hands off me," in a very raised voice. Again, mind
you, this place is a marble interior, so this thing's echoing
for the entire area with all these kids, (laughing), and there's
children and families coming in. "Get your hands off me.
Walk away, Tancredo." And Tancredo says, "I will not."
And then Gutierrez then proceeds towards the elevator bank with
his three staffers in tow. Mind you, I'm with another staffer.
We have Gutierrez'...
HH: It could have been a rumble!
WA: Yeah!
HH: It could have been like the Jets and
Sharks.
WA: Well, we look at each other, Gutierrez'
gal looks at me, her eyebrows are raised, and (laughing) oh
my gosh, because at this point, they're about the same height,
and they are, I swear, nose to nose, about six inches apart.
And Gutierrez is angry and, you know, he's cussing, and he goes
towards the elevator. And so we have to go down the stairs.
We're exiting...you know, there's only one exit to this particular
side of the building. And Gutierrez holds the door open for
his staffer, and says, "hey, hurry up before the racist
gets in."
HH: Oh!
WA: So the elevator door shuts, and I sit
there with Tom, and we're walking down the steps, and I'm like
oh my gosh. And you know, Tom's pretty shaken up at this point.
He's never seen an adult...well, he may have seen an adult act
like that, but I have never seen one act like that. So we're
walking down the stairs. It turns out that Gutierrez is only
going down one floor. He's taking the elevator because of his
leg.
HH: Oh, lovely.
WA: So just as he's getting off the elevator,
we're about five paces behind him down the stairs. And we have
to both exit the same exit to the exterior. He goes, he opens
up the door for his staffers, "Hey, hurry up, hurry up
before the KKK comes." And Tom restrains himself, we go
outside, and we're taking a right, he's taking a left, but he
stops, and supposedly is talking to his staffers, but you can
tell he's aiming this at Tancredo. And he's looking over at
us, and shouts at us, he says, "You know, I almost decked
him, but then I thought to myself, what if I blankety-blank
kicked his blankety-blank." (laughing)
HH: Now tell me something. We've only got
20 seconds left, Will Adams. How old is Luis Gutierrez?
WA: He was born in the 50's, so you know,
he must be...
HH: Well, he's my age.
WA: Yeah, exactly.
HH: How old is Tom?
WA: He's in his early 60's. Don't tell him...
HH: You know, middle-aged men should never
fight. It's just not a good thing. Middle-aged men should not
fight or yell at each other. Will, I appreciate the blow by
blow. And if there's a Part 2 of Grape-Adam/Adam-Grape/Orange-grape/Grape
whatever, I want it here on the Hugh Hewitt Show. I want to
set up Round 2. Gutierrez-Tancredo: The rumble in the jungle
should be here on the Hugh Hewitt Show.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:30PM PST
Frank Gaffney's
sobering trip to France, and his reservations about the coming
Iraq Study Group.
HH: Now joined by Frank Gaffney, he of the
Center For Security Policy, www.centerforsecuritypolicy.org,
and of Warfooting.com,
and a book by the same name, just back from France land. Hello,
Frank.
FG: Hello, Hugh.
HH: What took you to France?
FG: The Center For Security Policy co-sponsored
a conference with an organization called the Institute for Defense
of Democracy, a very impressive, courageous, small, young organization
in France trying to fight against Islamo-facism, and the anti-Semitism,
and other trials and tribulations that are increasingly evident
in France today. And we put on an all-day conference to address
those topics, and what they portend, not just for France, but
for the free world.
HH: Interesting. I'm sure that was planned
long and in advance, but of course, France has been riveted
and revulsed by the torture/murder of a young Jewish man, by
some of the Islamo-facists. Did that come up in the course of
your deliberations?
FG: Yeah, it was very much on people's minds.
And Hugh, I must tell you, that in the course of the conversations,
both during that day and on the margins of the meetings, even
I, who in our book, War Footing, talked about how far gone Europe
is, and how necessary it is for us at this point, basically,
to try to salvage what we can of it, which is basically sort
of what Rumsfeld calls the New Europe, the countries of the
former Eastern part that were under the Soviet's domination
for so long, and Britain. But even I, I must tell you, was unprepared
for how really grim things look. And you know, we had people
talking with real trepidation about the 1930's returning in
a fashion that few could have seemed to imagine at that time.
HH: You know, Frank, in October of 2003,
Encounter Books published The
Return of Anti-Semitism, by Gabriel Schoenfeld. And I talked
about it at the time, but no one really believes it. The modern
world has trouble believing that the sort of viciousness and
virulant anti-Semitism that marked the 30's could be back, but
it's back, and it's in France.
FG: Yeah, and it's not confined to the Islamo-facists.
This was one of the really stunning things, is that it appears
that the many of the larger population are now feeling unconstrained
any longer by memories of the past, or any sense of morality
for that matter, and are indulging in this sort of thing, which
may well, as you say, have contributed to this brutal murder
of a young man who is Jewish. Though the perpetrators were seemingly
of this Islamo-facist stripe, the attitudes towards this attack,
and what it portends, do speak a larger anti-Semitic phenomenon
than I certainly would have believed possible.
HH: Well now, I want to talk to you a little
bit, Frank, not just about Europe, but also about what happened
here. And we can come back to Europe in the weeks ahead. But
yesterday was announced an Iraq Study Group. Have you had a
chance to see this yet?
FG: Well, I've seen some reporting on it.
HH: Headed by James Baker and Lee Hamilton,
Rudy Giuliani is on it, Alan Simpson is on it, Sandra Day O'Connor
is rumored to be joining it, Chuck Robb, just some of the usual
suspects. And I'm dumbfounded that not long after the 9/11 Commission,
and the politicization it brought with it, it looks like we're
set to go around again on this. What's your reaction?
FG: I must say, I'm not wildly enthusiastic
about Congress constantly contracting out its oversight responsibilities
to unelected, unaccountable people, some of whom have, as in
the case of this commission, held senior positions in the U.S.
government in the past. But this particular lineup, with the
possible exception of former Mayor Giuliani, is pretty much
the usual suspects, who have been assembled for the purpose,
it appears, of giving a pretty predictable critique of what
President Bush has been trying to do, and is doing, with the
liberation of Iraq and the efforts to try to help bring a non-status
quo outcome, both to that effort in Iraq, and to the Middle
East more generally, something that in my experience, the usual
suspects, the establishment, if you will, has always regarded
with antipathy.
HH: But Frank, what could they possibly say?
One of two things. Either they will say this is the only thing
we can do, what the realists believe like you and me, and then
it will not be worth a dime in the media. It will be ignored.
Or they can critique what we've done, in which case it will
be the most important study of all time. This is all too predictable.
FG: It is, and in fact, I think that Option
A is predictably out of the question, so what we really have
to look forward to is another salvo being leveled at the administration,
including from Republicans, that will further, I'm afraid, undermine
the President, and the sense we desperately need to impart to
our adversaries, that we are in fact committed to seeing this
thing through, and have every intention not only to stay the
course, but to prevail with the Iraqi people.
HH: But do you know...they said it's got
$1.3 million in funding. Did you ever see anything about this?
A proposal? Frank Wolfe and John Warner are mixed up in it,
but it just came out of nowhere, and I'm just surprised that
it got through without opposition from serious people.
FG: Well, I'm afraid it's $13 million, at
least according to what I've seen.
HH: Oh, my gosh.
FG: So it's considerably more than that.
And no, it may have appeared in Frank Wolfe's musing, or perhaps
even in some report language on an Appropriations subcommittee
mark-up. But the first I heard of it was when it was sprung
upon us. And again, it has become all to common, and I have
high regard for Frank Wolfe, by and large. I think he's done
an awful lot of very courageous and important things. This particular
one might even have been an important and courageous thing,
had it been something that involved people that are going to
look at this a little bit more rigorously.
HH: Serious people. Frank Gaffney, we're
out of time. I'll talk to you again next week.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:00PM PST
Wall Street
Journal's Bret Stephens on Israeli politics at a crossroads.
HH: Joining me now on the Hugh Hewitt Show,
Bret Stephens of the Wall
Street Journal. Bret, welcome back. Good to have you on
the program.
BS: How are you doing, Hugh?
HH: Good. Let's talk first, the Israeli elections.
Kadima has fallen recently in some of the opinion polling I've
seen. Any doubt in your mind, though, that they will still be
forming a government in early April?
BS: Well, the last poll that was taken in
the last couple of days following this raid on the prison in
Jericho, and the seizure of these six prisoners wanted for the
killing of an Israeli minister, have Kadima up as high as 43
seats, which would be just about what the Likud had after Sharon's
landslide victory in January, 2003. So with about just over
a week to go before the election, I think there's no doubt that
Kadima is going to win, and probably win big. A bigger question
is who's going to pull in second, whether it will be Benjamin
Netanyahu's Likud, or the the Labor Pary of Amir Perez.
HH: Does that have any significance, who's
second? Is that the formal opposition, as in Great Britain?
BS: No, it's hugely significant, because
I don't think...it's been more than a generation, if ever, in
fact, when a party in Israel has had an absolute majority in
the Knesset, that is in the Israeli parliament. So all parties
ultimately have to form some kind of coalition. And during the
years when Sharon was prime minister, he sometimes had coalitions
with some of his allies on the right, and sometimes he was in
coalition with his biggest opponent. That's why Shimon Peres,
the traditional Labor leader, though not this time, was in and
out of Sharon's government as foreign minister for a period
of time. It's part of the nature of Israeli politics that many
of the smaller players will have seats in the government.
HH: Now who has run a good campaign? Who
has distinguished themselves? Or has this been under the shadow
of the coma in which the prime minister rests?
BS: Yeah, I would say that it really...this
is a campaign that has kind of moved forward on the sort of
intertial energies of Sharon's legacy in terms of his popularity,
his legacy, the withdrawal from Gaza, the disengagement plan.
And Olmert is still cruising on that legacy. I don't think that
respectively, his campaigning has really had any real effect
on Israeli attitudes, except, I think, to reassure voters that
Olmert is politically in Sharon's mold, if not personally. The
real jockeying has been, as I said, between the Labor and the
Likud Party, where neither candidate has distinguished themself.
The head of the Labor Party is now the...is a guy by the name
of Perez, Amir Perez, not as distinct from Shimon Peres, an
old time Labor leader, very much in the socialist mold, and
with a base in Israel's labor movement, but nothing beyond that.
And Benjamin Netanyahu, the head of the kind of remain of what
remains of the Likud, of Ariel Sharon's Likud Party, hasn't
done particularly well for himself, either. He's been unable
to kind of break out from the 15-20 seat margin that he's expected
to win.
HH: Does this mean eclipse for Netanyahu?
Or simply an extended run on the sidelines?
BS: Well look, my experience in Israeli politics
is it's always foolish to rule anyone out. You know, Sharon
was ruled out as a serious political figure for a long time
before he came sort of out of nowhere and took the prime ministership,
and became probably one of the most significant prime minsters
in Israeli history. People talk about a comeback for Ehud Barak,
the last of the Israeli prime ministers during the peace process.
He suffered a humiliating defeat to Sharon in 2001, but he's
still in the picture, so it's foolish to rule people out. That
being said, Netanyahu has consistently played a bad hand in
Israeli politics. I mean, I know he cuts a brilliant figure
when he's on CNN, or other talk shows. He's a rhetorically,
very astute guy. But in the context of Israeli politics, he's
been much less successful, and he very badly damaged himself
prior to Israel's withdrawal from Gaza where he was, as finance
minister, he supported the government position in a succession
of votes, right up until the very end, and then pulled out at
the very last minute. And so, in doing that, he seemed to lack
both a sense of principle as well as a sense of loyalty. And
he did himself immense damage. As I said, I hesitate to make
predictions, but I would be surprised to ever see Benjamin Netanyahu
as prime minister again.
HH: Now let's switch to the events of this
week, the raid on the Jericho jail, the capture of the six terrorists
charged with either actually conducting the assassination of
a former Israeli cabinet member, or assisting in it. What did
that tell you about Olmert?
BS: Well, I mean, I don't think people are
suggesting that the move was essentially political, but it wasn't.
It was dictated by the suggestion of the new Hamas prime minister,
Haniya, that he would let these guys go, a suggestion that was
seconded, unbelievably and distressingly, by the Palestinian
president Mahmoud Abbas, who becomes a more discreditable figure
by, basically by the day. These are significant prisoners. They've
killed an Israeli cabinet member in November, 2001, and when
Israel invaded the West Bank and surrounded Arafat's compound
in April of 2002, Arafat had these guys in his basement. And
it was one of the chief demands of Israel that they either be
surrendered, or faced some kind of justice. And Israel only
withdrew its forces from Ramallah, from the Palestinian territories,
after an international agreement where a kind of trial was held
for these guys, and they were put in a prison in Jericho under
international monitoring. There have been American and...unarmed
American and British troops in Jericho, about 20 of them, ever
since 2002. I mean, these are very much wanted men in Israel,
and I think that Olmert really had no choice following the suggestion
that they would be freed, and the British and American monitors
would withdraw. He really had no choice but to go after them.
Obviously, it's helped his standing, politically. It's helped
him look tough, but I don't think that it was basically a political
decision.
HH: I'm talking to Bret Stephens of the Wall
Street Journal editorial page, long time editor of the Jerusalem
Post, and that brings me to my last set of questions, Bret.
Stepping back from the elections, and the event of the week,
Hamas' takeover has been sort of rolling along here for a number
of months now. People know what's coming. What's the mood in
Israel about what is going on there?
BS: Well, the whole logic of disengagement
was to stop caring, I guess, as much as Israelis did during
the period of the peace process, for what was going on, the
internal dynamics of Palestinian politics. And most Israelis,
certainly those on the right, but also, I think, the broad center
of the electorate, has basically written off the Palestinians
as peace partners, as people who are as a government that's
serious about playing its part in tamping down and eradicating
the terrorist elements within it. So I don't think that the
Hamas...that the election of Hamas had the kind of shock effect
that some people expected that it would. I mean, Likud very
much hoped, the Likud of Benjamin Netanyahu very much hoped
that the election of Hamas would galvanize Israelis to its side,
that it would be a kind of proof or evidence that the withdrawal
of Gaza by Israel, by the settlers, hadn't moderated Palestinian
politics, but had in fact, made it that much more fanatic. What
Israel polls are telling you is that that message didn't really
wash. Israelis have made, I think, a very shrewd, if depressing,
judgment about the current condition of Palestinian society,
Palestinian attitudes, Palestinian politics. But the difference,
really, between Hamas in power and Yassir Arafat's Fatah in
power, is not very great. Both were committed to terrorism,
both engaged in acts of terrorism, and ultimately, the only
real difference was of nuance. Fatah pretended to be committed
to a peace process, which everyone knew it wasn't committed
to, and Hamas, to its credit, has...I don't want to credit them
seriously, but in a sense, Hamas has been...has had truth in
its advertising. They have been more honest in their absolute
rejection to a peace process, and their opposition to Israel's
right to exist than Fatah has been. But Israelis aren't easily
fooled, and there really isn't a shade of difference between
the two groups.
HH: All right, a last question. There have
been some statements by previously ranking members of the Israeli
military, and in and around the government about Iran. What
is your sense of what Israel is prepared to do concerning that
nuclear adventurism?
BS: Well, Iran is an existential threat to
Israel. Not only has Ahmadinejead, the president, threatened
to wipe Israel off the map, but that's a statement that has
been repeated by the supreme leader of Iran, the Ayatollah Ali
Khamenei. And so obviously, the Israelis have to take the threat
very seriously. That being said, Israel's ability to strike
Iran is less than people suppose. People of course remember
Israel's destruction of Iraq's nuclear plant at Osirik in 1981.
But that was...I mean, that was a complicated operation. But
it ultimately involved sending a fleet of F-16's to one site,
in the desert, near Baghdad, destroying the site, then coming
back. With Iran, you're dealing with dozens of...at least a
dozen sites, if not more, hardened, often underground. And Israel
really doesn't have the kind of military capability to launch
the sorts of sustained military strikes that would really be
required to effectively degrade, if not destroy, the Iranian
nuclear program. The only country that really is in a position
to do that, if it should come to it, is the United States. And
I think it would be very foolish for American policy makers
to lull themselves into thinking that the Israelis will take
care of a problem that isn't Israel's alone. It's really the
world's, as well as the United States'.
HH: Bret Stephens, a very somber way to end,
but I appreciate the update. We'll chat with you hopefully after
the election, looking forward to the next five or six years
of Israeli government. Bret Stephens of the Wall
Street Journal, former editor of the Jerusalem Post, thank
you.
BS: All the best.
End of interview.
Posted at 5:55PM PST
Thank you,
Rush Limbaugh callers.
It's always nice to get mentioned on the
Limbaugh program, even if it is by a caller. It's like a comedian
getting on Carson's show. For those who want to read and hear
John Zogby melt down with Hugh Hewitt, click here.
To see the Zogby military poll questions and demographic information,
click here.
Posted at 11:30AM PST
Return to top
Wednesday,
March 15
John Eastman
on the wisdom, or lack thereof, of the new panel looking into
the prosecution of the Iraqi phase of the War On Terror.
HH: I'm joined on the Hugh Hewitt Show by
John Eastman, professor of law at Chapman University law school,
my colleague there, but not by Erwin, because I switched up
the time, and Erwin couldn't adjust. I'm sorry about that, but
earlier, we had the majority leader on, and we had to replay
that. Thank you for being there.
JE: Sure, Hugh.
HH: Now John Eastman, this is fortuitous.
About an hour ago, a release was made in Washington, D.C., announcing
the formation of something called the Iraq Study Group, which
will consist of James A. Baker and Lee Hamilton, former CIA
director Robert Gates, former New York Mayor Rudy Giuliani,
Clinton advisor Vernon Jordan, Clinton chief of staff Leon Panetta,
Clinton Defense Secretary William Perry, Democratic Senator
Chuck Robb, retired, Alan Simpson, a Republican, and allegedly,
Sandra Day O'Connor is rumored to be about to join this as well.
It has been put together under the auspices of the Congressional
Institute of Peace, it will be funded by federal dollars. John
Eastman, as a Constitutional scholar, what do you think of this,
which smacks, I think, of the Committee of Reconstruction from
the Civil War, and the Church Committee, and the 9/11 Commission?
JE: Well, we're still suffering from the
consequences of the Church Committee in the 1970's. I think
it's pretty clear that the reason we have been hit on 9/11,
that the U.S.S. Cole was hit, that a number of incidents is
that we decimated our intelligence gathering operations as a
result of the Church Committee. And this committee is as wrong-handed
as it is unconstitutional for the same reasons. Look, the founders
were very smart, the smartest generation of human beings that
ever walked the face of the Earth, in my mind. And they understood
that they needed to have an executive that was accountable to
the people, but that it could also operate with secrecy and
dispatch in time of war. What this commission is clearly aiming
to do is to second guess military decisions from field commanders,
and executive policy making, out in the light of day, on matters
that need to be kept confidential if we're going to win this
war.
HH: Not only that, it...I'm so glad you said
it's unconstitutional, because that's where I'm headed. Congress
has the right, of course, to conduct oversight hearings. But
when Congress does it, if we don't like what's happening, there
can be reprisal at the ballot box. When they shuffle it off
to a blue ribbon panel like the 9/11 Commission, they are insulating
themselves from any political fallout that the people might
feel about their interference with the war effort. That's what
I resent about this.
JE: Well, that's right. And look, they've
been doing that for sixty years, though. I mean, the entire
advent of the administrative state is based on the theory that
we should shuffle things off to unaccountable people, so that
the politicians don't have to suffer consequences of wrong decisions.
I'd unravel the whole lot of that, and start put policy making
judgments back in Congress, and execution of war making judgments
in the executive, without their interference.
HH: John Eastman, politically, I don't believe
the Bush administration will be able to resist demands made
by this group, especially with Rudy on it. I just can't understand
why Baker and Rudy agreed to this, but you know, some of the
old timers like Simpson and Perry are looking for a last turn
in the sun, like Leon Panetta. They couldn't turn this down
in a hundred years. But what would your advice be to someone
who did not want to have anything to do with them, who is serving
in the executive branch. They have to quit, don't they?
JE: Well, I wouldn't say they have to quit.
I would say they should dust off some old George Washington
letters when Congress tried to interfere with his negotiations
of the Jay Treaty, and demanded accountability and demanded
the President to come up and testify, and that his negotiators
testify about what their instructions were. And he just sent
them a letter saying that it would be inappropriate for the
executive to respond to such overtures from Congress. It would
mean that the executive was not a co-equal branch, but a subservient
of Congress, as if this was some parliamentary system. And he
refused to comply. And the Bush administration should do the
same.
HH: The 9/11 Commission, fresh in our memory,
but I want to remind people of Richard Ben-Veniste, Bob Kerrey,
etc., much circus, much televised hearings, much abuse of the
process. Any reason in your mind that we will not have part
2 of that circus here?
JE: None whatsoever. It was even worse than
a circus, Hugh. The very people that were responsible for the
wrong-headed decisions of the 1990's, the refusal to let the
FBI share intelligence information with the CIA and with the
military, was Jaime Gorelick. She ought to have been called
as a witness, and yet she was sitting on that commission. I
mean, there can be no higher conflict of interest than that.
HH: Is it appropriate for a former Justice
of the Supreme Court to sit on this?
JE: Well, you know, it's appropriate for
a Justice of the Supreme Court to sit on commissions of all
sorts. What makes this inappropriate is not that she's a former
Justice of the Supreme Court, but that the commission itself
is an unconstitutional intrusion by Congress into the operation
of the executive.
---
HH: John Eastman, Russ Feingold has called
for censure of the President. Your opinion on such a motion,
given the Constitution's very explicit discussion on how presidential
misconduct is to be dealt with, if at all.
JE: Well, the Constitution provides for one
route for the Congress, formally, to address the president,
and that's by an impeachment proceeding. Now the Senate and
the House of Representatives can pass resolutions all they want
that have zero effect, and I suppose that's what Senator Feingold
has in mind. But it's kind of beat our chests, a lot of it,
and pass something that has no effect. Now the Congress, and
the U.S. Senate did in the 1800's, pass a resolution of censure
on President Johnson, but it had no effect as well, and was
ultimately repealed a couple of Congresses later.
HH: Now this is a hard question. I want,
and in fact, Senator Frist on this show today guaranteed that
the Feingold censure resolution will be brought to a debate
and a vote on the floor of the Senate, and I'm happy with that.
There are, however, some e-mails arriving, and some votes saying
no, this establishes a precedent which is bad and unconstitutional,
in that they are supposed to wait for the House upon such matters.
Your take on it, John Eastman?
JE: Well, I mean, a resolution of censure
is not an impeachment thing. As I said, it has zero effect.
They could not initiate an impeachment proceeding on their own.
The Constitution specifically requires that to originate in
the House of Representatives, and gets tried in the Senate.
But a resolution, you know, we have resolutions for national
hog day, and we have resolutions for all sorts of things. And
if they want to pass a resolution, or have a vote on a resolution,
you know, however foolish it is, they're free to do that. It's
about all the substantive work they do these days, it seems
to me.
HH: So it'll be a political event, and as
such, you have no serious objection to it, other than on the
merits of course, I'm sure you'll agree with men the NSA surveillance
program was not illegal, the President is not a criminal, and
in fact, he was well within his existing authority.
JE: You know, I've not agreed with everything
the administration has done, but this one they are absolutely
correct on, and Attorney General Al Gonzales, when he went over
there, and was subjected to question about the President it
not above the law, he reminded the Senator on that committee
that neither is the Congress above the Constitution. And what
Congress did with the FISA act was try and intrude on Constitutional
powers that the Constitution specifically gives to the president
of the United States. And for them to have done that is unconstitutional.
For the president not to succumb to the unconstitutional intrusion
on his powers, was the right thing to do.
HH: Now Professor Eastman, earlier today,
Christopher Hitchens, tremendous writer, often right, sometimes
wrong, announced to me, I did not know this, that he's a plaintiff
in the ACLU lawsuit to strike down the NSA program. And his
argument is thus, that even if the authorization for the use
of military force had given the president statutory authority,
that the FISA was subsequently amended so that that amendment,
though it did not deal specifically with the AUMF, or the NSA
program, would have, by virtue of its reauthorization of its
exclusivity provisions, rendered a nullity any authorization
of use for military force expansion of presidential power.
JE: Well, that's clever, but the FISA court
of review, which is the highest court in the land to have considered
the question of the Constitutionality of the FISA's intrustion
on the president's powers, specifically said even if that the
use of force authorization didn't authorize the president to
conduct this, and FISA prohibits it, even if it does that, that
would be unconstitutional intrusion on the president's powers.
HH: I agree with that, and he will actually
concede that point. But he nevertheless wanted to argue but
there's no gainsaying that the president broke the FISA. And
I don't agree with that. I believe there are a couple of ways
to avoid that conclusion, that are in fact the ways that courts
typically work to avoid such conflicts.
JE: Well, they would be making the same argument
that the subsequent FISA amendments somehow by implication restricted
the use of force authorization. But that's exactly the argument
that the White House is making, that the use of force authorization
was...implicitly overruled FISA.
HH: But actually, the use of force resolution
explicitly gives the president everything he needs to go after
the terrorists.
JE: Exactly. But Hitchens and others have
argued that it was only implicit, not explicit, because it didn't
go on to say and we also mean to let them use typical surveillance
techniques, whether FISA permits it or not.
HH: Right.
JE: But look, it has been since time immemorial
that military commanders have had the authority to conduct surveillance
of enemy communications. The notion that this was somehow not
part of the necessary and proper use of force given to the president
by the use of force authorization after 9/11 is really a preposterous
question.
HH: It is, and unfortunately, there will
be no standing to bring this lawsuit, because I would like to
see it actually decided. John Eastman, a couple of quick things.
First of all, the status on the Los Angeles City seal suit,
Los Angeles County suit?
JE: Well, as far as I know, unless something's
happened here today, it's still pending in the 9th Circuit without
any answer. But there's a new suit pending that I'm involved
in down in Long Beach, California. The city has condemned the
Filipino Baptist Fellowship Church to make way for some additional
condos.
HH: They can't do that.
JE: Well, that's what I'm thinking, and I
tried to tell them that at the hearing on Monday, and they just
gave me blank stares, arrogantly refused to answer any questions
about why this was necessary to a valid public purpose, even
a valid public purpose as broadly defined as the Supreme Court
now does.
HH: John, get it before Judge David Carter
in Orange County. He'll slap down...
JE: Well, we're looking at that, and I would
encourage all your listeners to help us out by putting the political
pressure on. Handsoffourchurch.com
is where they can go, and they'll all the phone numbers and
e-mail addresses to complain to.
HH: Handsoffourchurch.com.
And John Eastman, I was teaching this past week the Buckley
V. Vallejo, and paused over Proposition 62 and the case before
the Supreme Court. Are you at all optimistic that the new Court
will simply sweep away Buckley?
JE: Well, yeah, but optimistic is not the
right word. I'm fearful that they will. Buckley's bad enough.
HH: No, I mean...
JE: But there are some provisions in there
that protects...
HH: No, I'm talking about returning to the
original speech, because Kennedy, Scalia and Thomas dissented
in the Buckley progeny. And now they've got two more with them.
Do you think those five might gather around the 1st Amendment?
JE: I don't know. Where was Kennedy on the
McConnell V. FEC case? I'm off the top of my head not recalling.
HH: I'm not either.
JE: Yeah, this is dangerous. The trend of
the Court has been for more restrictions on speech, not less.
And I hope Roberts and Alito will be able to turn it around,
and I just don't see it yet.
HH: I think actually...all right. We'll see.
John Eastman, always a pleasure.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:50PM PST
Christopher
Hitchens' political autopsy of Milosevic, plus his reaction
to the Feingold censure resolution.
03-15hitchens.mp3
HH: Coming up after the break, Majority Leader
Bill Frist joins me to discuss the motion for censure filed
by Russ Feingold, and that's a subject I will also be talking
about with my first guest, Christopher
Hitchens, columnist for Vanity
Fair and for Slate
Magazine, but not before...Christopher Hitchens, welcome
back. Good to have you.
CH: Very nice for you to have me back.
HH: Not before I wanted to talk to you a
little bit about Slobodan Milosevic, whose body arrived in Serbia
today, to be greeted by supporters who kissed his coffin. They
wanted a state funeral. You wrote
on this butcher quite forcefully on Monday. I don't think Americans
quite understand who he is or what he did. How would you, just
to the average American, describe him on the scale of thugs
over the last 100 years?
CH: Well, that's an interesting question,
because though he's one of the foulest of them, and ruined his
own country as well as his neighboring countries, he was in
a way not the kind of dramatic psychopath like Stalin or Hitler
or bin Laden. This was the trials of a completely mediocre opportunist,
a bureaucrat who may not even have believed in Serbian nationalism,
or Serbian Christian orthodoxy, but who just used these things
to move from being a Communist Stalinoid official to being a
national socialist, to being a facist, and I think was incapable
of considering any feelings other than his own. It's very sad
to see Serbs rallying to him as if he was a symbol of their
country, because they should hate him as Germans should hate
Hitler more than anyone else. It was...the principal victim,
and the first victim of his revolting politics, was their own
country.
HH: Christopher Hitchens, after Tito's death,
was the disillusion of Yugoslavia, and its ultimate savagery
inevitable?
CH: It's disillusion was inevitable, certainly.
And it would have been quite possible for it to desolve peacefully,
and for the larger independent countries like Croatia, Serbia
and so on, and I think Bosnia, too, to eventually seek membership
of the European Union, autonomously, because Tito's constitution
gave the right to any of the Yugoslav republics to secede if
they wanted to. What happened instead was when it broke up,
was Milosevic seized control of the whole of the state, the
whole of the treasury, the whole of the national army that belonged
to everyone, that had been built with everyone's taxes. And
he turned it on anyone who wasn't a Serb in an attempt to create
a greater Serbia, and to destroy the independence, and in one
case, even the reality of the other republics. So it mutated
into a terrible kind of facism, right on Europe's doorstep.
And of course, the Europeans were unable to do anything about
it. I remember it with fantastic shame. I mean, they all picked
sides, the same as they'd done in 1914. The British supported,
generally, the Serbs, as did the French. The Germans supported
the Croats, the Autrians supported the Slovians. It was exactly
like 1914, like the bloodbath.
HH: There were no heroes in this. You write...
CH: Well, yes there was one.
HH: Who was that?
CH: I mean, the United States of America,
because the Europeans having found they could do nothing about
it, they couldn't prevent the near obliteration of great cities
like Dubrovnik and Sarajevo by bombardment, right next to their
own borders, after the fall of the Berlin Wall, they eventually
had to say we can't do a thing. We need the Americans to come
and sort this out. I've never forgotten it, because in all the
discussions you've had since about how we should remember to
placate the Europeans and take their statesmanship into account,
no one ever remembers to point out that they had to come, cap
in hand, to Washington, unfortunately, to the Clinton administration,
which took ages to make up its mind, but eventually did, and
say we can't do this without you.
HH: But in your Slate
piece, you refer to David Owen, Cyrus Vance, Kissinger,
Eagleburger, a parade of people who just said let them slaughter
each other.
CH: Well, these are the people we now with
a laugh call the realists, the people who just said why not
let's let it run and see what happens. Why don't we let it run
until there's ethnic cleansing in every quarter of the Balkans,
and there will be a war which might well drag in the Russians
on the side of the Serbs, and perhaps even the Turks eventually
on the side of Bosnia, if they'd been left completely alone,
and where the possibility existed, if the oldest minority, Muslim
minority in Europe being just simply exterminated. So we would
have begun the 20th Century with a Muslim massacre of the Christian
Armenians, celebrated the middle of the century by having a
German imperialist massacre of the Jews of Europe, and finished
it by having a Christian massacre of the Muslims. That would
have been a great way to wind up the 20th Century. Fortunately,
the United States was on the right side of all these three things.
HH: Now Milosevic's party is down to 22 seats
in a 250 seat parliament, yet they are ecstatic over the return
of his body. What do you see happening in Serbia, in that region,
with our troops firmly placed right in the middle of the Balkans,
although dwindling in number, NATO's still there. What's the
end game, if there is an end game in the Balkans?
CH: Well, gradually, Croatia and Slovenia,
I think I'm right in saying Slovenia's already in the European
Union now.
HH: I don't know, either.
CH: Well, I think I'm practically sure I
am right in saying that President Kucan got them in. It's easier
for them. They're small, they're fairly homogenous, they're
very prosperous, they're right next door to Europe anyway. They
have a common border with the EU. But Croatia's certainly a
candidate member, and will be a full member once it gives up
all its wanted war criminals. The Serbs can't yet qualify, because
they haven't surrendered their two most wanted guys, Generals
Karadzic and Mladic, who were the people responsible for the
mass murder in Bosnia. People laugh that we can't find bin Laden
in some remote part of the Pakistan border, but European NATO
cannot find the two most wanted war criminals right on its own
soil.
HH: Oh, excellent. I haven't heard that point
made before. That's excellent. Now let's turn...
CH: And for much longer, by the way. That's
been a scandal, and someone is protecting them. And if you wanted
me to guess which European country's been helping to do so,
I can probably tell you.
HH: Please.
CH: Well, I'm sorry to pander to the predjudices
to some of your listeners, Mr. Hewitt, but I'm afraid it's the
French yet again.
HH: (laughing) The French. You know, we've
been trying...we've got to get back our friend from Paris Match.
CH: I'm a great Francophile myself, but I
have to say, their politics lately have stunk really badly.
And this is one case where we are morally certain that at one
point, Mladic certainly was about to be caught, and he was tipped
off by a French general.
HH: Oh, that's very interesting. Christopher
Hitchens, let's turn to domestic politics. Russ Feingold filing
a censure motion, MoveOn.org collecting 200,000 signatures in
support of it, Barbara Boxer, titan of the Senate, Tom Harkin,
titan of Iowa, joined her today in calling for the censure.
And yet, it's stuck there. What should the Republicans do with
this?
CH: Well, I actually have a soft spot not
for any of the people you've just mentioned except for Senator
Feingold. He was the only Democrat to vote against stopping
the impeachment trial of President Clinton. It's not remembered
often, but I remember it, because there were many Democrats
who promised they would do or say something, including Lieberman,
if you remember...
HH: Yes.
CH: ...about Clinton's crimes. Feingold was
the only Democrat who actually cast a vote saying no, the trial
has to go on. So I kind of like him, and I should tell you that
I am a plaintiff in the ACLU lawsuit against the NSA and the
Justice Department against warrantless wiretapping.
HH: That's fine. You're wrong, but that's
okay.
CH: I think the...it seems to me that the
FISA law was broken by the President.
HH: Well, an unconstitutional statute has
no applicability, and in any event, would be overridden.
CH: Well, that might well be true. And if
the President wants to say the statute's unconstitutional, then
he should go to the Congress, or the Supreme Court, and ask
for it to be repealed or struck down. Meanwhile, though, it
seems to me it is the law, and my allies in this battle, as
well the other people who joined the ACLU suit, who some of
whom are much more impressive than me, have actually been Republicans
like Congressman...former Congressman Bob Barr, and Grover Norquist,
and so on, saying look, it's really a problem that in a time
of war, the state tends to aggrandize its power in secret, and
we have to be aware of this danger.
HH: But did any of them...I mean, sitting
around and persuading you to join this ill-considered lawsuit,
say to you the authorization of use for military force, as discussed
in Hamdi, does give the President the opportunity not to make
the argument that FISA is, in fact, unconstitutional, though
he could fall back to that. But that is in fact overridden and
made null and void as to warrantless intercepts of al Qaeda,
because that's...
CH: I would say not for this reason, Mr.
Hewitt, because FISA was reworked, and attended to again, and
amended to some extent, after the passage of the authorization
for the use of military force. So it can't be said that the
AUMF trumps FISA. I know this sounds technical, but it's not.
It's important. And Congress has the right to know when it takes
the trouble to amend the law at the President's request, that
he hasn't in the meantime decided to bend or break it on his
own account. There can't be a blank check for presidential authority
in time of war.
HH: Oh, but there was one. I digress. I still
want to go to the censure motion. We'll come back and debate
this again.
CH: Oh, yeah. Okay, well, I think that's
probably silly, because my experience with most of these liberal
left types is that...that may not be true of MoveOn.org and
people like Boxer and so on. But if they're put to it, they
say okay, do you really want this? Are you really prepared to
come up and vote on it now? They tend to melt away.
HH: But do you see what's going on at Daily
Kos and the other websites? They are frothing for this to be
brought forward. Can Democrats refuse their hysterical base?
CH: Well, that's a good question all the
time with them. I mean, they're in a hostage condition, I would
say. They're in a prisoner's dilemma. They know very well that
the people who actually raise the money and form the energetic
base of the party are people who could not possibly get elected
dog catcher anywhere, and may well defeat them again. But they
can't, nor can they afford to tell them to get lost. And this
is a problem for them all the time. I mean, remember, the MoveOn.org
people, if Clinton had done this, which he did with the so-called
effective anti-terrorism death penalty law, which the ACLU said
correctly was the most repressive law published...sorry, passed
by the President who was the worst for civil liberties in living
memory, they would have defended it if it was him as they would
now.
HH: Yup.
CH: It's the sheerest, most bloody awful
partisanship.
HH: Christopher
Hitchens from Vanity Fair, next time we'll get to George
MacDonald Fraser, as our audience needs to know about that.
But thanks for the time.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:01PM PST
Majority
leader Bill Frist's plans for the Feingold censure resolution.
"This is a political
stunt in a time of war, talking to an America that remembers
9/11."
03-15frist.mp3
HH: Joined now by the Majority Leader of
the United States Senate, Tennessee Senator Bill Frist. Senator
Frist, congratulations first on your victory down in Memphis
in the straw poll. I know that that was not that significant,
but it's always better to win than lose.
BF: You know, Hugh, that's the way I billed
it. I said coming in, these straw polls don't mean a thing.
It don't matter, but then after two days of real excitement,
not just about the straw poll, but about our Republican principles,
conservative principles, values, bold leadership by the President,
a lot of activity, a lot of energy, then we had the straw poll.
And then I saw the results and said man, I'm like any other
politician. I love to win. So it was a lot of fun. We had a
lot of energy down there in Memphis, Tennessee.
HH: Now let's get on, Senator Frist, to the
question before the Senate. Russ Feingold has accused the President
of criminal conduct, has called for his censure, the Wall Street
Journal predicts this is the beginning of a campaign of impeachment,
should the control of the House of Representatives be lost in
2006. What's going to happen to the Feingold censure resolution?
BF: Well, Hugh, as you saw the other day,
after his political stunt that he pulled on television Sunday,
which sent a clear signal that he was going to do a little grandstanding,
attacking the President on Monday at 4:00, confronting him directly
on the floor, I said if you want to censure the President, if
you want to make these false accusations, let's take it directly
to the American people, and let's have a vote right now. If
you're going to put censure out there, I will accept your proposal
for a vote, and let's go do it. And with that, there was objection.
And then I basically said well, if you're not going to vote
tonight, let's bring that censure vote up tomorrow afternoon
at 5:30. And once again, they said absolutely no. So where we
are now is that I made a standing offer, and I'm ready to take
it to the floor at any point in time. You've got a party out
there that fought against the Patriot Act, took great pride
in, at a point in time, killing the Patriot Act, a party who
opposes the NSA terrorist surveillance, and who's talking about
cutting and running Iraq. It's time to finally call them on
what we're saying out there, to show the difference between
us and them.
HH: Now Senator Reid commended Senator Feingold,
plus Senators Boxer and Harkin, two Democratic hard left members
of their caucus, agreed with the censure resolution today. So
I'm up to 59. How do you get this to the floor? What's it require?
BF: Well, there are two things, and this
gets down then, in sort of the mechanics of the Senate. I can
got out and just leader to leader say if you're ready to vote
on this, I'm ready. Let's do it right now. Well, that didn't
work. Then I tried a little bit different time, and that didn't
work. I can continue trying that, which I do, and as you see
us talking on the floor as we're moving around between votes.
And then the other thing that I've done is referred it to committee.
And when it goes to committee, there is this process of a markup
of the resolution itself. And it's been referred to committee
now, and that week of March 27th, it should be coming out of
committee, in which case it can be taken directly to the floor.
HH: Does it go to Judiciary, Senator Frist?
BF: It does. It goes to Judiciary, and I
think, Hugh, you also heard Arlen Specter right after I spoke
at 4:00 earlier this week, when they put that censure resolution
out there. And Arlen understands the significance of this, and
he will mark it up, and get it out of committee, and then hopefully,
we'll be able to vote on it.
HH: Let's stay in the tall grass for a moment,
Senator Frist. Obviously, Senator Kyl was our guest yesterday,
a good friend of the program, part of the leadership. He said
look, this is a stunt, we can't let it take too much time away
from what we want to get done. But then I got a tidal wave of
e-mails saying no, stand on that line all Summer if you have
to, quoting Grant. And the question is, do you think the Republicans
on the Judiciary Committee will allow the Feingold motion to
just pass through unaltered, so that it can come to the floor
as he proposed it?
BF: Hugh, I think they will. I've sort of
got mixed feelings. First of all, as I showed the other day,
and as I said openly, this is a political stunt in a time of
war, talking to an America that remembers 9/11. And I'm sitting
here in our nation's capitol right now as we're looking out
on the Washington Mall, recognizing that those three airplanes
really destroyed the spirit of America in so many lives. And
right now, we're still at risk. And while they're out there
attacking the President for partisan, political grandstanding
reasons, the President is out there fighting a War On Terror
to protect the American people. To me, that's in excusable.
And so I think the political stunt end of it bothers me. But
what even bothers me more is the fact that we do have a party
out there of Democrats who did fight to kill the Patriot Act,
who did...are fighting to kill the most powerful program out
there we have today to fight terrorists in this country, to
make us safe. That is the NSA terrorist surveillance program.
And that contrast, America needs to see. They need to see where
we are, where the President is, and where this cut and run mentality
against the Patriot Act, against the most effective law enforcement
tools we have.
HH: More than 200,000 members of MoveOn.org
have signed petitions in just 24-48 hours endorsing this censure
resolution. So I think whether or not it's a stunt, it certainly
is at the center of politics in the United States today, the
paranoid view of what we're doing, and the responsible view.
So I hope you do get that to the floor.
BF: Yeah.
HH: I think that's probably the most important
question of early this year.
BF: Yeah, I think that is the point. It's
two different things. It's a political stunt. But also, it goes
right at the core of the safety and security of the American
people. So it's not just a political stunt we can dismiss. It
is an issue where their tools are such it puts us at greater
danger to a terrorist attack. Our tools are out there to protect
the American people. And there is a bright line there that the
American people need to see.
HH: I just had Christopher Hitchens, excellent
writer with whom I often disagree, though he is often right
on many things. He is of the opinion that the President's NSA
authorization to conduct warrantless surveillance of al Qaeda
contacting their operatives in the United States is illegal,
because it did violate FISA. I believe that's wrong, and I don't
think anything near a majority of Senators believe that's correct,
that they believe the AUMF, in fact, gave the President the
authority to do this. Your take on this, Senator Frist, from
the Senate perspective? Does anyone really believe the President
violated FISA?
BF: You know, it is so fundamental. And again,
I'm one of the eight people who have been fully briefed on this
program. As you know, there's this argument that the Democrats
said we've got to brief everybody on the program. And as I've
said before, if you do that, by definition, you're taking the
playbook that's protecting all of our listeners right now, and
you're giving it to the guys over in Torah Bora, or Osama bin
Laden, or the terrorists. You're giving them the playbook so
they can attack us. And it doesn't make sense. But being one
of those eight people, I can tell you that I know...don't believe,
don't think, but know that this program is lawful, it is Constitutional,
and it is protecting the safety and the American people like
no other program can.
HH: And so if this comes to a vote...is there
even 20...are there even 20 Senators who believe the President
has acted illegally, Senator Frist?
BF: No. Well, you know, I can't say, because
what sometimes they'll do is sort of lock-step, because there
is a real dislike by the Democrats...that's a nice word, for
the President. And so some people will just follow their leadership
and make a statement. But no, I don't think there are 20 Senators
who truthfully would say this program is unlawful today. I mean,
he's the commander-in-chief. We're at war. We passed a resolution,
in a bipartisan way to give him the force to go out and take
down these terrorists. So surely he can listen in on a telephone
call that is, by definition, terrorist with somebody in the
United States.
HH: Well, I compliment you, Majority Leader
Frist, on your determination to get that vote and that debate,
and look forward to watching it and reporting back on it, and
talking with you about it when it begins. Majority Leader Bill
Frist of the United States Senate.
End of interview.
Posted at 4:13PM PST
Return to top
Tuesday,
March 14
New
York Post's John Podhoretz on the Rock N Roll Hall of Fame, and
the politics of the censure resolution.
HH: Lynyrd Skynyrd, Hall of Fame,
Rock 'N Roll division, providing the bumper music to my guest,
John Podhoretz, columnist extraordinaire for the New
York Post, author of Bush
Country and the soon to be published Can
She Be Stopped. When's that coming out, John?
JM: May.
HH: May. All right. John, I'll
be in New York in a couple of weeks. I hope I can drag you over
to the Empire State Building again to do some broadcasting.
JM: You know I'll be there.
HH: Okay, wonderful. John, before
I go to the politics, you're a man of great musical taste and
distinction. What do you make of Black Sabbath, Blondie, Miles
Davis, Lynyrd Skynyrd, The Sex Pistols, Herb Alpert and Jerry
Moss, this year's class of inductees at the Rock And Roll Hall
of Fame?
JM: Well, let's see. Miles Davis
never played Rock 'n Roll, Black Sabbath couldn't play a tune.
And Blondie recorded four sort of good songs. I mean, the interesting
question here is does this suggest that the Rock And Roll Hall
of Fame is now sort of having to go to the minor leagues to fill
itself up?
HH: This is what I've been saying...this
has been my argument, but the Lynyrd Skynyrd fans are attacking
me en masse via e-mails as not knowing anything. It was loud...
JM: Ahh, that's just sentimentality
because of the plane crash. You know it and I know it.
HH: And so I just...
JM: Because if they were so good
when the survivors reconstituted themselves as the Rossington-Collins
Band, they would have done okay, and they didn't, so...
HH: I'm telling you, you've got
to take to the airwaves on this, John, because we have to shut
down induction. We're run out. There's nobody left. Now...
JM: I sort of...when it comes
to Lynyrd Skynyrd, I go with Warren Zevon, who did his own version
of Sweet Home Alabama, which went, "Sweet Home Alabama, play
that dead band's song."
HH: Oh, that's so brutal. I'm
so glad I talk to New Yorkers once in a while, because they add
spice to the show. All right, John. Let's get to the United States
Senate. Russ Feingold, the censure motion. Your column today,
Rich Lowry's column on National Review, the realist-retreatist
divide. On one side, we've got you and Lowry and Christopher Hitches
and Mark Steyn and me and a whole bunch of other people. On the
other side, you've got George Will and William F. Buckley and
Russ Feingold. What is going on in this country?
JM: Well, I think the issue here
is among those who believe as some of us believe, that the notion
of bringing freedom to an unfree part of the world is a realist
strategy with dealing with, and finally winning the War On Terror.
And the problem with the people who have now become skeptics,
not only about Iraq, but about the way the War On Terror is being
conducted, is that they have no answer to how you win. I mean,
it's one thing to sort of kill the bad guys, but at some point,
you, as we learned from the happy conclusion to the Cold War,
you need the possibility of an achieved goal, which is that this
threat will melt away. And George Cannon at the beginning of the
Cold War said if you contain the Soviet Union, it will fall apart
of its own internal contradictions. And those of us who believe
in the Bush freedom doctrine think that if you offer people in
the Muslim world the possibility of living a life on Earth that
has intrinsic value, and is not simply a postponement of a hope
for a better life in paradise, then you have the possibility of
changing the ideological conditions and thereby saving the United
States from the threat of a suicide bomber carrying a weapon of
mass destruction, and detonating it in Times Square.
HH: And if we do not fight this
war realistically, with those stakes in mind, the inevitability,
and I use that word very advisedly, the inevitability of that
attack, I think, is certain, and it's wrong to deny it's certain.
Because if we don't fight it, they will coalesce, they will gather...you
read about the Iraqi plot today? The 421 al Qaeda that were going
to infiltrate one battalion with the idea...
JP: Sure.
HH: That's sophisticated stuff,
John Podhoretz.
JP: Right. Well, it's not just
that. It's...Frank Fukuyama, Francis Fukuyama, whose now turned
against neo-conservatism and all this...I mean, basically, his
line is, and this to me is the only intellectually respectable
line, is that essentially, 9/11 was a fluke, that we have overestimated
the capability of terrorist groups and radical Islamists to strike
at the West and the United States. And that argument is only supported
by the fact that we haven't been hit since 9/11. Well, Fukuyama
could be right. It could be that 9/11 was a fluke. I don't see
how on any rational reckoning of how you deal with threats, that
you can make policy based on that idea.
HH: And it also seems to me...I'm
not accusing Fukuyama of racism. But it also seems to me to allow
the appearance of a third world economy, and a pre-modern garb
and belief systems, and patterns of language to hide technological
sophistication, fervent organization and simply a refusal to be
beaten...you know, suicide...they are very good at terrorism.
JP: Look, I mean, this is what
we know, okay? If the 9/11 strike had been 45 minutes later, 20,000
more people would have been dead in New York. If the people on
Flight 93 hadn't brought the plane down, the Capitol or the White
House would have been destroyed. And if certain lucky things hadn't
happened in Britain, 5,000 people would have been dead in the
underground this July.
HH: And we came very close to
having our government decapitated, and whether or not the Capitol
would have been rebuilt, it's almost certain that the martial
law that would have followed, or whatever happened, would have
convulsed the United States in ways that would have been transfiguring.
JP: Right. So but basically, what
we have here is...I mean, what you can look at this as is, we
went into Iraq, we are seeing that we can't just close our eyes
and snap our fingers and change the world in that respect. And
it's possible that some people were overly optimistic about it.
Certainly some people I knew were probably overly optimistic about
it, and certainly I didn't expect that things would be this brutal
this late. But you live and learn, and the world...you can't...one
of the great jokes is this idea about okay, well you know, we
went into Iraq, but we didn't have a plan for winning the piece,
right?
HH: Yeah.
JP: There is no peace.
HH: Yup.
JP: The war...this is the war.
HH: And it's going to go on a
long time.
JP: The war didn't end. We eliminated
the regime, but the war is still going on.
HH: Before we run out of time,
Russ Feingold introduced a censure motion. Should the Republicans
insist on a vote on it?
JP: Oh, yeah. I think basically
what this is, this is Murtha II. The most responsible and best
thing that happened last year, in last year's politics, was the
Republicans forcing a vote on the immediate withdrawal of troops.
And I think basically, this is a chance for Republicans to say
Democrats, put your money where your mouth is. You're going to
say Bush has done all these terrible things, then censure him.
HH: Let's get to the vote. You're
right. John Podhoretz, always a pleasure. His column today linked
at Hughhewitt.com.
End of interview.
Posted at
11:58PM PST
John
McIntyre from Real Clear Politics 2.0
HH: This is a segment for anyone
in America who has ever had a website, currently has a website,
or is thinking about starting a website, especially anyone whose
livelihood was in any way, shape or form dependent upon a website,
because at some point in your life, you will face the question
of whether or not to redesign it. And especially if it's successful,
you will stare at that prospect with fear gripping your stomach
as though you were walking off of a dark, dark cliff into an abyss.
John McIntyre of Real
Clear Politics just did that. Hello, John.
JM: (laughing) How are you doing,
Hugh? You've aptly described my feelings the last, probably, seven
days to four months. It's been a long process.
HH: Well, as you know, I went
on self-imposed vacation last week. Didn't do any news, didn't
do any blogging, didn't do anything, and hadn't checked RCP until
this morning, and I was stunned what I found, a gorgeous, absolutely
fascinating redesign. But I'm not interested in politics today.
I want to know what went into the thinking of changing something
that was working fabulously well, because Real Clear Politics,
respected by both the left and the right, owns the space. Why
would you mess with it?
JM: Well, it was...the biggest
driver, quite frankly, was the back end software platform issues.
I mean, we were using...this gets a little technical. We were
using a Dreamweaver type software. It was...technologically, it
was almost the equivalent of like a 1958 Chevy, and it just...the
technology changes so quickly, I mean, it was the same technology
when we founded the site in 2000. And I mean, we just had to upgrade
it. And so that was really the driver. So given that we had to
change the platform that we were using, that kind of led to the
whole process of okay, how do we keep the core of what we do,
what people like about it, but also incorporate changes that are
going to help us be more successful?
HH: Now, the color scheme is gone,
and it was garish. I wrote on the blog today that it's always
been my favorite website for political news, analysis and straight
up the middle objective data. But that...you know, you get used
to it like you get used to a migraine, because the colors were
all over the place, and it was just loud and garish tabloid like.
JM: Right, right.
HH: And now it's all clean and
smooth and 2006 like. I mean, did you...do you have any regret
over killing off the garishness? It was Las Vegas in neon. It
was...
JM: Well, it's funny. I had some
advisers, including family members, who suggested that that was
part of the...what was Real Clear Politics. We hired a very good
design firm, Dylan Thompson in New York, who had done some other
media sites, and we were very pleased with their work, and how
they worked us through the process. And it was just a needed change
that we sort of had to do.
HH: Now I'm looking at it. You've
added a resource center, and an opinion buzz tracker. What are
these features?
JM: Well, the resource...and that's
funny you said that. Some of these things were actually on the
other site, but we just didn't do a very good job of sort of promoting
and profiling them. The resource center is an aggregation, daily
aggregation of transcripts of major speeches, debates when they
start to happen, video clips, audio clips. And if you click on
it, we have things from your program, Hugh, and that Radioblogger
puts up, and then also Hardball, Meet the Press, Fox News Sunday,
O'Reilly. So any political junkee type whose interested in what's
on the cable channels, talk radio, President Bush's speeches,
this is where they can get that type of information.
HH: All right. Now that all having
been said, how's the reaction been among the consumers?
JM: Well, I'd say the reaction
has been overwhelmingly positive. I mean, we get lots of people,
probably three to one, four to one positive. People say they love
it. They like the change. You do get a hard core intensity group
of people who...like we've upset them greatly. Probably I'd say
that's maybe 5 or 10%. And I think there's a lot of people who
grew really accustomed to what we did, and it was almost a part
of their life in the sense that they would use the site very regularly.
And I think when you change that up, and this was true for myself,
too, change is hard. And so I think for those people, it's going
to be a period of adjustment. But I think the way that we've done
it is an improvement in that I think we're going to be able to
deliver everything that we were delivering before, and a lot more.
HH: All right. Now talk to me
a little bit about...in terms of your business plan, your roll-out.
Are you going to be adding more original content?
JM: Oh, yeah. Absolutely. That
is definitely part of what we're, what our plan is. And obviously,
that increases and keeps people on the site more. And one of the
things we've been fortunate with is, because of our audience and
our growth, we get a tremendous amount of submissions of people,
and a lot of quality writers want to be profiled and seen on Real
Clear Politics, and that makes it...our number one priority at
all times is to keep the quality first-rate and the best. So we're
not going to sacrifice quality for the sake of linking to things
on our site. But what we're going to try to do is to keep the
same top quality while growing more and more exclusive Real Clear
Politics pieces.
HH: All right. That's enough of
that. Now I've got to get your reaction to the Feingold trap,
and whether or not the Republicans should walk away. Jon Kyl on
this program earlier today suggesting you know, we've got business
to do, it was a stunt, and we've just got to move on. What do
you think?
JM: (laughing) Well, I don't know
who it's a trap for. I mean, I think if anything, it's a trap
for the Democrats. I think this is similar to the Murtha episode,
in that it puts the Democrats...they get a free pass where they
go out and they do this non-stop Bush bashing, where they just
hit the President, hit the President, hit the President, and they
gin up their base. And then when they're sort of called on it,
to vote on it and follow through on everything they say, just
like Murtha, then suddenly the vote's four hundred something to
three. And I think the Republicans in the Senate should try to
put the Democratic Senator on record, I mean, Hillary Clinton,
John Kerry, Evan Bayh, the ones running for President. What do
they think? Do they think the President should be censured for
trying to prohibit al Qaeda...for monitoring al Qaeda phone calls
into the United States.
HH: And in those terms that he
used...
JM: Yeah.
HH: ...of criminal activity and
that sort of stuff...
JM: Oh yeah, yeah, yeah. Look,
this is great for Russ Feingold and his run for the presidency,
because it helps him with the total left-wing base, that that's
what he's going to have to need to make a run. And it's an opportunity
for Republicans...and I think they should press this issue, and
force the Democrats...
HH: Will Senator Frist pay a price
if it doesn't come to a vote?
JM: Well, I think Senator Frist
is being pretty aggressive on this, quite frankly. I think he's
doing a good job, and I think he's going to do everything he can.
But you're right. At the end, actions speak louder than words,
and what will matter will be whether he can get it done.
HH: All right. John McIntyre from
Realclearpolitics.com,
2.0. Congratulations on a great roll-out. It's a magnificent redesign.
Realclearpolitics.com.
Go bookmark it. Start your day there every day, as most political
savvy people in the United States do.
End of interview.
Posted at
10:44PM PST
Arizona
Senator Jon Kyl on Sen. Russ Feingold's censure resolution, and
the odds of the Republicans scheduling an up or down vote.
HH: I'm joined at the beginning
of the show by Senator Jon Kyl of the great state of Arizona,
to brief us on the reaction and the ongoing maneuvers over Russ
Feingold's, Senator from Wisconsin's, attempt to censure the President
of the United States over the NSA program conducting warrantless
surveillance of al Qaeda contacting their operatives in the United
States. Senator Kyl, welcome back, and it's great to have you.
Thanks for making five minutes for us.
JK: Well, thanks very much. Glad
to be with you. The reaction, of course, that galloping sound
you heard was all the Democrats running away from the proposal.
HH: I've seen that. He doesn't
have a lot of co-sponsors yet.
JK: No, in fact, Hugh, as I'm
sure your listeners are well aware, when the matter was presented
last night, Majority Leader Frist said okay, we'll go ahead and
vote on it, say, in a half an hour. And one of the Democrats on
the floor objected to that. That wouldn't give enough time. And
he said okay, then at 6:00. No, that still wouldn't be enough
time. The leader said okay, tomorrow. No, that still wouldn't
be enough time. I mean, obviously, they do not want to vote on
this.
HH: Will the vote happen, Senator
Kyl?
JK: Well, I'm not sure. There
is a point at which I think you want to say look, this was just
a stunt, you brought it up, you weren't willing to vote on it,
and so we're going to move on to other things. It is, after all,
a pretty serious proposition to bring a matter...a censure resolution
to the floor, censuring the President of the United States of
America. And I think if they're not serious about it to vote on
it, then we may not be wanting to give it any more legs over the
next several weeks. So I'm just not sure yet what the best way
to handle it would be. But one way would be to put the Democrats
to the test. You know, do you want to vote for it or not? The
other way, since it does involve censuring the President, is to
say okay, the fun and games are over. Let's get back to serious
business.
HH: You know, Senator Kyl, judging
from the reaction on my e-mail, we spent yesterday's program primarily
on this, and the phone calls, the American people would like to
see this debated. And not just the idiocy of a censure resolution,
but the NSA program, and whether or not people are willing to
stand up and say, as I know you have, it is within the President's
Constitutional authority, and statutory grant, that we do what
he has been doing. And I think getting people like Senator Clinton
on the record on this would be very clarifying.
JK: Yeah, it would. And as a matter
of fact, we probably will have an opportunity for that debate,
because legislation is being crafted right now which would grant
the Congress some additional oversight of this program. And by
implication, would approve the program. Now it's already authorized
in my view, so I don't think we have to authorize it. But at least
it would be a recognition of the program by Congress, and provide
oversight by the Intelligence Committee, which, by the way, I
think is all right. There is always the question to be asked,
how do we know that the program is not being abused? And if you
don't have judicial oversight, you should have Congressional oversight
of that. We have it. It could be improved. And so I would support
the effort of somebody like Senator DeWine, for example, to add
an element to the briefing of the members of the Intelligence
Committee who are briefed on it, that would determine whether
or not Americans are ever by mistake surveilled under this program.
And if that were to occur, the steps that could be taken to make
sure that it wasn't a common occurrance. That way, it's pretty
hard to say that there could be a down side to the program. We
know what the up side is. It catches bad guys. And as long as
Congress can be assured that there is no down side, then it's
pretty hard to argue against it, it seems to me.
HH: Well, one minute left, Senator,
and I know you've got to run off to a meeting. If you hear from
the base that they want this vote taken, do you think that the
leadership will succeed in forcing it?
JK: Possibly, Hugh. But again,
I just want to make the point that we have a lot of serious business
to do, and we don't have time just to get people on the record.
It would be interesting to see where they stand on certain issues,
even though politically, that would be a lot of fun, and frankly
would have some benefit for the American public. But it is a serious
matter to censure the President. And if you're going to take a
vote on that, you've got to be able to devote the time to it.
We're supposed to start immigration reform on the 27th. We have
to do the budget this week, and then immigration reform starting
the 27th. That's going to take two weeks. After that, we have
to do the repeal of the death tax, and begin the appropriation
process. My only point in all of this is we only have so many
days and weeks to get all of our business done.
HH: Oh, I know, and Brett Kavanaugh's
in line, as are all of the other nominees.
JK: He is. Exactly. So there's
that business as well. And so, it's not just a matter of saying
we have all the time in the world, let's have some fun with the
Democrats.
HH: Well, I still think it would
be a teaching moment. Senator Kyl, thanks for spending an extra
five minutes with us. We'll check back with you later in the week
about how this develops. Jon Kyl of Arizona.
End of interview.
Posted at
4:24PM PST
Monday,
March 13
John
Fund on the political trouble looming for Republicans, and Yale's
sensitivity problem in dealing with criticism over the Taliban
student on campus.
HH: Joined by John Fund, columnist
at Opinionjournal.com,
the Wall Street Journal's always on the move, peripatetic, really,
John Fund. Where are you today, John?
JF: New York City. Home base.
HH: Okay, you're at home this
week. I'm glad I caught up with you. John, I've got a number
of things to cover with you, especially the Yale Taliban. But
I want to start with the beginning of your column today, which
says that the Bush White House is showing signs of being insular,
burn-out, and desperately in need of new talent. There are rumors
today that Andrew Card and John Snow will join Gale Norton in
retirement shortly. Have you heard those?
JF: Yes, I've heard that, plus
others.
HH: And do you think those are
true?
JF: At least half of that will
be true, and perhaps more. There's a piece in the Washington
Post today which goes and talks to Ed Rollins, who served in
the Reagan White House, and various other people, and they say
you know, in the fifth or sixth year of an administration, people
can't take the punishing schedule. It's not that they're not
capable, it's not that they're not qualified. It's just eventually,
the batteries run down. You can't have people working 18 hours
days, 50 weeks a year, for six years straight, and not have
some kind of burn-out.
HH: John Fund, do the people
that you talk to recognize the November danger ahead? I think
it's break the glass and pull the alarm time.
JF: I met with 20 House Republicans
last week, and all of them basically said we are in trouble,
and it's because we lack an agenda that's meaningful to the
American people. And the only thing saving the Republicans from
complete meltdown is the Democratic Party, which seems to have
no agenda, or no platform, other than we hate George Bush.
HH: And the Feingold episode
today, do you think there's any chance that the majority leader,
working with Arlen Specter, will call that censure resolution
to the floor in a replay of the House embarrassment of Murtha
in the late Fall? Because that's what they ought to do, John
Fund, is go right at that.
JF: I think people should be
allowed to vote on just about anything on the floor of Congress,
and that censure move would bring all of the debaters out. Let's
not have the shadowboxing on television. Let's have a debate
on the floor of the United States Senate, and have at it.
HH: John Fund, well, we agree
on that. Now let's turn to Yale. I'm so happy about Yale, because
my alma mater had so embarrassed itself with the dismissal of
Lawrence Summers last week, that I thought we would be in the
basement of stupid moves for a long, long time. But evidently,
they've dug a floor in the cellar, and Yale's gone into it,
led by their dean of fundraising at Yale Law School. Tell people
how he reacted to critics of the Yale Taliban.
JF: Well, he's the assistant
dean of funding for the law school. His name is Alexis Surovov,
and he was so incensed that some Yale students were upset that
Yale had brought in the deputy foreign minister of the Taliban
as an honored student on campus, taking the place that some
very qualified American, or perhaps an Afghan woman who'd been
brutalized could have, that he sent out an e-mail to them, using
an anonymous Columbia University account to try and mask his
identity, saying, well, what's wrong with you. Are you retarded?
This is the most disgraceful alumni article I've ever read.
You failed to mention you've never contributed to Yale in your
life. To suggest others follow your negative example is disgusting.
HH: So number one, he used the
term retarded. Number two...and as the friend of an organization
that takes care of kids with Down's, I am deeply offended by
that. And I mean, really, in that regard. Number two, he broke
into the financial records to use them in order to send out
this critical e-mail, correct?
JF: Well, he claims he got them
from public records, but he can't identify the public records
he used. And he somehow got the very private e-mail of one of
these critics, which is not available anywhere else, and her
maiden name, and he refuses to explain how he would have gotten
them, other than going through Yale records, and using that
as a means to attack them.
HH: And so tell me now, given
that that's all happened, is he being forced to quit his job
or retire?
JF: No. As a matter of fact,
Yale refuses to make any comment at all. In fact, throughout
this entire Taliban disaster for Yale, they have issued one
144 word statement, and that's it. They will not answer any
other questions, they will not give any interviews.
HH: Now when someone goes and
hijacks Columbia's IT account database to send out this thing,
that is so fraudulant on the face of it. You know, the Bush
White House is suffering through the obvious embarrassment of
having a shoplifter or a fraud as their domestic policy advisor.
But this is the same thing, though it's probably criminal. I'm
not sure...
JF: No, no. Actually, to be
fair to him, he is a graduate student at Columbia. He has a
right to a Columbia address. But he was trying to hide his identity,
and that's just sneaky and wrong.
HH: Okay, I didn't understand
that part. Okay.
JF: What is certainly wrong
is him accessing private records of donors to discredit them.
That is a complete violation of ehtics and standards.
HH: And I think it will also
be, if you look at some of the federal privacy rules, will be
a violation of some of those. Now John Fund, any reaction among
Yale alumni that's noticeable yet?
JF: Ben Stein. Ben Stein has
been used as an example by Yale fundraisers, saying well, a
conservative like Ben Stein is still happy with Yale. And I
called up Ben Stein, and he said that's ridiculous. I still
give to Yale because I love it so much. But some things are
beyond reason. I'll tell you what I do think of Mr. Rahmatullah,
the Taliban man going to Yale. He said that is the equivalent
of having an unrepentant SS man go to Yale after World War II
in hopes that he'll go back and rebuild Germany. He said Yale
is run by fruit loops, and is wacky.
HH: John Fund, you're breaking
up on us, and I want to pause on that, because my guess is if
we researched this, we would find this Yale Taliban standing
around at some of the wall pushovers on gay people, as standing
around at some of the doors barring doctors from treating women
under their extreme version of Shuria. I mean, he's a crazy.
This was the most repressive regime on the planet.
JF: He claims to have turned
over a new leaf in some respects, but that's usually when he's
been carefully coached, and has spin doctors around him. When
he's on his own giving one on one interviews, he says things
like well, those executions of women in the soccer stadium that
were filmed, that was all some rogue ministry. And he said,
and besides, there were executions in Texas at the same time.
He still excuses the Taliban, the group that harbored the terrorist,
Hugh, that bombed the World Trade Center with that plane.
HH: Now let me ask you, John
Fund, who is paying for his education?
JF: A liberal foundation out
of Wyoming that is funded by a trial lawyer, and by a CBS producer/cameraman
who befriended him in Afghanistan. But Yale is giving Mr. Taliban
man, Mr. Rahmatullah, a 40% discount on tuition. So they're
treating him with special status that other students wouldn't
get.
HH: Well, John Fund, any subsequent
follow-up article?
JF: Oh, yes. There will be another
one next week when Yale comes back from Spring break. And look,
I'm simply saying to Yale, he's applying for admission next
month as a sophomore for a full degree program. I'm saying to
Yale, you should tell him it might be best if you study abroad
next year.
HH: Ah, well put. John Fund,
always a pleasure. Opinionjournal.com
is where you can find this article.
End of interview.
Posted at
11:59PM PST
Weekly
Standard's Stephen Hayes on the release of the Saddam Hussein
documents.
HH: Joined now by Stephen Hayes.
He's a writer for the Weekly
Standard. He's the author of the book, Connection.
He's also a graduate of the Columbia
School of Journalism, perhaps their most famous conservative
graduate, Stephen. Is there anyone else in that category? Or
are you the only one?
SH: Pat Buchanan.
HH: Oh, that's true. I always
forget that, because it's so...
SH: He actually got into a fist
fight during his time at Columbia, which I have to say, I never
did.
HH: We're not really surprised
by that, are we?
SH: (laughing) We're not.
HH: (laughing) No, we're not.
SH: I was tempted, I must say.
HH: I wrote about your alma
mater not long ago for the Weekly Standard.
SH: Well, it was a great piece.
HH: (laughing) Yeah, I had a
lot of fun up there, but boy, they are uneasy with The
Connection, Mr. Hayes.
SH: I would say so.
HH: So tell me a little bit,
explain for our audience who have not been following the Harmony
database, these documents, these tapes, what we're talking about,
and what they might show us about Saddam's Iraq.
SH: Well, essentially what happened
is we went into Afghanistan, we went into Iraq. And among the
things that we did, I would say that we didn't prepare well
enough to do it, but we did it sort of haphazardly. And we now
have this collection of two million plus documents. And by documents,
I mean anything from audio tapes, video tapes, computer hard
drives, paper memos, you name it. Two million of those have
been captured by U.S. troops, by intelligence officials, and
they have, most of them, stored basically in a warehouse in
Doha, Qatar. They have been translated and analyzed at what
I would consider to be a snail's pace. The term of art I think
is exploited. They have been exploited at a snail's pace. So
really, we're talking about having gone through less than 4%
of those 2 million documents at this point, that we actually
have some idea of what's in them. So it's a little...it's probably
premature to draw conclusions about what generally we will find,
or to be very specific about what we'll find. But at the same
time, there are some documents, we've seen in the past month,
a couple of different studies based on those captured documents
that have been quite interesting.
HH: Now Stephen Hayes, you've
written this afternoon that a long-running bureaucratic in-fight
that is being waged between John Negroponte, Director of Intelligence
for America, and Congressmen from a variety of positions, and
open government advocates has been resolved, allegedly. Update
us on this long-running battle.
SH: Yeah, this is actually,
I think, a big moment, potentially. What happened was for 13
months, I've been trying to get the government to release these
documents. My basic view is we are continuing to have debates
about what was going on in Iraq before the war. Why not actually
use documents and computer hard drives and audio tapes and video
tapes that can tell us, and let's not speculate anymore. Congressman
Pete Hoekstra, who's the chairman of the House Intelligence
Committee, agreed with that view, and has been pushing, I would
say, very aggressively for the past six months to have these
documents released so that Americans, so the policy makers,
the media, can pore over them and come up with some better sense
of what was going on in Iraq. And this weekend, actually, we
had a couple of examples of what we learned by exploiting these
documents. Michael Gordon, who's a reporter for the New York
Times, a good reporter, wrote a book that's coming out soon
called Cobra
II. He co-wrote it with Bernard Trainor, who's a former
general. I don't agree with everything that Gordon concludes.
I haven't read this new book. He wrote sort of the definitive
book about the first Gulf War. But a lot of the press, a lot
of the attention that he's gotten over this past weekend has
been because he got his hands on a classified document that
was based on 600 captured documents from Iraq that talked about
what the regime was up to as the war began, and as the war proceeded.
So we know a lot more about what Saddam was doing, and where
he went, and who he was talking to. And those are interesting
things. I think what he focused on, those are interesting things
more for a historical perspective. I actually think there are
reasons to exploit the stuff and release it, that would have
practical applications to the kinds of debates we're having
today.
HH: I think you're absolutely
right. I'm also curious as to why Saddam has not made a demand
on these documents, or why we have not produced them, because
the Nuremberg Trials and the Eichmann Hearing were all preceded
by elaborate documentation of the crimes against humanity that
the various accused had commited. And our indifference to this
record being compiling is a little shocking for a country that
prides itself on doing justice the old fashioned way.
SH: Absolutely. Well, look.
I mean, I'm a supporter of the administration generally. I'm
a supporter of the war in Iraq, but I think they dropped the
ball on this one. I mean, I think we should have had...there
were some preperations...Donald Rumsfeld wrote a memo in March
of 2003, that outlined how we should go about securing these
documents. It was never distributed. If it was distributed,
important people didn't get it. So there was no systematic way
of securing these documents, and not to revive another and separate
debate, but frankly, we didn't have the troop numbers to secure
some of these buildings that would have allowed us to secure
the documents to give us this important historical record.
HH: Now I want to talk to you
about The Connection, too. Obviously, the flash point here is
weapons of mass destruction, although that is just one of many
debates upon which light might be shed by these documents. But
in your mind, Stephen Hayes, having studied this perhaps more
than any other journalist out there, what's the case for WMD
or not at this point?
SH: Well, I don't know that
we know a lot about the WMD. You know, when ABC News broadcast
some excerpts of Saddam tapes, I think it was about two weeks
ago, maybe three weeks ago now. There was one passage that I
thought should have gotten a lot more attention, and didn't
get much attention. And it was a discussion that Saddam had
with one of this top advisers. This guy was briefing Saddam,
and this guy asked himself rhetorically, what happened to the
nuclear components, or something to that effect. And he said
some of the materials were transported out of the country. Now
there's a lot we don't know. We don't know who said it, we don't
know when it was said. At least I don't know when it was said.
We don't know what Saddam's response was, we don't know where
it went. I mean, there are all sorts of things we don't know.
But boy, I would think that, you know, Bush administration officials
and intelligence community officials, to say nothing of my colleagues
in the journalism profession would be interested when you have
someone on record, on tape, in a meeting with Saddam Hussein,
saying that nuclear materials were transported out of the country.
HH: Yup.
SH: I mean, that matters.
HH: It also matters as to documenting
the nature of the regime and it's susceptibility to change.
I believe that among the Harmony documents that Austin
Bay and others have been analyzing, there is conclusive
proof that they continued to cat and mouse the inspectors.
SH: Yeah, I think that's true.
I mean, Austin Bay's done a fantastic job on these 28 documents
that West Point released that were captured in post-war Afghanistan.
I think there may have been some documents that he's looked
at also that have had some relevance to Iraq. One of the interesting
things about the captured al Qaeda documents is that they include
a report from someone who was described to me as a mentor to
Zarqawi, talking about how Ayman al Zawahiri, who was bin Laden's
chief deputy, remains on the loose today, sought, and sought
repeatedly support from Iraq. We don't know the time frame,
but it stands to reason it was in the 80's and 90's.
HH: Yeah, you're right. The
audio tapes...how did they get to ABC, Stephen Hayes?
SH: Well, the audio tapes were...as
I understand it, what happened was the U.S. government contracted
with a number of Arabic speakers to translate some audio tapes
that they thought would be useful in the Saddam trial. One of
the guys they went to is a guy named Bill Tierney, who's a former
U.N. weapons inspector. And they went to Tierney and said here's
12 hours of tape. Listen to it, tell us what's on it. And Tierney
listened to it and thought well gosh, this stuff is interesting,
and it doesn't have a lot of relevance to his criminal prosecution,
to these war crimes trial. So Tierney kept a copy, returned...you
know, gave his analysis to the FBI, who had contracted him to
do this work, and then tried, I understand, to go to the Pentagon,
and elsewhere in the U.S. government to say hey, look, this
is something you guys really need to pay attention to, and if
possible, you should release this. This is important. He didn't
get a response from a variety of different places in the U.S.
government, so he decided to take the copy public, and provided
it to this guy who runs something called the Intelligence Summit.
And they, then, went public and gave it to ABC.
HH: Very interesting. Now Stephen
Hayes, we're out of time, but I want to ask you, you write about
this, and your new piece is up at Weeklystandard.com. And you're
able to track the number of people who come and read articles.
What's the public's interest in this conversation and these
documents?
SH: There's huge, huge interest,
I would say, in understanding better what happened, and what
the regime was up to in the years and months before the war.
You know, there's this...I think the conventional wisdom now,
sad it is, is that Saddam Hussein was sort of not much different
than the king of Denmark. He didn't really have any...he didn't
have these weapons, he wasn't a threat to anybody, why did we
do this? And you know, nobody knows, as I say, what's in the
totality of these documents. But certainly, and I've had some
hints of this, I think there are things likely to come out in
the coming weeks and months that will at least make the American
public, if not my colleagues in the media, take a second look
and say hey, wait a second. This is a lot more complicated that
we first thought.
HH: And when they do come out,
I'll be you you put them out there first. Stephen Hayes of the
Weekly Standard, thank you. His latest piece, Finally,
is published right now at Weeklystandard.com.
I'll link to it at Hughhewitt.com.
End of interview.
Posted at
11:30PM PST
Massachusetts
Governor Mitt Romney on his surprising 2nd place finish in the
Tennessee poll last weekend, and his legislation to protect
religious adoption agencies.
HH: Joined now by Massachusetts
Governor Mitt Romney. Gov. Romney, welcome back to the Hugh
Hewitt Show.
MR: Thank you, Hugh. Good to
be with you.
HH: Hey, congratulations. I
know you were not actually involved in this, because you went
down and spoke to the Memphis gathering of Republicans. But
it's got to be nice to surprise the folks when it comes to the
straw poll.
MR: Well, there's no question.
It's a lot better than a kick in the teeth, and I was very,
very pleased that folks down there were pleased with me, and
ended up voting for me, which...obviously, this is very early
and not very meaningful, but of course, it's nice to have a
few people think that you're a pretty good guy.
HH: Yeah, I spoke with Nancy
French, who runs Tennesseans For Mitt, and she tells me they're
completely independent from your campaign. Are you troubled
that you've got a lot of free agents out there, because I mean,
you don't have a campaign. You haven't declared, and you can't
coordinate anyway with these people. So it sort of has a lot
of people running around doing that. Does that give you pause?
MR: Well, you know, it's fine
for people to get involved in the game of politics, and I think
it's a great thing in this country that people do find politics,
in addition to sports, something that they can get involved
in, and make a real difference in. And I...you know, when this
idea of Tennesseans For Mitt, I'd never heard of it. But I got
one of their T-shirts. It said Yankee Governor, Southern values.
I had to get a chuckle out of that, and express appreciation
to them for their support. They're very, very kind people.
HH: It's a great thing, and
obviously, it turned a lot of heads, so congratulations. Better
to surprise on the up-side than on the down-side. Governor,
the reason I wanted to talk to you is adoptions in Massachusetts.
Can you explain to people the controversy in the Bay State?
MR: I sure can. Some years ago,
the state legislature concluded that gay couples should have
the right to adopt in Massachusetts. That's been the law here
for some time. We have one major agency, however, that's affiliated
with the Catholic Church, and that's Catholic Charities. And
they place a lot of our most difficult to place children, the
special needs kids that have been in state custody, in the Department
of Youth Services. They place about a third of all of them in
the state. And this group, the Catholic Charities, said look,
we can't place these kids in gay families, because we don't...as
a religion, we don't support gay marriage. And so we can't do
that. So you know, I'm of the belief that we have to do everything
we can to allow the Catholic Church to practice its religion
as it wants to, and not impose on them the direction that they
have to place children into gay couples.
HH: Now Archbishop Sean O'Malley,
recently nominated by Benedict to become a Cardinal of the Church,
met with you last week. What did he discuss with you?
MR: Well, we talked about this,
this feature, and I expressed to him my concern that you know,
as a society, we're very quick to jump when a Church or a religion
in any way seems to be imposing in the public sector. If there's
a Nativity scene, the ACLU is right there to keep that from
happening. On the other hand, when the state intrudes on the
right of a religion to practice its faith as they feel appropriate,
somehow, no one comes to their aid. And in this case, I am going
to come to their aid. I'm filing a bill which will exempt the
Catholic Church from the requirement to provide children through
adoption to gay couples.
HH: Now, the obvious critique
of your response will be what is a Church believed it was wrong
for minority couples to adopt? And they will play that argument
against you. How are you going to respond to that, Mitt Romney?
MR: Well, the answer is that
our Constitution, both federal and state, designate a number
of protected classes, and they include race, religion, place
of national origin, and there can be no discrimination against
any individual on those bases. But same sex couples are not
such a designated protected group. And their right to adopt
under Massachusetts law is from a statute, not from the Constitution.
And therefore, we can say that in this case, a religion should
be able to abide by its own tenets, and not have to place children
into a gay home.
HH: Now you will also run into
the argument that if this law passes, and I suspect it will.
You expect this will pass, even though you've got a Democratic
legislature, they're very aware of the Catholic vote in Massachusetts.
MR: They are aware of the Catholic
vote, and it's very difficult ot predict at this point whether
this will pass or not. I think there's a huge need on the part
of our state to put the kids first. The Catholic Charities have
placed some 700 special needs kids in homes through adoption.
And in the last 20 years, they've only placed 13 in gay homes.
So we're talking about less than 1 per year. The idea that we're
going to lose a major adopter of special needs kids because
of the concern about maybe one gay couple per year. That makes
no sense to me.
HH: And they have withdrawn
now, have they not, Catholic Charities, from the adoption process?
MR: Yeah, the Catholic Charities
said look, we just can't continue here, because the law is pretty
clear that we have to place kids in gay homes, and we as a faith
do not believe that's the right thing to do. And therefore,
we can't continue, unless, of course, there was some kind of
statutory exemption, which is what I'm looking form.
HH: So right now, the losers
are the kids?
MR: Yeah, the losers are the
kids. I mean, here, you've got hundreds of kids, special needs
kids, in very difficult foster home settings. We have the Catholic
Church willing to take them and place them in homes. And instead
of allowing them to happen, we're imposing on them the requirement
that they place some of these kids in gay homes, and it just
doesn't make sense, when you're thinking from the standpoint
of the kids.
HH: Now Mitt Romney, they will
also argue that this will be an unlawful and unconstitutional
establishment of religion, violative of the 1st Amendment. Your
response?
MR: Well, this doesn't establish
religion. It does just the opposite. It allows the free practice
of religion. What we're looking to do is to say that a religion
should be able to abide by its tenets, and its beliefs, and
not have imposed upon it a statute that came before them by
the legislature. This is not part of our Constitution. We would
never allow an organization to discriminate, even a religion
to discriminate on the base of race or national origin or religion.
But in this case, these gay adoptions are not in the Constitution.
They're only by statute, and we don't think that the Catholic
Church should be prohibited from placing children because of
that statute.
HH: One last question, Governor.
Switching subjects, Russ Feingold today called for a censure
or the impeachment of George W. Bush, a tirade that went 20
minutes. What is that all about? And do you think that's useful
in the effort to conduct the War On Terrorism?
MR: Well, I'm sure Al Jazeera
found it a very interesting piece, but I don't think the American
people do. I think the American people, whether they agree with
the President or not, recognize him as a man of character and
courage, who stands for something, unlike some prior leaders
that we've had. They know where he comes from, they know he's
doing his very best, and whether you agree with him or disagree
with him, you know that he's desiring to protect this country
and protect our future, and protect our safety. And when people
try and make political hay like Russ Feingold has done, I think
it ends up reflecting poorly on them.
HH: 30 seconds, Governor. There's
a lot of talk among the left talking heads that there's a split
in the Republican Party over the war. Did you see that in Memphis?
MR: I sure did not. I saw enormous
support for the President, a recognition that we're in for a
tough road here, as we have been over the last several months,
but there's no question we have to stay the course, and do everything
we possibly can to defeat the jihadists.
HH: Mitt Romney, Governor of
Massachusetts, thank you.
End of interview.
Posted at
9:59PM PST
Congressman
Mark Kennedy, one of the GOP's strongest contenders to gain
a Senate seat this Fall, on his potential colleague, Russ Feingold's
outburst today on the floor.
HH: Joined now by Congressman
Mark Kennedy from the 6th district in Minnesota. He is running
for the open seat in Minnesota, the United States Senate seat
that has been vacated. And Mark Kennedy is widely believed to
be the Republican's best shot to pick up a currently blue seat,
and put it into the red category. Congressman Kennedy, welcome
back to the Hugh Hewitt Show.
MK: Always good to be with you,
Hugh.
HH: Now Congressman, I want
to talk to you a little bit about Russ Feingold, your future
Senate partner's motion to censure the President today. But
before that, give us an idea of how the campaign is progressing
in Minnesota.
MK: Well, the campaign's going
very well. We're getting lots of great support. We have a stark
contrast here in Minnesota, with my opponent for raising your
taxes, for government run health care, Canadian style, you know,
for cutting and running in Iraq, and this is one of the starkest
contrasts in a Senate race, in the country.
HH: You've got a website up,
Markkennedy06.com.
Is that working for you? Are people using that the way that,
say, Thune used his in the course of his election in 2004?
MK: Yes, we've got our website,
which gives you a lot of information. I also have a number of
blogs covering the race, including Kennedyvmachine.com.
And on either of those, you'll get a lot of good information
as to what's going on in this very exciting race.
HH: You know what's very interesting
about Minnesota is that it is a new media state. The Start Tribune,
obviously, is going to be against you, because they're just
over the left edge of the world. But you do have Powerline,
you've got a whole bunch of great bloggers up there, Shot
In The Dark, you've got Captain
Ed Morrissey. If you can stay away from the Fraters
guys, you'll be in good shape, Congressman.
MK: You know, no question about
it. And my likely opponent's father worked as a writer for the
Star Tribune for decades. So that's going to make it even worse,
and even more important that we're looking at the alternative
media, the bloggers.
HH: Well, let's turn to Russ
Feingold across the state border there. I've actually driven
over to Wisconsin a couple of times when I've been in Minnesota
for a variety of reasons. Russ Feingold, he will be your colleague
in the United States Senate if things go well this time next
year. Today, he brought a motion to censure the President of
the United States. What do you think of that?
MK: Well, I think Minnesotans
and Americans are just tired of this complain, complain, attack,
attack...not offer any new solutions. And I'm hopeful that we
can have a focus on issues in this campaign, because if we get
back to the issues of who's going to keep your taxes lower and
grow jobs, who's going to really bring down the cost of health
care, we win in that environment. They're trying...they're running
against the President, I'm trying to talk about issues.
HH: Now here's what Russ Feingold...and
let's just give you a taste, and the audience a taste of what
he had to say today. Cut number 1:
RF: Congress will need to
consider a range of possible actions, including investigations,
independent commissions, legislation, or even impeachment.
HH: Now Congressman, you're
no stranger to radical politics, because Minnesota has its own
slice of the fever swamp in the DFL. Some of them are pretty
normal, but a lot of them are over the edge. But impeachment
from Russ Feingold...is that helpful in any way, shape or form
to the war effort?
MK: You know, I don't think
it's helpful to anybody, other than defining them as the party
of radicals, that really doesn't care about solutions, and just
cares about negative talk. And I think Americans, Minnesotans
are tired of this partisanship, of these angry words, and they
want to get beyond that, and they want to talk about solutions.
And that's where I think it's important that we in Congress
get on a common sense reform agenda that can drive those solutions,
and show this stark contrast that there is between us and them.
HH: Now today, there was a report
in the CNN/Gallup poll, that 60% of Americans believe the economy
is in good to great shape. That's a very high number. Is that
reflected in the Minnesota economy?
MK: What...it certainly is.
If you look at our economy, we've got a lower unemployment rate
than the national unemployment rate. The economy is going well,
and as I talk to businessmen, they're very excited about what's
happening out there. So we just need to make sure that we are
focusing on getting the message across that we've grown nearly
5 million jobs in the last three years. And if you want to keep
that moving forward, you've got to keep with the policies that
we've put forth.
HH: Now Congressman, have you
had a chance to go to Iraq yet?
MK: I've been there three times,
not just to thank the troops, and to see first-hand what's going
on, but to benchmark the progress, Hugh, over here. And each
and every year I've gone there, I've seen stark increase in
the government that's in place, and I'm hopeful they get their
act together, and come together with a cohesive government that
everybody can still buy into, but also the training of the Iraqi
troops that are increasingly taking over for us. So yes, I've
been there, and I hope to maybe even go again this year for
the fourth time.
HH: Now given what you've seen,
how do you rank Congressman Murtha's rhetoric again today, calling
for a cut and run, and getting out of Iraq.
MK: Well, you know, I had an
opportunity to stay overnight in Baghdad when I was there last
November, and I like to do coffee shops. And the coffee shop
equivalent was going to the mess hall. So I went to two or three
or four tables of soldiers and Marines, talking to them. And
a number of Marines say you know, we understand Murtha's a Marine,
but he doesn't speak for us, and we don't agree with what he's
saying. They feel very good about what's going on, the progress
that's being made, the way we're training the Iraqi troops,
the way the government is coming together, and people are stepping
out and voting. So I think you see a stark contrast between
the Marines in Iraq and what Murtha's been saying.
HH: All right. Now let's switch,
again, to domestic politics. You're running against a lawyer
in all likelihood. Today, the Wall Street Journal is reporting
that the annual Tillinghast Survey of the cost of torts and
lawyers is $315 billion dollars in 2007. Any thirst for tort
reform on your lawyer opponent's part? I know it's on your businessman
background part.
MK: Well, yeah. I mean, I voted
for ending these out of control lawsuits that are driving doctors
out of business, that are driving businesses out of business.
And we ought to spend a lot less time fighting lawsuits, and
use that money to hire employees, and keep this economy moving
forward. I think that will be a stark contrast. The trial lawyers
have already given a quarter of a million dollars to my opponent.
You can rest assured they've given me not a penny. And the idea
that nearly two out of every three Senators is a lawyer, and
that you don't change Washington by sending another lawyer to
the U.S. Senate, is going to be something we're talking about,
because I'll be one of the few business people, and the only
CPA, in the Senate.
HH: Let me ask you, Mark Kennedy,
as well. How much are you going to have to raise to run this
race?
MK: We're...it's going to be
a big race. You know, we've been saying from the beginning that
this could be as much as $15 million dollars on either side.
So it's going to be a race that's important, because it could
determine the outcome of who controls the Senate. But we're
going to keep pushing to make sure we can get our message out
there and talk about issues.
HH: Now you're going to be on
the ticket with Governor Pawlenty up for re-election. Of course,
our friend and yours, Norm Coleman, will be out there helping
you. Will you welcome the President to Minnesota as well?
MK: Well, you know, the President
has been nice enough to come and help me raise money to get
my message out. And whether the President comes out again, I
don't know. Possibly, but they're going to want to spend this
whole campaign on the other side, as I said, talking about Bush.
I'm going to focus on my agenda, on the solutions that I've
put forth, and make sure that we're talking about things that
Minnesotans care about.
HH: Are you a strong supporter
of the war, Congressman?
MK: I believe it's the right
thing to do. I believe having millions of women vote for the
first, second and third time in Iraq is going to have a profound
impact on the direction that that country takes, and the region.
If we don't destroy the hopelessness that breeds terrorism by
giving an example of democracy that can spread through the region,
we're never going to have ourselves safe here at home. So I'm
a strong believer that we are doing the right thing in Iraq,
and we need to see this big thing through to victory.
HH: Congressman Mark Kennedy
from Minnesota, great to check in with you on the campaign,
the GOP's best chance for a red state pickup, a blue seat pickup
to the red column, is at Markkennedy06.com.
End of interview.
Posted at
4:00PM PST
Sunday, March 12
Passing
around the Tylenol at Yale today.
Our friend John Fund of the Wall
Street Journal has been a one-man wrecking crew of Yale's decision
to adopt and educate Sayed Rahmatullah Hashemi, a former member
of the Taliban regime, who hasn't exactly shown himself to be
the model of repentance. Last week, as more and more details about
this story came to light, including the fact that Hashemi has
a 3rd grade education level, and is receiving between a 35 and
40% tuition discount, Yale responsed by stonewalling the media,
including us, about their inexplicable rationale.
Many people have written letters
to Yale President Richard C. Levin. A lot of them are Yale grads,
including Christina Bost Seaton, a guest on Hugh's show last Friday
with Jed Babbin. Some have called for a boycott on financial giving
to the school.
But as Fund reports in Monday's
edition of the Wall Street Journal, while the school publicly
had been silent, craziness continues. The assistant director of
giving at Yale Law School sent a "private" e-mail to
some of the concerned alums, calling them and their actions "retarded."
How gauche. So Yale can criticize the critics who don't understand
the political correctness of understanding and accepting Mr. Hashemi,
but can't quite comprehend that the word "retarded"
isn't very political correct in today culture, and in fact, is
very, very offensive to people with developmental challenges.
But that's not all. Andrew Surovov,
the Yale official who wrote the e-mail to two of the critics,
revealed their past financial giving information in his e-mail.
He also called their criticism and protest ideas terrorist tactics.
Can you believe that? Yale is educating an official of a terrorist
regime, one that actually employed terrorist tactics, and the
mere action of trying to call the school on it, and the critics
now get accused ot terrorist tactics?
Tell me again why Yale is such
an elite school again?
Posted at
11:30PM PST
Return
to top
Saturday, March 11
Beltway Boys
preview.
Once again, Jed Babbin guest hosting.
JB: Hour 2 on Friday, that means the Beltway
Boys. Joining me right now to talk about the week's events are
Mort Kondracke, Executive Editor of Roll
Call, and Fred Barnes, Executive Editor of the Weekly
Standard. You know them together as the Beltway
Boys, 6:00pm on Saturday evenings on the Fox
News Channel, and repeated throughout the weekend. Guys, I
don't even know where to start. We've got so much stuff to pick
on, let me just ask you, Fred, I mean, if Yale has this guy, Hashemi,
a former Taliban, what's Harvard going to do? Are they going to
get a Chechen?
FB: Well, they could get somebody with less
formal education. And this guy at Yale only went through the 4th
grade.
JB: That would be hard.
FB: And maybe somebody older. He's 27. You
know, I mean, it really is an outrage. And of course, there's
some kid around the country who worked hard in high school, got
1,600 on his college boards, and has a 4.0 average, and he didn't
get in so they could let some guy in who hasn't repudiated what
the Taliban stands for. He's tried to soft-pedal it. I mean, it's
totally outrageous.
JB: Mort, is there something that there's a
message there? Is there a message there for the parents that are
sending their kids to Yale, and spending all that money to get
them in?
MK: Well, this is all about diversity, I suppose.
Diversity of opinion. Now you'd think that they'd want to have
a few conservatives on their faculty to balance out this guy.
I mean, it is ridiculous.
JB: Well, I've just got to read you both one
little quote from our friends at Yale. We finally got them to
respond after banging on them for a while. This is just a couple
of sentences, and let me just quote to you from the lady who's
responding on behalf of the university. And she says, "we
acknowledge that some are criticizing Yale for allowing Mr. Hashemi
to take courses here, but we hope that critics will also acknowledge
that universities are places that must strive to increase understanding,
especially of the most difficult issues that face the nation and
the world." Fred, how is this going to increase understanding?
FB: I don't know. You bring in someone who's
an apologist for a dictatorship, or an organization that is famous
for having executions at halftime of soccer games, a dictatorial,
repressive, woman-hating operation, and that's what he's from?
Well, that's diversity? Well, you know, why not start bringing
in mass killers, maybe you can bring in pedophiles. That will
be more diverse. I mean, that is such a smarmy statement. They
ought to be ashamed of themselves.
JB: Well, I'm sure they would be, and if Hugh
were here, he'd probably have another pithy remark about that.
But we won't note that he's not here right now.
FB: No, no. Let's not bring that up.
MK: No, no. Let's pretend he is.
JB: Okay.
MK: But sitting by your side.
JB: There you go. Mort, to you. We have a situation
here with the Dubai ports deal. It seems like a very significant
legislative defeat, political defeat, for the President. Do I
hear the lame ducks quacking already?
MK: Well, we're pretty close to that. I mean,
I think that ultimately, they handled this thing, given the fact
that it was a disaster, about as well as they could by putting
it to death as fast as they possibly could when they saw it was
a loser. But what it says about the whole administration is not
good, and the level of trust that it has in the Congress...this
is a Republican Congress. I mean, at the first sign of trouble,
you had the House majority leader, and the Speaker of the House,
for example, ducking for the high grass. And on a whole host of
issues, Bush doesn't have Congress following him this election
year. They're just bailing out on him left and right on health
savings accounts, on tax cuts, all that kind of stuff. And I know
that the Democrats are gleeful about it. They look at the Republicans
and see that they're in chaos, and it reminds them of what happened
in 1994, when Democrats bailed on Bill Clinton after the health
care thing, and Democratic voters didn't turn out, and that's
how the Republicans won the election.
JB: Fred, how is it that the President is in
such bad shape with Congress? And quite frankly, can he repair
things between now and the November election? Congress is up,
many of those guys don't even want him in their districts.
FB: No, it's going to be hard to repair it,
and the truth is, Republicans need to be united more than anything
else to do well in the 2006 election. That's one of the reasons
why they won in 2002, defying history, in the second year of the
Bush presidency. And getting them together with issues like immigration
coming up is going to be very, very difficult. So there are some
smart Republicans on the Hill that realize that most of this grousing
and complaining is unnecessary, and they're really going to have
to pull together. But they've got to get a set of issues on which
they can pull together on. I think those issues are probably taxes
and national security. But right now, they're nowhere near unity.
JB: Mort, is national...
MK: You know what really bothers me about this
whole thing, especially on the Democratic side, but on the Republican
side to, is I'm worried about whether we would have a united country
if we had a terrorist incident, or whether we would fall to pointing
fingers at one another, especially Democrats blaming Bush, and
Republicans not standing behind the President. And everybody scrambling
for cover, instead of standing behind a policy that would require
that we all hang together here.
JB: Well, let's freeze on that point for a
minute, guys, because I had no idea that you guys would think
it might be that bad. Do you think that in all seriousness, if
we had another 9/11, that we'd impeach the President and fall
apart? Has America gone down so badly, Fred?
FB: No, I don't believe that, and I don't believe
Mort does, either, if there's another 9/11.
MK: No, not impeach the President.
FB: You know, if there's a smaller...if there's...look,
Democrats are so deep into demagoguery that I think Mort's probably
right. Another smaller terrorist attack, and they won't react
the way Richard Gephardt and Tom Daschle did after 9/11. They'll
react by blaming the President. You know, he didn't spend enough
money here. He didn't do that. He didn't connect the dots. You
know, we've seen, even on 9/11, in the subsequent months, we've
seen a lot of that in attempts by Democrats, pretty explicit attempts,
to blame the President for 9/11. Now that came many months later,
but I think it would come a lot sooner if there's another terrorist
attack.
JB: Well Mort, I'd be willing to bet each one
of you guys a steak at the Palm that the Democrats' plan for legislative...the
whole legislative agenda for the Democrats that's supposed to
be announced for the 2006 elections, will be announced somewhere
around January of 2007, and not before.
MK: Actually, you're not right about that.
Next week is...the budget debate begins in the Senate, and I talked
to Kent Conrad today, who's the Democratic ranking member on the
Budget Committee, and he is preparing a whole slew of amendments
that will...to change the budget, which will amount to the beginnings
of an agenda. I mean, a lot of it is port security. Joe Lieberman
has a bill to increase port security spending by $8 billion dollars.
They want to have a big Avian flu preparation agenda. They want
to...what else? They want to increase Bush's education spending
by $2 billion dollars. And they claim they can do the whole thing
without actually raising tax rates, that they think they can do
it by closing loopholes. Or at least that's what they're going
to claim.
HH: But Fred, they're not going to have an
agenda, yet. I mean, those are good items that Mort is talking
about, and items to debate. But they're not going to have a position
on the war, they're not going to have a position on anything but
raising taxes and spending more money.
FB: Yeah...no, Mort's giving them the benefit
of a doubt when they...you know, I mean, are all the other Democrats
going to agree with Kent Conrad? I mean, look. They've got to
put out a document and say here's our agenda. The Republicans
did that, and of course, it had very little to do with the outcome
of the election in 1994. It did give Republicans a great blueprint
for what they were going to do after winning Congress. But anyway,
what they have to do is one document, this is our agenda, not
Kent Conrad coming up with something.
JB: Well, Mort, when are they ever going to
come up with a policy that says this is how we're going to fight
the war, win the war, or we're just going to fold our tent and
run?
MK: On Iraq, they are not going to have a single
agenda, because they don't agree. And so what they're going to
do is say we...any of our ideas is better than Bush's stay the
course idea, that Bush is a disaster, and in any event, Congress
doesn't run foreign policy...
FB: Oh, that's pathetic, though.
MK: So we've got Jack Murtha's policy, we've
got...Ike Skelton has a policy, Joe Biden has a policy, Carl Levin
has a policy. They're all better than Bush's.
FB: That's not going to fly, Mort. That's pathetic.
I mean, that's ducking it. That's chickening out. I mean, they're
supposed to be a major party.
JB: But that's what politicians do best, Fred.
FB: Here's the most important issue in the
entire world, in the entire decade, and they're going to duck
it?
MK: Well, it's a...look...
FB: That's cowardice of the highest kind.
MK: Well, it's a presidential issue. And you
know, it'll be...
FB: Oh, so what? Come one. They're a major...they're
the other party. They're the chief opposition party. They don't
have a position?
MK: There is not going to be...there's simply...there
wasn't...I don't think there was a unified Democratic position
that they all stood behind, even on the Vietnam in the late stages,
even though 85% of them were against it. There will still a few
hawks, you know, Paul Douglass and people like that.
FB: Well, this isn't the Vietnam war in the
late stages. This is Iraq, a war they voted for.
JB: Well, gentlemen, I think I'm going to have
to send you both to your neutral corners. Mort Kondracke from
Roll Call, Fred Barnes, the Weekly Standard. Watch for them tomorrow
on the Beltway Boys on the Fox News Channel.
End of interview.
Posted at 2:30PM PST
Return to top
Friday, March 10
Yale grad speaks
out about the Taliban co-ed.
Jed Babbin, guest hosting for Hugh Hewitt.
03-10bostseaton.mp3
JB: Talking about the Taliban at Yale. Like
I said in the opening segment, this is not a red versus blue issue.
This is not conservative versus liberal. This is not Republican
versus Democrat. This is every American really, I think, getting
outraged that one of our most prestigious universities would waive
its standards and allow someone who represents everything this
country is opposed to in as a student, even a non-credited student.
Joining me to talk about that right now is Ms. Christina Bost
Seaton, a very proud Yale graduate. Ms. Boss Seaton, thanks for
joining us.
CBS: Hi there. Thank you for having me.
JB: Well, tell me how you first found out this
Rahmatullah Hashemi was at Yale?
CBS: Actually, honestly, I found out from a
Republican friend of mine who was upset about it, and sent out
an e-mail explaining the situation to her friends, and her viewpoint
on it. I don't read right-wing blogs, and I think that's where
most of the coverage of the situation has been right now, and
that's part of the reason why I chose to come out and make a statement
at this point. I think that this is an issue that the left and
liberals need to get involved in, because it really should be
very dear to our hearts.
JB: Well, I completely agree with you. I think
this is one of those things that both sides of the political agenda
can actually come to agreement on. Now you kind of recognized
this guy from a movie or something?
CBS: Yeah. I saw Fahrenheit 9/11 on the day
it was issued, and there was a particular scene where they show
basically what I think was the Taliban world tour. This guy was
the ambassador-at-large to the world, and as part of that, he
spoke at various universities in America, explaining the Taliban's
policies, and trying to make us think that they were okay. And
in one of the scenes in the movie, they show him at a particular
university where a woman is wearing a full burkha, and takes it
off, and says that what the Taliban has done is terrible, they're
oppressing women, and makes a very passionate statement. And what
Ramatullah says in response is that he feels very sorry for her
husband. He must have a very difficult time with you.
JB: So this guy, I take it, is not repentant?
I mean, he has not renounced the ways of the Taliban, or the way
they kill homosexuals, repress women, and all the other things
they did?
CBS: Well, the New York Times article is really
the best statement of his current beliefs, and it's not entirely
clear. It certainly doesn't say that he has repented. He says
that he wishes he was less strong with his wording on his Taliban
world tour, which I don't know that that really adds any moral
character to me.
JB: Yeah, it doesn't sound like he's terribly
uncomfortable with what he used to say. Well, what about the fact
that if he apparently was gotten...admitted to Yale by some waiver
of the academic standards, I mean, how does that make you feel
as a graduate? I bet you sweated bullets trying to get into the
place. You had to study for your SAT's...
CBS: Absolutely.
JB: You worked your tail off while you were
there.
CBS: Absolutely. And what almost is more upsetting
is seeing it from the other side, as I've been doing alumni interviews
for the school for five years. And there are many very interesting
candidates with backgrounds that are diverse in ways that I couldn't
imagine, that I think would be fascinating to learn from, and
have amazing scores. And they don't get admitted. It's just a
ridiculously competitive school, and I understand that not everybody
can get admitted. But the fact that Ramatullah has been admitted,
not in spite of, but because of his beliefs as being a Taliban
member, is just a complete turning on the head of any system of
morality and any system of diversity in my mind.
JB: Well, how does that help diversity at the
university? I mean, how does that help the students there? I don't
see that...
CBS: I don't think it does at all, personally.
JB: Okay.
CBS: I think that diversity means bringing
in viewpoints that are legitimate viewpoints, that for some reason,
have been shut out because of structural situations in society.
We...you know, Yale was not diverse when it was founded, because
it was a school based with only people from Connecticut. Yale
became diverse when people from around the country came.
JB: Sure.
CBS: It became more diverse when they had African-Americans
and students of other cultures, and then foreign students come.
But you don't need to take it to the level of there being diversity
of morality. And I think that's what's happening here.
JB: Well, I think that's dead bang right, and
I think that's a very important point. I mean, to have diversity,
you don't necessarily need to admit KKK members, or Nazis, or
skinheads, or whatever. I mean, you want...
CBS: And you ought not.
JB: Yeah, but that's what they're doing, aren't
they? I mean, the Taliban is like...I mean, they're basically
Nazis. They were oppressing people, murdering people. You know,
I don't think they had a campaign of mass murder, but that's probably
because they didn't have the technology.
CBS: I think in some sense, too, what is more
disturbing about this is that he was the spokesperson for that
regime here. It's not that he was just some person involved in
it. I think that they could have found some person from Afghanistan
who had experienced this regime and could speak about it, and
maybe was qualified, and would be a good person to attend Yale
and share those beliefs. But to relax the admission standards
for the representative of the regime, I think, in a very strong
way, gives a strong impression that Yale is condoning the regime.
And I don't literally think that Yale is now saying that the Taliban
is okay. But it's sending a very mixed message.
JB: Well, you sent your letter to the president
of the school, right, to Dr. Levin?
CBS: Yes, that's correct.
JB: Did you get a response?
CBS: Well, I got an abbrieviated version of
your response that you just read online.
My article, my letter didn't mention the
ROTC situation, so I did not get that paragraph in the letter.
JB: Oh, okay. So basically, they're saying
we're not talking to you, and we think this is a great idea. I
mean, just basically what I read on the air, and you know, it
just seems to me that the condescension in that, that they're
just basically above any criticism...I mean, what are you going
to do? I mean, as an alumnae of the school, are you going to stop
giving them money? Are you going to stop doing the interviews?
CBS: Well, I think that that really just impacts
the students. And the students who go there right now, they worked
hard to go there. I don't think that they need to have their educational
system impacted. I think it's more important that people who agree
on this make a statement, and make it clear to Yale that this
is sending a message to society that's not valuable, and that's
hurting the reputation of the institution. And furthermore, if
this begins to send the message that it's okay to have this diversity
of morality, I mean, that, if anything, is just in my mind, feeding
right-wing pundit's tools to make fun of Democrats, and make fun
of the left.
JB: Well, as a right-wing pundit, I've got
to agree with you. Yeah, I mean, this is red meat. But the point
really comes down to the point that you're making. This is just
fundamentally wrong. This is...it's a betrayal not just of liberal
values, but of conservative values, and I really think, an American
value. I mean, we treasure freedom. And I don't think we want
to reward people who are totally opposed to it.
CBS: I would agree with that. I think that
the letter that you read on air, it says that he had a viewpoint
that was able to be expressed, and that people could learn from.
And I don't know that I would necessarily...
JB: Well, what are you going to learn from
a Taliban?
CBS: I don't know that I would even agree with
that. But if they wanted to have him come and give speeches, like
he did before he was admitted, I think that maybe you could go
and listen to a presentation from somebody that you don't agree
with, and try to open your mind. Maybe even if he taught a class,
and people had the right to attend that if they felt like it.
But I think that giving him a Yale degree and that mark of acceptance
is a really incorrect thing to be doing now.
JB: Christina Bost Seaton, a proud Yale grad,
thank you very much for joining us.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:45PM PST
So what does
Yale think about their critics?
This, no kidding, was the response given to
us today by Yale after requesting an interview with Dr. Levin,
their President, about the controversial Taliban co-ed.
Dwayne:
President Levin is out of town and further, we are not doing interviews.
Here is a statement. You can quote me or say it is from Yale,
whatever you prefer.
Ramatullah Hashemi was approved by the
U.S. government for a visa to study in this country. Yale has
allowed Mr. Hashemi to take courses for college credit in a part-time
program that does not award Yale degrees. Contrary to what has
been reported by some in the media, he has not been admitted as
an undergraduate to Yale College or to any of the other schools
at Yale.
We hope that his courses help him
understand the broader context for the conflicts around the world.
We acknowledge that some are criticizing Yale for allowing Mr.
Hashemi to take courses here, but we hope that critics will also
acknowledge that universities are places that must strive to increase
understanding, especially of the most difficult issues that face
the nation and the world.
Also, there is a lot of mis-information out there namely that
(1) Rahmatullah is a freshman. He is not, he is a non-degree student
and (2) that Yale does not have any ROTC program, we do. Here
are the facts, in case you are interested, in that latter point:
While Yale does not host an ROTC program, the University does
support those who wish to make such a commitment and we believe
that the leadership these students provide is vital to our military.
Each year we have a group of ROTC students at Yale, and they complete
their training alongside other students from colleges and universities
across the state at the University of Connecticut. Yale facilitates
participation in ROTC training by providing the students with
transportation to their ROTC classes. Recently a Yale ROTC graduate
was honored nationally while a Yale senior as the Air Force Cadet
of the Year.
Let me know if you have any further questions. Email is the best
way to reach me. Helaine
--
Helaine S. Klasky
Director, Public Affairs
Yale University
203-432-1345
I guess she told us, didn't she???
Posted at 4:44PM PST
So what do
Yalies think about the Taliban co-ed on campus there?
Here's a letter written to Yale President,
Dr. Richard C. Levin, by a Yale grad who is an avowed lefty. Her
name is Christina Bost Seaton.
Dear President Levin,
I am a proud alumnae of Yale, and a committed
donor and volunteer to the University. It pains me to say that
I think, this time, my beloved alma mater screwed up.
Yale admitted Sayeed Rahmatullah
Hashemi to Yale, first through its special students program for
one semester, and then as a full time student. Was it his 4th
grade education that impressed the admissions office the most?
Or his high school equivalency degree? Nope--he was admitted because
Yalies could apparently "learn" from his experiences
as the Taliban's ambassador-at-large.
Yup--the Taliban. You know that group that
forced/forces women to wear the burqua? That would publicly execute
women in the soccer stadium of Kabul for "sins" like
going to the doctor, or walking down
the street, or, god forbid, for wearing nail polish? One of the
most violent and intolerant regimes the world has known?
Yeah, that Taliban. And Hashemi should
be familiar to you too. If you didn't catch him live on his Taliban
World Tour, an excerpt of one of his speeches was in Fahrenheit
9-11. He's the guy who, when a woman in the audience said he should
be ashamed for making women wear the burqua, said that "I'm
really sorry for your husband. He must have a very difficult time
with you." And Hashemi, to this day, is largely unrepentant
of the Taliban's policies.
This is learning that Yale doesn't need.
Diversity involves getting a wide mix of legitimate viewpoints
into the classroom, but the Taliban's viewpoint simply isn't legitimate.
There are some behaviors which are simply, objectively, morally
wrong. A massive campaign of brutally oppressing women and homosexuals
is wrong. It's true that we should learn about the Taliban, just
as we learn about all sorts of evil in this world--Hitler, Milosevic,
the KKK--but learning about something is not the same thing as
learning side by side with the ambassador to that regime.
By giving special treatment to the ambassador
of the Taliban regime, an individual with subpar qualifications
who was admitted because of, rather than in spite of, his involvement
with that regime,Yale is sending a pretty mixed message. Aren't
there other foreign individuals with diverse viewpoints that they
could have admitted? Ones who weren't the spokesmen for violent,
intolerant regimes? Maybe even ones who were academically qualified?
And this is an issue that the right wing
does not--and should not--own. The right wing doesn't own the
market on common sense. There are lots of Democrats out there
who can agree that it's pretty upsetting that Yale is giving the
Taliban spokesman the opportunity to earn a Yale education. And
I daresay that there are a lot of Liberals (gasp!) and Feminists
(oooh!) who think the same way.
I have been an alumni interviewer for Yale
for five years. I am involved in my graduation class, and I am
a class fundraising agent for the Developments Office. Unlike
the individuals profiled below, I don't advocate stopping your
donations to Yale. There's no reason to punish the students of
the University for the administration's mistake. I do think, however,
that this was a poor call on the administration's part,
and that it sends a bad message to all the well qualified students
out there who didn't get admitted to Yale. This is not diversity--this
is a lapse in judgment. Diversity doesn't mean abandoning your
sense of right and wrong.
Christina Bost Seaton ('01)
Her interview with guest host Jed Babbin will
follow shortly.
Posted at 4:30PM
PST
Return to top
Thursday, March
9
Mark Steyn
drawing lines in the sand.
Once again, Jed Babbin guest hosting.
03-09steyn.mp3
JB: Right now, let's go to the main man, columnist
to the world, Mark Steyn joins us. Steynonline.com.
Mark, thanks for joining us.
MS: Pleasure, Jed. Very mellifluous indeed.
JB: Well, I might as well use these pipes.
But set that aside. You have a really good bead on what's going
on in the Dubai ports deal. So much breaking news today. The Dubai
people are not going to be running ports in the United States.
Now we see the prospect, the prospects...and I'll put it to you,
Mark Steyn. What happens to our friend Chuck Schumer? Does he
entirely fall apart if Halliburton ends up running these ports?
MS: (laughing) Well, I would say there aren't
really many happy endings in this story for the Democrats. They
saw an opportunity to bash Bush on this, because he looked vulnerable
on it. Not just the Democrats, a lot of conservative commentators,
Michelle
Malkin and others were upset about this deal, too. But the
Democrats really ran with this, and panicked enough Republicans
into joining them. And the question now is who do these things
go to? Do they go to Halliburton? I mean, Halliburton might as
well get it, because the reality is that PNO, the British company
who were running things at these ports were running them because
there's no American company that does it. What are we going to
do? Are we going to create a company specifically for the purpose
of running these ports, which would be some semi-nationalized
off-shoot of Homeland Security? I wouldn't personally want to
see that. Or is there going to be a real company that steps forward.
Interestingly, as I understand this deal, Dubai Ports World will
still be running Canadian ports. So if the argument is that these
ports will be vulnerable to getting something suspicious trucked
in, shipped in, all they have to do is ship it into Vancouver
and drive it over the border to Washington State. So I'm not sure
quite what the benefits are there.
JB: Well, I think you're exactly right, and
what I understand now is we really ought to be taking a look at
some of the other ports. And for example, Communist China runs
the port of Long Beach through their company, COSCO. That's not
exactly someone who has our best interests at heart, or am I mistaken?
MS: No, one of the interesting features of
the modern world is that we live in a globalized world. And in
America, that generally means that a company can start up, a free
company can start up, a private company, and it'll be operating
in Canada, and Britain, and France, and Rwanda, and anywhere it
wants to. What it means in a lot of parts of the world is that
companies that are essentially owned by the state, as in Dubai,
or owned by the Communist Party, in China, end up running a lot
of American operations. And I do think there is a, insofar as
there's a broader lesson here, I do think you have to distinguish
between government owned foreign...I mean, I am a foreigner, and
I own businesses in the United States, and I don't certainly want
to be demagogued by the Democrats and driven out by Congress.
But I think there's a difference between individuals owning companies
in the United States, and foreign governments.
JB: Well, I think that's absolutely right.
But let me get...and let me tie that back to one thing you wrote
recently. I mean, you're saying in one of your columns, that basically,
people are bored with the war, and the Patriot Act has become
a bureaucratic chore. Are we just not interested enough to protect
ourself in our ports, or protect ourselves? Or do we have to start
another war somewhere, Mark, in order to get people really interested?
MS: Well, I think to answer that question crudely,
yes. You can't dine out on Afghanistan and Iraq forever. If this
is a great existential struggle, then at some point or other,
it has to have another military phase. And it probably will in
Iran, if Dick Cheney's speech is anything to go by. But at the
same time, if it is an ideological struggle, the rhetoric is not
unimportant. And it does seem to me that there is a disconnect
between what the President's saying, and what recent polls, particularly
this latest ABC News/Washington Post poll are saying. And that
there seems to be a much broader skepticism, that's putting it
at its mildest, about the Muslim world in general, than the President
is admitting in his War On Terror. And I do think in a certain
sense, he has to refresh the war with a kind of refreshed rhetoric
for it.
JB: Well, and that's part of what I was trying
to point out a couple of days ago on this program, and in a column
I wrote for Realclearpolitics.
We're fighting an ideological war. And it seems to me that the
kinetic war, the bullets and bombs, are no more and no less important
than the ideological war. And the ideological war is really not
being fought. I mean, how should we be doing this, Mark?
MS: Well, I think we have to be able to address
it honestly. I mean, for example, you saw in this bizarre thing
at the University of North Carolina, where an American...an Iranian
Muslim goes to rent a big Jeep Cherokee for the purpose of crashing
it into as many bodies as possible, at the university he was studying
at just a couple of months ago. And the unwillingness to address
the fact that he was motivated by his Muslim identity to do that,
the fact that we cannot even address that honestly, five years
after the war, is, I think, a problem. We have to be able to say
look, there are millions of law-abiding, peaceful Muslims around
the world, but nevertheless, the fact of the matter is that Islam
is the main challenge to Western civilization at this hour.
JB: And what can we do about that, though?
I mean, we're going to have to engage Iran. And when Mr. Cheney
says there's going to be meaningful consequences for Iran's conduct,
I mean, what are we going to do? We have to engage them on the
ideological side. Why can't we stand up and say that radical Islam
is not Islam, and radical Islam is not a religion. It's an ideology.
MS: Well, because I think the fact of the matter
is that most people are just squeamish about dealing with that.
You know, the New York Times, in the report on that fellow in
North Carolina, didn't even use the word Muslim. They didn't even
use the word Muslim when they were talking about the insurgents
in the Russia caucuses...so when they took over some town a couple
of months ago. The fact of the matter is that if you can't even
identify the enemy, you have a real problem dealing with it. You
know, when President Bush originally called this a War On Terror,
that's a technique, and you can wage war against a technique.
The Royal Navy did a couple of centuries ago against both slavery
and piracy. It stamped them both out in many parts of the world.
But those were just activities of opportunists. That's not what
we're facing here. We're facing the strongest ideological challenge,
much stronger than communism, much stronger than facism, because
in the end, they were just miserable, and they didn't have this
kind of mystical, spiritual dimension, which is the great reinforcer.
And if we can't stand up for what's right about our own civilization,
we're certainly not going to be able to resist this very strong
powerful force coming straight at us.
JB: Well, how are we going to beat it? I mean,
we're not going to win this ideological war with soft words and
euphemisms.
MS: No, and I think we do have to say...we
have to say...draw a line. We have to say, look. If someone wants
to go around in a burka...you know, in the Netherlands, they're
talking about banning the burka. I don't particularly agree with
that, although I think you could make the argument that in war,
certain measures are necessary. But let's say...it's fair enough
to say you've got the right to wear anything you want, but that
we regard this as an outfit that is not essentially compatable
with integration and assimilation in a Western society. And if
we can't even say that, if the feminists on the left, and the
media and the establishment now say that this kind of prison garb
for women is somehow just another expression of a personal identity,
then in effect, we're devaluing our own civilization. We have
to at least be able to draw the line at that.
JB: Well, have we not gone from tragedy to
farce already? I mean, we have, for Heaven's sake, at one of the
top schools in the United States, we have a former part of the
Taliban government, unreconstructed, enrolled at the school. I
mean, how much farther can we descend into political correctness?
MS: Well, exactly. And these are the same Ivy
League colleges that refused to let ROTC on campus, because they
have the don't ask, don't tell policy on gays in the military.
The Taliban doesn't have a don't ask, don't tell. Even if you
don't ask, they build a wall and crush you if you're homosexual.
I mean, this is the complete decadence of the kind of non-judgmental,
multi-cultural, everything's equal thing. And that is the way...people
are very foolish, They don't realize that incrementally, you can
lose your world, unless you're prepared to actually make a choice
about which values, which society you want to live in.
JB: So if we don't draw our line in the sand
very soon, we will never be able to?
MS: Well, I think you're seeing that in Europe
right now, that some...not all countries, but some countries in
Western Europe are passing the point of no return, at which they've
conceded too much. And I don't want this President, and the United
States, to be left alone in an isolated world of semi-Islamified...where
the rest of the world is semi-Islamified. I think we do need a
new rhetoric for this ideological battle.
JB: Mark Steyn, columnist to the world, read
him on Steynonline.com.
End of interview.
Posted at 4:45PM PST
Lileks wonders
if there might be a headline next week of Halliburton Spread Too
Thin.
Jed Babbin guest hosting.
JB: We're going to right now to one of my favorite,
favorite writers. James Lileks, proprietor of Lileks.com,
columnist for the Minneapolis Star Tribune, and author of many,
many fine books, including his latest, is it Mommy
Knows Worst, James?
JL: Mommy Knows Worst, and I didn't study nuclear
physics, either. I was an English major, so I'm utterly prepared
for whatever we're discussing here.
JB: (lauging) Well, let's get back into nuclear
issues, because I've got a quote that I've just got to read to
you. It just came up, and I'm looking at our favorite blog, my
favorite blog, because it's our blog, the American Spectator blog,
AmSpecBlog.
Anyway, I'm reading you something right now, and I'm sure you're
not even going to be able to guess the source. Let me just read
you this little quote. "If you want to see a nuclear-free
Middle East, you've got to remove that threat from Iran, including
the rhetorical threat to wipe Israel off the map. Once you've
done that, then we can get to work in respect of Israel."
Who do you think that's from?
JL: Well, could you spell each individual word,
because if half of them are misspelled, I'm going to say it's
Barbra Streisand.
JB: (laughing)
JL: It sounds like the sort of woolly-headedness
that you find from the diplomatic community. Spring it on me,
Jed. Who is it?
JB: Jack Straw of all people.
JL: Ahh...
JB: Now what do you make of this coming out
of the Brit foreign minister?
JL: Well, you find spines in the most unusual
places, at the most unusual times. But it depends, of course,
what actions they want to back this up with, doesn't it?
JB: Well, yeah, but I don't think they're going
to go very far. I mean, in terms of even taking the first step
in getting Iran out of the nuclear game, I don't see that Tony
Blair's Britain is going to be with us very long.
JL: No. I've been worried that peeling off
for sometime, too. I really have. You know, it seems as though
everything that's going on with Iran is going to be a paragraph
that precedes the story, the big story, which is what comes next.
Either this month or next month, or as some are saying, never.
That all this to-ing and fro-ing, and getting them to the Security
Council, and making strong faces at them and scowling, and threatening
to give them harshly-worded letters on thick, U.N. diplomatic
paper, that all of this stuff is just going to seem like a sad
run-up to the eventual catastrophe.
JB: Well, isn't this just another replay of
what we did with Iraq? I mean, it's just...you're getting to be...the
U.N. is like a rerun of a bad TV show.
JL: But that's all they do. That's all they
do is palaver. They...I mean, the Churchill quote of course that
jaw, jaw is better than war, war. Well, not necessarily, not when
the other side is bent on war, war. Then jaw, jaw actually gets
you in trouble. What we had with the U.N. was a year in which
Iraq was given enormous opportunity to prepare for what was coming.
And it seems like we've done that exact same thing again. You
practically have the Iranians crowing in other papers about how
they've duped the international inspectors, and gotten Europe
to bend over for them in whatever capacity they choose. It's all
out there fairly plain, and it seems rather odd that we can't
agree on the threat. But unfortunately, we have another party
in this country, half of the people seem devoted to the fact that
if George Bush is against Iran, then Iran must somehow be in the
right.
JB: (laughing)
JL: Their glasses, it would seem, have a picture
of George Bush in a Hitler mustache, painted on the inside of
the lens, so that's all they can see. And what threats may be
on the other side of the glass they seem resolutely indifferent
to.
JB: Well, but what is going on in this country
when we have, and I keep coming back to my favorite outrage of
the week, when you have a former minister of the Taliban government,
a terrorist, a terrorist government...
JL: Yes.
JB: This man is now a student in good standing,
albeit not credited, at Yale? Why is this character not in...
JL: Not only that, it's an amazing story. And
I tend to believe that if he were to set up a recruiting booth
for the Taliban on campus...
JB: (laughing)
JL: ...he would be allowed to do so. You know...
JB: Oh, but of course. Now wait a minute. Now
James, there's several things wrong with that. Number one, the
Taliban was a religious organization. How could Yale let a religious
organization recruit on their campus?
JL: Because the moment that somebody says it's
a culturally, multi-culturally sensitive, all of a sudden, tongues
get tied in knots, and people start to cough into their fists
and walk away, because they don't want to interfere with somebody
else's culture. He could set up a booth, recruiting for the Taliban,
with small little stone walls, showing how they bring them down
on the gay people, and there would people who would actually say
it's an expression of their culture, who are we to say, etc.,
etc., etc. And besides, it was George Bush who was opposed to
the Taliban, which means they've got to have something going for
them. I mean, of coure, I jest, but I'm not exactly sure that
it would be met with particular outrage if the guy from the Taliban
did set up shop there.
JB: Well, I'm not so sure that we won't, eventually.
I mean, you have a situation at Yale, where there's such utter
decay and decadence, that they're going to let someone in who
was, or probably still is a terrorist, amongst the student body
there? They're going to give him...
JL: Well, it tells you how far we have drifted,
shall we say, from the sort of cultural unity that we has, such
as it was, in World War II and the subsequent years. If you can
imagine a 1950, Joseph Goebbles getting a job at Columbia Journalism
in New York, telling them exactly how to shape and mold public
opinion. It's about like that, except that he isn't of Goebbles'
quality.
JB: Well, yeah. I mean, we need to find...
JL: No, I was just going to say, Jed, that
you're seeing this through one prism, and the other side, of course,
is seeing it through the other, which is why a lot of people on
this show have been talking about the security ramifications of
the Dubai Ports World deal, and the people on the other side of
the aisle are naturally now going to start having aneurysms left
and right, should Halliburton actually get that gig.
JB: Oh, I want to see that happen, because
Chuck Schumer's head will explode.
JL: Well, what I want to see happen is if that
does indeed happen, then we're going to see cover stories on Newsweek
about how Halliburton is spread too thin.
JB: (laughing) All right. Real quick, James.
We've only got one minute left. What is the headline...if Halliburton
gets this job, what is the headline quote from Howard Dean?
JL: That Karl Rove's devious plan to once again
enrich the Bush crime family, because he's about six weeks away
from saying that, has borne fruit in this masterful, Machiavellian
project to get the deal cancelled. Of course, that won't be a
good headline, but Howard will continue to speak.
JB: I love it. James Lileks, Lileks.com, author
of Mommy Knows Worst. Thanks very much for joining us.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:41PM PST
Colorado Governor
Bill Owens on Iraq, and one of his favorite high school students,
Sean Allen.
Again, Jed Babbin guest hosting.
JB: I'm really proud to welcome as our next
guest, Colorado Governor Bill Owens, freshly back from Iraq. Governor,
thanks for taking the time.
BO: How are you doing today?
JB: Well, I'm not bad for a grumpy old guy.
Much more importantly, what did you see over in Iraq, Governor.
Did you see a civil war?
BO: No, I did not see a civil war. I have to
say that I was just there for a day, and so there are people who
are much more expert than I am, though you may have seen the piece
by Ralph Peters in the New York Post?
JB: Sure did.
BO: He's a...you did see that?
JB: I did, and he's very good.
BO: You know, it was. He's on the ground, he's
traveling throughout Baghdad. He hasn't found a civil war, either.
But let me tell you what I did. I was visiting Colorado National
Guard troops. I was in Kuwait, then Baghdad, then Ramadi.
JB: Tough place.
BO: I talked to officers, enlisted men. I talked
to General Donovan, who's the chief of staff to the U.S. military
in Iraq. And I have a different view than what you would see on
CNN, and what you'd see on Matt Lauer, and what you see in the
mainstream media. Here's what General Donovan told me. He said
we've been kicking their rear, except he used a different word
than rear.
JB: (laughing)
BO: And he said they have to change the dynamic,
the current dynamic. As alien as this may seem to the mainstream
press in the United States, the dynamic is that we have been winning
in Iraq. We have been pushing them into smaller and smaller sectors.
We've been taking cities. We've been clearing provinces. However,
they understand that the current dynamic is not good for them,
and they're changing that dynamic by bombing the Mosque. They're
trying to start a civil war. And you know, the general, and I'm
paraphrasing, said if they're successful, then we've got a problem.
And if they're not, then they've got a problem. And now, almost
two weeks after that Mosque was bombed, and I was there on the
Friday after it happened, when Baghdad was in curfew, I don't
think that Iraq is facing civil war.
JB: Governor, you were visiting some of the
Colorado troops over there. What do you think their morale is?
Are they pretty much sunk into the ground? Or are they really
at the top of their game?
BO: You know, they're at the top of their game.
And again, I understand that you only see a small microcosm, but
the perhaps 200 individual troops that I had a chance to be with
and talk to, lunch, dinner, meetings, briefings, in Baghdad and
Ramadi, I can say without exception they believe in what they're
doing. And I just was at a funeral last week for a brave young
Coloradan who was killed in action, a Russian who was given his
citizenship posthumously at graveside.
JB: Wow.
BO: And his parents recounted how strongly
he believed in what he was doing in Iraq. Enlisted in the U.S.
Army as a 17 year old, killed in action as a 21 year old. And
that's been my experience at the 12 funerals that I've been at
in Colorado.
JB: Well, Governor, all I can say is God bless
you for going over there, and God bless you for going to some
of those funerals. I've been there and done that, and that's a
very tough thing to do.
BO: Well, it's nothing compared to what our
soldiers are going through, who are stationed, and who are in
Iraq, as well as those who've given their life for our country.
And so, I'm just proud of these men and women in our military,
and now is not the time to undercut them by suggesting in the
United States that we set some timeline for when we pull them
out. I believe, in fact, that trends are heading in our direction
in Iraq. Again, I understand that there are those who will ridicule
that statement. But I believe...you know, I know what I saw, and
what I've heard. And this is a war for civilization. If we are
defeated in Iraq, it's just the start of the problems our country,
and the West are going to face from radical Islam.
JB: Well, you've hit that one right square
on the nose. And let's talk about another subject...
BO: Sure.
JB: ...I know you're very concerned about,
Governor Bill Owens. We are all following this business of the
high school history teacher, Jay Bennish...
BO: (laughing) Right.
JB: ...and his student, Sean Allen, who taped
some really outrageous comments by this character. Now I understand
you're going to have Sean Allen in your office?
BO: You bet. I've invited him in. He's going
to come in on Monday, and...I haven't met Sean, but I'm proud
of what he did. And I wonder at the backlash against him from
some in the left, this is a 16 year old who's standing up for
what he believes is right. And whether you agree with him or not,
and I do agree with him...but when the left attacks this young
man, I mean, this is what we usually respect, a youngster standing
up for what he believes, taking on authority, trying to change
the system. But Jay Bennish, the teacher, those things were outrageous.
I'm sure he didn't expect to be caught at it...
JB: Amen.
BO: And we ought to have this debate. They
shouldn't be indoctrinating our kids under the guise of geography.
JB: Well, I think that's exactly right. When
you have a geography teacher talking about comparing the President
in the State of the Union address to Hitler and some of the things
that he said before, I mean I've just got to wonder what these
teachers think they're teaching.
BO: Well, I mean I'd love to see how well these
youngsters know the capitals of the world, and the geopolitical...you
know, I'd be interested to know if they're really good in geography,
or if they just have to listen to this leftist rant every day
from Mr. Bennish. My guess is it's the latter.
JB: Well, you know, I'd really love to just
sit down and maybe write a little bit of an exam for Mr. Bennish.
I bet you he doesn't know a heck of a lot more than his students.
He's just so fulminating around with is politics in the classroom.
Is there some way that you as a governor, we as Americans, can
stand up to this sort of ideological abuse of children?
BO: You know, it's really tough in the sense
that it's not just in our high schools, it's in our colleges.
And this gentleman, he had a professor at an Arizona school say
well, that's exactly what I taught Mr. Bennish to teach, which
is you're supposed to try to change the world. I don't want him
to teach my kids to change the world. I want him to teach my kids
what the capital of Egypt is...
JB: Well, yeah.
BO: ...and you know, in geography, this is
not a political science class. It's a geography class, and most
American kids, I've seen the data, really, they're not sure which
ocean is off our West coast.
JB: (laughing)
BO: And so, let's start with the basics, and
if you've got perfect geography students, then take a little bit
of time to talk about world politics. But my guess is these kids
aren't there yet.
JB: Well, Governor, we've only got about one
minute left, but give me real quick your reaction to Senator Clinton
saying that we're going towards a police state for trying to raise
the penalties for illegal immigration?
BO: You know, she, too, is ranting. And she's
trying to play to the Democratic base. She wants to be the Democratic
nominee, and then she wants to be President. And to do that, she
thinks she needs to move left on that issue. You know, we have
an absolute responsibility to defend our border. And if we can't
do it through normal means, then we have to ramp up our defense
in a humane way. But nevertheless, if that means a wall or barrier
or electronic means, that's what we need to do. And you know,
we're seeing the impact in Colorado of those who are here illegally.
JB: Governor Bill Owens of Colorado, thanks
very much for taking the time to join us today.
End of interview.
Posted at 10:41PM PST
CNBC's Lawrence
Kudlow on the possible economic impact of the failed Dubai port
deal.
Jed Babbin sitting in for Hugh Hewitt this
week.
JB: We're facing a lot of different reactions
to the crashing and burning of the Dubai ports deal. One of the
things that I don't get is the stock market. Economics is way
over my head. I'm a bullets and bombs guy, I do foreign affairs,
I do military affairs. I do not understand it, and when I don't
understand the stock market, which is all the time, the one show
I've got to watch, and never fails to explain these things to
me is Kudlow
& Company. And CNBC's Kudlow & Company is headed up
by my very good friend, Larry
Kudlow. Larry, thanks for joining us.
LK: Hey, Jed. You were great tonight on the
program. I can't thank you enough.
JB: Oh, you're way too kind. I think you already
did. I just love doing that stuff, and I learn stuff when I talk
to you. And I'm very serious about that, because if you don't
get the stock market, and I don't, I really need to hear these
things. Now tell us, you say the stock market immediately took
a dip when we heard the announcement about the Dubai ports deal
crashing. What's the long term...actually, what's the short term
economic effect, and why?
LK: Well, nobody can be sure, in truth. But
the market did take a dip. It was rallying back nicely mid-day,
and then as soon as this Dubai world ports announcement to sell
their U.S. situation came across the tape, the market just went
down quite a bit. I won't call it a plunge, but it lost a lot
of ground. And look, in a nutshell, what investors are worried
about is that the United States, whatever the motivation of our
political leaders may be, whether it's protectionist as I fear,
whether it's xenophobia against Arabs as I also fear, but whatever
the motivation, we're sending a message that we don't want foreign
investment capital. Whether it's Arabs, and I think there are
going to be big problems with China coming up, there could be
problems with India coming up. And look, we are an open economy,
and foreign investment is an important part. International capital
comes to the United States because we give them prosperity, a
high rate of return, and in turn, they create high-paying jobs,
by the way. $60,000 a year jobs on average, according to one study.
So there's a worry that we're repelling foreign investment, that
we're telling them to keep their money away from the U.S., and
stocks don't like that, because it's bad for the health of our
economy.
JB: Okay, Larry Kudlow, isn't there a way we
can parse this out a little bit differently in wartime? I mean,
we have companies like COSCO, the Chinese Communist company operating
the port in Long Beach. Don't we have a way to differentiate,
say, between companies that are essentially an arm of a government,
and companies that aren't, that are actually owned by private
people?
LK: I think it's very difficult to do that.
I mean, some of the leading...look, if you're going to deal with
China, for example, then you're going to deal with state-owned
companies. There's another one out there, Jed, that's Singapore.
And they run ports in L.A., I think, and Seattle. That's a state-owned
company. Ditto for the Middle East. If you're talking Kuwait,
if you're talking Dubai, if you're talking Bahrain, if you're
talking Saudi Arabia. Ditto for Russia. A lot of companies we
do business with in Russia are state-owned companies. You see,
my argument has been we do need additional security safeguards
at the ports here in the U.S. I agree with that. But I say that's
a separate issue than the Dubai group, because these guys are
very good marine terminal operators. They've played ball with
us, and they are not the problem with security. That's Coast Guard,
Homeland Security Department, Customs Department, areas that you
know far better than I do. Don't single these guys out. I mean,
to be consistent, if you're going to use Duncan Hunter's idea
that no state-owned company should do business here, and that's
the gist of the House resolution, then tomorrow morning, they
should all be throwing out China. They should all be throwing
out Singapore. And I think that is a very big mistake.
JB: Well, I think it's maybe a big mistake
if we go beyond those things which are crucial to national security.
And you know, this is one of the things we talked about on your
program earlier today. It seems to me that we have a failure,
at least a failure of confidence in the Department of Homeland
Security. I don't have the confidence that they have, the ways
to keep an eye on COSCO in Long Beach, and Singapore and so forth.
Why can't we at least just limit things. We don't want to cut
off trade. We don't want to cut off investment, we don't want
to cut off employement. But at least in those things that are
crucial to national security, like the operation of the ports,
maybe we can draw a line there.
LK: Well, you know, I felt that the additional
45 day scrub of the Dubai deal, with respect to all these security
issues, was a very good idea. The Dubai World Ports company thought
it was a good idea. And they were willing to make whatever changes
and amendments to security safeguards would be necessary to satisfy
national security, as defined by the Congress and the White House.
I thought that was a great idea. And to cut this thing off, you
know, I feel Republicans acted very badly on this. Here's my bigger
worry, going down the road. Calmer heads like yours don't prevail.
That in fact, you've got a whole movement. Some call it neo-protectionism
and xenophobia. You've got a whole movement now of people, like
my friend Pat Buchanan, and my friend Lou Dobbs, and some others,
who want to keep foreigners out of this country, lock, stock and
barrel, and now they're trying to manufacture national security
reasons to do so. And I don't like that one bit. And among other
things, Jed, you and I both know, we discussed this on Kudlow
& Company, we're going to have Iran. We've got an Iranian
problem. We've got a Syrian problem. I would like to have as much
Arab sentiment in our favor to get rid of these bad apples in
Iran and Syria. But, we're not achieving that goal if we are mistreating
them, or we're singling out Dubai, and we're not taking steps
elsewhere. That's just dead wrong.
JB: Well, I think you're probably right on
that, Larry. And let's talk about the backlash may be here. Do
you expect to see Dubai, and the UAE for example, reducing investment
in the United States? I mean, what would it mean to us if, for
example, countries like the UAE were pulling their money out of
American banks and Americans investments?
LK: Well, I think that firstly, we don't know
if there'll be a backlash. And I'll say that honestly. All I'm
saying is there's the risk or the threat. Secondly, the amount
of money that all the Arab countries have in the United States,
insofar as that kind of direct investment, is very small. It's
very small. It's only about $4 billion dollars, according to most
estimates. Now it is growing, incidentally, but it is still very
small. Countries like Britain and Germany and France and Japan
have, you know, a couple of hundred billion dollars in direct
investment. So the Arab story...look, these Arab nations are just
now getting prosperous. They're starting to develop some capitalist
models, Bahrain, Dubai and so forth. So it's small. But again,
I don't know what the so-called Arab attitudes are going to be
about this. Whether or not this was a longer term strategic mistake
remains to be seen, and I just wish we hadn't taken the risk.
I think we could have solved this in a more sensible way.
JB: Well, you're probably right. But let me
take a funny bounce on you. Let's go back to what the Vice President
was saying a couple of days ago, that there would be "meaningful
consequences" for Iran, in terms of sanctions or other action,
if they don't get into the game and clean up their act on their
military nuclear weapons program. What can we do? Is there any
economic sanction that you can envision that might actually have
some sort of serious effect on those guys?
LK: Well, I'm not sure. It's a good question.
It's a tough question. It's a very important question. I agree
with Cheney's view on this. I want us to be as tough on Iran as
we can possibly be. If you had a full-out Naval blockade linked
sanction on Iran, I think it would succeed. Or at least, it would
succeed in some part. In other words, it would be...it may not
be 100%, but it might succeed, let's say, 60-70, 75%. I mean,
these things are difficult, you're going to have overland routes,
and what have you.
JB: Sure.
LK: But yeah, I think that would be pretty
tough. I think that's probably a good place to start. And yes,
I think that it would hurt, because Iran, with all of its bluster,
they need foreign income sources. You know, they sell a lot of
oil. If we stopped their oil flow, that's their source of income.
And as I'm sure you know, they don't even have much gasoline inside
Iran, so they couldn't have any trucking, transporting, automobiles.
That stuff will stop within a short period of time. So yeah, I
think we could probably be very tough on economic sanctions there.
JB: Well, the thing that worries me about that,
though, Larry, is if we have a really tough economic sanction
like that, and we shut off the oil coming out of there, I mean
Europe and Japan are going to come to a screeching halt, no?
LK: Well, look. You're going to have...no question,
you're going to have an oil price spike if Iran cuts off the flow
of oil. Now they may do so to...what is it? To cut their nose
to spite their face?
JB: Right.
LK: To shoot themselves in the knee? Whatever
the cliche is. But yeah, that's an issue. However, the Western
countries do have significant, significant oil and gasoline reserves.
JB: Larry Kudlow, Kudlow & Company. CNBC.
End of interview.
Posted at 10:00PM PST
If you're Governor
Tim Pawlenty, what do you say to 2,600 National Guardsmen about
to deploy to Iraq?
Jed Babbin, guest hosting.
JB: One of Hugh's friends, one of the friends
of the show, is Governor Tim Pawlenty, fresh from the State of
the State message. Governor, thanks for joining us.
TP: Well, thank you very much, Jed, and thanks
for having me on the show.
JB: Well, it's my pleasure. Now you delivered
the State of the State address just today. Give us the two or
three most important things you talked about, and what do you
think's going to happen on them.
TP: Well, I'd say three things. One is trying
to get more choice and options in education, number two, trying
to get more people to buy a private market health insurance that's
affordable, so we've got some ideas to get that down to less than
$200 bucks a month, at least for people who are uninsured. And
number three, getting pretty aggressive in renewable energy, because
energy supplies are flat, and demand is exploding, and that's
a real formula for a problem for our country, and for Minnesota.
So those are three of the bigger areas that we outlined during
the State of the State, and school choice in Minnesota isn't going
to pass, because we've got a split legislature, and the Dems,
and the, shall I say, softer Republicans won't pass it. And on
the issue of health care reform, I think progress will be made
there, because it has to be. The system's busted. And then we're
a real big renewable fuel state, Jed. We've got nation leading
in things like Ethanol and wind energy and bio-diesel, so I think
there's a lot of possibilities there as well.
JB: Well, now those things, the renewable energy
systems that you mentioned, those fascinate me. And I'm just wondering,
how much is it going to take, or how long is it going to take
before we start seeing more widespread use of, say, bio-diesel?
TP: Well, I think bio-diesel may take a little
longer than, say, Ethanol, going in more states, or larger amounts
of Ethanol going in more states, because bio-diesel, we're the
first state in the nation to have a bio-diesel requirement, which
is soy oil, by the way, and diesel fuel. But we had a few hiccoughs
with it in terms of the technology or the refining of it, but
now those have been straightened out it seems. I think the more
likely scenario is Ethanol's going to be catching on in more states,
and that'll be the big thing unless and until somebody can commercialize
hydrogen fuel cells.
JB: Well, God bless you for trying. Let's go
right to another thing that you're concerned with, and you're
going to be leaving for Camp Shelby, Mississippi, where some of
your Minnesota National Guard folks are going to be shipping out
soon to go to Iraq. Now you've got a state that's, you know, it's
not really blue, it's not really red. It's kind of purpleish.
So I think it's safe to say, and fair to say that there's not
unanimous support for the war out there. What are you going to
say to the troops down there?
TP: Well, what I'm going to say is first of
all, thank you. And then I'm going to say we support our troops.
And I'm also going to say I support what you do. Now there's a
lot of concern, as there should be, about what's going on in Iraq,
and the like. But it's a schizophrenic message to say to the troops
you know, we really love you, and we do, but we don't support
what you go out and risk your lives, and work twelve hours a day
every day to do. And so, that sets up a schizophrenic message
to them. So I always want to tell them, we support you across
the board, no matter what. Once we commit troops, then let's support
them 110%. And also, you need to know that Minnesota leads the
nation in National Guard recruitment and retention, and these
aren't average folks. You know, we just don't go find them out
on the bus stop. These are strong, dedicated, tough, patriotic
people.
JB: Well, I've got to tell you that about,
oh, two Decembers ago, I had the very great pleasure of meeting
and talking to three of the military
moms of Minnesota, gals by the name of Terri Lee, Sharon Johnson,
& Jolene Wieman. And I talked to them, and I got a feeling
that there is so much family support for these troops going out...I
mean, the families of Minnesota are standing behind their guys,
I mean, as well as any Americans I've ever talked to.
TP: There's no question about it. We've got
a huge outpouring of family support. And again, there are some
mixed feelings about the war across Minnesota, as there are across
most other states. But that's not the point. The point is we've
got these folks over there, they need to know we're with them.
They need to know we're thinking of them, they need to know we
support them.
JB: Well, you lost a great baseball player
this week, Kirby Puckett at the very young age of 45. I mean,
I think you issued a statement on that. I mean, we're all going
to miss Kirby. What are your thoughts when he passed away?
TP: I had two key thoughts, Jed. One is that
the joyful nature of his personality. Obviously, he was a great
baseball player. But just as a human, just very joyful, always
energetic, up-tempo, happy, loved people. The other thing is,
you know, life is fleeting. That would be my second observation.
You know, he's 45 years old. He's been on a big roller coaster
ride, a big hero on the field, but definitely showed us his humanity
off the field. And at the age of 45, he dies. And so for all of
us, I hope it's a time not only to celebrate how great he was
in baseball, but maybe reflect a little bit about life and the
fact that it doesn't last that long, and how are we living, how
are we serving, how are we treating each other. I hope there's
a little bit of reflection that comes with the baseball assessments
as well.
JB: Well, I think that's exactly right. And
you know, I think any time a prominent person passes, we all kind
of think about our own mortality, and when you're going down there
and talking to military families, I don't know how many of Minnesota's
troops have been lost in Iraq. But I think every American sits
back and looks at the families that are supporting these young
men and women, that they really...the families are giving as much
of a sacrifice as anybody in this war. What else can Minnesota
do, or what can the rest of America do to help relieve some of
the pressure on these families?
TP: Wow, thanks for asking. You're exactly
right. When these soldiers serve, the families serve, too. I mean,
you can imagine being gone a year and half, and leaving behind
a spouse with a few kids, and now they're a single parent, basically,
because you're gone. And the driveway has to get shoveled, and
the grass has to get mowed. And so there's...in Minnesota, there
is a Minnesota family care initiative the First Lady's put together.
They can go on my website,
click on there, and they can sign up to do volunteer chores for
these families, mowing grass...they're not looking for money,
but just simple acts of love to support these families. So I hope
if you're in Minnesota, you check that out. Other states have
things like that as well. And then they can make contributions
to the Minnesota
Family Foundation, which helps families of deployed soldiers
in crisis.
JB: That's fabulous stuff. Governor Tim Pawlenty
of Minnesota, thanks very much for taking the time to join us
tonight.
End of interview.
Posted at 5:30PM PST
Return to top
Wednesday,
March 8
The Smart Guys
analyze the Solomon decision, and predictions on the South Dakota
abortion banning law.
Jed Babbin, guest hosting for Hugh.
JB: One of my favorite segments every week
that I sit in for Hugh is the Smart Guy segment, which we're going
to do right now. We're going to have a little bit of time with
these gents. Right now, let's go to, on the left, Professor Erwin
Chemerinsky, Duke University Law School, and John Eastman, Chapman
University, on the right. Gents, thanks for coming aboard.
EC: It's always a pleasure.
JB: Hey, let's start off with...hey Erwin,
how much is Duke University going to lose now that the Solomon
Amendment's going to be enforced?
EC: Well, they're not going to lose anything,
and hopefully, they won't lose any more basketball games, either.
The reality is that Duke is going to comply with the Solomon Amendment,
as every major university is, because they have no choice. Just
so that all your listeners know what we're talking about, the
Solomon Amendment is a federal law that says that universities
that receive federal funds must allow the military to recruit
on campus. Many law schools, including Duke, refused to allow
the military to interview on campus, because they have a policy
that employers that discriminate based on race, gender, religion
or sexual orientation aren't welcome on campus. And the military
won't allow gays and lesbians to serve. But the Supreme Court
yesterday, 8-0, upheld the Constitutionality of the Solomon Amendment.
So the military really does get preferential treatment. No other
employer that discriminates can interview on campus, as the military
is going to get...
JB: John Eastman, it should get preferential
treatment, shouldn't it? That's really the issue, that if the
government is paying your bills, why shouldn't they have a little
bit of control of what goes on, on the campus?
JE: Well, that's right. One of the things we
learned in the course of this litigation, for example, is that
Harvard University gets over $300 million dollars a year from
the taxpayers via the federal government. And this little condition
on that spending is one they didn't like, but they wanted to keep
the money. Look, it's more broad than that, though. I mean, in
days of old, our institutions of higher education welcomed the
opportunity to provide service to the country. The citizen soldier
scholar idea is a profound part of our nation's history. And the
notion that somehow they would block recruiting from the military,
while we're in the middle of the war, has really got people up
in arms, and I think that's what's led to the Congressional insistence
on enforcement of this statute.
JB: Well, Erwin, back to you. I mean, we have
a situation here where Yale is admitting a Taliban to their student
body, and they won't allow ROTC on campus? There's something seriously
wrong with schools like that, isn't there?
EC: That's an unfair characterization. The
military can speak on campus, just like the Taliban or anybody
else...
JB: Whoa, whoa, whoa. Time out. John, did I
just hear Erwin compare the military to the Taliban?
EC: No, you compared the military to the Taliban.
JB: I didn't lump them in the same sentence,
buddy.
EC: Let me finish.
JB: Okay.
EC: My point was this wasn't about whether
the military or the Taliban, or anybody else can speak on campus.
The Taliban wasn't trying to use the recruitment office, the career
service office to interview. Law schools have a long-standing
policy that employers who discriminate aren't welcome to interview
on campus using their facilities. And I think that's absolutely
right. I think no employer should be using the law school's facilities,
unless all students are able to interview. I think law schools
need to convey the message that discrimination is wrong. The reality
is the military can interview...
JB: All right. Erwin, let's let John get back
in on this. I mean, this wasn't about military discriminating
about homosexuals, John, or was it?
JE: Well, it was in part. But the first Solomon
Amendment, and it actually dates back to the anti-war protests
following Vietnam...and just general prohibition on ROTC long
before this particular policy was ever put in place, there's been
an anti-military sentiment from a lot of the nation's top schools.
But let me go further, and there's something else going on here
that's important. Most of the nation's top law schools actually
discriminate themselves against religion, for example, on who
they will allow to recruit on campus. If there's a religious organization
such as the Salvation Army, that because of their religious beliefs,
continue to adhere to the view that homosexual conduct is immoral,
they are barred from recruiting on campus. And that's a religious
discrimination on the part of the institutions. So they're being
very selective in their insistence on no discrimination on who
gets to participate, as long as there's no discrimination in the
direction that you want them to go.
JB: All right. Well, let me get Erwin back
in there, because I really want to stay focused on the military
issue. Now Erwin, John raised a very good point. This is not about
homosexuality, this goes way, way, way back to the point of banning
ROTC on campus. And that's what the Solomon Amendment was really
pointed at, wasn't it?
EC: Not at all. What this stems from is a specific
amendment that was made in 1997 by Representative Solomon, that
was in particular response to the military being excluded by law
schools. There may be other things in the past where this was,
but this is not what this is. And that's not what the Supreme
Court decision yesterday was about. That's not what this lawsuit
was about. I'm a named plaintiff in this lawsuit, so if nothing
else, I can speak with some authority. This is about the fact
that the military will not, because of a federal statute, to take
gays and lesbians, and law schools won't allow employers who discriminate
to use their facilities. I've never heard of the Salvation Army
wanting to interview at any law school, or being excluded from
any law school.
JB: Well I don't think the Salvation Army does
a lot of recruiting at law schools, does it, John?
JE: No, the American Bar Association actually
requires that all of its member institutions prohibit any group,
even ones that are religious, from recruiting on campus if they
discriminate on the basis of sexual orientation. And that means
that an organization that adheres to its sincerely held religious
views will be barred from recruiting on campus. And that's a condition
of membership in the ABA, and the American Association of Law
Schools. Let me go further here, because this vote by the Supreme
Court was 8-0. And a week ago, the Supreme Court had a similar
8-0 vote in an important abortion speech case, NOW V. Scheidler.
And I think there's a message here the Court is sending us. The
neew John Roberts Court is a workmanlike Court that is not going
to let the courtroom become the field where we play out political
battles. And I think the message in both of these cases is, if
you've got a beef with the Congress' policy on don't ask, don't
tell, take it to the legislature. Let's not stretch our Constitution
to try and resolve these political disputes in the courts of law.
JB: All right. Let's go on to another issue,
and Erwin, I want to give you the first shot at this one. South
Dakota's abortion ban. There's no way that this is going to stand
up. Why does a state like South Dakota even try to do something
at this point?
EC: We agree it won't stand up. There are five
justices on the current Court who in all likelihood are going
to uphold Roe V. Wade. I think they're doing it for two reasons.
One is if, say, Justice John Paul Stevens retires, and President
Bush gets another pick, then there might be five justices who
would be willing to use this as the vehicle to overrule Roe V.
Wade. The other reason they're doing it is political grandstanding.
It's an easy way for conservative legislators to appeal to their
conservative constituents.
JB: Well, John, you get the last word. What
is going to come out of this?
JE: I think people as committed to this cause
as that South Dakota is, is not doing it for political grandstanding.
They're doing it because they think human life is being taken
in wholesale numbers. And look, one of the things we learned a
couple of years ago, Justice Kennedy, who had been in the majority
of Planned Parenthood V. Casey, reaffirming Roe V. Wade, became
very troubled in the partial birth abortion case out of Nebraska
several years ago, when he saw what the impact, or the import
of that decision meant. And I think it's an open question whether
Justice Kennedy has had a change of heart.
JB: Well, let's just see. Professor Erwin Chemerinsky,
Duke University Law School, John Eastman, Chapman University,
the right and the left, thanks very much, guys.
End of interview.
Posted at 10:45PM PST
Former California
Attorney General and current Congressman Dan Lungren on the Rob
Reiner First 5 smell test.
Jed Babbin, guest hosting.
JB: We're talking right now to California Congressman
Dan Lungren. I want to get to one of the principal reasons we
invited you on today. Now you were Attorney General of California
for a while. You're one of the very few Attorney Generals in recent
history out there that could actually find his way to the courthouse,
and would know what seat to take when he walked into the courtroom.
So let me just go right to the issue. We've been talking, and
Hugh was talking a lot last week about this whole thing about
the First 5 Commission, Rob Reiner, and all of the money that
they're spending in California, that apparently, apparently is
related to Proposition 82, and the funding of preschool for 4
year olds and so forth. I know you don't want to prejudge these
things, but there's so many things that are going on in here.
I know from my experience in this goofy town, if this was a federal
commission, the place would be crawling all over with FBI agents
by now. So let's just set the names and the dates aside. Let's
just talk about what's legal. Is it possible that these guys could
be spending public money on a private campaign to get Proposition
82, or something else, on the ballot, and then passed?
DL: Let me put it this way. It appears to me
that there is more than an apparent conflict of interest. This
looks to me like a clear conflict of interest. That is a different
question as to whether or not it is unlawful. And the reason I
say that is you have to look at how these commissions have been
established by initiatives, and then there's another initiative
out there. Technically speaking, if you're not saying vote for
this particular amendment, if you're making a general statement,
you might very well be able to get around any illegality that
is chargeable. And what really needs to happen is this continue
to be exposed to the light of day, so that the people of California
can make a judgment as to whether this makes sense. And they also
can use that when they look at the proposition.
JB: Well, it seems to me that might be a little
bit too little and too late. Isn't there something...what can
citizens do? I mean, can they sue in their own names? I mean,
can you have a situation like in qui tam situation that I'm familiar
with in federal law, that someone can bring an action in the name
of the government, and try to stop this stuff?
DL: We do have qui tam actions that are in
California. Rarely, but they do happen. Rarely do they happen
on the state level. They have been successful under some circumstances.
Where you're talking about an allegation that it is a blatant
misuse of government money, and misappropriation of the people's
money for an inappropriate purpose. What I'm just suggesting is
that is a very difficult case to carry. And sometimes, when people
take that, everything gets lost in that. And if you're not successful
with that, they assume that what was done was okay, where you
are not looking at the action on its own merits, which appear
to me to be a clear conflict of interest. Just because it's not
actionable doesn't mean it's not unethical or inappropriate, and
that people ought not to respond very strongly against it. That's
my point. It's sometimes distracting to try and go in a legal
sense, if, in fact, you don't have a legal basis for it.
JB: Okay. So basically, if this comes down
to a political question, I mean, there's got to be political answers
to it. I mean, if there's...
DL: Absolutely. I mean, people should be asking
questions. Every time Mr. Reiner appears they ought to be asking
him questions. Every time there's an action by the commission
there ought to be a question. There ought to be a clearer statement
from the Governor's office as to how they feel about this. State
legislators ought to be asked very specifically what they ought
to do. I mean, look...if you look at what I call a scandal about
the way the commission that was set up with respect to stem cells
in the State of California has proceeded, problem after problem
after problem. It looks like the language...the very language
of the proposition is set up to assist particular individuals.
I mean, that's one of the problems we have with initiatives. As
good as that is as a general concept, when you can create mechanisms
that really in a sense unfairly benefit you with the taxpayer's
money without any oversight by the legislature, something's wrong.
JB: Well, but you have a situation here where
a guy who's running a commission, and is apparently awarding contracts
to his pals, he's overpaying them...I mean, is there something
that somebody can stand up and say we've got to stop this, and
here's how to do it right now?
DL: Well, two things. They ought to urge members
of the legislature to have an investigation. That oversight on
the legislative branch is an extremely important and can be effective
tool be used on behalf of the people...
End of transcript.
Posted at 10:11PM PST
Brig. Gen.
Mark Kimmitt on the state of affairs in Iraq, and the morale of
the troops.
Jed Babbin, guest hosting for Hugh this
week.
03-08kimmitt.mp3
JB: We're talking right now to one of the real
warriors helping run the Global War On Terror. Brigadier General
Mark Kimmitt is the deputy director of plans and strategy for
Central Command. General Kimmitt, thanks very much for taking
the time to join us.
MK: Well, thanks for having me.
JB: Well, you're a real no-fooling warrior,
sir, and I see that Ranger tab on your shoulder. So it seems to
me you've probably got a pretty fair idea of what's actually going
on on the ground. Centcom is in control of most of the forces
in Iraq. Let's go through some of the stuff that we keep hearing
from the mainstream press. Now for example, we keep hearing that
morale is falling apart, and 70% of our troops just are hating
it over there. Well, I guess they would. But basically, how is
morale going on in Iraq, on the ground, with the troops?
MK: Well, Jed, I've always said that morale
is a function of two factors. The first factor is do the soldiers
understand their mission? And the soldiers clearly understand
their mission over there. They see what they're doing, they know
why they're there. They know why the country has sent them over
to Iraq. They can't walk around a car bomb site, or see a targeted
assassination without understanding their mission, and how important
it is for them to be there. And frankly, the second aspect of
morale is how do they feel about themselves, and how do they feel
about the people back home? As long as they've got their friends
and family back home rooting them on, the American public, the
American Congress, the President, morale's going to be high. You've
got a clear focus mission, you've got the people of America behind
you, morale is high.
JB: Well, let me go through that just a little
bit deeper, because I was over there in December, and I talked
to a lot of the troops, and what I try to do when I get over there,
or anyplace with the troops, is just kind of shy away from the
officers and say Sergeant, let's you and me go in a corner. And
what they were telling me is number one, the food's real good
over here, aside from the places where you don't have a lot of
fresh meals, but most of the time, they're very happy with the
food, they're very happy with some of the special arrangement
you guys have made, like the access to e-mail, and the other things
they're able to do. I mean, a lot of these folks can actually
get on the phone and call home. Tell us how common that is for
the troops on the ground?
MK: Well, my sensing has always been that sometime
during the day, unless they're out on a combat mission, they're
going to find a way to get back in touch with their friends and
family back home. Whether it's by e-mail, whether it's by telephone,
as you said, the troops on the ground are going through enormous
lengths to try to maintain communication between themselves and
their families. So they're able to stay in touch with their friends
and their family.
JB: Well, in terms of the families, now you're
a significant commander in the loop there. How are the families
doing back here? Tell me some of the things that are being done
for the families, and quite frankly, what can America do to help?
MK: Well, I think if you go to most of the
posts around the country, you're going to find family support
groups are strong. You're going to find community relations are
strong. Not only are we counting on the folks on post to send
care packages and support to the troops, but the communities are
wrapping themselves around the units as well. You see that a lot
in the active duty military as well as the reserve communities.
There's a lot that the military does. There's an old saying, the
Army takes care of its own. In this war, we're finding out that
that is still the case.
JB: Well, in terms of what's going on back
here, I always want to mention for our listeners Americasupportsyou.mil.
It's one of the programs the Pentagon's running, and I think it's
doing pretty well in getting communities and businesses to help
support the troops in a very direct way. Not just sending care
packages, but even just having kids in school send notes over
there saying soldier, I appreciate what you're doing.
MK: Well, I certainly got those letters over
there, and I'm sure that the troops are still getting them.
JB: Well, let's talk about some of the other
stuff. And you know, we're hearing from the press all the time,
and we've got a lot of folks bleating away in Congress about how
much of a strain this is putting on the troops. Now when I was
over there, I talked to some of your leaders, and some of the
guys who really are having a good feel for what's going on there.
And it's undeniable. We have a strain on the force. How is it
holding up? I mean, you're talking about guys who have two or
three years of combat under their belts already, and it might
be a 30 year old captain we're talking about.
MK: Well, clearly there is some pressure on
the force. And the pressure on the force manifests itself by having
to send our soldiers back over once or twice, or more than that.
Nonetheless, I think if you take a look at the important statistics
about what that pressure causes, whether it's in terms of re-enlistment
or recruitment, the numbers are good. And again, if the soldiers
didn't want to be in the military, when they had a chance to re-up,
they would walk out. That is not the case. And I think it goes
to the point that you mentioned early, that these soldiers understand
why they're there. I am confident that there are services...in
my service, the Army, has got a plan that will sustain us as long
as we need for this operation, for the operation in Afghanistan,
and whatever else the country asks us to do.
JB: Well, that's the real $64 dollar question,
General. It seems to me a lot of people doubt now that if something
fell apart somewhere else, we even have the capability to do it.
I mean, we've got Jack Murtha blathering up there saying oh, the
Iranians know how weak we are, and that's emboldening them. I
mean, what's the answer to that?
MK: Well, I think that any adversary in the
world that would somehow suggest or think in their own deliberations
that we do not maintain a capability to do what our nation asks
us to do is making a serious mistake.
JB: Well, how about Centcom itself? Now you
guys have an awful lot of the Special Forces working for you.
And I know a lot of the SpecOps types. I mean, I'm a frustrated
one myself, wasn't ever athletic enough or smart enough or brave
enough to do that, but be that as it may, a lot of these guys
come and tell me you know, they're spending three or four years
away from their families. Are we expanding Special Forces? It
seems to me from what we hear from the Quadrennial Defense Review
that a lot more SpecOps troops are going to be there. What are
we doing? How big are they going to get? And quite frankly, where
are we going to get that many people who are that high quality?
MK: Well, the first thing that we're doing
inside my service in the Army is transforming the Army while we're
fighting this war. We're taking a hard look at the force that
we have today, and asking ourselves is this the force we want
for tomorrow, to keep continuing this fight, and whatever future
fights we're asked to fight. And that's why General Schoomaker
has been so revolutionary in transforming the Army into larger
brigades, taking some of the savings he's getting from units that
may not be as relevant in this war, artillery units, air defense
units, and converting some of those, and their people, over to
other types of units, or letting those people re-enlist for Special
Forces. So I think the first way is by an internal examination
of what we need now and for the future in transforming the military
so it's more appropriate to the fight. And second, of course,
is bringing on in our recruiting efforts, more high-quality young
men and women to take on those specialties that are going to be
needed.
JB: Well, I was down at the JFK Special Forces
school watching a Robin Sage exercise oh, about a year and a half
ago. And one of the things that impressed me was the confidence
of the people there that they'd be able to get more of the right
kind of guys. But the thing that struck me, I was talking to one
senior warrant officer, I think his name was Bart Bryant, one
very calm, pro kind of Green Beret that you'd expect that kind
of guy. But he was saying look, there's a lot of kids in this
country who can shoot expert. There's a lot of kids in this country
who can hump a 50 or a 100 pound pack up a long hill. But there's
not a lot of guys out there who can operate in the way that the
Army Special Forces operates, in terms of dealing with indigenous
forces and so forth. How are you going to find kids of that quality...I
mean young men and young women?
MK: Well, I've got a lot of respect for the
Special Forces at Fort Bragg. I come from Fort Bragg as well.
But I take a look at what we're doing on the ground in Iraq right
now, and most of the training for the Iraqi Security Forces is
done by non-Special Forces troops. Most of training for Afghan
forces is not being done by Special Forces. They do bring great
capability to that mission, foreign internal defense and training.
But that is also a skill set that our conventional forces can
do as well. Not as great all the time, but I think for the types
of forces that we're trying to build in Iraq and Afghanistan,
they're up to the task.
JB: In terms of the overall mission over there,
is it something that we're now facing a real diminution of the
Iraqi capability? Is the Iraqi government falling apart? I mean,
we're seeing nothing but bad news on the television every single
day. What do you say to the American people about that?
MK: Well, the first thing you say is that the
country is not on the verge of civil war. You can look at some
very clear barometers of civil war, and personally, I don't see
them. The country is not falling apart into large-scale sectarian
violence. The government is not falling apart. The military is
not falling apart and going into sectarian divisions. We've seen
this in Yugoslavia. We've seen this in Lebanon. I remain confident
that they're going to work their way through this situation. And
as I've said before, the last couple of weeks have been a bit
of a pothole. Not a bump in the road, but a pothole. And we're
going to find out if the country has those shock absorbers that
can see their way through this, or if it's going to crack in the
frame. But it looks like they're standing up to the challenge,
that the vast majority of Iraqis are rejecting the calls for civil
war. But at the same time, we always need to be concerned about
that. We can't wish it away. We can't ignore it. But there is
a probability that it could happen. But in my view, a very, very
low probability.
JB: Brigadier General Mark Kimmitt, deputy
director of plans and strategy of Centcom, General, thanks. I
know you're a busy guy. Thank you very much for giving us part
of your day today.
MK: Thank you, Jed.
End of interview.
Posted at 3:57PM PST
Return to top
Tuesday, March
7
Rob Reiner
watch: As the scandal turns.
Once again, Jed Babbin guest hosting.
JB: We're talking again about this whole scandal,
the growing scandal surrounding the First 5 Commission, Rob Reiner,
and Proposition 82. Joining me right now to talk about this and
bring us up to date is Bill Bradley of Newwestnotes.com.
Bill, thanks for taking the time to join us.
BB: Hi, thanks for having me on.
JB: You know, this whole thing, I'm new to
the story, I'm just getting up to speed on it. Reset the clock
for us. The whole basic bottom line is that you have a public
commission here, headed by Rob Reiner. Apparently they're spending
public money on a campaign to pass a proposition on the ballot
this Fall?
BB: Essentially, that's right, except that
the proposition will be on the June ballot, the California primary.
JB: Oh, wow. So this...
BB: Rob Reiner promoted an initiative which
passed here in California narrowly in 1998, to slap more of a
tobacco tax on cigarettes in California to fund early childhood
development programs. But it's turning out that there is very
little oversight or control over how this money is spent.
JB: All right. Now you've reported earlier
that about $230 million dollars has been spent by this commission
on advertising and public relations?
BB: On advertising and public relations. Actually,
over a quarter of that on public relations, which is a stunning
amount of money.
JB: Well, I mean it's a big amount of money.
$230 million bucks is a lot more than I make in a year, and in
all seriousness, this is astonishing. That's probably more than
Budweiser and Tylenol spend in an entire year on TV advertising.
BB: Actually, as it turns out, the commission
spent $23 million dollars in just one quarter of the past year,
promoting preschool for all, which was then the initiative that
Rob Reiner had his political organization out in the field gathering
signatures for. And in that one quarter of time, that $23 million
dollars spent promoting the universal preschool initiative, public
money, was actually more than the California Lottery spent on
advertising for the entire year.
JB: Well, you know, that's important, though.
I mean, it seems to me this is a huge, huge slush fund. I mean,
the last time I looked into something like that, it was being
run by the U.N. You know, this is something that is so out of
control. Let's talk about some of the contracts that you've found
between Reiner's commission and this ad agency. I mean, I'm reading
some of your stuff today, and I am just astonished. How do you
have the chairman of the commission, supposedly which is conducting
a competitive bid to get the services of some ad agency...the
chairman of the commission is signing the cover letter of the
proposal?
BB: Yes, it was very odd. Now he's trying to
distance himself now from the spending that promoted his own initiative,
but the fact is that this campaign firm...and by the way, as you
may know, I'm not a conservative. I'm a fairly liberal guy.
JB: Well, we won't hold it against you. You
seem like a pretty straight reporter.
BB: ...and have actually worked with a number
of well-known Democrats, some of whom you probably don't like.
JB: Well, all right. Again, we won't hold it
against you, as long as you stick to the facts, you're our friend.
BB: But this is...right. This is a situation
that is out of control here, and Rob Reiner, who I'm acquainted
with through Hollywood friends, he has a political media firm
called GMMB, which also turns out to be the media firm, the advertising
agency for the First 5 Commission. And it's actually founded and
headed up by a fellow named Frank Greer, who's a terrific consultant,
who also is a media consultant for Bill Clinton.
JB: All right. Let me stop you there, because
one of the things that struck me, and you know, I'm an old government
contracts lawyer. I mean, I have been looking at this stuff for
thirty years, investigating it, litigating it. And it seems to
me that there's a real question right up front. If there is a
bright line that separates the mission of the First 5 Commission
from the campaign for Proposition 82, then somebody's going to
go to jail over this.
BB: Well, we'll see. These contracts were apparently
dubbed to be legal when they were signed and executed, and that
the funds were transferred. But at the very least, this is a very
bad situation. And in fact, the state legislature, dominated by
Democrats here in California, is jumping into this tomorrow, and
will almost certainly authorize an investigation by the state
auditor into this situation.
JB: Well, it seems like a lot of people ought
to be investigating it, because...again, and maybe I'm not asking
the question in the right way. But is the mission of the First
5 Commission to get something like Proposition 82 on the ballot,
or to get it passed? Is there any commonality between the statutory
purpose of that commission, and someone saying well, you know,
that falls within our ambit to push Proposition 82?
BB: No, I don't think there is. Proposition
10 authorized the collection of these tobacco tax funds for the
purpose of promoting and funding early childhood development programs.
As it turns out, a lot of the money has gone, as you've said,
into advertising/public relations efforts, which as the commission
evolved over time, and we see this in the contracts I was revealing
today, the primary mission of the commission, as articulated by
its internal documents, was to promote universal preschool, which
was not what Proposition 10 was intended to do, and not what the
voters thought that they were doing. So in other words, to cut
to the chase here, what we have with this contract, a $67.5 million
dollar contract over several years time for advertising services,
is to promote the stimulation of public demand for more state
spending, and involvement with preschool programs, which of course
happens to be the purpose of Rob Reiner's current initiative,
Proposition 82, which would...that initiative would enact a higher
tax on wealthy taxpayers to fund a universal preschool program
throughout California.
JB: Okay. But what we're basically saying,
and I think what you just said, is that Proposition 82 is not
something that the First 5 Commission was supposed to be set up
to support.
BB: Oh, no. Not at all. Not at all, no.
JB: So it's outside their mission. So if they're
spending money on it, they're spending money on a purpose that
they weren't supposed to be involved in.
BB: Right. Well of course, by definition, it's
not the mission of a state agency to be promoting another ballot
initiative, which...
JB: Well all right. Is there a statute that
prevents that, do we know?
BB: Well, we're going to find out. One would
think there is, but so far, it's unclear, because...
JB: Well now, these guys are spending money
like the proverbial drunken sailor, and again, the last time I
saw something like this, Benon
Sevan was running it.
BB: Right.
JB: Now you've got a guy by the name of Ben
Austin, who is leaving as the campaign manager for Proposition
82. What's his story, and how is he connected back to the California
First 5 Commission?
BB: Right. Well, his story, as I just revealed
in the last few hours, he's leaving as the campaign manager of
Rob Reiner's new initiative campaign. He hooked up with Rob Reiner
some years ago as a political advisor and political consultant
as Rob got more involved in politics. He had been an aide in the
Clinton White House...
JB: Okay, I'm sorry. We've only got about thirty
seconds left.
BB: Okay.
JB: Is he someone who was paid out of the First
5 Commission to work on Proposition 82?
BB: He was paid out of the First 5 Commission
to do consulting services for Rob, and for the commission. Unspecified.
Over half a million dollars. And for most of that period of time,
he was being paid more than the salary of the current governor
of California, Arnold Schwarzenegger.
---
JB: Bill, regardless of our political differences,
you're uncovering something that really smells to high Heaven.
Recap for us just one more time, the amount of money flowing through
this First 5 Commission, and to God only knows what?
BB: Well, it's upwards of $4 billion dollars
in total, and 80% of which has gone to local county commissions
for early childhood development programs. I'm just beginning to
look into earlier state audit reports which indicate some irregularities
there. But at the moment, what we're focused on is the state fund
itself, and in particular, the $230 million dollars in money spent
on advertising and public relations services, paid through firms
which are connected either politically to Rob Reiner, or through
Hollywood friendships with Rob Reiner, which is the case with
the PR firm that we were talking about. And in particular, we
have the situation where $23 million dollars was spent in just
one quarter to promote universal preschool for all at the same
time that Rob Reiner had signature gatherers out collecting signatures
to qualify his universal preschool for all ballot initiative for
the June ballot.
JB: Now do we know if any of this money spent
for this community action network program was actually spent,
for example, in paying these people to go out and get signatures
to put Proposition 82 on the ballot?
BB: I don't know at this point. And there are
over 150 community-based organizations, so-called, who received
those funds, and you know, I literally do not know. This is...as
you know, it's a huge amount of money, and it's been spread around
to a lot of people.
JB: Well, sure. This is still early days in
your investigation.
BB: Sure.
JB: And I expect a lot of stuff's going to
come out. Now you have reported also that there's some joint audit
committee in the California legislature that's about to take a
serious look at this.
BB: Yeah, the California legislature, and the
Democrats in charge of it, have become quite alarmed, finally,
by this, and partly...you know, I report these things, other papers
report things, but I also know a lot of these people, and I've
been talking with them and saying you know, this situation is
out of control. And so, they are...the Joint Legislative Audit
Committee will meet tomorrow afternoon, and is expected to authorize
an investigation by the state auditor to look into the whole commission.
JB: Well, how would that play out? I mean,
do we think that the state auditor then...I mean, is there some
criminal investigation that would go along with that? Is the state
Attorney General going to get involved? Do we know?
BB: Well, the state auditor...well, the legislative
committee has the broadest potential purview, both looking at
financial controls, and looking at the nature of the spending,
whether or not it in fact is legal, or at best unethical. So that's
one aspect of it. The Attorney General has actually recused himself
from this, because as the state's top lawyer, he is also...his
office has been the lawyer for the First 5 Commission.
JB: Oh, wonderful.
BB: Yes. But what he has done is he has passed
off the situation to the Sacramento County District Attorney,
who's a pretty conservative female prosecutor, who will probably
take a hard look at this. We also have the state Controller, who's
a Democrat, who is running for governor. And he has his auditors
reviewing the situation. They have not decided yet whether or
not to do a full investigation, but I spoke with him in person
in Bakersfield late last week, and he has sharply criticized what
Reiner's been doing. And incidentally, none of the other two candidates,
including Governor Schwarzenegger, have really been critical of
Reiner to this point.
JB: Well, yeah. And what's the story on that?
I mean, I've got so many questions on this, but let me get right
to that. It seems to me that the Governator could remove Reiner
just by a phone call. Why isn't he getting off of his posterior
and doing something about it?
BB: Well, that really is an essential element
of this forest, because I confirmed the week before last from
the Governor's office that in fact, Rob Reiner's term on the commission
ended over 14 months ago. So he is sitting there in an expired
term. He has been making these decisions until he took a leave
of absence under pressure recently. But the Governor could...doesn't
have to embarrass Rob Reiner, who of course he knows through Hollywood.
He can simply appoint his own appointee, which most Governors
generally do. And why has he not done this? Well, I think it's
because of, frankly, the Hollywood club. He doesn't want to embarrass
a fellow star...
JB: Oh, Lord.
BB: Yes.
JB: Are we talking, are we talking here about
the ultimate girlie-man? Is he just scared?
BB: (laughing) Now I like Arnold Schwarzenegger.
I actually voted for him, so I'm not saying that. But I think
Hollywood is a club, and you will seldom find stars saying bad
things about other stars.
JB: Heaven help us. Bill Bradley, Newwestnotes.com,
thanks very much for joining us.
BB: Thank you.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:13PM PST
OMB's Joel
Kaplan on the line item veto.
Jeb Babbin, guest hosting for Hugh Hewitt.
03-07kaplan.mp3
JB: I'm very pleased to be joined right now
by Joel D. Kaplan. He's the deputy director of the Office of Management
and Budget. Mr. Kaplan, thanks very much for taking the time to
join us today.
JK: Great to be with you, Jed.
JB: Hey, let's talk about the new initiative
the President has to get a line item veto. Now we went through
this drill ten years ago, and I think every conservative in America
wanted the idea that the President of the United States should
be able to cut some of the fat out of the budget without having
to go through vetoing one of these massive, thousand page bills
that nobody reads through anyway. What's the difference? We've
got a situation now, President Bush is proposing legislation,
just got sent up to the Hill. You guys have a good idea. What's
the difference between this package and the one ten years ago?
And why is this going to pass Supreme Court muster when the other
one didn't?
JK: Jed, it's a good question, and we think
we've got a good answer to it. What happened the first time around
when the Congress, the Republican Congress first enacted a line
item veto, is the Court said it was unconstitutional because basically,
it allowed the President to unilaterally strike out individual
pieces of a bigger piece of legislation. And the Court said basically,
that's not the system the Constitution set up. You can't allow
the President essentially to just rewrite the law on its own.
So as the President said the other day, that shouldn't be the
end of the story. We can do this in a way that gets the job done,
and is also Constitutional. So what the President sent up to Congress
yesterday was a proposal that says when the President gets one
of these big bills with lots of spending in it, some of which
is good important spending for the country, other spending in
it which is wasteful or unnecessary, what this allows him to do
is instead of vetoing the entire bill, which is basically throwing
out the baby with the bathwater, what this lets him do is just
take the bathwater out, which is the unnecessary spending, and
send that back to Congress, and say Congress, you've got to vote
up or down just on these unnecessary, wasteful earmarks. So at
that point, Congress still has a chance to address it like a new
law, and the President will have an opportunity then to sign it,
getting rid of all the unnecessary spending. We think...
JB: Let me interrupt you for a second if I
might, and sorry to do that. But let me just say you've got...one
of the magic buzzwords just came out of you, the earmarks. Now
I think a lot of people in America are really very concerned.
There's so much fat in the budget. But, but, all the old bulls
of Congress, the guys who've been there a long time, the committee
chairman and vice-chairman and so forth, I mean they kind of think,
at least, that they live and die on the ability to deliver pork.
What makes the President think that they're going to let him get
away with this, even if the thing passes. Why is it going to work?
JK: Well, Jed, there's a...first of all, there's
a lot of, I think, good attention being paid right now in Washington
to the problem of earmarks. So we've got a real window of opportunity
here, and we're optimistic. And just since the President sent
up this legislation yesterday, we've already got, I think, 16
or 17 sponsors of the bill in the United States Senate, including
the majority leader, Bill Frist, John McCain, Mitch McConnell.
Even John Kerry has signed onto it. So we're optimistic...
JB: Ooh, there must be a problem with it then
somewhere...
JK: Well, you know, even a blind squirrel finds
an acorn every now and then. (laughing)
JB: (laughing) Okay.
JK: But no, actually, we're pleased to have
Senator Kerry's support. We hope we can get more Democrats. We
don't think it should be a partisan issue to take on wasteful
spending in Washington.
JB: Well, okay, and I think that's a wonderful
idea. And I think this is something that everybody should line
up behind. But I've just got to ask the basic bottom line question.
I love George Bush. I've been supporting George Bush since I served
in his father's administration. But the guy doesn't own a veto
pen. Is he really going to do it? Is he going to take on the Congressional
types and say I'm going to slash the following? Give me some idea
of what his thinking is.
JK: Well, first of all, the reason the President
hasn't vetoed any spending bills yet is basically what I said
before. It is, Congress sends these entire bills. Basically, they've
lived up to the overall targets that the President said. He says
don't spend more than X amount. Basically, the Republican Congress
has lived within that. The problem is, the individual items within
that spending bill may be things that the President doesn't support,
and his only option under those circumstances is to veto the whole
thing, or accept the whole thing. This bill, if it's enacted,
and again, we're optimistic it will be, gives him a new choice,
and that's to just take the spending that really, if it's held
up to the light of day, nobody will think is the right thing for
the government to be doing, and veto that spending, or in this
case, send it to the Congress and say you need to vote up or down
just on this pork. And I think, like I said, we're optimistic
that we'll get that authority. And once we get it, I think there's
going to be ample opportunity for the President to put it to good
use.
JB: Well, God bless him. We hope he does. And
let's just focus on how this is going to work. And I think again,
you're saying some things that are very important. I want our
listeners to understand. What we're looking at here is a bill
that would give the President the power to say hey, I'm not signing
part of a bill, and I'm sending it back to you. It's almost like
a pocket veto of part of the bill. Does he sign the whole thing
and then send it back for the first part of approval? Or how does
it work?
JK: Jed, well what he does is he signs the
whole bill, so the bill becomes law. And then the President takes,
he identifies those individual items in the bill that he doesn't
like, he packages them all up together, and he sends that back
to the Congress. In the meantime, he tells the agencies of government,
don't spend this money. For 180 days, do not spend this money.
That gives the Congress an opportunity to take an up or down vote
on that package of basically wasteful spending. And under this
legislation, they would have to do it within ten days. And...
JB: So this really puts the monkey on the other
back, because you've got people now, instead of the President,
having to veto the whole thing, or just sign it and accept it.
The Congress is going to have to take an up or down vote, no changes,
on his package, which he's saying this is the part that I want
to veto. So literally, the Congress has to do what the President
now has to, and the burden's going to be on them, rather than
on the President.
JK: That's right, and it won't be sort of bundled
up with all of the good things that people think that government
should be spending money on. So it just shines a bright spotlight
on all of the pork that would otherwise be buried in these bills.
And we think under those circumstances, we're going to get a lot
more cooperation from member of Congress, who are not going to
want to be on record just voting for the pork.
JB: Amen. Well, tell me how things look in
the Congressional outlook. You've got Bill Frist lining up on
this, Senator Mitch McConnell is going to back it up, and Senator
McCain. Do you anticipate pretty quick action in the U.S. Senate?
JK: Well, you know, the United States Senate
is the world's greatest deliberative body, and you wouldn't want
to go out on a limb predicting quick action, but we are optimistic,
and like I said, we've got a lot of cooperation from the Republican
leadership in Congress on the Senate side. And on the House side,
a lot of very positive statements from Speaker Hastert, and majority
leader Boehner, and a lot of other prominent members of the Republican
leadership. So I'm not sure exactly how quick, but we're off to
a really good start, and we're pretty optimistic that there's...like
I said, there's a good window of opportunity here to get this
done.
JB: Well, we really wish you the very, very
best. Ladies and gentlemen, Joel Kaplan, deputy director of the
Office of Management and Budget. Let's look for some progress
on this.
End of interview.
Posted at 9:24PM PST
Rob Reiner:
The frog in the pot gets hot.
The actor/director/chairman of the First 5
Commission in California has had a series of bad days over the
last two weeks. Today was no exception. William Bradley, journalist
from the L.A. Weekly and blogger extraordinaire at New
West Notes, dropped another bomb
on Reiner this morning. Here's a bit from Bradley's article today:
Documents can be very revealing. The June
28, 2004 contract for media services which commits the
state to $67.5 million of advertising and related services
between the Rob Reiner-led California Children and Families Commission
and the GMMB ad agency, founded and headed by former Bill Clinton
media consultant Frank Greer, reveals that the principal focus
of the so-called First Five Commissions activities had already
evolved into creating public demand for more state spending on
preschool programs. Which happened to coincide with the emergence
of Reiners universal preschool initiative, Proposition 82,
now on the June California ballot.
So the more time goes by, the more the media
is starting to figure out that Reiner has allegedly been using
the First 5 Commission's media/slush fund as a way of funding
the drive to get Prop. 82 on the ballot. This, my friends, is
what we call a no-no.
The temperature on this story has been rising
day by day, but at an almost painfully slow pace. Reiner may just
be the frog in that pot, not noticing that the water around him
has started to get hotter.
How long before the pot starts to boil and
Reiner gets cooked? Tune in today to find out. Bill Bradley will
join guest host Jed Babbin, as will former California Attorney
General and now Congressman Dan Lungren.
Posted at 1:06PM PST
Return to top
Monday, March
6
John Fund on
Yale's discounting of an Ivy League education to a Taliban official,
and the effect of the Court's 8-0 Solomon decision.
Jed Babbin guest hosting for Hugh.
03-06fund.mp3
JB: Maybe, we hope, nothing like (UNC SUV incident)
happens on other campuses around the country, but it seems to
me one particular campus, a very prestigious Ivy League school
may be kind of welcoming this sort of thing, welcoming the people
who do these things into their midst. Joining me to discuss that
right now is the indispensible John Fund of the Wall Street Journal.
If you don't read John's stuff, you just don't get it. John, thanks
for taking the time.
JF: Pleasure, Jed.
JB: Let's talk about your column today, Taliban
Man At Yale. Sayed Rahmatullah Hashemi...who is he? And why
is he at Yale?
JF: That's the question. He is the former deputy
foreign secretary of the Taliban, which was perhaps one of the
most evil and repressive regimes ever to pollute the planet since
Nazi Germany. And he has wound up with an honored perch at Yale
University, his expenses paid for by a liberal foundation out
of Wyoming, and people at Yale is wondering what's going on here?
Now some people are saying well, we have to be tolerant. But this
is a regime, Jed, that stoned gays to death, that if women were
caught wearing fingernail polish, they sometimes had their fingers
chopped off, kite flying, paper bags of all things, were deemed
illegal. Music was illegal. Dancing, and of course, how could
be forget, this is the regime that harbored the terrorists under
Osama bin Laden, who killed 3,000 Americans on 9/11. This man
was a spokesman for that government.
JB: John, what am I missing here? I mean, what
is Yale thinking? I mean, I know Harvard hates America. Yale doesn't
allow ROTC recruiters on campus, but they allow, or not just allow,
they welcome a Taliban into their school?
JF: Well, we know that Yale is out of touch.
We know that today, because the Supreme Court unanimously, with
Ruth Bader Ginsburg agreeing with Clarence Thomas...
JB: Yes.
JF: ...unanimously held that Yale Law School
had unconstitutionally restricted military recruiters from its
campus.
JB: Well, that's another big, big blow.
JF: So Yale has everybody on the Supreme Court
against them. Now they're going to have an awful lot of other
Americans, because let me tell you. What steams them, Jed, is
this guy has a fourth grade education, a high school equivalency
diploma, and there are thousands of people in your audience who
have kids who have slaved hard and studied hard, and get their
SAT's up, who would love to go to Yale, and this guy is going
instead.
JB: Well, before we even get to the point of
who's paying for him, can I just ask one very simple question?
How the heck did this guy get into the country??? Why isn't he
at Gitmo?
JF: Well, the State Department says we looked
at him. Yale says the State Department looked at him, they're
passing the buck. But here's what I've been told privately. The
application came into the State Department, and they said well,
as prestigious a university as Yale has accepted him, he must
be something special. And Yale says, well don't blame us, the
State Department cleared him.
JB: (laughing) So we're not just doing buck
passing. What we're essentially saying is we're going to turn
over the security of this country to the Yale admissions department.
JF: Well, let me be clear. I do not believe
that Mr. Rahmatullah is a direct security threat. He was a propagandist,
a mouthpiece for the Taliban. I have no evidence he's ever killed
anyone. But it is repugnant for Yale to give up one of its student
slots to this man. And one of the reasons they did it was, the
dean of admissions said, well we had a guy just like him the other
year, and he went to Harvard. We couldn't lose another one. And
my question, Jed, is who in the world did they lose? Robert Mugabe's
agriculture minister in Zimbabwe?
JB: (laughing) Well, now we have a serious
question, John. We have a lot of people, the United Nations, Tony
Blair, all of these folks are saying well, you really just ought
to close Gitmo, and maybe you ought to just let all these people
go. There was a page in the Post today, the Washington comPost,
where they are basically saying well, all these guys need to be
released. Now my question to you is if we close Gitmo, and release
all these people, how many of them are going to get admitted to
Ivy League schools? And what scholarships are available to them?
JF: Well, at this rate, you know, if Osama
bin Laden is found in his cave, I'm worried that when we take
him into custody, Harvard may send out a recruiter.
JB: (laughing) Well, at the risk of being serious,
John, this conversation is degenerating...
JF: No, no. Part of this is a surreal conversation...
JB: It really is.
JF: ...because the situation is real. Jed,
do you know what the first class this guy took at Yale was? I'm
not making this up.
JB: Oh, I can't wait.
JF: He took the class called Terrorism: Past,
Present, and Future. And do you know why?
JB: Why.
JF: He must have thought it was a lab course.
JB: (laughing) All right.
JF: Now that's a joke, but he did take Terrorism
his first class.
JB: All right. Step back, Fund. Calm down here.
Who's paying for his education at Yale? It's got to cost what?
25 or 30 grand a year.
JF: Something called...
JB: And where do they get their money?
JF: Well, first of all, Yale is giving him
a discount of about 35 or 40% off normal tuition, because of his
special status.
JB: What???
JF: They're giving him a discount. The rest
is being picked up by something called the International Education
Foundation out of Wyoming. And that's run by a group of liberal
trial lawyers, and a guy named Mike Hoover, who's a cameraman
for CBS News, who went over into the Taliban, and visited with
them, and interviewed their officials several times in 2000, 2001,
before 9/11. And he apparently befriended Rahmatullah there. And
after the war, when he found Rahmatullah again on another trip,
he said well, why don't you come back, and we'll have this great
educational exchange. You can teach us about yourself, and I'll
teach you about America. Well, this fellow, though, is unreconstructed.
We can go into the fact that despite the claims that he has learned
his lesson, despite the claims that he has shown repentance and
remorse for serving this evil regime, I have evidence in his own
hand that he has not done that.
JB: Well, tell me. What is that evidence, John?
JF: He wrote an article, which has suddenly
been taken down from the International Education Foundation's
website, in which he says, "The Taliban were not dishonest
people. They honestly practiced what they had learned in their
religious schools, they did what they had been taught to do. Whether
what they had been taught was good or bad is another subject."
Then he goes on to say, "Seemingly like the poor Taliban,
the Americans are ignorant of the fact that their franchise state
of Israel is serving as an American al Qaeda against the Arab
world."
JB: Well, wait a minute. When did he write
this? I'm sorry.
JF: Late November, early December of last year.
This is after he'd already been at Yale for about four months.
JB: All right. So this is a guy who is clearly
not repentant. He is certainly a representative of what the Taliban
were, and the evil that they represented, and their ideology,
I still come back to the point, why is this man even allowed to
be in the country? Is the Homeland Security Department and the
State Department...are these guys all totally asleep?
JF: I think some members of Congress are starting
to ask that question. I think they want to know exactly what the
process was. Now I've heard one theory. Some people have speculated
well maybe he was an intelligence asset. He was really a double
agent, and gave us valuable information, and we're rewarding him
by admitting him to the country. But I have to tell you, Jed.
I have talked to all my sources in State, and other places. There's
no evidence of that. There's nothing more than a rumor. We have
to think that given the choice between government being malevolent
and government being incompetent, usually incompetence wins out.
And I think that's what happened here.
JB: Good Lord. Well, tell me one more point
that you just mentioned, saying he's getting a 35-40% discount
from Yale? I mean, that's got to be what, 10-20 grand worth of
tuition per year? What are the Yale people saying? How do they
justify this?
JF: They are not saying anything. When they
finally return calls to reporters, they said we cannot discuss
this case at all, because of privacy concerns. We discuss no individual
student's case. And I'm simply saying look, it is unbelievable
that you would do this. It is even more unbelievable that you
won't explain it or defend it.
JB: Well, John, let's go back to the other
point you were raising. We're going to get to that later in the
show, but I'm really glad you raised it. The Supreme Court today
said the Solomon Amendment, which says that you have to let ROTC
recruiters on campus to your law school if you're going to get
federal money. How is this going to be felt? Is this going to
be actually enforced against places like Yale? I really hope it
is.
JF: Well, that's up to the federal government.
And I think that they should have the courage of their convictions.
Look, if Yale or these other elite law schools have a beef, it
should be with Congress, because the policy on gays in the military
is run by Congress. It's not set by the military. Instead, they're
trying to punish the military, and they're trying to restrict
the number of recruits the military can get at a time when our
national security is threatened, and we're having trouble getting
recruits. I find it unconscionable that they were taking that
position, and it turns out that they wasted hundreds of thousands
of dollars in legal fees and delaying tactics, because the Supreme
Court unanimously said this is ridiculous. Withholding federal
funds from you if you won't allow military recruiters on campus
is perfectly reasonable.
JB: Well, it sounds to me like the Supreme
Court for once got it dead bang right. John Fund of the Wall Street
Journal, thanks very much for joining us.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:55PM PST
At the University
of North Carolina, none dare call it terrorism?
Once again, Jed Babbin guest hosting.
JB: Last Friday, Mohammad Taheri-azar, a 22
year old former student at the University of North Carolina, took
a rented SUV, and ran it into a crowd of students at the University's
campus. It seems to me this might be an act of terrorism. It's
only by the grace of God that the kids who were hit weren't killed.
Joining me to talk about that, and the University's pusillanimous
reaction to it, Kris Wampler, a senior at UNC. He's a member of
the UNC student Congress, and Kris, I think you're also president
of the college Republicans.
KW: Well, actually, I'm not president of the
college Republicans. I am a member though, definitely.
JB: All right. Well, tell me what happened
today at the campus. You were a part of the demonstration about
this event. What were you guys demonstrating? And what was the
campus...what were the campus authorities, the deans and so forth,
reacting?
KW: Well, we had about fifteen people out today
in the Pit, which is the name of our common gathering spot. It's
kind of a sunken down area, which is right where it happened,
actually. Right about where it happened. And we had signs out
there saying things like united, UNC united, call it what it is,
terrorism, and things like that. And a lot of people started crowding
around us, and asking questions. And we would hand out flags to
people. And there were debates going on, small groups, large groups.
The media interviewed some people. The administrators and deans
and so forth were there, but they were really distant. They kind
of looked on. One person commented they were quite rude when a
reporter tried to ask for an interview, and they were quite rude
to him. These people, the University of North Carolina, do not
like this kind of attention focused on them. They don't like anything
going off-campus and becoming a national issue like this. They
especially get upset, so naturally they were not too happy with
what we were doing out there.
JB: Well, you guys are trying to make the point
that his was essentially a terrorist act, right?
KW: Right, right.
JB: And what were the deans...I mean, has the
college said anything about this? Have they issued any statements
or made any reaction at all?
KW: The college...they've issued a couple of
messages from the Chancellor saying it was a terrible accident,
or not an accident, but a terrible thing to happen, and we're
sorry this happened, and we grieve with the victims, and we need
to heal, and things like that. But it's missing one thing: calling
it terrorism. And they haven't been willing to do that yet, despite
all of the rhetoric coming out of court today from this guy, and
the things he said to the police and so forth. A lot of this rhetoric
is out there, and it's pretty clear that he acted to avenge the
death of Muslims, to carry out the will of Allah, as he sees it.
And yet, UNC is just not saying what it clearly is, an ideologically-driven
agenda to hurt people, to hurt innocent people, which is terrorism.
JB: Well, exactly. I mean, they're trying to
say that this is not an ideological act? I mean, it seems to me
as you said, this man from his own mouth, from the very moment
he called 911, and I heard the tape today...
KW: Right.
JB: ...that he's called 911, and he says I'm
here, I just ran into a bunch of people, come and arrest me.
KW: Right.
JB: And he was saying today in court...tell
us what he was saying today in court. I only heard a bit of it.
KW: Right. I heard that in court, he said something
about how he was grateful to have the chance to carry out the
will of Allah. That was about all I heard, and the 911 call that
he made said something to the effect of, the reason he carried
this out was to punish the government of the United States for
its treatment of Muslims around the world.
JB: Yeah.
KW: So you had these two statements, on top
of the fact that he said he wants to avenge the death of Muslims
around the world.
JB: Well, you have this guy obviously, and
he's going to be tried for...
KW: Right.
JB: ...vehicular assault. It's a very serious
felony.
KW: Sure.
JB: Thank Heaven nobody got killed. Is there
anything you're hearing from the law enforcement people down there
that indicates they're going to treat this as an act of terror?
KW: Not yet. I mean, it's hard getting any
kind of information. I mean, the FBI of course was called in after
these statements were made and so forth, but nothing right now
indicates what anyone's going to do. And they've just now released
this 911 tape today. There have been some local experts, or at
least one of them saying that regardless of what the Feds do,
he does consider it an act of terrorism. So we're really trying
to be out there and pressuring the University to take the lead
on this, and to say look, this affected our members, our own students.
This affected members of our own community. Let's call it what
it is, it's terrorism. Let's charge this guy as much as we can
under federal law, and let's really punish him for what he did.
JB: Well, now I understand, from some federal
law experts I talked to on the way over to the show today, basically,
they don't treat this as an act of terror, and you're not likely
to get federal charges unless there's some link between this guy
and an international terrorist group. So it sounds to me like
they're just going to have to stick with the state charges. But
there's no reason why you guys shouldn't have some action on campus.
KW: Sure.
JB: Isn't there, or are you guys going to pass
or plan any sort of campaign here to hold these people up to the
standards they should be, and just basically say terror is terror,
and you're not welcome on our campus?
KW: Well, I'm a member of the student Congress
on campus, and one thing that me and some other people are planning
on doing are introducing a resolution, several of them, to condemn
what happened, to thank the first responders who were on the scene,
and also to urge the University to be out there calling it terrorism.
And I understand that there of course is an issue of what can
the Feds do, they have to follow law. At the same time, I don't
think a terrorist has to be connected with a group. People can
act on their own. And I just think that from a common sense view,
if you look at what this guy's saying, and you look at what people
say all the way across the world in Iraq and other places, when
they're beheading people, they say look, this is to get back at
what the United States does, this war on Islam as they call it.
It just seems to me that given this rhetoric, it's a pretty clear
act of terrorism, and UNC can really stand up and say look, we
don't want that here on our campus, and we want this to be treated
as terrorism. Even if the Feds are reluctant to do so, I think
that they should at least take the lead and say that.
JB: Well, do you have other groups that are
active on the campus? I mean, are there groups out there, for
example, trying to apologize for this guy, or accuse you guys
of being nasty to Muslims or anything like that?
KW: Well, there is a Muslim students association,
but I'm fairly certain that they were actually somewhat in favor
of us. They...I don't know if they particpated or not, but there
were people out there holding signs today saying let's forgive,
and things like that. But you know, forgiveness isn't really the
issue here. The issue is what this guy did. And there were people
apologizing and saying oh, this guy was just trying to inflame
people, and arouse passion against Muslims. It's not what we're
doing. We're trying to go out there and speak the truth in what
we thing really happened, and calling the University to follow
suit and do the same thing.
JB: Well, Kris Wampler, best of luck to you
in what you're doing. Please keep us apprised of what you're doing
on the campus of the University of North Carolina.
End of interview.
Posted at 10:42PM PST
Lt. Gen. Tom
McInerney on the ideological side of the War On Terror.
Former Undersecretary of Defense Jed Babbin
guest hosting.
JB: Right now, we've got to go direct to our
first guest, my very dear friend, Lt. Gen. Tom McInerney, U.S.A.F.
retired, Fox News senior military analyst. Around the Pentagon,
they call him RSG's, real smart guys. Tom is one of the best.
Tom, thanks for joining us.
TM: Thanks for having me, Jed.
JB: Hey, let's talk right away with the situation
in Iraq. People are saying there's civil war, the government's
falling apart. Even William F. Buckley, Jr., said we've lost.
Please give us your take.
TM: Well, unfortunately, they're all wrong.
The fact is there is a tough fight there. It's not civil war.
They want to know what civil war is, they'd have thousands of
people fighting. It turns out it's five car bombs in one day.
Look, people can just throw these things around, civil war, etc.,
we're losing. The fact is that we are winning, and that's why
they attacked the Golden Mosque. Zarqawi...when you attack a holy
shrine like that, it means that you, the enemy, is losing. And
so that's what they're doing. They're trying to create the impression
of sectarian violence, and there is violence. But that's entirely
different than a civil war.
JB: Tom, let me raise a question. You and I
were in Iraq last December, and you asked a question of a number
of the senior people we were meeting with. And I think they were
very uncomfortable in answering them. You asked them whether this
is building up to a showdown between the Sunni and the Shiia,
which is going to end up with a situation where there's really
just a shootout between those two groups. Is this what we're seeing
now?
TM: Well, this could be what we're seeing.
But I think as General Pace said yesterday, they went to the abyss
and they backed off. But for our listeners to understand it, if
the...the normal way they have solved problems in the Middle East
are, they just kill their enemy. So you've got 80% of the population
are either Shiia or Kurds. And we're trying to integrate that
20% of the Sunnis, where most of the, virtually all of the insurrection
has been over there. It's a combination of Zarqawi, foreign terrorists,
it's a combination of former regime loyalists, and then you've
just got some pure bandits, crooks, that are kidnapping, etc.,
or people planning car bombs and IED's. So the fact is, what we
talked about when we were there, Jed, was the U.S. government
ought to be telling the Sunnis look, this is your last best chance.
And we will work very hard to have a constitution that is inclusive,
we'll work economically for you. But what you have got to do,
you have got to stop the violence. You have got to come on board,
and be part of the team, because America is your last best hope.
Otherwise, the Shiia and the Kurds are just going to get tired
of it, and as we withdraw, they're just going to kill you. We
don't want that. That would be civil war.
JB: Amen to that.
TM: And we are a ways from that, and that won't
happen as long as we're here.
JB: Tom, we're suffering another mental eruption
from Congressman Jack Murtha. Let me just play a brief segment
of what he said yesterday on CBS' Face The Nation, and ask you
to react. Let's go to Murtha one, please.
Bob Schieffer: The chairman of the joint
chiefs of staff said this morning on Meet The Press, he said he
believes the war in Iraq is going, in his words, very, very well.
What is your assessment?
JM: Why would I believe him? I mean, this
administration, including the President, have mischaracterized
this war for the last two years. First of all, they said it'll
take 40,000 troops to settle this thing right after the invasion.
Then they said there's no insurgency. They're dead-enders. That's
what the Secretary of Defense said. On and on and on, the mischaracterization
of the war. They said there's nuclear weapons. There were no nuclear
weapons there. There are no biological weapons there. No al Qaeda
connections. So why would I believe the chairman of the joint
chiefs when he says things are going well?
JB: Tom, are we getting a lot of baloney from
Gen. Pete Pace? Or is Murtha really just suffering another mental
breakdown here?
TM: I think Murtha's suffering a mental breakdown,
and he's in denial, and he's using it for political purposes.
Let's first of all say you were at the intelligence summit two
weeks ago, Jed, three weeks ago.
JB: Right.
TM: ...in which the tapes that were translated
by Bill Tierney, in which in Saddam's own words, and Tariq Aziz's
words, that they in fact did have nuclear weapons. They didn't
have nuclear weapons, they were working on the development. They
were working on the development of plasma enrichment. They had
biological, they had chemical. They knew that they were deceiving
the U.N., because they were getting advanced information. And
they talked about, Tariq Aziz and...in the year 2000, and Saddam
Hussein, talked about, this was just before 9/11, talked about
planting either a nuclear device or biological, and Tariq Aziz
says we couldn't get away with an explosion. They'd blame us.
But he did say there's a place that the Americans have called
Fort Dietrich, that perhaps we could frame them on the biological,
because they do biological work there. The fact is, they're in
denial. They don't want to look at these tapes, and the administration
hasn't been real good about publicizing them as you know. But
Jack Murtha, for whatever his political reasons are, he's never
come up with a solution. He doesn't understand the overall threat
of Islamic extremism. He never talks about Islamic extremism.
He doesn't have a clue. And so many of them do not. And how this
Islamic extremism, which was not prevalent in Iraq, but Iraq can
be the counter as the first quasi-democracy in the region. That's
why Iraq is important.
JB: Tom, you said something I want to seize
on right now. The point that we're fighting here, we're fighting
a ground war in Iraq, we're fighting a kinetic war. We're also,
or at least we should be, fighting an ideological war. I think
you would agree with me when I say that radical Islam is not a
religion. Islam is a religion...
TM: That's right. It's an ideology.
JB: Exactly.
TM: Like Nazism.
JB: And what are we doing...exactly. And what
are we doing, or what are we not doing, I should say, to fight
the ideological war?
TM: Well, we're not doing enough, Jed, and
at this intelligence summit three weeks ago that John Loftis hosted,
I met an Egyptian, his name is Dr. Tawfik Hamid. And he has just
written a book, The Roots of Jihad. And in it, he says, which
is a wonderful book. And so what I'm going to talk about is what
Muslims that have made the transition understand. And he says
in his book, confront the reality of Islam now, or otherwise,
the reality of Islam will confront you later on. And what he is
in fact saying, that even the moderate parts of Islam are a major
problem, because they do not have separation between Church and
state, and it is an ideology moreso. And some of the things that
he writes in this book are so profound. It says...he's talking
about himself as a Muslim, our hatred toward non-Muslims, and
justification of killing them, was simply because they did not
follow Islam. They drank alcohol, and their women do not wear
the hajib, the Islamic scarf or veil. Therefore, it was, and still
is for many Muslims, a goal to inflict any form of harm or damage,
and cause pain to non-Muslims as a punishment for not following
Islam. Now this information is what I am looking into and getting
an intense background on...the deviancy of Islam, and why these
Islamic facists are such a threat to what we're doing, and why
Iraq, which would be a counter, where people vote, where women
vote, where you have, as I say, a quasi-democracy. It will not
be like ours directly, but it will develop into that. It's so
important. So I think that we have got to start looking at this
and countering this, Jed, and you're asking the exact right questions.
JB: Well, Tom, we've only got about a minute
left. But what is the biggest thing we could be doing to fight
the ideological war?
TM: Well, I think what we've got to do is have...Islam
need a reformation. And the world leaders, Bush, Blair, Berlusconi,
Merkel, and Japan, all of these world leaders need to get together
and say to Islam, you need a reformation, or there will be a clash
of civilization. And the danger is these people going nuclear.
JB: Lt. Gen. Tom McInerney, U.S.A.F. retired,
Fox News senior military analyst, thanks.
End of interview.
Posted at 10:00PM PST
Return to top
Sunday, March
5
The Beltway
Boys
HH: Fred
Barnes is at sea, but we have half of the Beltway
Boys. That would be Morton Kondracke, also of Roll
Call, the newspaper of Capitol Hill. And Super Stretch, Bill
Sammon, also a guest earlier this week on this program, talking
about Strategery,
the New York Times bestseller joining us. Did you fill in for
Fred on the Beltway Boys as well, Bill?
BS: I did not. I did not fill the Fred Barnes
memorial chair this week, although I would have been honored to.
HH: Morton Kondracke, who fills in for Fred
tomorrow night at 6PM?
MK: Tony Snow.
HH: Oh, very good. Well, Republicans two against
you, Morton. It doesn't much matter which one we put in there.
Let's start with the significance of this trip that the President
is on, landing in Kabul, going on to India, now in Pakistan, Morton
Kondracke. It's a pretty momentous occasion.
MK: Yeah, I kind of think that Bush probably
regards it as unfortunate that he's not back here fighting the
battle of the UAE, because his poll ratings are cratering, and
he's losing Republican support. But he's doing important work,
obviously, for the long run in the United States, balancing off
an ascendant China with two allies in the subcontinent. And that's
important work, strategic work.
HH: And Bill Sammon, how important is the India
deal, for example?
BS: Well, it's extremely important. I mean,
I happen to think that from a proliferation standpoint, it's not
particularly good news, because the bottom line is that it'll
allow India to have more nuclear weapons. Having said that, the
nuclear genie has been out of the bottle in India since 1974,
and I think President Bush tried to salvage what he could out
of this deal by providing India with civilian nuclear power technology.
You know, you're looking for a silver lining there. That means
that India, which has something like three times our population
at least, will not use as much oil. And the reason that our oil
prices are so high, one of the main reasons, is because India
and China are gobbling up the world's reserves of oil to feed
their burgeoning populations and their move to a more industrial
modern society. And so if we can start getting them on more nuclear
energy, that means that's going to have a mitigating effect on
the price of oil.
HH: In Pakistan, where he is tonight, I was
talking, Morton Kondracke, last hour with Howard Fineman, who
wrote a column suggesting Bush's inability to talk to the American
people may be hurting him. But I think come poll time, courage
and compass matter more than a lot of ability with words. Do you
think that's true?
MK: You know, I'm worried about Bush's condition
right now. He managed to get himself out of a hole in November.
You remember the Democrats were assailing him for having lied
about how we got into Iraq. And he fought back, made some really
great speeches about what Iraq policy was all about. Then we had
the election, and that lifted him. It lifted him five points.
You know, he was up from 38 to about 43, where he held for two
months. And now he's sinking again, back into the 30's. And you
get the impression that people have just stopped listening to
him. I mean, he's got to come back here and do one of the biggest
education jobs that any president's ever done. I mean, to turn
around, this is all...this is a nexus of nativism, is what this
is. This is...you know, you take a guy like Duncan Hunter from
your territory out there. He's a dyed in the wool nativist, and
he's been against Mexican immigration forever and ever and ever.
And a bunch of Arabs, a bunch of Mexicans, he doesn't know the
difference. And he...it's just no, no, no. And it's all this kind
of stuff, and the radio
talk show hosts have been bellowing about our borders are
insecure, and Lou Dobbs, and Sean Hannity, and these people have
been bellowing like crazy for so long, and it all fits into the
same thing. And Bush has got to come back and deal with that.
And I don't know if he can.
HH: Well Morton, A) our borders have been insecure
for a very long time.
MK: Yeah.
HH: It's not bellowing, it's argument in many
instances, though I'll agree with you about Lou Dobbs. But I will
say this. Duncan Hunter's a fine Congressman, an extraordinary
talent, and he knows armed services. He also knows the border
regions.
MK: Well, then why doesn't he know that the
UAE is harboring all these ships...our aircraft carriers are in
and out of Dubai all the time. We trust them with our men, we
trust them with out ships, and yet he doesn't trust them with...some
company that's owned by them, to manage these ports and unload
boxcars?
HH: Bill Sammon, how would you answer that,
because...then I'll take my shot. I know what my answer is. I'm
just curious what you think about that.
BS: Well, my feeling is that this thing started
off so negative out of the gate for Bush. In other words, virtually
all of America looked at this left and right and say boy, this
is a lousy deal. But I think it can only get better from his perspective.
And I agree with Mort that he's going to have to do a massive
education project. But I do think that a lot of Americans, the
more they learn about well, okay, it's sort of a paper transaction,
and oh, they're not going to be unloading the ships, and it's
still the Coast Guard, and still the Customs, and it's still the
same old longshoremen, the more people are beginning to accept
the merits of the deal itself. But that doesn't change the fact
that Bush, I think by his own admission, mishandled the PR, the
politics of this. The White House has admitted they didn't brief
Congress early or often enough in terms of public disclosure.
It didn't even rise to the President's level until it was a big
debacle. So he's got to walk that back. I mean, forget about the
merits. He's got to sort of attone for the politics of it, and
then get into the merits. And it's a big task.
HH: And my answer on that point is it's the
difference between 9/11 and the attack on the Cole. Both reprehensible,
and both certainly grievous loss of American life. But the ports
represent the home front, Morton Konracke. And the reason 70%
of America is thus far unpursuaded on the deal is that they're
afraid, and that there is a legitimate reason to fear penetration
of Arab countries more than there is to fear penetration of British
companies, though I think most Americans would prefer that all
the ports were simply run by American companies, staffed by Americans,
don't you think?
MK: Well, yeah, except that they're already
run by...look, these ports could be infiltrated by just about
anybody. If a British company is running a port, there's no reason
why...if you could buy a terrorist, or buy somebody who would
give terrorist information, that you couldn't get it from a Brit
just as easily as you can get it from somebody from the UAE, especially
because there's hardly any Arabs that are going to have anything
to do with the actual port management. And I think that you can
as part of this, and I think part of the education process, it
shouldn't be just education and PR, it should also be to isolate
the actual Arab owners of this company from the management of
the port to make it clear that it's reliable people who are going
to actually be privy to intelligence secrets, for example, as
to security.
HH: But Bill Sammon, let me switch over here.
It's not that the Arab owners aren't unreliable. In fact, I think
they would be reliable. It's that the information flows through
their company will have sensitive information, and people are
afraid of penetration at the level of a low level employee tapping
in, similar to penetration of the Philby era, of the Hanssen area,
of everything else. Is that what's driving Capitol Hill here?
BS: Well, that fear is, whether it's rational
or well-founded or not is another question. I mean, yeah, that
could happen, but then again, Richard Reid was British. You know,
the shoe bomber. And we have terrorists right here in our country.
I mean, we had terrorists in Oklahoma. We have al Qaeda people
that live here. So I mean if you're going to start looking at
countries and using that as your criteria, you're going to limit
yourself pretty rapidly. The problem I have, Hugh, is the economic
problem. Once you...because there's legislation being pushed through
Congress by both Republicans and Democrats, in both chambers of
Congress right now, that would not only prohibit foreign investment
by an Arab company, but by any foreign company in these kinds
of operations. And you're really starting to go down the road
of protectionism and isolationism, and as Mort says, nativism.
And at what point do we say okay, you know, we're going to shut
off all of this foreign investment in the United States. And other
countries are going to say well, we're going to shut off American
investment in our country.
HH: Well, for example, China will not allow
Americans to buy Chinese television systems, correct?
BS: Well, yes, but when you start going down
the road towards stopping global commerce and international commerce,
I think you're going to hurt a lot of business interests in this
country.
HH: Oh, you might. Let me ask you both, are
there some industries, and some operations in the United States,
which should not be open to foreign ownership, Morton Kondracke?
MK: Yeah, I suppose so. I mean, there are some,
probably some intelligence satellites you're not going to put
in foreign hands.
HH: And Bill Sammon, you agree with that?
BS: I do agree, and there's probably some more
if I could think about it. But...and I know ports...when you talk
ports, it sounds like oh my God, it's their vulnerable point where...and
it is. But when...the more you learn about this, the more it looks
like a paper transaction, where you're not going to have a bunch
of...I hate to put it this way, because it sounds like a slur,
but Arabs running around on the docks. And I think that's the
hysteria that's feeding the fear here.
HH: Well, again, I don't think it's hysteria.
I think it's people saying should ports be in that former category
that all three of us agree exist, or should they be in the latter
category, about which free tade is the best. And the question
is, Morton Kondracke, thirty seconds, is Bush prepared to make
the argument? Or is it simply going to go away?
MK: Oh, he's got to make the argument. He's
got to make the argument, or what I'm afraid of it that Dubai
will just say well, thank you very much. Now you can find some
porting for your ships someplace else.
HH: And Bill Sammon?
BS: And also, thank you very much, and you
can find support for the War On Terror from someplace else, because
it's my suspicion that Dubai has done something for us, or is
doing something for us compelling, behind the scenes, that Bush
can't talk about, and that Dubai can't talk about, because their
clerics wouldn't like it. And therefore, if we screw them on this
deal, we may lose that valuable ally in the War On Terror.
HH: And Bill, have you heard that Chertoff
is resigning?
BS: I've heard the rumor. I haven't heard it
confimed.
HH: And Morton?
MK: I heard it.
HH: All right. Thank you both, gentlemen. We'll
continue to follow this.
End of interview.
Posted
at 2:40PM PST
Professor Bainbridge's
wine o' the week.
HH: That music means the return of the Professor
of the Vines, Stephen Bainbridge, professor of law at the University
of California, Los Angeles, who will also be, I believe, joining
me at Chapman University Law School in late March on a law blogging
forum.
SB: That's right, Hugh. I'll be there.
HH: I'm looking forward to that. Now Professor
of the Vines...
SB: Yes, sir.
HH: It's been a while.
SB: Yes, sir. I'm back.
HH: In fact, it's been two years since we did
this bit.
SB: Is that right?
HH: I think it's been two years. Maybe only
18 months.
SB: I think so.
HH: How was 2005 for California wines?
SB: 2005 is shaping up to be a great year in
California, although maybe not as good as 2004, where there was
some really good wines produced. But 2005 should be really quite
good.
HH: So for the cheap people out there who want
to try and get ahead of the curve, it might be good to lay down
some options on 2005 California Napa and Sonoma Valley winery?
SB: You know, I don't really recommend doing
what we call futures buying in California wines. Unless you're
talking about something like Screaming Eagle, which is impossible
to get other than through futures, most California wines are readily
available upon release, and the savings...you don't get the kind
of savings you do say with buying first growth bordeaux by buying
futures. You know, you just...
HH: What's a first growth bordeaux?
SB: Something like Chateau Lafite Rothchild,
a French bordeaux wine, that where they're offered for sale a
couple of years before the bottles will actually be released by
the winery, and you can save a lot of money buying them that way.
It doesn't really work in California.
HH: Okay. Now tell me, have you got any recommendations
for our audience today?
SB: Yes, and in honor of coming back, I have
one that I think is sort of fun, which is the Hewitt
Vineyard Cabernet Sauvignon.
HH: Oh. No relation, and it's not Payola, because
I don't know who these people are.
SB: Well, Hewitt Vineyard is a vineyard up
in Rutherford, up in the Napa Valley, and it's owned by a guy
named William Hewitt, who's hooked up to the Deere, the John Deere
family...
HH: Uh-huh.
SB: Any relation?
HH: Nope.
SB: Well, they make awfully good wine. They
are an exclusively cabernet sauvignon vineyard, about 60 acres,
and their wine is made by a fellow named Tom Rinaldi, who I met
when he was the guest wine maker at a Federalist Society dinner,
actually, up in Napa Valley. And he's a super guy, really solid
guy who I think, like a lot of Napa wine makers, started off being
sort of Northern California, birkenstock liberal. But then having
to deal with the environmentalists and land use and all that has
sort of brought him over towards our side of the fence. And he's
a super wine maker. He has a vineyard called Provenance,
where he makes excellent wine. And then he also works for some
of these smaller vineyards like Hewitt. And the 2002 Hewitt cabernet
sauvignon is the one that's on the market right now.
HH: What's it sell for?
SB: It's going to be anywhere from around $65-75,
which unfortunately, these days in California cabernet, is a bargain,
given how the prices have gone on California cabernet the last
few years.
HH: Okay. Now, Mr. Professor Bainbridge...
SB: Sir.
HH: Given that you've just recommended the
Hewitt winery, I just have to ask. Is there a Bainbridge winery
anywhere?
SB: Not that I know of. Not that I know of.
HH: So I've kind of got you lapped on that
then?
SB: I've occasionally toyed with the idea that
I'd like to have one, but I know a couple of people who are in
the wine industry, and what they tell me is that the way to make
a small fortune in the wine business is to start with a very large
one.
HH: Now one more thing. I saw at Professorbainbridge.com,
your blog, that as a Catholic, you're observing Lent.
SB: Yes, sir.
HH: And you're not giving up wine?
SB: No.
HH: You're giving up cigars.
SB: I'm giving up cigars for Lent, yes.
HH: How many cigars do you normally consume
in the course of a month?
SB: In the course of a month? Well, usually
three or four a week, so maybe 16-20.
HH: Okay. For your next appearance then, and
to heighten the significance of your sacrifice, I'd like to know
the best wines with cigars.
SB: Okay, that's what I'll work on.
HH: I want you to ponder on that.
SB: And so you're going to put me through the
wringer on that, because by then, I'll really be hurting.
HH: That's right. So you'll be thinking about
cigars more, rather than less.
SB: Okay.
HH: A little diabolical, but I think fun.
SB: All right.
HH: Professor Bainbridge, always a pleasure.
Professorbainbridge.com.
End of interview.
Posted at 10:00AM PST
Return to top
Saturday, March
4
Howard Fineman
from Newsweek on the black and white of George Bush versus the
gray of Bill Clinton.
HH: Joined now by Howard Fineman of Newsweek
and MSNBC. Howard, I haven't talked to you since the Steelers
won the Super Bowl. Belated congratulations, though it burns this
Browns fan to say so.
HF: Well, thank you. I really appreciate it,
although when Jerome Bettis fumbled on the goal line, I though
it was all lost.
HH: The game before.
HF: The game before.
HH: Well, it was a great opportunity to both
live and die again, and live.
HF: That's right.
HH: Let's go to your column.
I found this very provocative, Howard, and let me tell people...actually,
tell people what your theory is about why Bush appears to be losing
public support at this crucial time.
HF: Well, I think aside from the substantive
issues of things, I think that his whole method of politics has
been to draw sharp contrasts, to be about light and darkness,
about right and wrong. And I think that's the way he views life,
and that's the way he speaks. He's a man of few words, he comes
from West Texas. He distrusts talk, I would say he distrusts eloquence.
He gives those speeches that he gives at the State of the Union
and so on only because he's sort of required to. And I think that's
served the country, and served him very well after 9/11, because
I think it was a scary, confusing time, and we wanted strength,
we wanted certitude, and we wanted to see things in black and
white terms, in good and evil terms. I think to some extent, we
still do, but we now understand, are beginning to understand,
just how complicated the so-called war, as Dick Cheney and the
Defense Department have called it, really is. And George Bush
is now in a situation where he's kind of in a gray world, and
he's not a man who can deal in eloquent terms with gray. That's
what Bill Clinton was all about. And my point in the column was
that Bill Clinton was made for the world of gray, and George Bush
is having trouble explaining things like the Dubai port deal for
that reason.
HH: Let me recast it, though, a different way
of looking at...Bill Clinton, definitely a man of words and perhaps,
without equal, Reagan being a great communicator, but sort of
set piece artillery, as opposed to mobile.
HF: Right.
HH: And on the other hand, George Bush a man
of deeds, and that although in the time between elections, his
numbers always go down. When it is time to choose, whether 2002,
2004, 2000 or 2006, perhaps this November, people like deeds,
especially in wartime. And the deed I'm looking at this week,
Howard, what do you think about the Kabul to India to Pakistan
trip? Doesn't it once again illustrate that when it comes to courage
encompassed, this president has few equals?
HF: I wouldn't disagree with that. I think
it takes guts to do the trip, and do it as he did. I think it
takes a lot of guts to do the deal with India on nuclear power,
and go to Pakistan the next day, after...with all the history
between India and Pakistan. I wouldn't disput that, but I do think
that sometimes, leadership does require an ability to be an explainer.
And as I also say in the piece, Bill Clinton, that was Bill Clinton's
strength, but it was also his great weakness, because he thought
he could explain his way out of anything. That turned out to be
dangerously untrue in his case. But I do think something like
the Dubai deal required Bush, if it's in the national interest,
to do, if it's in our security and commercial interests to do,
to explain it better than he ever did. He's not had any interest
in trying to explain it, and probably never will, in which case
it's probably going to be seriously screwed up by the Congress.
HH: I want to come back to the Dubai deal in
just a minute, but put it in the context of the NSA program to
conduct surveillance of al Qaeda communicating with their agents
in the United States. Originally, fierce criticism, now it's all
gone, because people realize the American public likes it. Number
two, the extension of the Patriot Act, which I gather sailed through
the Senate today and is on its way to the President's desk in
a matter of time, and then the Dubai ports deal. So the pattern
I see, Howard Fineman, tell me where I'm wrong, is that he's always
underestimated at the start of a controversy, ends up bringing
it around. Now I think the ports deal might be different, but
he did end up winning on NSA and Patriot, didn't he?
HF: Yeah, he did, and he actually even won...the
administration even won a procedural vote on the Dubai thing the
other day in the House, I believe narrowly, but they won it. Well,
I wouldn't attribute that really...I agree with you on the substantive
victories, on Patriot Act, on NSA. I think they're doing...probably
doing what the American people regard as the right thing, and
that gets back to your point about deeds versus words. But I think
you have to ask yourself why George Bush and the administration
are viewed in such negative terms by the vast majority of the
American people right now. And I think that the substantive reason
for that is the difficulties in Iraq, and it's hard to argue that's
going well right now. And I think it's people's concern that George
Bush doesn't always pay attention to the details of the policies
he champions, however right they are. You know, they're beginning
to question the competence of the administration to carry out
the fine detail of some of what they're doing. And I think one
way people have confidence that you understand the details, is
to hear you be able to master them in public. I mean, nobody's
expecting George Bush to be a policy wonk, or to be Bill Clinton.
But they're expecting to hear him feel comfortable explaining
in some depth what he's doing, and he doesn't always do that.
HH: Now Howard Fineman, is it possible that
the verbal class values that a lot more than America, and certainly
red-state America? And that the poll numbers, I think you're right,
reflect gosh, we wish this war would end, and the American troops
could come home, and it's tough, and we hate to see shrines blown
up, and won't they just get it, that we're not their enemy. But
that election time, over and over again, that fades away, because
you've got to vote for one of two parties, and have the Democrats
created a viable alternative yet on national security, Howard
Fineman?
HF: Well, yeah, several things there. On the
point of whether the chattering class' values talk more, I would
plead guilty to that. I think there's no question about that.
Words are my business, so I care about that. And teaching is my
business, if I can be so bold as to say in journalism, and I believe
in the value of educating people, and I think that's an important
function of the presidency. I think Bush succeeds politically,
because he's where the American people are on the question, on
the fundamental question of our attitude towards terrorism and
terrorists. We basically still want to try to kick their butt
if we possibly can, and George Bush is uncomplicated on that topic.
And I think unless and until the Democrats can say that they are...they've
got to argue that they're somehow...they're just as strong, but
they're smarter, you know? That's got to be their argument. How
they do that, I don't know. They also have to argue that they're
more internationally minded, somehow, than the president is, and
yet sound patriotic at the same time. They haven't figured that
out, either. I'm not saying that the Republicans won't win the
presidency again in 2008. But I bet you that they're nominee is
going to be more of an explainer of the grays than George Bush
has been able to do.
HH: Oh, well put. Last question. There's a
rumor out today given that Chertoff is quitting Homeland Security.
HF: Yeah.
HH: Have you heard that?
HF: I have, well I saw it on the web out of
Human Events. Chertoff sure doesn't look like a happy man, I'll
say that. And it would be beneficial, marginally beneficial for
the administration for him to go. It's not going to turn things
around, but it would certainly help. And George Bush needs to
begin to be looking a little upset about the way some things in
his shop have been handled, and this would be one way to demonstrate
it. I wouldn't be surprised if it does happen.
HH: Howard Fineman, always a pleasure from
Newsweek. Thank you, Howard.
End of interview.
Posted at 11:40PM PST
Politics across
the Pond.
HH: I'm pleased to begin today with our colleague
across the water, Brooks Newmark, member of Parliament in Great
Britain, a Tory member for Braintree. Welcome back to the program,
Books. Good to have you.
BN: Thank you very much.
HH: I want to cover a number of subjects with
you first, but given that Great Britain's history in the region
of India and Pakistan is so deep and so really enduring in so
many of their institutions, what's your reaction to seeing George
Bush progress from Kabul to India now, and to Pakistan today.
BN: Well, I think that it's all part of, geopolitically,
the same area. It's an area of extreme tension. I think historically,
as you're probably well aware, there have been enormous tensions
between India and Pakistan that luckily has been reduced significantly,
probably over the past three to four years, notwithstanding what's
been going on in Afghanistan.
HH: And as a result, do you think Pakistan
is a real ally, Brooks Newmark? Or is it simply Musharraf is on
our side, in the long term, we won't be able to hold him?
BN: Well, I think Musharraf is on our side,
and I think that's what important. I think historically, particularly
Pakistani intelligence, the ISI, had enormous links with Osama
bin Laden, the Taliban and so on, and we had to turn that more
in our favor, in order to fight the terrorism that was emanating
from Afghanistan. And I think George Bush has done a tremendous
job in turning Pakistan more as an ally in the fight against terrorism,
notwithstanding the fact that obviously Pakistan is an Islamic
state.
HH: Now Brooks, I want to move on to what your
Parliament has been doing this week. You've had four rather controversial
bill introduced and acted on in the Parliament this week: The
introduction of I.D. cards, the glorification of terrorism bill,
the religious hatred bill and an anti-smoking bill. The last one
really doesn't carry me too much, because I'm on the Prop. 10
Commission in Orange County, California, which is also an anti-smoking
commission, so I'm kind of anti-smoking myself. But let's talk
about the introduction of I.D. cards. What is Great Britain considering
doing?
BN: Well, we haven't really had identification
cards in the U.K. since the 50's, which was a reflection of what
was going on during the war and after the war. There is a tremendous
feeling that one shouldn't have to carry a form of identification
merely to say that I am who I am. We...our forefathers, my father
was a soldier during the Second World War. He fought for our liberties,
and part of that liberty was the freedom not to actually have
to carry around a card that says who I am. And the conservatives
fought very hard against that bill.
HH: What would this card say?
BN: Well, this card just simply is an identity
card with I guess various forms of identification, including biometric
identification, which just says who you are. And it isn't just
simply a social security card. I have absolutely no objections
whatsoever to social security cards, or driver's licenses, or
passports. We have many, many forms of identification in this
country. What I objected to was the need for identification cards
as a means of fighting terrorism. All it's going to do is infringe
on the liberties of the vast majority, and in our view, will do
nothing at all in the fight against terrorism.
HH: All right, let's move on to the glorification
of terrorism bill. What's that all about?
BN: Well, that has to do with someone standing
up, and the focus of it clearly had a lot to do with the Islamic
community in the United Kingdom. So if somebody who's holding
up a placard and says the July 7th bombers, it's the equivalent
of...our 9/11 was 7/7 in the U.K., did a fantastic job, and basically
glorifying those who murdered man people in the city of London.
And when thinking about that, our view was that you have to look
at it in the context, actually, of other religions, not just simply
in fighting the more radical Islamic elements in our society.
If, for example, you had some Irishmen singing in a pub in North
London, singing songs that had to do with perhaps glorifying the
IRA members going back to 1916, they could be arrested under this
new law that Tony Blair was trying to bring in. And again, you
have to balance fighting terrorism with people's liberties and
freedoms. And we felt that once again, it erred on the side of
infringing on people's liberties.
HH: Okay, last one I want to get to is the
religious hatred bill.
BN: Yeah, the religious hatred bill pretty
much along the same theme. What we have is laws against people
inciting hatred against other races, which is good. We all agree
to. This decided, so to say, those laws were not strong enough,
and therefore, we have to bring in a bill that incites people
to religious hatred. Now again, one has to answer the same question.
Let's strip out the Islamic dimension from that, and rather than
focusing on the more radical Muslims in London who are preaching
religious hatred against Christians, let us say a comedian gets
on Saturday Night Live, makes some poor joke about God or Christianity.
Under this new legislation, technically he or she could get arrested.
And again...
HH: Wow.
BN: ...we felt it went far too much into infringing
on people's rights and liberties of freedom of speech.
HH: What's the status of that bill?
BN: Well, you know, unfortunately, all three
of those bills...well, the bill to religious hatred, this was
an interesting one. There were two votes. The first vote, Labour
lost by 10 votes. There was an amendment that went through to
slightly weaken it. The Labour whips convinced Tony Blair that
was enough to convince the Labour rebels. Tony Blair went away,
effectively for a drink with his wife, for 15 minutes, didn't
turn up for that second vote. Labour didn't win that vote. In
fact, they lost by one vote, the one vote they would have had
if Tony Blair had bothered to turn up and vote. So as a result
of that vote, the following week, he brought forward the other
bill, the other three bills that were contentious, the one to
do with I.D. cards, the one to do with anti-smoking, and the anti-terrorism
bill.
HH: Now what has been the public reaction to
all this? Is the Tory Party surging in the polls as a result?
BN: Well, actually, the Tory Party is surging
in the polls probably less for that reason, but going back to
two things that have gone on. One is the long-running sore of
Iraq, which the vast majority of people in Britain oppose, and
Tony Blais is coming under the same problems that George Bush
has been having, and as each day or each week another British
soldier is killed, that's in the news, people are wondering why
we're there. And as a result, Tony Blair is losing support in
the polls on that. The flip side of that, the conservatives have
a new leader in David Cameron, who's focusing on other issues
such as the environment, global warming, third world poverty,
perhaps all these sort of touchy-feely issues the conservatives
haven't naturally been addressing, pretty much in the past ten
to fifteen years, and have been pretty much moving the conservatives
to the center ground where Tony Blair has traditionally staked
himself out. And as a result, the conservatives have jumped up
five or six points in the polls, and are pretty much neck and
neck with Labour at the moment.
HH: Any bi-elections scheduled anytime soon?
BN: No, no. But there was actually, since we
last spoke, there was a bi-election up in Scotland. The interesting
thing about this bi-election was that is was in Gordon Brown's
back yard. In fact, where Gordon Brown lives. And the Labour Party
has held onto that, pretty much, throughout the past century.
And in fact, what happened there was that the liberal Democrats,
who are the second party up in that part of Scotland, came through
and won a tremendous bi-election victory, which is pretty much
a slap in the face to Gordon Brown.
HH: That is pretty remarkable. Brooks Newmark,
thanks for the update. I understand you've been in D.C. as well
recently.
BN: I'm...no, in fact, I'm going to D.C. this
week with my science and technology select committees. So I'm
looking forward to that.
HH: Excellent. Safe travel to you. We look
forward to talking to you again next month for our update from
the U.K.
BN: Great. Thanks.
HH: Member of Parliament, Brooks Newmark, thanks
for joining us.
End of interview.
Posted at 4:49PM PST
Return to top
Friday, March
3
Sean Allen
speaks about the aftermath of the deranged geography teacher.
03-03allen.mp3
HH: Joined now by the, perhaps the overnight
media sensation, Sean Allen, who was the high school student who
brought to the nation's attention the teaching methods of his
(Overland) High School geography teacher. He's joined on the line
by Jeff Allen. Welcome, Sean and Jeff to the Hugh Hewitt Show.
It's great to talk to you. Sean, I gather you've heard the show
before?
SA: Yes, I have.
HH: Well, that's great. I'm glad to make your
acquaintance. Congratulations, but it must be like living in the
middle of an avalanche right now.
SA: Oh, absolutely. It's kind of the eye of
the storm right now. Things have died down a little bit, but I
feel like things can only pick up from here.
HH: I'm very interested in whether or not Jay,
tell me his last name, Brennish?
SA: Bennish.
HH: Bennish. Has Mr. Bennish's friends on the
faculty been looking at you sideways in any way?
SA: Well, I have not gone to school since I
have done the Mike Rosen show. I haven't gone to school, just
because I've gotten a lot of threats, a lot of things, and I try
to put my safety and the safety of my family first in this situation.
HH: Jeff Allen, are you afraid for your son
at all when he goes back?
JA: Well, I had to cut my business trip short
by a day to come back home, because I was frantic that something
bad was going to happen.
HH: And I'm glad you did that, although I suspect
overwhelmingly, public opinion is with you, Sean Allen. Do you
think that's correct?
SA: I've gotten a lot of thanks, and a lot
of praise, and a lot of parents calling in saying hey, my son
or daughter has had that same situation with a different teacher,
or for Mr. Bennish, for that matter. And then, there are a small
percentage of people that will anonymously threathen me in different
ways.
HH: Now tell me about Mr. Bennish. Is he a
nice guy?
SA: Personality wise, I do enjoy him. He's
a very...he's a nice person. I like his personality. But as a
geography teacher, the things that he's teaching don't belong
in a geography class.
HH: You know, I've seen a number of people
now vetting his many factual errors. Is this sort of standard
ops for him in the classroom to go off on these soliloquies about
politics?
SA: Yes, it's pretty much every day, or just
about every other day that he did it. About 80% of the time was
devoted to his own personal politics, and about 20% was devoted
to actual geography.
HH: And do the students find that entertaining?
SA: I think that's why a lot of the students
have come out in support of him, is because his class is more
of a means of entertainment during school in a way. So by getting
him fired, or getting him revoed from class, it's kind of taking
away their entertainment.
HH: Yeah. Is that what...he's been suspended,
but I can't imagine him getting fired over this, can you, Jeff
Allen?
JA: Oh, he's not going to get fired over this,
and nor do we want him to get fired over this. I think he should
stay in the school system, because I think it would send a bad
message to good teachers that you have really...the teachers that
do what Bennish does should be concerned, but I don't want to
intimidate other teachers that are really trying to present both
sides of the story.
HH: Sean Allen, do you enjoy politics?
SA: Yeah, very much.
HH: And do you enjoy having teachers who are
politically knowledgeable and willing to debate issues?
SA: Yes, I enjoy teachers like that, but in
Mr. Bennish's situation, he gave one side, and in that case, a
radical biased opinion, and basically treated it as fact, and
the students treated it as fact, and that's what I thought was
at fault in that situation.
HH: Well, that's what...I mean, just some of
the stuff was crazy, comparing Bush to Hitler, and then qualifying
it, but also talking about 7,000 terrorist acts in Cuba. Did he
ever footnote or come up with a syllabus that would back up his
wilder assertions?
SA: No, he never...in his classroom syllabus,
and the description of the class, he never explains during the
class description that any of this was going to take place, or
any of this was going to go on.
HH: Did he ever have guest speaker?
SA: No, he did not have any guest speakers
come into class, though he was planning on having a Muslim mullah
come in for guest speaking.
HH: Did he ever invite a center-right authority...I
have often spoken on high schools, especially in AP government
classes, to present the center-right perspective. Had he ever
invited anyone remotely like me into your classroom?
SA: No, never.
HH: Did any of the students ever talk to him
about being so over the top?
SA: No, in ways that you can tell from the
tape, in his voice, and in his kind of actions, and kind of the
passion in his voice, a lot of students were intimidated by him,
and could not really talk to him face to face, just because of
the intimidation factor of it.
HH: How old is he?
SA: He is 28.
HH: And how long has he been teaching?
SA: I believe six years.
HH: And do you know where he went to school?
SA: He went to Arizona State University, and
I believe now is taking classes at DU.
HH: And was he ranked...is he tenured by the
way, Jeff Allen?
JA: I'm not sure if he's tenured. He's...in
a certain way, he's tenured. But I'm not real clear on the whole
thing. But the fact is we know that the chances of him getting
fired are just next to zero.
HH: Sure. And Sean Allen, does he teach any
other classes besides political geography? I guess that's what
this was called?
SA: The name of the class, actually to clarify,
is accelerated world geography. I know his lawyer has been saying
it's political geography, but the name of the class, and the title
of the class as according to the syllabus, is accelerated world
geography. But I believe that's the only class he teaches right
now.
HH: Are you learning any geography?
SA: Absolutely not. I...actually, before I'd
left school, had been transferred to a lower regular geography
class, where they were farther ahead in geography than the honors
accelerated class was.
HH: And is there an AP exam connected with
this at all?
SA: I'm not quite sure what you're saying.
HH: Well, is there an achievement test that
would test this class against sort of norms of achievement and
knowledge?
SA: Yeah, a lot of the stuff is going to be
on the ACT's, and the SAT's, and things like that, and just...CSAP
and other tests. He hasn't gone over yet in class, and I think
that's doing a disservice to the students who want to get a good
grade in college, and a good grade in high school.
HH: I think you're right. Now Sean Allen, we've
got about 45 seconds left. Do you expect it will die down, you'll
be able to have a return to normalcy at your high school?
SA: I'm hoping so. With the situation the way
it is, I'm looking at other schools that I can attend, just because
I put my safety and the safety of my family in front of everything
else.
HH: And...wise thought. Jeff Allen, do you
think it's going to end up being somewhere else he'll have to
go?
JA: I'm pretty sure it's going to be. But interestingly
enough, we've been looking at other schools today, and another
school called and asked if Sean would come to their school, if
he actually transferred.
HH: Ah, wonderful. That's good news. Jeff and
Sean Allen, thanks for the courage it took to stand up and to
say no to political indoctrination. We'll check back with you
as the weeks go by.
End of interview.
Posted at 5:00PM PST
Return to top
Thursday, March
2
Mark Steyn
on the Oscars, Ethel Merman impersonators, and the decline of
the West.
03-02steyn.mp3
HH: We begin as we do most Thursdays with columnist
to the world, Mark Steyn. Hello, Mark.
MS: Hi there, Hugh. I wish I was as well lubricated
as David Gregory was on that tape.
HH: (laughing) I'm not sure I'd want you to
be, though. Mark, I want to begin with a very serious couple of
columns from two of the heavyweights, widely respected in all
of conservative thinking, and that's William F. Buckley and George
Will. On Monday, William F. Buckley wrote basically, it's time
to give up, Mr. Bush. That other challenges loom, these will have
to take precedent. He mentioned North Korea and Iran. He said
once we got in and we got rid of Saddam, we've just got to get
out, because there's no way to realistically handle the realities
there. Today, George Will writes, all three components of the
axis of evil, Iraq, Iran and North Korea, are more dangerous than
they were when that phrase was coined in 2002. What's going on,
Mark Steyn?
MS: Well, I think there is a difference, a
serious difference of view among conservatives. I mean, I should
say, first of all, that I very much regret that the other party's
not making any useful contribution to this debate. I mean, the
other party is just opportunists.
HH: Right.
MS: That's summed up by the Clintons. Bill
Clinton has been an adviser to the government of Dubai, and to
Dubai Ports World on this ports deal, while Mrs. Clinton ran the
numbers and decided to come out against it.
HH: Right.
MS: They would make an interesting first couple
during a Hillary presidency, if that's the way. But I think as
far as the right is concerned, you know, there are now I think...there